tltl;:

.i._ .t-."
'-

, iI

'i!

$** r *.' ... r.i*'

..

.r '; -':i,. "*1:r+ !' i ,' - ] :; -' tr .!,::'l ],r' ,

it. i l.r 'i;

,l

,::,.. i.
:'
I

r'

'./ '"{,

.'i .:

..

i,'
. ,-5

;'
'.'*": -';:

i
i

'1"

CONTENTS

I.
I

GENEML

I.

PROGRA]4I"IING

I.
)

INTRODUCTION CONTROLLED AXES

I Controlled Axes ) 2 IncremenE Svstem 3 Maximum Stroke 3. 4.

PREPAMTORY FUNCTION

20

20
ZU

20

(G

FUNCTION)

2l
24
24 25

INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

4.L Positioning (c00) 4.2 Single Direction Positioning (c60) 4.3 Linear Interpolation (G01) 4.4 Circular Inrerpolarion (c02, G03) 4.5 Helical Cutting (c02, c03) 4.6 Equal Lead Thread Curring (c33)
FEED FUNCTIONS

26
27

29 31 32 32 32 32
32

5.

5.

I Rapid Traverse 5.2 Cutting Feed Rate 5.2.I Tangential speed constant control 5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp 5.2.3 Feed per minute (G94) 5.2.4 Feed per revolution (c95) 5.2.5 One-digit F code feed .

5.3

Override 5.3. 1 Feed rate overri-de 5.3.2 Rapid traverse override 5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration 5.4. 1 Automatic acceler ation/deceleration after interpolation 5.5 Speed Control at Corn ers of Blocks

....+

33 33 33

34
34 34 35 35 36
37

5.5.1 Exact stop

(G04)

5.5.3 CutLing mode (c64) 5,5.4 Tapping mode (c63) 5.5.5 Automatic corner override 5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop (c04) 6.1 Automatic
REFERENCE POINT

5.5.2 Exact stop mode (G61)

37 37
37

(G62)

38

4I
L? 42

Reference Point Return (G28, G29) 6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28) 6.I.2 Automatic return from reference point (C29) 6.2 Reference Point Return Check (G27) 6.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point Return (G30)
COORDINATE SYSTEM G59)

43

43
44 45 45 45 47 48

7.

7.L Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, G54 to 7.I.1 Setting work coordinate sysrem (c92) 7.1.2 Setting work coordinate system (G54 to cs 9) 7.f.3 Selecting work coordinate systern (G54 co G59)

7 .I.6 Systern variables 7.2 Plane Selection (G17,

R.

7.1.4 Changing work eoordinate system by program command (csa to csg) 7.f.5 Setting and display of work zero point offset amount
G18,

49 50

Gt9)

5l
52 53
53

B.

f Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91) 8.2 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21) 8.3 Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type
Decimal Point Programming
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

s3
54

9. I

Spindle Speed Command 9.1.1 S 2-digit code 9.I.2 S 5-digit code

56
56

s6
56 57 57 57

IO. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) 10.1 Tool Selection Command LO.2 Tool Life Management ...

II. }IISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M, B FUNCTIONS) 11.1 Miscellaneous Function (M Function)

II.2 Auxiliary Functions 12.
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION .

63 64 65 67 67 67

12.

1 Tape Start ..e. 12.2 Leader Section and Label Skip . L2.3 Program Start L2.4 Program Section I2.4.1 Main program and sub program 12.4.2 Program number 12.4,3 Sequence number and block 12.4.4 0ptional block skip 12.4.5 Word and address L2.4.6 Basic addresses and command value ranse
Tape End Tape Format 12.8 ";'.2 Tape Codes ... 12.9

68
68

72

IJ /5
77 78 79

L2.7

;:H:H

;:;'t::

::

::

::

::

::::::

::

.:::

::

::::..:::::::::::

::

::::.::

::

79
79

79

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING I3.1 Canned Cycles (c73, Gl4, G76, G80 to 13.2 External Motion Function (G80, GB I)
I4.
COMPENSA,TION FUNCTION .

80
GB9)

80
95

14.

I Tool Length Offset (c43, C44, G49) L4.I.1 Tool length offset A... 14. f. 2 Tool length offset B . . . L4.2 Cutter Cornpensation B (c39 to G42) 14.2.I Cut,ter compensation function. 14.2.2 Offset amount (H code) 14.2.3 Offset vector L4.2.4 Plane selection and vector ... 14.2.5 Corner offset cj-rcular interpolation (G39) L4.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40) 14.2.7 Cutter comDensation left (G41)

96

vo
96 98
99 99

100

i00
100

....

f01
101

loz

14.2.8 Currer compensarion right (c42) L4.2.9 General notes on offset L4.2.10 Program example 14.3 Cutter Compensation C (G40 to c42) 14.3.1 Cutter compensation function . i4.3.2 Offset amount (It code) 14.3.3 Offset veclor 14.3.4 Plane selection and vector ... 14.3.5 c40, c4l, and G42 . L4,3.6 Details of cutter compensation C ... L4.4 Changing of Tool Offset Amounr (Prograrnmable Dara Inpur) (G10) 14.5 Scaling (c50, c51) 14.6 Coordinate Systern Roration (c68, c69) 14.6.1 Command fcrmat . 14.6.2 Relationship to other functions 15.
15.
MEASUREI"IENT FUNCTIONS

103 104 106

f07
107

f07
107

i08
108 110 140

l4l
L42 L44
T47

Skip Funcrion (c3I)

I47
L49

16.

16.

A ... I Custom Macro Cou'unand 16.1.1 M98 (Single call) 16.1.2 Subprogram call using M code 16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code f6.1.4 G66 (Modal call) 16.1.5 Argunent specification 16.2 Custom Macro Body . L6.2.1 Variables. 16.2.2 Kind of variables 16.2.3 lulacro instrucrions (G65) 16.2.4 Notes on custom macro Example of Custbm Macro 1 6. 3 .4. . . 16.3. f Bolt hole circle 16.3.2 Pocket machining 16.3.3 Interface signal ... ..;.. f6.3.4 Shearing machine ... 16.3.5 Program examples ... 16.4 Pattern Data Input Functj-on ... 16.4. I Pattern menu display 16.4.2 Pattern data display 16.4.3 Character-to-codes correspondence table
CUSTOM MACRO

... ..

150 150 150 150 150

151

153 153 154

157

L62

f63
163

L64
166 167 167

169 169

172 L75

17.

CUSTO}I MACRO

17. I Macro Ca11 Corunand (Custom Macro Command) I 7 . l. I Simple calls .1. . . 17. 1.2 Modal call . I 7. 1.3 Macro call using G codes 17.1.4 Custoro macro call with M code 17.f.5 Subprogram call with M code 17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code

B ...

I77
179
17 9

L82
183 183 184

17.I.7
17.

1.8 Multiplex calls I7.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodlr L7.2. I Custom macro body format 17.2.2 Variables 17.2.3 Types of varlables . 17.2.4 Arithnetic commands .

Dif ference between 1"198 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body call) ...

184 184
185

i86
186 187

f89
200

17.2.5 Control c,onnands ... 17 .2.6 Macro and CNC statements ... 17.2.7 Codes and words used in custom macro I7.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body 17 .4 Limitations .. i8. 10/11 TAPE FORMAT ... 18.1 Difference Points of Tape Format 18.2 Address and Range of Command Values f8.3 Key Position . 18.4 Each Address Restrictions 18.5 Setting of Setting Parameters . 18.6 Cautions of Each Function III.
I.
OPEMTION INTRODUCTION

203

208

2LI 2IL

2fl

2r3
2L3 2L3

.'. . . . 2I4
2L4 2L4

2I4

2T7

2. OPERATION DEVICES 2.1 CRT/MDI Panel z.I.L MDI keyboard . 2.L.2 Function buttons 2.2 Machine Operator's Panel 2.3 Tape Reader .. 2.3.I Portable ?' reader .. tape 2.3.2 Note for handling tape reader .. 2.4 FANUC casserre BI/B?/E| 2.5 FANUC PPR . 3.
POWER

237

23L

232 233 234 236 240 240 247

'236

ON/OFF

/,') . )---

4. MANUAL OPERATION 4.L l"lanual Ref erence Point Return 4.2 l'Ianua1 Continuous Feed 4.3 STEP Feed 4.4 Manual Handle Feed 4.5 Manual Absolute 0N and OFF . 5.
AUTOMATIC OPEMTION 5.1 Operation Mode . 5. 1.1 Memory operation 5.L.2 MDI operation . . 5. f.3 MDI operation-B 5.2 Starting Automatic Operation . 5.3 Executing Automatic Operation 5.4 Stopping Automatic Operation 5.4.I Program stop (M00) .2 Optional- scop (M01 ) 5 ^4 5.4.3 Program end (M02, M30) 5.4.4 Feed hold 5.4.5 Reset 5.5 Program Re-Start 5.6 l'lanual Handle Interruption . 5.6-l Handle interrupt operation 5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt 5.6.3 High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis

243 243 244

246 247

249 255 255 255 255

251

259 259 259 259 259 259 260 260

260
263

263
264 265

6.

t A1l Axes I'lachine Lock . 6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
6.

TEST OPERATION

6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

Auxiliary Function Lock

Feedrate Override Rapid Traverse Override Dry Run Single Block
Emergency Stop

... ...

266 266 266 266

zot
267 267

268
269

7.

7.1

SAFETY FUNCTIONS

269
zoY

7.2 Overtravel
8.
o

WHEN ALARM ARISES

270

1 Preparation for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation 2 Registering Prograrn to Memory 9.2.1 Registering with MDI key 9.2.2 Registering from NC tape 9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory 9.4 Program Number Search 9.5 Deleti-ng a Program 9,6 Deleting A11 Programs 9.7 Punching a Program 9.8 Punching A1l Programs . 9.9 Sequence Number Search 9. l0 Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape . 9.11 Inserti-on, Changing and Deleting the Word 9.1i.1 Word search 9.11.2 Inserting a word 9.11.3 Changing a word 9.1 .4 Deleting a word ..:.. ol .5 Deleting up to an EOB . 9.11.6 Deleting blocks a 12 Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
o

PART PROGMM STOMGE

& EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM

REGISTMTION)

271 27L

27r 27r
271
271 272

272
273

zt J
273
,1
/,

275

.r'7 a

276 280 281 281

28r
282

13 Background Editing . 9. 13. 1 Registration from

q o o

9.13.2 Registration from CNC tape . 9. 13.3 CNC Eape punch . . .

MDI

. . .1

o
q a

14 Menu Prograrnming . . 15 Program Loading by TEACH IN Mode 16 Conversational Programming with Graphic 9. 16.I Prograroming . 9. 16.2 Confirmation of program . . . 9 . f6.3 Editing of program . . . 17 Nurnber of Regist.ered Programs . 18 Part Program Storage Length

Function

282 283 284 284 284 286

288 288

290 290

29I
291
292

t9 Editing Operation Using Full Keys

SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

IO.

10.

I Offset Amount l0.l.l Setting and display of t,oo1 offset values (function key: offset ) ... L0.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: PAMI'I ) ... I0.3 Custom Macro Variable f0.4 System Parameter 10.4. I Parameter dlsplay i0.4.2 Parameter setting ..

294 294

294 295
297 291 291

298

10.5 f0.6 10.7 10.8

1

Pitch Error

Data Protection Key . Software Operatorrs Panel Tool Length Measurement

Compensation

Data

300 300 300

301

1.
I 1.

DISPLAY

IL.2 11.3 Command Value Display (Function key: PRGRM ) lI.4 Display for Program Check Il.5 Current Position Display (Function key: POS ) 11.6 Display of Run Tirne and Parts Count 11.6.1 Actual position screen 1 I . 6. 2 Parameter setting screen Il.7 Alarm Display (Function key: ALARM ) .. If.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Displav

303
JUJ

Program Display Displaying Program Memory Used

303
305

306 . .t. . . . .
.

307

309
309
3

10

tI.9

311 311

Clock

3r3
314 314
JI4

T2.

DATA OUTPUT

12.I Tool Offsets 12.2 Parameters

TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1

13. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 13.1 What is a File 13.2 File Heading f3.3.3
CNC

/82/FI)

315

3r5
315

13.3 Data Output Operation 13. 3. I CNC prQran output f3.3.2 Offset data output

3r6 3i6
317

parameter output 13.4 Data Input Operation t3.4.1 CNC program input 13.4.2 Offset data input 13.4.3 CNC parameter input 13.5 File Deletion Precautions L 3. 6 i3.6.1 Request for cassette replacement 13.6.2 Cassette adaptor lamp conditions

3r7
3L7

3r7 JId 318 318 318 318

319

13.7 Floppy Cassette Di-rectory Display I3.7. I Display ... 13.7.2 File input/output 13.7.3 Other precautions L4. GRAPHIC FUNCTION 14.1 Drawing Range I4.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter .. 14.2.1' Setting procedure of graphie parameter .. L4.2.2 Details of graphic parameter . L4.2.3 Tool path drawing .
I5.

f3.6.3 Write-protect key

319 320 320

322

323
325
327 327

328 329
JJU

I5.1 Outline

MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION

*FLWU

L5.2 Fo1low-up Signal 15. 3 Input Signal 15. 4 Cauti-on

JJU 330 330

16.

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF OO-MB

nicn]arr

332
JJJ

1A I

???

L6.2 Operation

333

IV.

MAINTENANCE

FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT Specifj-cation of Fuses t. 2 Mounting Positions of Fuses

l. I

337 337
JJ I

L.2.1 Power supply unit I.2.2 Additional I/0 Bl

1 ', L. z. 2 ) T-^,. ts unrt rnpuL ,,- -!

337

338 338 339

339 339

2.

TROUBLESHOOTING

2,
')

4 CNC Status Displav 2.5 Display of Position Deviation 2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point V.
APPENDIXES

General 2 Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control 3 NC System Check (No E.ools required)

34L 34L
5+J

APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX

1 2 3 4

TAPE CODE LIST

FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
NOMOGRAPHS

54

349

3s2
351 357 360

1. 2. 3.

INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH TOOL PATH AT CORNER

RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING

363 364

APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX

TAPE JOINING
STATUS WI{EN TURNING THE POWER ON, WI{EN RESET

36s
367

I.

7 PARA]'IETER PARAMETER DISPLAY 8 9

LIST

367

APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX

CODES USED ERROR CODE

IN

PROGRAM

496
497 514
5

LIST

10 LIST

OF OPERATION

1I LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

r6

:
il

bt
F:i' fi'l

I I

i l\

GENERAL

This manual describes the programming, operation, and daily maintenance for 0-MB and 00-MB. This manual includes all optional functions. For the functions unique to each CNC system, see APPENDIX 11 I'LIST 0F SPECIFICATIONS". For which options are provided with your system, see machine tool builder I s
,

manual.

Sometimes, the specification and usage of the system may be different to t.he specification of the rnachine side operation panel. So, see the machine tool builderts manual without, fail.

according

1.1

General Flow of Operation of CNC Machine Tool

When machining

the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program, then operate the CNC machine by using the program. l) First, prepare the prograrn from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine too1, Then punch the paper tape to be read the program into the CNC system. How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter II. 2) Paper tape is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the workpieces and tools on the machine, and operate the tools aceording to the programming. Finally, execute the machining actua11y. How to operate the CNC system is described in the Chapter III.
OPERATION. PROGRA}frIING.

Part drawing

Paper tape

CNC

MACHINE TOOL

CHAPTER

II

PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER

III

OPERATION

Before the actual programming, make the machining plan for how to machj-ne the
parc.

Machining plan l. Determination of workpieces machining range 2. Method of mounting workpieces on the nachine tool 3. Machining sequence in every cutting process 4. Cutting tools and cutting conditions Decide the cutting method in every cutt.ing process

t. ::i,

4':i.

-3-

\-\_ Cutting
procedure

Cutting

------\

process

I
Face cutting

a
L

Side cutting

Hole machining

1. CuEting nethod

: 2. Cutting tool :

Rough
Semi

Finish

Tools

3. Cutting conditions : Feedrate

Cutt ing Depth

4, Tool

path

Face cutting

Prepare the program of the tool path and cutting condition according to the workpiece figure, for each cutEing.

I'

-4-

r:.

rl

il

1.2 Notes on Reading This Manual 1)

The function of an

CNC machine tool system depends not only.on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system' the CNC, the operatorrs panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function, programming, and operation relating to all connbinations. This manual generally describes these fron the stand-polnt of the CNC. So, for details on a particul.ar CNC machlne tool, refer to the manual issued by the rnachine tool bullder, which should take precedence over this manual.

2)

This rnanual addresses as many subjects as posslble. But it would become too voluminous to point out everything that should not or cannot be done. Functlons which are not specifically stated as possible are impossible.

3) Notes refer to detailed and speeific items. So, when a irote is encountered, terms used in it sometimes are not explained. In this case, first skip the note' then return to it after having read over the manual for details.

-5-

II

PROGRAMMING

lr

il

1.

INTRODUCTION

l) Tool movement along workpiece parts figure Interpolation (See II-4) The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constltuting the workplece parts flgure. (See Note) a) Tool movement along stralght line

Progam GOIY _; X-Y-;

b) Tool movement along arc

Program

G03X

--

--

--;

of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs ls called the interpolation. Syutbols of the Progratmed commands G01, GO2, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
The function
Control unit X axis

a) Movement along

staight line

colY

_; X-Y-;

/v j--t a) Movement along ( '\ straight line R-; t b; Mo"urnent along

7

\n
Tool movement

,ll -'

Y axis

b) Movement along arc

G03X

-Y-

Note)

workpiece.

the table rnay be moved without moving the tool in an actual machine, thJ.s manual assumes that the tool noves with respect to the
Though

-9-

ilil,

2) Feed
ilfr Irll

Feed

function (See II-5)

Itf
lrll ti':

Iii
I

'

Table

Movement

of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 150 uun/min, specify the following in the
F150. 0

Program:

The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed funetion.

3) Part drawing and tool movenent a) Reference point (fixed position on rnachine) An NC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Nornally, tool change and prograurming of absolute zero point as described later are performed *t this position. This position is called the reference point.

The t,ool can be moved to reference poi_nt in two ways: i) Manual reference point return (See III-4.1) Reference point return is perforrned by manual button operation. ii) Automatic reference point return (See II-6.1) Reference point return is performed in accordance with progranme,

In general, manual reference point return is performed flrst after th, pov{er is turned on. In order to move the tool to reference point fo: tool change thereafter, the function of automatic reference poin return is used.

commands.

-10-

(
coordinate system specified by

b) Coordinate system on part drawing and --- Coordinate svstem (See III-8)

NC

Program

Command

Part drarving

Coordinate system
lviachine NC

tool

There are t\ro types of coordinate systems. i) Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are used. ii) Coordinate system specified by NC The coordinate systen is prepared on the rnachine tool tab1e. Thi.s can be achieved by prograrnning the distance from the present position of

the tool to zero point of the coordinate to be set.

of tool
t Distance to zero point of coordinate system to be set

a workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay as follows:
hlhen

part drawing established

on the workpiece

Coordinate system established on the

- lt -

The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the NC in accordance with the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cut a work piece into a shape on the drawing. Therefore' in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems must be set at the same position. To set the two coordinate systems at the same positlon, simple methods sha11 be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machlnings. Some examples are shown below: i) Using a standard point of the work.

Work standard point

Bring the Eool center to the standard point. And set the coordinate system specified by NC at this position.

Fixed
distancc

ii

ii)

Mountl"ng a workpiece

directly against the jig. Meet the tool center to the reference point. And set the coordinate system point specified by CNC at this position. Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined point from the reference point.

! tl
t'
I

iii)

Mounting a pallet wj-th a workpiece against the jig.

Jig and coordinate system specified the same as ii).

Pallet

shall

be

-L2-

c) How

to indicate command dimensions for moving the tool Absolute, incremental commands (See II-8.1) Coordinate values of comrnand for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute or incremental designation. i) Absolute coordinate values The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero point of the coordinate system, i.e. to the position of the coordinate values.

Tool

A (1s,60,40)

(1030,20)

Specify the tool movement from point A to point B by using the coordinate values of point B as follows:
G90X10.0Y30. 0220.0;

ii)

Incremental coordinate values Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position.

i..

e.i
v|,:

*:j;

#
__J

30

u$, ,/

Specify the tool

movement

from point A to point B as follows:

c9 1X40. 0Y-30. 0z- 10.

0;

_13_

4) Cutting speed

Spindle speed functlon (See II-9)

ll

,p^'% ,,1w,:.,*

i-----(2/
IL
L---

7//)

rool

Workpiece
----J

--t
I

The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in rpm unit. For example, when a workpiece having a diameter of 100 nn should be machined at a cutting speed of 80 nrm/nln, the cutting speed in rpm un.it is calculated to be approx. 250 rprn from N = 1000 V/nD. Therefore, specify the following:
S

250;

Spindle speed co*mand is called spindle speed function.

5) Selection of tool used for various machining

Tool number

Tool Funetion (See II-10)

ATC magazine

I^lhen

necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool and the number 1s specified in the program, the NC selects the corresponding

dri11ing, tapping, bearing, milling or the like,

is performed, it

is

tool. For example, when No.01 is assigned to a drilling tool and the tool is stored at No.0l of the ATC magazine, the tool can be selected by specifying:
T01

This function is called the tool function.

-L4-

g
F

6) Command for machi.ne operations ----- Miscellaneous function (See II-11) When machinlng is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed coolant. For this purpose, on-off operations of spindle motor and

coolant valve should be controlled.

Spindle rotation

Coolant

/l

onloff

Workpiece

The function of specifying rhe on-off operations of the components of the machine is called the miscellaneous function. In general, the function i-s specified by an M code. For example, when M03 is specified, the spindle is rotated clockwise at the

specified spindle speed.

7) Program

configuration (See II-12) A group of commands givpn to the NC for operating the machine is called the program. By specif)'ing the conmands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle notor is turned on and off. In the program, specify the conmands in the sequence of act.ual tool movements.

Blobk' Block Block Program Block

Tool movement sequence

Block

A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number for discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number for discriminating each program is cal1ed the program number The block and the program have the following configurations.

*-

ft

*.

_ 15 _

a)

Block
Block

NCOOOO cCO xCO. O ZCCO . O MCO s CC r CO

s_:31:1."

cR

numDer

preparatory

Interpolation

funltion

function

Spindle function Miscellaneous Tool function function

End of

block

Each block consists of a sequence number for indicating the NC operatlon sequence at the beginnlng of the block, and a CR code for lndicating the end of the block. b) Prograrn

Program number

Block
BIock
Bloc.k

M3O CR

end of program

Normally, a program number is speclfied after the CR code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02, M30) is specified at the end of the program.

-15-

'r.

c)

Main program and subprogram

Mrin program
I
I

-----l

I I

M98Pl@1
I I
I

-- )-| --j==-." '/"i

l.t'-.----...-.....--.--l
--

-io'oo'
I

Scbpiogrrm#l

----r
Program for hole

#l

M98P'1002
I
I

-/ --

Ntsg
Subprogram #2

M98P1001
I I
I

---l- or ooz

----"1

Program for hole #2

Lryg_

_ ____J
Hole

Hob *1

#l

'\c
Hole

#2

Hole #2

When

machining of the same pattern appears at many portlons of a program, a Program for the pattern is created. This is calfed the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program ls ca1led the naln program. When a subprogram execution comnand appears during execution of the maln program, conutrands of the subprogran are executed. When execution of the subprogran is finished, the sequence returns to the main program.

8) Tool figure and tool motion by program (See II-14.1) a) Machining using the end of cutter Tool length compensation function. Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program in accordance wlth the tools.

Standard tool

-t
I

-t7-

Therefore, a standard tool is selected, anci the difference between the position of the nose of the standard tool and the position of the nose of eaeh tool used is measured in advance. B,v setting the rneasrrred value in the NC (data display and setting: see III-11), rnachining can be performed without alterjng the program even whcn the tool is changed. . This function is ca1led the tc'o]. length conpensation. b) Machining rrsJng the side of cutter Cutter radius compensation (See rr-14) Because a cutter has a radlrrs, the cente!- of the cutter path goes around the workpiece vrith the cutter radius deviated.

Cutter path using cutter radius compensation

Machining part figure

Cutter

If raditrs of cutters are stored in menory, the tool can be uroved by cutter radius apart from the machining part figure. Thls function is ca1led cutter radius compensation.

-18-

9) Tool movement range ----- Stroke check An area whieh the tool cannot enter can be specified by parameters. This functlon is called the stroke check.

I L_---l
I

l---

Tutte

r__

____r
L- .t'

7/////U//////////Z///////t
2

tl -Jl tTr'

l,al,

Rererencepoint

4V 2',, '44 t,

.- -t-i

*V
LJ
LJ

',

:l - ---{

//rl-z7zzzrlzzzzrlz,.zzrzrrr2,

-19-

2.

CONTROLLED AXES

2.1 Controlled Axes

No. of basic controlled axes

3 2

axes

Controlled axes expansion Basic simultaneouslv controll-ed axes

Simultaneously controlled axes
expansi-on

l'lax. I axis (Max. 4 axes in total)

axes

Max. 4 axes
axes

(Note)

PMC

axis can be expanded up to the 2

by an option.

2.2

Increment System

Least input increment

Least comnand increment

Maximum stroke

0.001

mm

0.0001 inch

0.00I

mm

0.001

0.0001 inch

99999.999

mm

deg

0.00f

9999.9999 inch
deg

deg

99999.999

In increment

systern 1/I0
ar

Least input increment

Least

command

increment
rur deg

Maximum stroke

0.000f

mm

0.00001 inch

0.000f

0.0001

0.00001 inch

deg

0.0001

9999.9999 mm 999.99999 inch 9999.9999 des

Combined use

of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are functions that cannot be used between axes with different unit systems (circular interpolation, cutter radius compensati.on, etc.) For the incremen! system, see the machine tool builder's manual.

2.3

Maximum Stroke 99999999

Maximum

stroke = Leagt command i-ncrement x 2.2 Increment Svstem. See

-20-

3.

PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTTON)

command

A number following address G determines the meaning of the cerned block. F^1 1^,'i6ft c enl,Ps Are divi ded into the rurruwrug Fr'^ tsr Lwo Lypes.
u Lvsev

for the con-

- I Y"

Meaning

One-shot G code
Modal G code

The G code is effective only in the block in whieh it is

-i ^-^^.i Dgc!tllgu.f ^l

The G code is effective until

srolrD is sneeified.

another G code of the

same

(Example)

GOl and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.

{:t I I x

7_. ut Y-.
-. uvvL

GOl is effective in this range

t
t G

The following G code

c00
G01

codes are offered.

Funct ion

Positionlng (Rapid traverse)

0l

Linear interpolation (Cutting feed) Circular interpolation/Helical Circular interpolatio*/Helical

UWEIIT l^dLL DLvP

GO2

CW

c03 c04
G09

CW

Exact stop
00
n^+^ ud Ld ^^*+i-- r!r5 DE L L

GLO

cll
G

Data setting mode cancel

XY olane selection
02

17.

GIB

ZX plane selection
Y

cl9
G20

/. n l2nc
ir!l

qp lparr
.'-^L flruLr
mm

on

T**,,f rrrPuL

r\)
uLt

06
1

Input in

Reference point return check

c28
00
G29 G30

Return to reference point Return from reference point

2nd reference

point return

-2r-

i:.i

i/

il'

llllj
ll,.lt
illit,,

G code
G31

Group
00

Function

iil

,lii, r,j.rlti
i

Skip function
Thread cutting

c33
G39 G40

0l
00

Corner offset circular interpolation

ii.,i' iil

Cutter compensation cancel

07

G4i
G42

Cutter compensation left cutter comPensation right Tool length compensation * direction Tool length compensation - direetion Tool length compensation cancel
Scaling cancel

G43 G44

08

c49
G50

l1
G51
Gf1+
S

caling

Work coordinate svstem I selection Work coordinate system 2 selection Work coordinate system 3 selection
L4

c55
Gfo

Work coordinate system 4 selection

c58
G59

I,iork coordinate

sY

stem 5 selection

Work coordinate system 6 selection

00

c60
G61

Single direction Positioning

Exact stop
mode

G62

Automatic corner override

I5
Tanni no mnde

c63

*tat*
c65
GOO

-.*
Ilacro
comman-d-

00

Macro call,
F1acro --*

modal call

\
c68

la LL

l'lacro modal cal l cancel Coordinate rotation

LO

G69

Coordinate rotation cancel

LZ -

G code
G73

uruuP
Porb ! svA Arillino ur rrrrrrS

Func t i on
nrrnla L)Lrc

Gl4
tr/O GBO

Counter tapping cycle

Fine boring
Canned

cycle cancel cycle, spot boring cycle, counter boring

c8l
G82
GB3 GB4 GB5

Drilling Drilling
09

Peck dri I I ing evcle

T-*^;'-rdyPf ^.,^1^ 116 Ly Lrs

Boring cycle Boring cycle

Baek boring cycle

c86
G87

c88 c89 c90

Boring cycle Boring cycle

Ab

solut.e

conmand

not aot
G94

03

lncrement.al command 00

Programming
Foorl nor

of absolute zero point

minrrt-o

05

c95
Gvd

Feed per rotation

\
l0

Return to initial

point in canned cycle

G99

Return to R point in canned cycLe

(Note l) G codes marked \ are initial G codes when turning power on. For G20 and G2l, the G code before turning power off remains. G00 or G0l can be selected by parameter setting. ftr^rrn ara (Note 2) T LUUEJ UIF E;rUUy OO aro nnl- mnd: I . Therr ere only effective in the u -^A^rlrsJ ^ block in which they are specified. (Note 3 ) If a G code not listed on the table of G codes is i--..ts+^r v! utru ional tLIPULLEUT G code not specified in the system is commanded, an alarm (llo.0l0) is
(Note 4) A number of G codes can be specified in the same block. l'lhen more than one G code of the same group is specified, the G code specified later (Note 5) If. any G code of group 0t is specified in a canned cycle mode, che canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the GB0 condj-tion is entered. However a G code of group 0i is not affected by any of the (Note 6) A G code is displayed from each group.
canned cycle G codes.
di
sp

lay ed .

is effective.

-23-

4.
ii

INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Positioning (G00)

4.1
G00

I
I

A tool
Format
GOO

specifies positioning.
moves

absolute command or to a position specified distance from the current with an incremental comnand at a rapid traverse rate.
IP-;

to a certain posltion in the work coordinate

system

with
pos

an {
;

i t ion

where lP-: Cornbination of optional axis address (of X, y, Z, A, B, C) as x-Y-z-A-.. . This nanual uses this notation hereinafter ; : End of block (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code) This manual uses this notatoin hereinafter. - Non linear interpolation type posltioning Positioning is done with each axis independently. Tool path generally does not become a straight line.
Starting point

o+------J
g-.

A----'Non linear interpolation positionjng

Eno potnt

(Note 1) The rapid traverse rate in the G00 coumand is set for each axis independently by the machine tool builder (parameter No. 0518 to No. 0521). Accordingly, the rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a b1ock. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the in-position. (See Note 2). (Note 2)'rln-position" means that the feed motor is withln the specified range. (This range is determined by the roachine tool builder) (Parameter No. 0500 to No. 0503).

-24-

4.2

Single Direction Positioning (G60)

For accurate positioning without backlash, direction is available.

Start

final

positioning .from only

one

point

O+_--__J
End point

(Direction for final positioning is right

to left).

G60 is used insEed of G00 as below.

are set by the parameteT (No. 204 - 2O7z An overrin-and--a pos-itionii[direction P0STNI - 4, No. 29: G60X, Y, Z, 4). Even when a commanded positioning direction

G60o

B _\_6_;

coincides with that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point. (s, B, y, 6 = X, Y, Z or which one of additional axis A, B, C, U, V, W. Simultaneous 3 axis is option. )
Overrun

End point

Temporary

(Note 1) G60 is a one/short G code. (Note 2) During drilling canned cycle,

no Single Direction Positioning is effected in Z. (Note 3) No Single Direction Positioning is effected in an axis for which no voerrun has been set by the parameter. (Note 4) When the move distance 0 is commanded, the Single Direction PosLtioning is not performed. (Note s) The direction set by the parameter is not effected by mirror image. (Note 6) The Single Direction Positioning does nor apply to the shift motion in the canned cycles of G76 and G87.

-25-

4.3

Linear Interpolation (G01)

F; GOl P This comiland i-ctuates the linear interpolation mode. The values of lP define the distance of tool travel which will be conducted in absolute or incremental mode, according to the current status of G90/G91. The feed rate is set to a cutting feed speed commanded by F code and is a modal data.
(Program example) (c91) GOl x200. 0

YI00. 0 F200. 0
Y axis

00.0

X lxis
(Start point)
200.0

The feed rate conmanded by the F code is ueasured along the tool path. not coruranded, the feed rate is regarded as zero. (Note 1) The feed rate of, each axis directlon is as follows. o B Gole B
Feed Feed

If ir is

rate of q axis direction: rate of B axis

Fc = *

. t

direction: FB = f Feed rate of y axis direction: Fy = f Feed rate of E axis direction: Fe = *

. t ' f ' t

y=ffi
(Note 2) The feed rate of the roa"r, axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (the unit is decimal point position) G9l cOi B-90. 0 F300.
:

(Start point)

@nd point)

\Rotation

rate is 300 deg/min.

-26-

i,
!

4.4
The

Circular lnterpolation (G02, G03)

command

bel-ow

Arc on X-Y plane \,1 1 t.G02. ^1 / CO:J Arc on Z-X plane

wl1l move a tool along a clrcular arc.

{ -I
R

}T }F

c,8 ,33it
Arc on Y-Z plane

,R tr p
^'

crs

r[!]r

tJ

Date to be given
I

Command

Meaning

Plane selection

trI /

Specification of arc on

XY plane

cl8 ci9
L

Specifi-cation of arc on ZX plane

Specification of arc on YZ plane

Clockwise direction
(CW)

Direction of rotat ion

End point
G90 mode

an.,

c03

Counterclockwise direction
End

(CCW)

position

Two of the X, Y, and Z axes Two of the X, Y, and Z axes

Tvro

point position in the work coordinate system

Distance from start ooint to point 4
end

G91 mode
4

Distance from start point to center

of the I, J, and K axes

R

The signed distance from start point to center

Arc radius
5

Arc radius Velocity along arc

Feed rate

The view is from the positive direction of the Z axis (Y axis or X axis) to the negative direction on XY plane (ZX plane or \Z plane) in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system.

ir.

I \\
----\ I

lcor\

"o'

\\co3
G02\
\

G17

Clockwise and counterclockwise directions

-27-

The end point of an arc ls specified by address X, Y or Z, and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the coordinate of the end point which is viewed from the start point of the arc is specifled. The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the X, Y, and Z axes, respeetively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and G9 I, as shor,rn below.
End

point (x, y)

End point (2, x)

xl
nnin t

| lt

z1

t_
I

j
Center

tart

nni 11i

Center

I-_--l

Start point

Programming for circular interpolation

I,

The

be signed according to the direction. radius can be specified with address'R instead of specifying the center by I, J ,orK. The command format is as follows:
J , and K must

c02

In this case, two types of arcs (one arc is less than 180o, and the other is more than 180") are considered, as shown in the figure below. hrhen an arc exceeding 180o is commanded, the radius must be specified with a negative value.
For arc (!) (1ess than 180')
c9 (Examp le
q

c03'

).

For arc O, (gr"ffithan

c9 IG02X60. 0Y20. 0R-50.
0

rc02x60. 0Y20. 0R50. 0F300. 0:

i8o')

F300. 0;

r=50mm
End point

\-..._

--/

-28-

i!.il!,1:

ir'r.1; I

l:i,,,,";. 'i.

'

'

l, l,t:-t1,

(Program examPles)
Y axis

00

60 40

p'

90 r20 140 The above tool path can be programmed as follows: l) In absolute programming x200.0 Y 40.0 z0 G92 ; c90 c03 x140.0 Y100.0 r-60.0 F300. : # c02 x120.0 Y 60.0 I=50.0 ;
0

X axis 200

G92 X200.0 Y 40.0 Z0 t c90 G03 xr40.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ; c02 xl20.0 Y 60.0 R50.0 ; 2) In incremental programming c9l c03 x-60.0 Y 60.0 r-60.0 F300. ; c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 r-50.0 ; or c91 c03 X-60.0 Y 60.0 R 60.0 F300. i c02 x-20.0 Y-40.0 R 50.0 ; The feed rate in circular interpolation is equal to the feed rate specified by the F code, and the feed rate along the arc (the tangegtial feed rate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feed rate. (Note 1) I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted. (Note 2) If X, Y, and Z are all omitted or if the end point is located at the same posi-tion as the start point, and when the center is commanded by I, J, and K, an arc of 360o (a complete circle) is assumed. c02I ; (A complete circle) when nTs-@ an arc of 0o is programmed. GO2R ; (The cutter does not move.) (Note 3) The error between the specified feed rate and the actual tool feed rate ' is *2 - or less. However, this feed rate is measured along the arc after the cutter compensation iS applied. (Note 4) If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified'simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignored. (Note 5) If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm j,s displayed.
4.5
Helical Cuttins (G02, c03)

or

Helical

synchronously with the circular the Lool can be moved helicallv.

interpolation

is

enabled by specifylng another axis which moves interpolation by circular commands. That is,
rr\

ur/

,G02. tGo3J

Lr

!U

t t

c18 ,G02 \ 'c03'

.G02. cl9 tco: J

rR tI ,RtJ--

}Y lv

-29-

The command method is to simply add a move

interpolation

command

axes.

axis which is not circular

Thereforc - the feed
t !rr\

An F command specifies a feed rate along a circular arc. rate of the linear axis is as follows:

- " Length of Linear axis - Length of circular arc

Determine the feed rate various limit values.
so

the linear axis feed rate

does

not exceed any of the

Tool path

The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.

(Note l) Cutter compensation 1s applied only for a circular arc. (Note 2) Tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a helical cutting is commanded. (Note 3) The additional axes can be specified as not the circular axes but the linear axes.

-30-

4.6

Equal Lead Thread Cutting (G33)

Equal lead straight threads can be cut with a G33 command. The command shown below is used for thread cutting and the lead is specified numerically following address F. In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path 1n rough cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when the positlon coder mounted on the spindle detects a I-turn signal, threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is unchaged for repeated thread cutting. NoEe that the spindle speed must remain constant from
roilph crrttins !vu6rr th-^..-L L!r!vu6tr
f {-.'^L IMIDTT
LULLflr6.

^..!+ jh-

'I
l!

In general, the lag of the servo system, leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To compensate for this, a threading length somewhat longer than required should be specified. Programmable lead legnth is as follows:
Least
lrfafrin innrrf

f -^r lluL,

inCOrt.eCt thread leaO will OCCur. I etc. will produce somewhat incorrect

command increment

Lead range

0.001

mm

Fl F1

0.0001
Tnnh i nnrr
l-

(0.01 - 500.00 (0.01 - 500.00

F50000 F50000

mm) mm)

mm

0.000I inch
0.00001 inch

Fl - F500000 (0.000i - 50.0000 inch) Fl - F99999 (0.0001 - 9.9999 inch)

The spindle speed is limited as follows:

I <K Maximum feedrate Thread Ieao Allowab le number of positlon
mm

coder revolutions

spindle speed (rpn) or inch Maximum feed rate: mm/min or inch/mj,n The smaller value of the maximum command value in the feed per minute or of the maximum feed rate subj ect to restriction by motors and machine tool. Allowab le number of position coder revolutions: 4000 rpm (position coder A) 6000 rpm (position coder B) (Note I ) Spindle speed is read continuously from the position coder mounted on the spindle and converted into the feed raEe per minute to feed the tool. (Note 2) Feedrate override is applied to the converted feedrate, but is fixed to
Thread lead
:

p.

(Note
(Noce

1002.
3)
4

The converted feed rate applied with the feed rate clamp. The feed hold is ineffective during thread cutting. If the feed hold button is pushed during thread cuEting, the tool stops at the end point of the block immediately following the block in which Ehread cutting is completed.

5.

FEED FUNCTIONS
Rapid Traverse

5.1

Positioning is done in rapi<i There is no need to program the parameter (parameter No. Rapid traverse rate can be
panel:

motion by the positjoning command (G00). rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set in 05lB to No. 0521) (per axis). overridden by a switch on the machine operator I s

F0, 25, 50, 1002. F0: A eonstant speed set by parameter (data No. 0533)

5.2 are

Cutting Feed Rate

conmanded

Feed speed

of llnear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02, G03) with numbers after the F code.
speed constant control

In cutting feed' it is controlled so that speed of the tarrgential dlrectlon is always the same commanded speed.

5.2.1 Tangential

Starting point

*--

\ \E-

End point

./

/', \l / 'xl l\at|

\ /t\

rr

L_J

Fx Starting

point

Fz

End point

For arc

F:

Fx:
Fz:,

Feedrate along tangential dlrection Feedrate component along X-axis direction Feedrate component along Z-axls direction
F

G;ryfrt

cuttlng feed rate uPper liurit can be set as parameter (data No. actual cutting feed rate (feed rate with override) is conrmanded0527). rf the exceedlng the upPer limit, it i-s clanped to a speed not exceedlng the upper linit value. The clamped va'lues is set in mr/rnin or inch/urln. Except during acceleration or deceleration, the cNC arithmetlc error for the command value of the feed rate is hrithin +22. This error is applied to the tine measured for the tool to move a dlstanG of 500 mm or more'under stationary ) conditions.

5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp

-32-

5.2.3

With the per

Feed per minute (G94)

minute feed mode G94, commanded bv numerical value after F.

tool feed rate per minute is directlv

Feed per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)

Specify feed per revolution mode by G95. Following F, direetly specify the feed of tool per spindle revolution. It is necessary to mount a position coder on the spindle. c95 is modal. After G95 is specified, it is effective until G94 (feed per minute) is specified.
Feed per spindle revolution

5.2.4

Feed per revolution (G95)

(mm/rev or inch/rev)

Per revolution feed

(Note) When the rotation speed of the position coder is I rpm or less, the feed rate becomes nonunif orm. In cases where rnachining is not adversely affected by feed rate nonuniformity, the position coder can be used at I rpm or less. Though the degree of nonuniformity differs according to the case, the degree becomes large as the rotation speed becomes low under I rpm.
5.2.5 One-digit

Specifying a one-digit number (1 to 9) following F produces a feed rate set correspondingly to that number. The feed rate is set in advance as a parameter for each number. F0 produces rapid traverse speed. Rotating the manual pulse generator with the F l-digit feed rate change switch on the machine operatorfs panel ON, increases or decreases the feed rate for the currently selected number. Fmax i The increase or decrease of feed rate AF = per scale of manual pulse I UUX
generat,or, where, Fmax l:
Fmax

F code feed

feed rate upper limit for Fl-F4 (parameter setEing No. 583) 2: feed rate upper limit for F5-F9 (parameter setting No. 584) value of l-127 (parameter setting No. 216) X:any

-33-

The feed rate set or altered is kept even while the power 1S feed rate is displayed on the CRT. When plural manual pulse generators are available, use the generator without fail.
Format of G94 and G95 is shown below.
Feed per minute
Meaning Address

off.

The current

Ist manual pulse

Feed per revolution

Tool feed amount oer minute

F

Tool feed amount per revolution

F

G code

G94

c95

Override
Clamp

Overrides can be applied.

The feed rate is clamped at the maximum feedrate. The clamp value is set by the machine tool builder. (The feedrate with an override applied is clamped.)

Value

5.3 Override
Refer to machine tool builderfs manual for detai,ls of overrides.
a
5.3.1

Feed rate

The per minute feed (G94) can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs panel by: 0 to 1502 (per every IO7") . Feed rate override cannot. be applied to functions in which overrj-de 1s . inhibited.
5.3.2
Rapid traverse override

override

Rapid traverse rate can be overridden using the switch on the machine operatorrs panel by:

!'0,

25 , 50, 1002. F0: A constant speed set by parameter (data No.

0533)

! r

i i

-34-

5.4 Automatic

Acceleration/Deceleration

Acceleration and deceleration 1s performed when st.arting and ending movement, resulting in smooth start and stop. Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feed rate changes, so change in speed is also srnoothly done. It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration when
programming.

5.4.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

Rapid traverse:

Liner acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameEer set per axis) (Dara No. 0522 to 0525) Cuttlng feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter set conmon to al1 axes) (Data No. 0530) Jogging feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter ser per axis) (Data No. 0601 to 0604)
Rate after acceleration/deceleration Rate after interpolation

control

Pulse

distribution (Interpoiation)
Acceleration /deceleration

Servo motor

con!rol

R.Bte after

interpolation

Rate after acceieration/decelera tion control

Rate after acceleration/deceleration control

Rapid traverse

F'

RMAX.

Rapid traverse

T -R

deceleration time
constant
0s 2s)

Accelerat ion,/

(data No. 0522 to

t* -l t*"

-35-

JOG feed

Jog feed rate

I
Speed FJ

'J' Jog feed time constant (data No. 0530)

+

F1

*Ty

Time TJ

Fr: Low feed rate after " deceleration (dara No. 0548)

F: Feed rate, Dry run c

race

F: Acceleration/ c deceleration time constant (data No. 0530) 5.5

Speed Control at Corners of Blocks

For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the acceleration or deceleration is applied in feed start and feed stop, automatically with a time constant so that the machine tool system is not jarred. Therefore, this need not be considered when programming. Because of automatic acceleration and deceleration, corners are not cut sharply. In this case' cieceleration command (G04;) rnust be commanded at the corner to cut For example, if the tool moves along the X axis only in one block and along the Z axis in the next block' the feed rate for the X axis decelerates while motion along the Z axis accelerates and the actual tool path is as follows.
Insert a deceleration command here

sharp.

'/

Programmedpath

Actual tool path

If the decele.ration command is j-nserted, the actual tool path matches the propath. The faster the feed rate and the larger the acceleration/ decereration tiine constant, the larger the error at the corner. In circular lnterpolation, the actual arc radius is smaller than that of the prograuuned arc. (See the Appendix. 3) This error can be mininized by rnaking the acceleration/deceleration time constant of feed rate sma11.
grarnmed

-36-

(Note

I)

The following chart shows feed rate changes between blocks information specifying different types of movement. New block
Prev ious -----_r_...--. block

of

-------\

Posi t ioning
x

Feed

Not moving
x

Posi t
Feed

ioning

x x

Not moving
zeTo.

The next block is executed after commanded rate has decelerated to

The next block is executed sequentially so that the feed rate is not changed by very much. However in the block G09 is specified or G6l mode, the next block is not execut,ed until the feed rate is decelerated and reached to zero.
5.5.1 Exact stop (G04) Move command in blocks commanded wiEh the command (G04;) decelerates, and -in-nnqi t.i nn nhonI is performed. This command (G04; ) is not necessary for deceleration at Ehe end point for positioning and in-position check is also done
r.l ^ ^ 1 1 ,, duLUrudLrLdLLy. This func.tion is used when sharp edges are required piece corners in cutting feed.

for work-

r'Nnro I ) rrTn-nncigiontt means that the feed motor is within the specif ied range. (This range is determined by machine tool builder.)
5.5.2 Exact l.lhen G6 I

is commanded, deceleration is applied to the en? point of cutting block and in-position check is performed per block thereafter. This G6l is valid till G61+ (cutting mode) , G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping mode) is
commanded.

stop mode (G61)

5.5.3 Cutting mode (G64) When G64 is commanded,

deceleration at the end point of each block thereafter is not performed, and cutting goes on to the next block. This command is valid till G6t (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded. However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in-position check is performed in the following case; I) Posj-tioning mode (G00, c60) 2) Block with exact stop check (G09) 3) Next block is a block without movemenc cornmand
5.5.4 Tapping mode (G63) When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded as l00Z)' and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not decelerate at the end

of block to transfer to the next block. This command is valid till G6I (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cut-ting mode) is commanded.

5.5.5 Automatic corner override (G62) When G62 is commanded during

cutter compensation, cutting feed rate is automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time of the corner is thus controlled so as no! to increase. This command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is comnanded. If cutting is made at a programmed feedrate at inner circular region during the execuEion of the cutter compensation, Ehe cutter may be overloaded to rough cut surfaces. This function automatically decelerates the tool movement to lighten the cutter load at these region so as to obtain clean cut surfaces. 1) Automatic override at inner corners a) Operating conditions The feedrate is automatically overridden when all the following conditions are satisfied in both blocks before and after a corner. i) G code of group 0I is G0I, G02, or G03 ii) The offset quantity is not 0 in the offset mode. i.ii) The offset is made inside at a corner to be machined. iv) An axis moves along the offset plane. v) Neither G4I nor G42 command is included in the subsequent block. vi) Neither G4l nor G42 command is included in the previous block, or the block is not started up, if either command is included. vii) An inner corner is smaller than 0 preset by a parameter. The angle is judged about the programmed path. i) Straight line - straight line
Programmed path

Cutter center path

ii)

Straight line-arc

iii)

Arc - straight line

iv) Are -

arc

-38-

t'lhen 0 5 0p, the corner is regarded as inside. 0p value is set by parameter (No. 0215) (2S0pSl78 unir.) rf I is almost, equal to gp, the decision may include an error wirhln b) Motion area When a corner is judged as inside,

0.001".

the feedrate is overridden from the distance range within Le of the block on this side from the intersect.j-on of the corner to the distance range within Ls of the next block from the intersection of the corner. Distances Ls and Le are linear distances from a point on the cutter center path to the intersection of the corner. Le and Ls are set by parameters (No. 0580 and 0581), respectively.
hogrammed path

.-4:
.,,rrA, uviltcr -.rh Lurlsr ^ohro? plrL L -a/ \\- f

The feedrate is overriden from point a to point b.

Programnred path

Cutter center path

The feedrate is overridden from point a to b. In case of an arc, this override function to the end point of a block is effective when the following condition is satisfied. 1) The distance is within Le. 2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or in the next quadrant.

The override function to the

end point of a block is effective when the following condition is satisfied. i) The distance is within Ls. 2) The start point of an arc is in the same quadrant of the end point or in the next quadrant.

-39-

(ExarnpIe)

In case of disc

/'/"/a,i\

\,V
\v
\h

'/
'/

",r.'l'r,
./
L,l
I

Progranrnrerd path

/" \' --/

center path

Regarding program @ of an arc, the feed.rate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d. (Note) Ls and Le are the distances along the arc in case of 10/fl series, while they are the distances between point a and b and between c and d along the straight line in case of 0 series.

c) Overri-de quantity The override guantity is set by parameter No. 0214 l<override quanrity (I7. srep)s100(%) It is also effective for the dry run and FI digit coumand. In case of an F4 digit command, actual feedrate becomes F x (internal corner override) x (feedrate override) d) Whether internal corner override is effective or not Whether the internal corner is overridden or not i,s selectable by G codes. G62 is added to G61 and G64 in group 15 as shown in the fo11owing table. These G codes are also related to whether the exact stop check mode is effective or not.
Exact stoD check
G61 mode

Internal corner override Ineffective

Ef

Effective Ineffective Ineffective

c62 c64

fect ive

Ineffective

(Note 1) G64 functions when povrer is turned on or under the clear condition. (Note 2) Specify G09, if you want to check the exact stop in G62 mode. (Note 3) The internal circular cutt.ing feedrate change described in (2) always effective without being affected by these G codes.

1e

-40-

;tt'

t.
I,
ts I

b i,

Internal circular cuEting feedrate change In case of the internal offset circular cutting, the feedrate 1n the programmed path is se! to the specified F by setting actual feedrate to F x Rc/Rp (where, Rc: Cutter center path radius Rp: progranmed rbdius) wirh reference to the specified feedrate (F). This change is also effective for dry run and Fl digit command.
(Example 1)

ogrammed path

However, if

Rc is very small as compared with Rp, nc/Rp = 0, causing the cutter to stop. Accordingly, the minimum reduction ratio (lDR) is set to nake the actual feedrate. F x (MDR) when Rc/npSlOn. MDR is set by parameter No. 02i3.
I SI,TDR ( 1Z sreP) S100

This is also applicable to Fl digit and dry run. The reduction ratio of the automatic override at internal corners is not affected by MDR. (Note 1) If the automatic override at internal corner overlaps the internal circular cutting, actual feedrate becomes as folfows. FxRc/Rpx(override at corner)x(feedrate override) 5.6 Dwell, Exact Stop
(G04)

With the G04 cornmand, shifting to the next block can be delayed. Shifting to the next block can be delaved for the commanded minutes.
Format

Per second
c94c04

{:. A
is

dwe11
t

orX

-}

When

P or X

9999.999 sec In incrernent system 1/10, 9999.9999 sec) omiEted, t.his command (G04;) is turned to exacE stop command.

: Dwell time coruranded in

(0.001 0.0001

seconds

-41 -

6. REFERENCE
The reference

POINT

point is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can be moved by the reference point return function. easily
Y
I

o
Re ference poin

6.1 Automatic

Reference Point Return (G28, G2g)

6.1.1 Automatic return to reference point (G28) G28rP _; This command specifies automatic return

to the reference point for the specified axes. IP is an intgrmediate coordinate and is conmanded by absolute or incrementaTvalue. Thg intermediate coordinate specified in thls block are stored in memory. The G2B block is used to position the tool at the interurediate point of all specified axes at the rapid traverse speed, then move to the reference point at the rapid traverse rate. rf the machine lock has not been set, the Reference Return lamp goes on. Positioning to the interrnediate point or to the refererice point is done at rapid traverse rate of each axis. (Non linear positioning). rn general, this command is usec for automatic tool changing (ATC). Therefore, for safety, the cutter rad.ius compensation, ." should b" "".r".11"d (Note 1) when the G28 command is specified when manual return to the reference polnt has not been performed after the power has been turned on; the movement from the intermediate point is the same as in manual return to the reference point. In this ease, the direction from the intermediate point is equal to that for return to reference point selected by paraDeter (No. 0003 ZMX, ZI,IR, ZIIZ). (Note 2) The coordinate value specified in G28 command is memori zed for all axes as is tlte coordinate value of the intermediate point. In othr words, for axes not specified in the G28 block, the cooidinate value memorlzed for intermediate point earlier is Eaken as the coordinate value of the intermediate point for the axj-s.
Example:

NIXI. OZ2.O;
N2G28X40.0; N3G28260.0;

Intermediate point (40.0, ) Intermediare poinr (40.0, 60.0)

-42-

6.1.2 Automatic return from reference point

(G29)

This command positions the tool at the cornmanded position via the intermediate point of a conunanded axj-s . In general, it is commanded immediately following in" cz8 ccmmand or G30. For incremental programming, the cornmand value specifies the incremental value from the intermediate Point. In the G29 block operation, all commanded axes are positioned at thg intermediate point defined by the previous G2B or G30 corunand, and then to the commanded point from the intermediate point at the rapld traverse speed. Application example of G28 and G29
Reference poinl

G29P

_;

Tool is changed

ai R point.

Intermediate point

X (rnm)
0

300

I 300

800

(c91) G28X1300.0Y700.0; Ttltl.

(Program A to B)

G29X1800.0Y300.0; (Program B to C) As shov,rn in the example, the prograuuer is not required to calculate the actual nove distance from the intermediate point to the reference point. (Note l) llhen the work coordinate system is changed after the tool reaches the reference point through the intermediate point by the G28 or G30 com-

{
Si

s
g
S.

mandr'the intermediate point also shifts to a ner^r coordinate system. If G29 is then commanded, the tool moves to the commanded position through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the new coordinate system.

6.2

Reference Point Return Check (GZ7l

A reference point is fixed on the rnachine tool and the cutter can be moved to that point by the reference point return function. The G27 reference point return check functlon checks whether or not the program returns to the reference point normal1y, as programmed.

G27lF : This comnnnd-positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the reference point, the reference point return lamp lights up and the next block is executed. However, if the position reached by the tool is not the reference Point, an alarm is displayed.

-43-

(uote t) In an offset mode, the position to be reached by the tool with the G27 cornmand is the posiEion obtained by adding the offset va1ue. Therefore, if the position with the offset value added is not the reference point, the lamp does not light up, but an ararm is displayed instead. Usually, cancel offsets before G27 is commanded. (Note 2) when the machine tool system is an inch system wit.h metric input, the reference poinr return lamp may also light up even if the programmed position is shifted from the reference point by lp. This is because the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than its least command increment. (Note 3) If G27 is commanded with machine lock on, the reference point return check is not done.

6.3 2nd,3rd,4th
(P2\
c30 {P3) tl
lP4.r
II -

Reference Point Return (G30)

_-t

P2,

P4: Selection of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point If omitted, the 2nd reference point is selected.

This com-and returns the commanded axis to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point automatically through the specified position. Each reference point return LED lights after completion of the return. The positions of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point are determined by presetting the distance from the reference point as a pararDeter (Dat.a No. 0735 to No. 0738, No. 0780 to,A787) during field adjustment. This funcrion can be used after the first reference point return has been completed. This function is the same as G28 reference point return, except that this function returns the tool to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point instead of the primary reference point. If G29 1s commanded imrnediately following G30, the tool is positioned to the point commanded by G29 through the intermediate point commanded by G30. This motion is the same as thac by the G29 command following the G28 command. The G30 command is generally used when the automatic tool changer (ATC) position differs from the reference point. (Note I) At least one manual reference point return or automatic reference point return must be performed by the G28 command after the power supply is turned on, prior to issuing G30 command. (Note 2) Like the G2B command, cancel the cutter compensation, and tool length offset before thi-s command is executed.

-44-

7,

COORDINATE SYSTEM

the position to be reached by the tool is taught, the CNC moves the tool to that position. The position to be reached by the tool is given as'a coordinate value in a coordinate system. The position to be reached by the tool id commanded with a coordinate value of one of the coordi-nate systems, as required. The coordinate value consi-sts of one component for each program axis. If there are t.hree program axes (X, Y, and Z), the coordinate value is expressed as follows:
I^lhen

I 40.0
a

tool when X40.0Y30.0235.0

is commanded

Position of

Since the number of program axes, that is, the number of components for the coordinate value, varies with the machine tools, the coordinate value is referred to as IP in this manual. 7.1
Programming of Work Coordinate System (G92, GS4-G59)

A coordinate system used for work machining is called the work coordinate system. The work coordinate system is set by either of the following method: l) Using G92 command. 2) Using G54 ro G59 command. In case of 1),'a work coordinate system is established by specifying coordinate values after G92. In case of 2), six work coordinate systems are preset from CRT/MDI panel as setting data and any of them can be selected by G54 to G59 command.
7.1.'l
Setting

1) Establishing coordinate
G92]p

work coordinate system - Method by G92 system

Thi;-;*","nd-Lstablishes rhe work coordinare sysrem so that a certain point. of the tool, for example the tool tip, becomes Ip in the established work coordinate system. A.y subsequent absolute commands use the DosiEion in Ehis work coordinaEe
system.

-45-

(Exarnple 1)

Meet the programming start point with the tool tip and command G92 at the start of program.

(Exanple 2)

c92X25.2223.0;

Coordinate system setting by the G92X600.021200.0, command (When a start point is based on the base point of the tool holder)

As shovrn above, G92 is also used to align the base point of the tool holder with the start poinf and to establish a coordinate system at the beginning of the program. If an absolute command is issued, the base point moves to the commanded position. In order to move the tool tip to the comrnanded position, the difference from the tool tip to the base point is compensated by tool length

offset. (Note 1) If a coordinaie system is set with the G92 comrnand in offset mode, the coordinate system is set so that. the position before tool length compensation is applied becomes that specified by G92. (Note 2) In the cutter radius compensation, offset is temporarily cancelled by a
G92 command.

-46-

' 'lj:.:i

+,#.;

j.;

If rtlrr is seE to the parameter APRS (No. 0010), the work coordinare systeu is se! automatically when the manual reference poinc return has been completed. In this case' set the distance o, B, and y to the parameters No. 0708, No. 0709 and No.0710 so that the machine position (top of the standard tool or the standard point of holder) after manual reference point return becomes X = o, Y = B and Z = "y. It is equivalent to command the following.

Automatic coordinate system setting

G92X a

Zy;

7.1

.2 Setting work coordinate system - Method by G54 - G59 l) Setting work coordinate system Six work coordinaEe systems can be set. These six systems are decided by setting the distances of each axis from the machine zero point to the zero points of the coordinate systems, (i.e. the work zero point offset value, by using the CRT/MDI panel).
Work coordinate
system 4

Work coordinate
system
1

Work coordinate
system 2

Work coordinate
systern 3

EOF54

Work coordinate system 5

Work coordinate
system 6

ZOFSI: Work zero point offset value of work coordinaEe system I Z0FS2: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 2 Z0FS3: Work zero poi.nt offset value of work coordj-nate system 3 Z0FS4: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 4 Z0FS5: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 5 Z0FS6: Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 6

re

-47-

2)

Shifting work coordinate svstem Six work coordinate systems can be shifted bY a specified value (external work zero point offset value).

Work coordinate
systern

Work coordinate
systern 3

Work coordinate system 4

ZOF'S

ZOFS

ZOFS

ZOFS I
Work coordinate
system
5

ZOFS

I'XOFS
Machine zero point

ZOFS

Wotk coordinate
systenr 6

EXOFS:

Elternal work zero poig,t offset value can be changed in three ways. a Using CRT/MDI panel Q] Using program (cl0) (f Using external work c oordinate system shift function. An input sign enables you to change work coordinate systems. Refer to machine tool builder's manual for detiils. (Note l) The external work zero point offset amount can be set within the range of 0 and +7.999 nm or 0 and +0. 799 inch for every axis. (Note 2) When G92 i.s sp&ifi.ed afrer a shlft value has been specified, the shift value is ignored.
(Exarnple) when G92x100.0280.0;

External work zero point offset value

is courmanded, a work coordinate system in which tool position is x = 100.0, z - 80.0 is establishei, irrespective present of set shift value.

7.1.3

Selecting work coordinate system (Gb4 Gsg) Six coordinate systems proper to the machine tool are set in advance, permitting the selecrion of any of rhem by G54 ro G59. G54 L{ork coordinate system I G55 . I^/ork coordinate system 2 G56 . Worli coordinate system 3 G57 Work coordinate system 4 G58 Work coordinate system 5 G59 . Liork coordinate system 6 The six coordinate systems are determined by setting distances (work zero offset varues) in each axis from the machine i"to point to their respective zero points

-48-

,
.

, . rr=:,;f;_;
i:!;'. I :.;

Example: G55G00X20.02100. 0;

,,1.

In the above example, positioning is made to positions ({=20.0, Z=100.0) and ({=40.0e Z=20.0) in work coordinate sysrem 2. Where the tool is positi.oned on the machine depends on work ,"ro poirrt offset
values.
Work
Work coordinate System I
4

40.0220.0;

Work coordinate System 2

0.0

20.0

--l ( 40.0 , 20.0 ) --1---1(20.o,loo.o)

20.0
I 00.0

Machine zero point

systemlto6are established after point reference return after Ehe po!r'er. is turned on. When the power is turned onr G54 coordinate system is selected.

eoordinate

7.1.4
When

Changing work coordinate system by program command

shift them. 1) Using Gl0 clO L2 Pg p=0

they are to be moved for each program, a progranmed

lP
t

(Gs4

G59)

command

can be used to

: External work zero point offset value. DL= 6j-f I to 6: Correspond to work coordinate system 1 to 6. P) = 6fL : Work zero point offset value of each axis. lP Dd :' Ci'l 2) Using G92

P/ = Gs-'(

ce2P By this command, six !/ork coordinate systems move to creatf a new work coordinate system so that the tool tip becomes the coordinate value IP commanded by G92. Since the distance shifteC at this time is added to al& subsequent work zero point offset values, all work coordinate systems move by Ehe sarne distance.
Y'

_;

P"rJfT

tool is positioned ar (200, 160) in G54 mode, work coordinate system I (X' - Y') shifted by vector A is
created.

If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the

100

200

i{hen creating a new work coordinate system with the G92 command, a certain point of the tool becomes a certain coordinate value; therefore, the new work

coordinate system can be determined irrespective of the old work coordinate system. If the G92 command is used to determine a start point for machining based on workpieces, a nerd coordinate system can be created even if there is an error in the old work coordinate system. If the relative relationship among the G54 to G59 work coordinate systems are correctly set at the beginni-ng, all work coordinate systems become new coordinate systems as desired.

-49-

I 2000

G54 work

coordinate
system

G55 rvork coordinate

s),stem

z'
t

Work zero point shift value created by G92

New rvork zero point

offset value

f\

Work zero point offset value specified by parameter

L'

-Z

01d work coordinate system

New work

coordinate system

If G92X600.021200.0; is commanded,(shov,rn ia the dlagram above) when the G54 work coordinate system is specified, the G55 work coordinate system is set in so that the black point on the tool shor,un in the diagram above becomes position (600.0, f200.0); provided that the relative relationship between the G54 and G55 work coordinate systems is set correctly. Therefore, :ln loading pallets aE te/o different positions, the two pallet eoordinate systems are set as G54 and G55 work coordinate systems. hrhen the coordinate system of one pallet is moved by the G92 command, the coordinate system of the other pa1let is also moved in the same manner, provided that the relative relationship of the two \^/ork coordinate systems is set correctly. Accordingly, a wbrkpiece placed on two pallets can be machined with the same program by merely specifying either G54 or G55.
7.1.5 Setting
I

) Display -pr."" a) l-oFSETl. b) Press FFacfr tey to display ttlnlork Coordinates" screen
"woRKtt. )

and display of work zero point offset amount

(Press soft k.y

-50-

c) The work

zero point offset amount is displayed on two pages: press k"y, and select a required page.

"PAGE',

t{Xt<

CIRDII.fITES
MTR
Y

(E1B 1.810 f.

_ax
01

Ml.

z
A X

L.4 -3.s@ o.&t a.@

t4.@ ta,w L5..m
o.s@

@,x
z
A

MTA

a.w a.gzg a.em a.m

9-m
9.W3 9.WA 9.@B

6X
z
A

z
A ADRS.

lsr.srll,,*-1 tr*.ln
The following is displayed on each page. i) Page t 00: Shift amount of work coordj.nate system 01: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system I (c54) 02: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 2 (G55) 03: Work zero point offset amount of work coordinate system 3 (C56) '.\

11:S:45

l.rDt

2)

11/ Eage I 04: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate sistem i (c57) 05: Work zero point offset amount of work coordi.nate system 2 (c58) 06: Work zero point offset amount of work coord.inate system 3 (c59) Set t ing a) Adjust the cursor to the number to be changed or set. Step I
Cursor Press [Tl E. cursor
Page.

next

A continuous push on this key moves -the cursor. Move over the Pa8e, and the screen will be changed to the screen on the the

b)
7.1.6

Step 2 Key inl No. IINUMBER ll mTur-l .l,.[ z I or [E_l T:y in.E: l-y (Note l) rhe workEoordiiii'tE system range of 0 - +7.999 mmor0

amount can be entere +0. 7999 inch.

within the

It is possible to know the offsec amount by reading the of ables tt2500 to ll2806 for rhe work offser amount, and it valuealso system variis modify the offset amount by substituting a value for system variable possible to /ll.

System variables

51

Work offset No.

Y

Work

offset
{t2500

amount

External work zero point offset

c54

It2sor
I

t
c59
Y

{t2506
112600

External work zero point offset

c54
5

It260L I
112606

c59
Z

External work zero point offset

c54
(

ll27 00 ll27 0r
5

c59
4

ll27 06

Ext.ernal work zero point offset

c54
(

#2800

ll28Ar
t

c59

#2806

7.2

Plane Selection (G17, G18, G19)

A plane in which circular interpolation and cutter compensation is performed can be selected with one of th,ese G codes: ci7 . XY plane ZX plane c18 .

If GI7, Gl8, or Gl9 is not specified in a b1ock, the plane remains unchanged.
(Example)

c19.

YZ plane

G18X

ZX plane The plane

is not changed (ZX plane)

The movement command is not related to the plane selectj-on. For example, when G177. ; is specified, the Z axis does not exist in the XY plane. OnIy the XY plane is selected and Z axLs moves independently of the

plane.

-52-

,:i#;!ri

' :,t,::-

B.

COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, Gg1)

8.1

There are t\,to ways to corunand travels of the axes; the absolute command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed; in the incremental conunand, move distance of the axis itself is programmed. , G90 and G91 are used to couunand absolute or incremental command,

respectively. G90: Absolute comrnand G9l : Incremental cormand

100.0

For the above figure, incremental conmand prograrnming results in: c9l x-60.0 Y40.0; While absolute command programnring results in: c90 x40.0 Y70.0;

8.2

Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21)

Either inch or metric input can be selected bv G code. Unit

Inch
systems

G code
c20
c21

Least input increment

0.0001 inch

Millimeter

0.001

mn

This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program. The unit systems of the following itens can be changed with G codes: (l) Feedrate comrnanded by F code (2) Positional command (3) Offset value (4) Unit of scale for manual pulse generaEor (5) Ilovement distance in step feed (6) Some parameters (Note l) I^Ihen the power is turned oo, the NC status is the same as that held before the power r{as turned off. (Note 2) GzO and G2l must not be swltched during a program. (Note 3) When the machine unit and the input unit systems are different, the maxlmum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated. (Note 4) When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (c2l) and vice versa, the offset value must be reset according to the input unit.
I

-53-

8.3

Decimal Point Programming/Pocket Calculator Type Decimal Point Programming

This control can input numerical values with a decimal point. However, some addresses cannot use a decimal point. A decimal point may be used with rnm, inches or second values. The location of decimal point is mm, inch or second. ZL5.O 215 millimeters or Zl5 inches. F10.0 10 uun/min. or l0 inch/min. G04X1 . D,rell for one second The following addresses can be used with a decj-mal point iXrYrZrIrJrKrQ, R, 4-th, F. Use a parameter to select input method; whether to input by pocket calculator type input, or by the former type decirnal point input.
(Example )

Program

command

Pocket calculator type decimal point input

1 1

Former type decimal point input

lmm 1000 nm

xl 000 xl 000.

000 mm 000 nm

(I{ote i) In the dwell comrLand, decimal point can be used wj-th address X but not with address P. (This is because P is also used for a sequence
(Note 2) The appropriate G code should be specified before the numerical values are specified {n one block. l) G20; (inch dimension) Xl.0G04;....... Because the value Xt.0 is not regarded as the number of seconds, buE the distance of motion (in inches), Xl0000G04 is assumed resulting in dwelling for f0 seconds. Indication also changes from 1.0 to 10.0 when G04 is input. G04Xt.0 .. This is regarded as G04X1000 and dwell is performed
number. )

tor a seconcl . (Note 3) There is a great difference in values with and without the decimal point, when programned by conventional decimal point progra'nming. G2L ; (rniillmeter dimensions)
]ll. ,!L
mm

..I

X0.0001 inch (Note 4) Values with and without a decimal point can be specified together. Xl000223.7;

xt.

X0.001 G20; (inch dimension s)

mn

Xl inch

(Note 5) Valuef less than the least input increment are rounded off. When XL.23456 is specified, XI.234 is assumed in rnillimeter input and XL.2345 is assumed in inch inpuE. Also, the number of digits must not exceed the ma:<imum number of digits
a1lowed.

X10.Y22359;

XL.23456789 XL.2345678 ...

This is an error because it exceeds B digits. This is not an error because it is within 8 disits.

Jq

$-.o"

':iit;'i'1ffi'
li*i'

(Note 6) When a number ryith a decimal point has been input, the number is converted into an integer of the least input increment.
Example:

t,_

X123400 (input in inches) XI2.34 This converted integer is checked for its number of digits. x123456.7 Xl23456700 (input in inch) An alarm occurs because the converted integer exceeds 8

Example:

digits.

-55-

9. SPINDLE SPEED 9.1

FUNCTION

Spindle Speed Command

By specifying a numerical value following address S, a code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This ls mainly used to control the spindle speed. An S code can be comnanded in a block. Refer to the machlne tool bui-lder's manual for the number of digits com-andable with address S and the correspondence between the S codes and machine operations. Llhen a move corrmand and an S code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous executlon of the move cornmand and S function comnands. ii) Executtng S function comrnands upon completion of move cornmand execution. The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderrs specificatLons. In certain cases, these sequences nay be provided together in an NC machine. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool bullder for details. The spindle speed is controlled by address S and a following 2-digit number. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. (Note 1) htren a 2-digit S code is set in parameters and the 5-digit S code has been commanded, the loner two digits are available.
The spindle speed ls directly
number. The unit 9.1.1
S 2-digit code

9.1.2 S S-disit code

controlled by address S and a followlng 5 dlgits

of spindle spe& may differ depending on nachlne tool builder.

-56-

a,-.;.*lr

10. TooL

FUNCTTON

(T

FUNCTTON)

10.1 Tool Selection Command

One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for the number of digits commandable with address T and Ehe correspondence between the T eodes and machine operations. When a move conmand and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the fol|owing two ways: (i) Simultaneous execution of the move conunand and T function commands. (ii) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution. The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builderts specifications. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details. 1O.2 Tool Life Management

By specifying a 2-d,igitl4-digit numerical value following address ;, a BCD 2-digit l 4-digit code signal and a strobe signal are transmitted to the machine tool. This is mainly used to select tools on the machine.

Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency of use) for each group being specified. The function of accumulating the tool life of each group in use and selecting and using che next tool previously sequenced in the same group, is called the tool life management function.

1) Setting the tool life dara Tools used sequentially in each group and their respective tool life previously set by the following format tape in the cNC equipment.
Tape format
Meaning Prog ram number

are

____
?

c10T

Star t of setting tool life data AA

A

_L

Pfo llowed by group No. (l to 128) Lfo llowed by tool life (l to 9999) (Note (l)
(2)

TAAAAH00D TAAAAH00D

H followed by tool length offset No. D followed by cutter compensation No. Tools are selected in the sequence of (1 through (2) ro (N).

T followed by tool

No.

rAAAA;ooD P___LAAAA; TAAAAH00D GII

(N)

o"." for the next

group

;
t

End
End

of setting tool life data of Program

MN? /M?N\ \rrJv"

-57 -

(i) Insert the aborze tape into the tape reader and load the tape in the EDIT mode, as wj.th an ordinary CNC tape. The program will be registered in the part program memory and will be made ready for display and editing. Part Program (ii) Perform a cycle srarr operation in storage & the AUTO mode to run the program. editine area The data will be stored in the tool life data area of the memory; at the (ij) AUTO mode same time, the already existing tool life data of all groups will be cancelled and the life counters will Presetting be cleared. Data once stored is not Display erased by turning the power off. Tool life data area (iii) Executing a cycle start operation in the TAPE mode instead of rhe operation of (i), stores the program contents directly from the tape onto the tool life data area. In this case, however, display and editing cannot be done as i_n (i). (Note) TAPE mode is not always prepared according to the machine tool builders in 0 series.
(iii)
TAPE mode

The setting operation is as follows.

(Note l) Whether tool life is to be indicated by time (minutes) or by frequency, it is set by a parameter. (No. 0039-LCTH) (tlote 2) Tool nurnber is up to 4 digits. (Note 3) D and H codes are up to 254, No. of groups
I
L

No. of tools
r6
8 L
2

I6
32
64

J
4

128

(Note 4) The number of groups and the number of tools per group Ehat can be registered are combined by setting in one of four ways as follows: In any combination, up to 256 tools can be registered. Combination i is selected for up to 16 gruops, each with up to 16 toolsl combination 2 for.up to 32 groups, each wit.h up to 8 tools; and the tike. To change a combination, change the parameter, then reset the tool groups. If the tool groups are not reset, former tool groups are selected. Therefore after changing parameter, execute the group setting program

(tlote 5) CJaes H and D, when not in use, can be omitted. (Note 6) The same tool No. can appear at any frequency and at any place in the set data.

^ ^^.i dXdllt. *

-58-

The following is a concrete example of the tape format.

0000i
T001

GlOL3 ; P001L0150;

lH02Dl3

T0132H05D08; T0068H14D16; P002L1400 ; T0061H15D07 ; T024LH25D04 ; T0134H17D03; T0074H08D21; P003L0700 ; T0012H14D08; T0202H22DO2 ;

Data

of group I

Data of group

Data of group

Gll

M02

(Note 7) Group Nos. specified by P need not be consecutive. A11 registerable groups need not be set, either. (Note 8) When the optional tool life nanagemenr 5L2 pairs is combined, 53m of part program length is used for the data storage. Accordingly, 320m or more part progr.am storage is required. (Note 9) The tool compensation numbers registered as the tool life management data is linited to the tool compensation numbers permitted to the NC.

2) Specifying tool life data, etc. in a machining program In a machining program, tool groups, eEc. are specified by using the T as follows.
Tape format

codes

Meaning I
Group No.

TVVVV
MO6T n

of tools which are to be used after the next M06 command + tool life management ignore No. (Note I)

L-l LJ L-I

Terminates the tool specified by (Note 2) and begins to use the tool specified by V V V V.

c43H

6a
0

[99: makes the tool offset specified by group No. { effective. l.00: Cancels tool length offset.
I

c4lH o

[99: Makes cutter compensaEion, specified t-gtonp No. effecEive. i l.OO: Cancels cutter compensation.
M06 command.

by

TAAAA
MO6T

Uses a tool specified by A A A A after the next

Terminates the tools ofVVVVandbegins use the tool of A A

End of the machining program.

to

*or- r"rol

_59 _

(Note l) From T0000 to TAAAA, stipulated by the tool life management ignore No. AAAA, are handled as ordinary T code commands, and no tool life management is Performed. When the T code of AAAA plus the group No. is designated, tool life management is executed for the related group. The value of the tool life management ignore No. is set by a parameter. When the value is 100, for example, from T0000 to T0I00 are output as ordinary T codes; and when the T0t0l is designated, a T code of a tool, which has not reached its life end among the tools of group 1, is output. (Note 2) The above tape format uses the tool return No. command method (Type A), which requires a tool return command at the time of tool change. Type B and Tvpe C are also available.
Concrete examples of the tape fomat when the tool life management ignore No. is 100 are described on each type.
Tvoe
A

Format

lleaning

Set the tool of group 01 to the waiting position.

1,t06

(Toloo)

Set the tool of group 01 to the spindle. (Uote I) Set the tool of group 02 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool of group 01.

Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 01 to the magazine. Set the tool of group 03 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool- of group 02.
M06T102;

Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 02 to the magazine.
Machining using the tool of group 03.

G43H99: l'
I I

Uses the tool length compensation value of the tool of group 03. Uses the cutter compensation value of the tool of group 03.

G4
I I I

lH99;

Cutter comDensation cancel.

I

unn.

.'

Tool length compensation cancel.

(Note i) The return tool may not be specified. If a T code is specified in the same block as I'106, the T code shall be the tool number of the tool to be loaded in the magazine. The tool number is of the tool attached to the spindle at present. If the tool is under the tool life management, specify the tool group of the too1. When the tool group must, be specified, if the tool group specified here (group of return tool) and che tool group currently under management is different for each other, an alarm is generated. (No alarm is issued if parameter 0039-IGIN is set).

-60-

TyPe

Format

Meaning

Tl0l
I I I
I

Set the tool of group 0l to the waiting posit,ion. Set the tool of group 01 to the spindle. Set the tool of group 02 to the waiting position.
Machining using the tool of group 01.

M06T102;
I

M06T103;

Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 0l to the magazi-ne. Load the tool of group 03 to the waiting posi tion.
Machining using the tool of group 02.

c43H99;
I I I

Uses the tool length compensation value of the tool of group 02. Uses the cutter comDensation value of the tool of group 02.

c4 rH99
I I I

9rv
T

CuEter compensation cancel.

H00;
I I

Tool length compensation cancel. Bring the tool of group 03 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 02 to the magazine. Bring the tool of group 04 to the waiting
posit 1on.
Machining using the tool of group 03.

M06T104;

-61 -

Type

Format
MO6T IO
I I I I

Meaning
1

Bring the tool of group 01 to the waiting position.

M06T102;
I I I I I I I

Bring the tool of group 0l to the spindle. Ot F^ --^i+i-^ Bring the rnn'l ^f -r^"^ w4 LU *L^ LLIE WdILITIB 6rvsl/ position.
Machinign using the tool of group 01.

M06T103: l'
I I I
I

Set the tool of group 02 to the spindle. Load the tool of group 0l to the magazine. Load the Eool of group 03 to the wait.ing
pos

it ion.

I I
I

I I

Machining usign the tool of group 02.

Uses the tool length compensation value of the tool of group 02. Uses the cutter compensation value of the tool of group 02.

G43H99;
I I I

G4lH99;
I I

Cutter compensation cancel.

I

rJnn.

Tool length compensation cancel.

(Note l) Whether T code following M06 is used as back number or as waiting code for next exchange is set by the parameter (No. 0039-I'16TCD). 2) Counting tool life Tool life is counted by time or by frequency. The life count is executed every group and the contents of life counter is not cleared by turning off

tool life is specified by time (minutes) In this case, a T code in the machining program specifies tool life management group and the time during which the tool is used in the cutting mode from the M06 specification to the next M06 specification is countec at certain intervals (four seconds). The time for single block stop, feed hold, rapid traverse, dwell, machine lock, time to wait for FIN signal etc., is disregarded. (Note 1) The tool life can be set up to max of 4300 min. b) When tool life is specified by frequency The couriter for groups of tools that were used is increased by one, every process from the time that a cycle start operation is performed until the time that M02 or M30 is commanded and the CNC is reset. Even if the eonmand for the same group is given a number of times in one process, the counter increase stays at one. (Note l) I^lhen having executed M02 or 1130 with life specified by the frequency of use, input the External Reset (ERS) signal to the CNC. (Note 2) l"lax. f requency of the tool lif e i-s 9999 . a)
When

Po\^/er.

-62-

r.,1ri:,; ::;i r*':

11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (M, B

FUNCTIONS)

when a move command and M or B codes are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and M or B function commands. ii) Executing M and B function commands upon completion of move command execut ion, (Example) Nl G0l c91X50.0Y-50.0 M05; (Spindte srop)

Move command and spindle stop command

L\
tl F
s0 ---l
(ii)
Sequence

The spindle stops at the end of move command execution.

(i) Sequence (i)

The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specification. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.

11.1

Miscellaneous Function (M Function)

Itlhen a 3-digit f igure is specif ied f ollowing address M, a 3-digir BCD code signal and a strobe signal are transnitted. These signals .ru ,rs.d for 9N/OFF control of a rnachine function. One M code can be specified in one block. Selection of M codes for functions varies with the rnachine tool builder. t The following M codes indicate special meaning. 1) M02, M30: End of program i) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary fnr rooi qfrr-

tion of NC commands from tape to memory. ii) cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder. ) iii) The NC tape is turned to the beginning of the program. 2) t"tOO: Program stop Cyc1e operatj,on is stopped after a block containing !100 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by actlatlng the cNC. (This differs wirh rhe machine tool builder.) 3) M0t: Optional stop simi lrrlrr tn |r{QQ, cycle operation is stopped after a block containins M0 I is executed- This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machi-ne control panel has been pressed. 4) MgA: Calling of subprogram This code is used to call a subprogram. See section 12.4.1 (2) for details. 5) M99: End of subprogram This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution returns control fn LO +!'a ..^-:-. tne mal-n -Program. See the subprogram control section for details. (Section 12.4.r (2)) (Note l) The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read inro rhe inpur buffer register, if present. Similarly, t\ro M codes which do not buffer the next block can be set by parameters (No.0lll, 0l12). Refer Eo the machi-ne tool builderts instruction manual for these M codes.

63

(Note 2) The code and strobe signals are not sent to the machine tool- side for the M98, M99. (Note 3) Except for M98, M99, all M codes are processed by 'the nachine too1, but they are not done by the CNC side. Refer to the machine tool builder's

instruction manual for details.

11.2 Auxiliary Functions

Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 3-digit or 5-digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding indexing differs between machlne tool bullders.

-64-

$ ltr
t.

12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A program is composed (i) TaPe Start (ii) Leader (i11) Program Start (iv) Program Section

-il.

of the following sections:

(v) (vi) (vii)

Comment

Program End Tape End

1) A nain program on a taPe

Program -

Section
hogIam Start

I
I

Comment

(if necessary)

Main Program End

Tape End

(Note 1) lI02 can be used instead of M30 at the end of the maln progran. (Note 2) Wtren in IS0 code, LF is used for ;, while in EIA code, CR is used.

2)

One subprogram on

tape

\l* Start Tape

t'""o"t

*f{- f;ffff
Program Start

Program Section

-L ffi

-L-l
Tape End

A subprogram must be used after being entered into the part program
area.
:
a

memory

L :.

:r.-:il "'ii*

-55-

-, r.Jlit-fJ;,

,+ $p,iil

3) one main progran

and a number

of

subprograms on

taDe

Main Program

sectlon in the proper section.)

Program Start

(if necessary, insert aJ6frrnent

Subprogram ubprogram End

Tape End

A program including subprograms on into the part program memory area.

4) A number

tape must be used after

being entered

of programs on a tape

Program Section Tape Start Program Start

+-

Comn:ent

Program Section

Program Section

-66-

Program

Section Program End Tape End

A program number must be put at the first block of each main program section or subprogram section. A prograur number is a four-digit number following address 0. (lrlhen in ISO,: can be also used instead of O. ) Program numbers are not necessarily given. See Secti"on 12. 4'.2 f or details.

0r001c0Ixr2
g-

300.

Prog:am

Number

12.1 Tape Start

Start must be punched at the top of the paper tape by using the following code. This section is necessary to stop rewinding the tape when used with a Tape Reader with Reels. This section may be omifted when the Eape is used with a Tape Reader without Reels.
The Tape
EIA
ER

ISO

Meani-ng

Tape Start (Rewind Stop)

12.2

Leader Section and Lable Skip

Information punched before the first LF (for IS0 code) or CR (for EIA code) on a paper tape is called the Leader Section. Normally, the CNC is set to the Label Skip condition when turning the power on or resetting and this section of paper tape is loaded on a PPR. The PPR reads but skips this section (by the Label Skip function). Generally, a labe1 for a tape is punched in this section. Since no parity check is performed on the skipped leader section, any combination of codes other than LF and cR may be punched in this section. (Note) The 1abe1 skip function is used to ignore all information up to the first
EOB code.

12.3

Program Start

Punching the following code immediately after the end of the Leader section (at the top of the first block of a program) indicates the start of a program. This code is necessary to release the LabeL skip function.
EIA
t, It

ISO
L.T

I'feaning

Program Start

-61 -

12.4

Program Section
End

The part of the paPer tape punched between the Program Start and program

code (except the Cortment section explained in Section 12.5) is called the Program Section. Information specifying tool travel and machine ON/6FF function is punched in this section. This section is cal1ed the significant section and is different from the non-si-gnificant section which includes the Leader and
Conrment Section.

A program section is composed of a number of blocks. A block is partitioned into a number of words, and the end of a block is identified by an End of Block Code (LF in ISO code and CR in EIA code).

l--

u,""u

(Note 1) TV check (vertical parity check) A parity check is performed in the vertical direction of a b1ock, and alarm 002 is generated if the block is found to contain an odd number of characters (between a code j-rnmediately following an EOB and the next EOB). The TV check is not performed for a part of tape which is read but skipped by the Label Skip function, but the Command Section between rr (f ' and tr) I' ig checked f or the total number of characters in each block. The TV check function can be specified Valid/Invalid through the IIDI keyboard. (See Section Il.3 in Chaprer III.) (tlote Z) In program examples in this manual,; is used instead of the End of Block code (LF for IS0 and CR for EIA), but the proper EOB code LF (IS0) or CR (EIA) must be used in actual programming.
12.4.1 Main program and sub program

1) Main program A program is divided into a main program and subprogram: Norma1ly, the NC operates according to the main program, but when a comnand calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program, control is passed to the subprogram. When a corunand indicating to return to the main prograp is encountered in the subprogram, control is returned to the main program.

-68-

F'

$t
Main program

Subprogam Information
1

Information

Information 2

Information 2

'Fg[o.w m rnrormaRon
tn lne sll rDfOqfam--

Information n

lnfolmation n + I

Retun to main program

A total of 125 main programs and subprograms may be stored in the NC nemory, and the CNC uses one of these main programs to move the CNC machine tool.
cNc
Program

#r a>
/

.7
Program

@
I

#n2

Refer to III 9. 2 for how to register programs.

l
E<'

tu

-69-

?l Subprograms When a program contains certain fixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns, these sequences or patterns may be entered into memory as a subprogran to sinplify programming. The subprogram can be ca11ed in AUTO mode. A subprogram can call another subprogram. hthen the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one loop subprogram ca11. Thus, two loop subprograrn call can be executed as shown below. However, four loop subprogram call can be executed using custom macro.
Main program
Sub

program

Sub propgam

010001
I
I I I

r{98P]000;
M98P1 000;

r!{98P3000:

{oop nesting

2Loop nesting

A call command can call a subprogram repeatedly A call command can specify up to 999 repeations of a subprogram. a) Preparation of subprogram A subprogram is prepared in the following format:
O(:)XXXX; Subprogram number
Subprograrn

Mqa.

At the top of subprogram, a subprogram No. identifying the subprogram is specified after "0" (EIA) or ":" (IS0). Specify M99 at the end of a subprogram. Subprogram end command 'rM99rt need not be sneeified in a block by itself. (Example) X M99 ; For how to enter subprograms into memory, see Chapter III-9.1.1 (Note t) For compatibility of the CNC tape with other devices, "i{xxxx" is also used as a subprogram No. instead of 0(:). A sequence number under N is registered as a subprogram number. b) Subprogram e.xecution A subprogram is executed when cal1ed by the main program or another
subprogram.

A subprogram call has the following format:

M98P00000000

-L5-

When

is to be repeated. the repetition times is omitted, the subprogram is repeated once. (Example) t'tggPS1002; This command is read "Ca11 the subprogram (subprogram number 1002) five
The subprogram catl command specified in the same b1ock.
times.tt
(M9BP

Subprogram number Number of times the subprogram

) and a move command can

be

- 70 -

ffi. *:.:
4.

&
;{.

In thls example, the subprogram (subprogram completing movement in the X-axis direction.
The execution sequence
(Example )

(Example) X1000 M9BP 1200;

number 1200)

is ca1led after is
as

follows:
NOOI
O

of a main

program which

calls a
;

subprogram

Main program

N0020--_-_-;
N0030M98P21010;

N0040 --------; N0050M98P1010; N0060 ---------;

o10I0; }t1020 N1030 _;

N1040

Subprogram

Ni050 N1060

M99;

k4ren the subprogram is ca11ed by another subprogrann, same sequence as shown in the above example. (Note 1) M98 and M99 signals are not issued to the machine

it is executed in the tool.

(Note 2) If the subprogram number specified by address P can not be found, an alarm (PS078) is displayed. (Note 3) The subprogram call command "M9BP ;" cannot be input frorn the MDI, In this case, prepare the maitr-f,Efr"m in EDIT mode as follows:
Oxxxx;
M98P
M02;

xxrx;

Then execute it in the AUTO rnode. c) Notes on subprogram control The following special specifications can be used to control subprogram

executi-on.

i)

When

a sequence nunber is specified in address P of the last block of a subprogram, control does not return to the block after the block in which the subprogram \./as called, but rather to the block with the sequence number specified in address P. However, this is only effect tive in memory operation. The processing time for return to the specifi-ed block is considerably longer than that for normal return. Ilain program
N0010
N0020

___a

N0030 _____1 N0040M98P1010; N0050 _____;\

N0060 N0070

---x---

Subprograrn 01010 t-i N1020 N1030 N1040 N I05O

Nr.060

N1070M99P0070;

ii)

If the M99 command is executed in the main program, control returns to the start of the main program. For example, a " ll"l99;" block is j-nserted in the proper position of Ehe main program and the optional block skip is off' M99 is executed, and control returns to the start of the main program and the program is executed again. rf the optional block skip is turned on, "/1499;" is omitted and control is passed to the next block. If "/M99Pn;" has been inserted, control does not return to the start, but returns to the block whose sequence number is ttntt. The processing time for return to sequence number n is lonqer than return to the start.

- 7t -

Optional block skip OFF

iii)

N00901'102; ; It is possible to execute a subprogram from the start by specifying a search for it from the IDr keyboard as well as the main program. (Refer to III 10.4 and 10.9 for the search operation). In this case' if the M99 command is executed, control returns to the top of the subprogram and execution is repeated. IfttMggPn;" is executed, control returns to the block whose sequence number is rrnrr and execution ls repeated. In the above operation, if you want to stop execution, insert "fl'1021" or the "/M30;" at the appropriate position. Lrhen the optional block skip swi-tch is turned off, the above cornmand is executed and the program 1s terminated. In the example be1ow, execution will continue while the optional block skip i-s on and will stop when the optional block skip is turned off.
Nl 040 N1050

N0010 N0020 N0030 N0040 -; N0050 N0060 /N0070M99P0030; N0080

Optional block skip ON

Nr060

/Nr070
12.4.2 Program number

M02;

N1080 M99 P1050;

This control can store program in itfs memory. A 4-digit program number following address O is used to differentiate graru from another.
O

one Dro-

trtrDD
Program number

Address

(l-9999, Leading zero suppression)

011r1...
Progran I1 Il

..M02; I O2222
I

.....M30;

Program 2222

M02; or M30; means the end of a main program. M99; means the end of a subprogram.

05555.

....

M99;

Subrogram 5555

(Note 1) In ISO code, colon (:) can be used instead of O. (Note 2) A block with an optional block skip code such as /uoz3, /M30; or /ugg: is not regarded as the end of a program.

72

(Note 3) When lhe program number is not specified at the st.art of the program, the first sequence number (N...) in that program is regarded as the program number. However, N0 is not used as the program number. (Note 4) When nej-ther program number nor sequence number are specified, a program number must be specified from the CRT/IDI when the program is registered. (Note 5) When a taPe contains more than one program, an EOB code j-s unnecessary before the second and subsequent programs. However, when a preceding program ends with ER (EIA code) or % (IS0 code) r 3o EOB code is necessary at the head of a program. This is because of the 1abel skip
/rr^+^

f eature . 4.\ ru/ ru Duure cases, program ----L^-^ numbers nnnn n 9000-9899 are reservEd and cannot be \L\uLE used by users.
Sequence number and block

12.4.3

A prograu is composed of several commands. One command is ca11ed a block. One block is separated from another block with an end of block code. manual uses ; as the end of block code.

!-

nro"r.

Brock

--l

l-

Block

(Note l) The end of block code is

-f-

CR

in EIA code and LF in ISO code.

A 4-digit sequence number can be specified (I - 9999) following address N at the head of a block. The order of sequence numbers is arbitrary and need not be consecutive. Sequence numbers can be specified in all blocks or only in blocks

requiring them. It is recornmended that sequence numbers be specified sequentially at important points such as when a tool is changed and a ne\^r tool is used. (Noce i) Sequence number N0 should not be used for compatibility with other NC
(Note 2) Because program number 0 is invalid, program number must not be 0.
12.4.4 Optional block skip When a slash followed
equ]-Pmenc.

a secuence numDer reqarceo as

by a number (/n n = I - 9) is specified at the beginning of a block and the optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panel is set ON, the block with ln corresponding to switch number n is ignored in the tape or memory operation. When the optional block skip switch n is set OFF, the block with ln is valid. Thoror^ro rha nperstor can sklp a block with /n at his discretion. L in / I may be omitted.

- t? _

The

following range is ignored when the optional block skip switch is ; /2Nl23G0lX4. ....; N7856

0N.

Example:

lr l-

Range ignored

Nr00XI00;

/2Nl0lZi00;
/213Nr02x200; /3N1032200;

In the above example, the blocks of NlOl and NI02 when switch No.2 is ON, the blocks of Nl02 and Nl03 when switch No.3 is ON, are skipped.
(Note
1)

and

(Note 2) (Note 3)

(Note 4) (Note 5) (Note 6) (Note 7)

sr^iitches can be used. (Note 8) If more than one optional block skip code is specified in a block for

A slash (/) must be specified at the start of a block. If it is placed elsewhere in the block, the information from the slash (l) to the EOB code is ignored, r^rhile information before the slash (l) is ef fective. \tlhen the optional block skip switch is ON, TH and TV checks are performed for skipped portions, as when the switch is OFF. The optional block skip is identified when the information is read into Lhe buffer storage from the tape or memory. I^lhen a block preceded by a slash has been read into the buffer, it is not ignored even if the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is turned on. This function is also effective during a sequence number search. When storing the program in memory, this function is ineffective. A block with a slash (/) is also stored in the memory regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch. When punchi$g out the program from memory, the program is punched out regardless of the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch. Some of the optional block skip switches (l to 9) may not be used on Ask the machine tool manufacturer how many some machine tools. the system with additional optional block skip function, I in /l cannot be omitted. Please specify /1 under Ehe above condition.
(Example)

-m Gooxlo.o; Correct
--7TTz cooXro.
o:
12.4.5 Word and address A block is composed
i 000

Error

of one or more words. A word 1s composed of an address followed by a number as i-s shown below. (An algebraic sign (+ or -) may be added before the numerical va1ue.)
X

Address

Numerical value

''t

The address is a letter which indicates the meanins of the numerical value following the address. Addresses and their meanings are shown below. Some addresses may vary 1n meaning depending on preparatory functions specified in the program.

Word

&

fi L

,:

1,.+. I

74

Function
Program number Sequence number

Address
: (ISO)

Meaning

/o(nre)
N
G

Program number
Sequence number

Preparatory function
Dimension word

Mot.ion mode (Linear, arc, etc.)

C

xrY ,z,ArB,
K

Coordinate axis motion

command

Arc radius, corner

I, J,K
Feed function
F
b
.F

Coordinate values of arc center, chamfering

Feedrate, thread lead Spindle

speed

Spindle speed function Tool function

Miscellaneous function

Tool number, tool offset number

ON/OFF

M B

control on the machine t,ool

Index of table, etc. Designation of offset

number

Offset nunber
Dwe1l

PY
P

Dwell time
Designation of the subprogram number

Program number

designation

Repetitive count
Parameter
P

Repetitive count in subprogram

Parameters in canned cvcles

'Q'R

For example, the following block is cornposed of words:

N

\
number
function

Y -_-f_

----r-Sequence heparatory

Dimension rvord

Feed Spindle Tool function function function

Miscellaneous

iunction

In the next Process sheet example, one line represents a b1ock. And one frame in a block is a word.

-75-

Progran

name
Test Program
2

-Note
Da

te

Proglam number

o(:)

zooz

Programmer

'85.10.10

x1 96. 0

Y3

15. 0

\
I

(Note )

End

of block code (;) is

CR

in EIA code or LF in ISO code.

#r

B
F.'
Sri

12.4.6

Basic addresses and command value range

The basic addresses and command value range are listed in Table L2.4.6. Note that these figures give the maximum numerical liurit, not the mechanical limit of the CNC machine tool. Under CNC control, the tool rnay traverse up to 10 m (in millimeter input) along the X axi-s, but actually travelling distance may be lirnited to 2 m for the specific machine tool. Sirnilarly, CNC control may permit a maximum cutting feed of 25 m/min., but the CNC machine tool may be limited to 3 m/min. The manual issued by the machine tool manufacturer should be closely consulted' in addition to this rnanual when programming to ensure that the actual limitations of the specific machine tool are not exceeded.
Table 12.4.6 Basic address and command value range

Funct ion

Address
:
o

Input in
L L

mm

Input in inch
L9999 9999

Program number
Sequence number

(IS0)
(ErA)
N

9999

Preparatory function
Dimension word

- 9999 0-99
R,

L-

0-99
nrn
mnr

X, Y, Z, Q,

Increment system l/10

Feed per minute

I, J,

+99999.999 +9999.9999
1

+9999.9999 inch +999.99999 inch

K,

100,000

Increment systern l/10

Feed per revolution

mm/min

0.0r -

400.00

t2,000 5m.00 rev

9999

mn/rnin
F

inch/min 0.01 - 480.00 inch/min

0.0i rim/

0.0001

inch/rev

9.9999

Spindle speed function

0-

0-

9999

Tool functions
Miscellaneous functions
Dwell

T
M

0-99 0-99
oo99999.999 sec. 9999.9999 sec.
9999999

0-99 0-99
o099999.999 sec. 9999.9999
qoa

Increment system l/10 Designation of sequence number, number of

ranafil-innc

r-

| -

9999999

0ffset

number

II
B

l-200
0999999

l-200
o999999

2nd miscellaneous function

- l7 -

12.5 Comment

Section

The information punched between the control out and the cont.rol in codes shown below is all considered as a comment and is skipped . Since a TH check is not performed, a heading, cofi[nents, and indications for the operator can be punched by combining any code of arbitrary holes. The TV check is oerformed on the conment section.
EIA
ISO
(
)

Meaning
Cnntrnl nrrf! (efarf \eLur
e

2-4-5x
z-+- I ^

nf vr

nnmmontLvrLsrre!rLl

'\

Control in (end of

comment)

* Indicates the hole combination for the EIA code.

Channei Channel 5 Channel 4 Channei 2
7

a\ v
o o o

oo

o o

Channel 4

-)

o o oo

o
l^'

Channel

a)
Control In

Control Out

u c

(Exarnple) In IS0 code

N1000c00x.
(MEASURE

l
LF LF LF

Nl00

1G0

lx

WORK.........)

LF
LF

When a command comment section

tape is read into memory, for memory-controlled operation, the is read into memory. However, codes not listed in Appendix 7 are ignored and are not read into memory. When daEa in the memory is punched out, information in the Comment Section is also punched out. The Comment Sec+i ^.. i ^ urDPr4J ^-'ed on the program screen. However, codes ignored when read-in ,r't ^*1 !> Lfurr neither punched nor displayed on the CRT screen. are During a memory-controlled operation in memory command mode, the comment section in memory is ignored and operation is executed. (ExarnpIe) Used as heading

F1000cR( Significant section

Name of the tape, etc

)N 110

Signficant section

(Note l) The rewind stop code (Z or ER) cannot be used in the comment section. Reading this code resets the CNC. (Note 2) When a connent section is in the middle of a Program section and is long, movement is interrupted for a long time. Therefore, insert corment sections in a place where movement can be interrupted or a place specifying no movement.

- 18 -

(Note 3) The length of the conment sectj-on is unlimited. (Note 4) When the eontrol out code does not come first and only the control in code is read in, it is ignored. (Note 5) The TV check for the comment section can be disabled by sp eci fy ing paramerer TVC. (Data No. 0000) 12.6
Program End

The end of a program is indicated by punching the following code at the end of the Program Section.

EIA
I'1O2CR

T.

SO

Meaning

I'1O2LF

Program End Program End and Rewind

Subprogram End

M3OCR

M3OLF

M99CR

M99LF

When

the End of Program is sensed during the execution of a programr the CNC unit terminates the execution of the program and enters a reset state. In case of M30CR or I'130LF, the program is returned to its beginning (in l'femory Courmand Wrrgrl Ltr IIUUE,/ -^r^\ . rrL^- -L.e subprogram. end code is sensed in a subprogram, control is returned to the program which called the subprogram. (Whether or not the tape is rewound by exeeution of I'130 depends on the machine tool.)
12.7 Tape End
The end of a tape is indicated by punching the code below immediately following the Program End of the last program on a tape. t
EIA
ER

ISO

Meaning

Tape

End

(Note) If M02 and M30 are not at the end of the program section, and ER (EIA) or Z (IS0) is about to be executed, the CNC enters the reset state.
12.8 Tape Format The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as tape format. 12.9
Tape Codes

Eit,her the EIA or the IS0 code can be used as tape codes code is distinguished with the first end of block code. Appendix l.

The input program See Tape Codes in

fn

13.

FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

Canned Cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89)

13.1

A canned cycle siruplifies the program by using a single block with a G code to specify the nachining operations usually specifleci in several blocks. Table 13.1 lists canned cycles.
Table

13.'l

Canned cycles
Re trac t ion (+Z direcrion)

G code
c73
c74

Drilling (-Z direction) Intermittent

feed
Feed

Operation at the bottom of a hole

Applicat ion
High-speed peck drilling cycle

Rapid traverse Dwel1 + Spindle

CW

Feed

Left-hand tapping
cycle

G76

Feed

Oriented spindle
s

top

Rapid traverse

Fine boring cycle

Pos

c80

Cancel
Feed

z,e
pla
seL

c8l

Rapid traverse

Drilling cyc1e, sp_s!_ !r:llling

cycle

Ih"

eac

c82

Feed

Dwe1l

Rapid traverse

Drilling

co111-1T,!erlnc cycle Peck driIllng cycle

cycle,

(l)
(2) (3)

c83
c84

Intermittent
feed
Feed

Rapid traverse

Dwell + Spindle
CCW

Feed

Tapping cycle

c85

Feed Feed Feed Feed

Feed

Boring cycle Boring cycle

Back boring cycle

c86
c87

Spindle stop Spindle

CW

Rapid traverse

Rapid t.raverse
Manua
1

c88

Dwell + spindle
s

top

Boring cycle Boring cycle

c89

Feed
a

Dwe1l

Feed

Generally,
below.

canned cycle consists of a'sequence of six operations as shom

Operation I Operation 2 Operation 3 Operation 4 Operation 5 Operation 6

Positioning of axes X and y (including also another Rapid traverse up to point R

Hole machining Operation at the bottom of a hole Rapid traverse up to the initial

rvi c'l

point

-80-

F
Operation

I
I
I

Initial point
I I I

Operation

2 *l

l+
I I

Operation 6

Point

J
I

9
I I

l*
I I

Operation 5

Operation

3-l

I I I I

--

-+

Rapid traverse
Feed

/
Operation 4

Fig. 13.1 (a) Canned cycle operation

:..

:.' t *i

Positioning is performed on the xY plane and hole rnachining is performed on the Z axis' Positloning and hole urachining cannot be perfoimed than this plane and this axis combination. Canned cycle indifferent other the plane to selection G command. These canned cycle operatio5rsr. to be more stri.ct, consj.st of these three each of which are specified in a particular modal G code, as shom below. modes, (1) Data formar J c9O Absolute. I C91 Incremenral (2) Return point leve1 G98 Inirial point 1evel { , I c99 R poinr level

f:

(3) Drilling

node

c73 c74 c76 c80

.9t
c89

See Table 13.1

(Note) The initial level means the absolute value of the Z-axls tine changing fron the canned cycle cancel mode into the canned aL the mode. of cycle

- 8t -

a) Fig. 13.1 (b) shows how to specify data according to the rnode (C90 or
G90
G91

G9I)

v____*"
I

z=o

PoinrR"ll
Point Z
-r O-

I -|ts-T1Rl !ll

tit
(b)

lir

r.in'nPoirt
Z

llt
I

*L--i

Absoiute

Incremental

Fig. 13.1

Absolute and incremental programming

b) Whether

the tool is to be returned to point R or to the initial level is specified according to G98 or G99. This is shown in Fig. 13.1 (c). When the Use G99 for the first dril1ing, and use G98 for the last drilling. canned cycle is to be repeated by K in G98,mode, tool is returned to the initial leve1 from the first time drilling. In the G99 mode, the initial 1evel does not change even when drilling is performed. r
G98

Initial
level

Initial

V---

,z

level

-*o/ rl rl rl rl Ir lr ll t! ll
ll o'
Initial level return

sz/

Point R level

Point R level return

Fig. 13.1

(c)

lnitial level and point R level

c) The drilling data can be specified following G73/G74/c76/G81 to c89 and a single block can be formed. This command permits the data to be stored in the control unit as a modal value. The machining data in a canned cycle D specified as shom below:
G

[tr
I I I

+{f lll.--.
Drilling

r. .\' ."
-Dritlingdata

I - Hole position data

mode

LNumber of repeat s

-82-

llrl

lllno

m^dp

Hole positlon ;;;;' rxl

I.YJ

Specifies the hole position by an increnental or absolute value. The path and feed rate are the same as G00 pcsitioning. Drilling data Specifies the distance fron point R to the bottom of the hole in Fig. 13.1 (a) with an increnental value or the position of the hole bottom with an absolute value. The feed rate is specified in the F code in operation 3. In operatJon 5, it becomes the rapid traverse rate or the feed rate specified in the F code, accordlng to the drilling mode. Specifies the d.j stance frorn the initial 1eve1 to polnt R 1eve1 in Fig, 13.1 (a) with an absolute value. The feeC rate i-s the rapid traverse rate in operatlon 2 and 6. Specifies each cut-in value with G73 and GB3 or the shift value with G76 and G87. (Always speclfled with an increnrental value.) Specifies the dwe11 time at the botton of the hole. The relationship betrveen the time and the specified value is the same as for G04. F ... Specifies the feed rate; K ... Number of Specifies the number of repeats for a series cf repea t s operation 1 to 6. When K is not specifled, K = 1 is assumed. When K = 0 is specified, the drllling data is sinply stored, and drilling ls not performed. Since the drilling node (GID remains unchanged untl1 another drilling node is speci-fied or the canned cycle is cancelled with a G code, j-t must not be speclfied any blocks when the same drilling mode continues. G80 and the 0l group G codes are used to cancel a canned cycle. Once the drilling data has been specified in the canned cycle, it is retained until it is changed or the canned cycle is cancelled. Therefore, all requlred drilllng data shal1 be specified when the canned cycle is started and only data to be changed sha11 be specified during the cycle. The number of repeats K shall be specifled only when operation $ust be repeated. Data K is not retalned. The feed rate specified with the F code ls retained even if the canned cycle ls cancelled. When the system is reset during the canned cycle, the drilling mode, drllllng data, hole position data and repetition count are deleteC. An example of the above data retention and deletion ls shown below.

[[

See Table 13.1

C x
O

@ G8IX
Y

coo

Mo3;

Y-Z-_R-F-KIn the beglnning, Z, R,

values. Drilling
c81
.

ls repeated K times according to

and

; ..... F speclfy

necessary

_;

. Slnce the drllling mode and drllling data are the same as those specif ied in O , G8 l, Z _, R _, and F can be ornltted. The hole posltion moves only f6T Y _ and drilling is performed only once

c82x

K-;

accordi.ng
ThE

to

G8l.

Fole posltlon moves only for X _ from O and the hole is drilled according to G82 with Z, R, and F speclfled ln @ and the drilling data P speclfled in @. Thls Ls repeated K times,

-83-

\)-/

/;\

G80
G85

Mq.
L LJ

Drilling is not performed. cept F) is cancelled.

All drilling data (ex-

RP

Ox
@ G89
X

Since drilling data is cancelled in O, Z arrd, R must be respeci.fied. Since F is the same as F specified j.n O, it can be onitted. p is noc required in this block, but it is stored. Performs drilling which differs only for the Z value with @ by moving the hole position only for
X.
Y

O colx

Performs drilling according to G89 by using the specified i1 O , R and P speeified in @, and specified @ as drilling daia.
The drl11j-ng mode and a1l drilling are deleted.

data (excepr

F)

d) Repeat of canned cycle When holes are repeatedly drilled at equal j-ntervals in the same canned cycle, the number of repeats can be specified by using address K. The maximum value of K is 9999. K is effective only for the specifled block.
(b<aurple)

machining position
Present

I
First
machining position

G81 X

K5F

_;

_ specifies the first drilling positi-on for an incremental -it f is specif ied for an absolute cornmand (c90), a hole is repeatedly drilled at the salne position. The canned cycle automatic deceleration time constant is automatically switched to the rapid traverse or feed tirne constant according to the feed used for each operation. At the end point; the tool decelerates and moves on to the next sequence. However, when return frorn the bottom of the hole to the R 1evel is performed at the rapid traverse rate with G98 (initial 1evel return) (for example, G8I), the tool does not decelerate, but inmediately returns to the initial level at the rapid traverse rate.
cofrand- (egi)]f
Each hole machining operation is detailed below.

-84-

I
E

1)

G73 (High-speed peck drilling

G73',(G98)

cycle)
G73 (G99)

3 i
:':

.e

Initial point

I
I

u_*,
Point R

iJ

I
I

+
i,

I I I I I I I
I

{}
:"t

.:

I
I

I
I I

I I
I

\l
6

Ir
Point Z

The

int"TmiiiEnr--Itad simplifies
c74 (Left-handed tapping cycle)
c74

retraction value to be set in "trip hole dr1lling, efficient machining is deep performed. Retraction is performed at the rapid traverse rate.
_

retraction is set by a paranelgr -_(No. 0531). Sinc-e rhe Z-axis direction ai;pbsaf'-?nd p'ermlts a very small

2)

(c98)

c74 (c99)

i ,/'"* tr@ *''.

| | ol

Spindle Rapid
traverE Feed

Point

O\
:
j

spindre

cw

!
E

At the bottom of the hole, the splndle rotates clockwise and left-handed tapping perforroed. (Note) During left-handed tapping speclfied in G74, rhe feed rare override ls i-gnored and the cycle does not stop until the end of the return operation, even if a feed hold is applied.
-6)-

3)

G76

(fine boring

cYcle)
G76

(G98)

G76 (c99)

"'*F1

)l

Spindle C\!

Initial
pornt

Point R

Point Z

Point Z

oss

Oriented Spindle Stop

Shift (rapid traverse)

l+

Shift amount

Since a spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the

spindl.e retracts after shifting i-n the direction opposite to the cutter direction, high precision and efficient boring is performed without scratching the workpiece surface. (Note) The shift value is specified by Q. The Q value is always a positive value. If a negative value is specified, the sign is ignored. For the shift directionr dny of +X, -X, *Y and -Y is selected by setting parameter (data No. 0002). The Q value is modal in the canned cycle. Since it is also used as the cut-in value for G73 and G83, specify it carefully.

-86-

/+)

G80 Canned cycle cancel The canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G81 to

GB9) is cancelled and normal operation is subsequently performed. The points R and Z are aI'so cancelled. (That is, R = 0 ar,d Z = 0 for the incremental command.) other drilling data is also cancelled.

5) c8l (drilling cycle' spot boring cycle)

\ U6I

n v______*?

'\ ./

G81 (c99)

Imtial
polnt

Point R

I
1t

:.Glr.-,

Point Z

ll ll o
---*Rapid

ll

Point Z
travelse
feed

6) c82 (drilling

cycle, counter boring cycle)

cbz icgal

-Cutting
G82 (G99)

___---*

Initial
?

pornt

ti lr
ll ll lr

Poirt R

Point R

,'Jr"{

'@

Point Z

Point Z

6--

D well

This is the same as G81. Dwell (specified by the P code) is performed at Eire bottom of the hole and the spindle is raised. Dwell at the bottom of the hole improves the hole depth precision in blind hole dri1ling.

i) c83 (Peck drilllng

cYcle)
c83 (c98) c83 (c99)

r: tl

v-----?
Tql -t
YI

Initial point

r: |./
ll
I

T-:ql

^TG83

cf It i li tt of-"-i-llT qT- ----iJ-T

At

lts

o>
a

At

r-

Point Z

The coromand above specifies the peck drilling cycle. a is the cut-i.n value each time and specify with an incremental value. When the second and subsequent cut-in is performed, rapid traverse- is switched to feed by d nn (or inch) before the position where cut-in is performed. The specified Q value

_;

must always be positive. If a negative value is specified, the FlEn*is lgnored. The d value is set by parameter (data No. 0532).

8) c84 (tapping cycle)

G84 (G98)
'

G84 (Ge9)

r:
V----+
I

R
o I

Ii/
ll

t:""' cw tG). spinare

po.,z

Initial

v____+o

I ,snittar" c* i@/ ll

li'-17 tl
O-- rni*.*

il Pottz $- rn"u," ".rn

tl
RaPid traverse

li

*'-'*

Feed

The spindie is reversed at the bottom of the hole and the tapping cycle ls
perrontreo

(Note) During tapping specified in G84, the feed rate override is ignglad,;tnd the cycle does.-not _s:9-p-_""!i!_,the-snd.-o-f the reTTrrfrEeTefi-on, .even lf feed hold is applled.

-88-

9) cB5 (boring cycle)

+-rr.

0____*"

..-9
I I I

il il ti

I
I

ll
This is the
hole.
same as C84,

I I

t o

but the spindle

i,s

not reversed at the bottom of .the

10) c86 (boring cycle)

r:
U

,
1l

snndtec$

',*

-9

I I
I

I
I

Rapid traverse
Feed

This ls the same as Ggl, but the spindle stops at the bottom .of the holes and is retracted at the rapid traverse rate.

: *
F

:.

3:

s a G: G.

G *-

_89_

1l)

G87 (boring cycle/back boring cycle)

G87 (G99)

/L--=6 =+ I / + tti Spindle CW t

,,=:

11 @s5)f=1

Initial point

vlt ^\Y:Yi

lr <-

+ |

!l

pointZ
Rated traverse

\Spindte CW

Point R

Shift

After the tool is positioned along the X and Y axes, the spindle stoPs at the orientation position. The spindle i-s then shifted in the direction opposite to the tool and is positioned at the botton of the hole (Point R) at the rapid traverse rate. At this position, the tool returns only for the shift value and the spindle rotates clockwise. Machining is performed up to the point Z in the positive direction of the Z axis. At this position, the splndle again stops at the orientation position and shifts in the direction opposiEe to the tool and the tool is withdrawn from the hole. After the tool returns to the initial point, it returns only for the shift value. The spindle rotates clockwise and the tool moves according to the command of the next b1ock. The-shift value and direct.ion are the same as those for G76. (Direction setti;g is common to both G76 and G87.)
L2)

c88 (boring cycle)

I
I

spindle cw

,..'
I I
Point R
I

SPindle CW

I
{

Poht z

'...-(D

spindle stop after drvell

o-

Spirdle stop after dwell

Rapid iraverse
Feed

Manual feed

-90-

#. Sr
E,5

t:) c89 (boring cycle)

G89 (G98)

c89 (c99)

9,
ll

i! rl
rl

Initial
I I

I
I

Ir I

tl tl

ll
rDl

Point R

Point R

Ir
PontZ
uweil

6',

II
(P)

Point Z

This is the

same

as G85, but dwe1l is performed at the bottorn of Ehe ho1e.

14) Rigid mode To set the rigid mode, specify M29s*J^**1 before command of tappi_ng cycle and reverse tapping cycle. By this operation, the spindle stops, the rigid mod.e Dr signal turns on, and the rigid mode j-s set for the. tapping cycle or reverse tapping cycle which i^ IS
l'129

is called a rigid tapping prepare auxiliary function. The rigid tapping Prepare auxiliary functj-on code can be changed to another M-code by setting the corresPonding value in the parameter 0256, However, 1429 is used fhroughout thi-s manual to make the description consistent. Specify GBO; to reset the rigid mode. The rigid mode can also be reset by the another canned cycle G-code or the group 01G code, that ls, the commands that clear the tapping cycle. The rigid mode DI signal is turned off by this rigid mode reset conmand. Irrhen the rigid tapping is ended by the rigid mode reset command, the spindle stops and the S-code goes to the state with S0 specified. The ri-gid mode can also be reset by the reset operation (reset button, external reset). However, note that the canned cycle mode is not reset bv the reset
operation.
I I I

commanded

next.

M2qS**XX.t
G7 4

XY
XY

/c84X-Y Z._R-P-F-K-

-] Rigid
mode

_____t

G80;

a) F /5***x is a screw b) 5T-*** nusg be lower Otherwise, p/S alarm for the alarm No.) c) F must be lower (piraureter No. 527) .

Precautions on

camrnand

lead.

than the value set in the parameter (No. 0617). occurs in the G f] f] block. (Refer to Section 5
Ehan the cutting feed rate upper Otherwise, P/S alarm (011) occurs.

limit

value

91

d)

Don't specify S and axis motion berween M29 and G ! !. Donr t specify 1429 during tapping cyc1e. p/S afarrn occurs in both
cases.
GBO.

e)

Donrt speeify S in the block immediately after rhe block of c | [

and

cycle specifications) (Note 1) The spindle must be rotated by the miscellaneous function (M code) before a canned cycle is specified. M?. Spindle CW
(NoEes on canned

n r-1ll t-]| v I
UU

....,

Co

rrec

Nfq.

Spindle stop

fl n

(Note 2) If the block contains X, Y, Z, or R data, drilling is perforned in canned cycle mode. If the block does not contain the X, Y, Z, and R

block.

Incorrect
)

(1.13

or

M4 must

be specif ied before this

data, drilling is not performed. However, when G04X ; is specified, drilling is nct performed even if X is soecified c00 x _;

G81X
E.
t

(Drilling is not perforned) (Dri11ing is not performed. Value F is updated.) v-. (Dri11ing is not performed. ) (Onfy the miscellaneous function is executed.) (Drilling is not performed. Drilling data P is not G04P _; changed by c04P. ) (Note 3) Specify drilling data Q, P in the block where drilling is performed. In other words, specify it in the block for which the X, Y, Z, or R, axis data is specified. This data is not stored as modal data if specified in a block where drilling is not performed. (Note 4) When the canned cycle (G74, GB4, G86) which performs the rotational control of the spindle is used and drilling rrrith a short distance between the hole .positions (X, Y) or the initial level to the R point Ievel is short, the spindle may not reach the normal rotation before it enters the cutting operation (-Z) of the ho1e. When this occurs, a time lag musc be provided by inserting a dwe11 commarld (G04) between each drilling operation. In this case, without specifying the number of repeats with K, prograrn as shovm be1ow.

-92-

Drvell is applied anC waits for the nornrrl spindle rotation.

*o{_-*,

til ltJ

Tl-

GOOM : GB6X Y Z F R : GOa P ]; is perforrned, but drilling -(Dwell XY: (Dwell is performed, but drilling G04 P ; XY: aais performed, but drilling -tlwell j -t

is not performed) is not performed) is not performed)

This may not have to be considered, depending on the machine tool. Refer to the machine tool builderts instrucEion manual (Note 5) As previously mentioned, a canned cycle may also be cancelled with G00 to G03 (group 0l G code). This cancel is performed when G00 to c03 is (i/ indicates 0 to 3, read if it is specified in the same block as G indicates the canned cycle code): EI' G X P F Y Z R K Q ; (The canned i-s perfo?rned.)"y"t. GG#XYZROPFK: y a*""-is perforred as specified (t"tovement alon[-the x in G//, R, P, Q and K ""d ignored and F is stored.) are (Note 6) When a miscellaneous function is specified in the same block as a canned cycle command, the M code and MF signals are sent at Ehe first positioning operati-on (operation l). The controlr waits for the finish signal (FIN) aE the end of positioning before starting the next drilling operation. When the number of repeats (K) is specified, the M code and MF signals are senL only the first time. (Note 7) The tool offset commands (G45 or G48) are ignored in canned cycle mode. (Note 8) When tool length offset (G43, G44, G49) is specified in canned cycle mode, offset is applied when the tool is positioned to poinE R (operation 2).
(Note
9)

Operator precautions a) Single block

When

F
+
ie =

a canned cycle is performed in the single block mode, the control stops at the end of operation l, 2, and 6, as shown in Fig. f3.l (a). Therefore, it must be started three times to dri1l one ho1e. The feed hold lamp lights at the end of operations I and 2. When the number of repeats is left at the end of operation 6, the system stops \,iith feed hold state, and when not, the system stops in stop state. D) feed nord When a feed hold is applied between operations 3 to 5 in canned cycle G74 or GB4, the feed hold lamp imrnediately lights, but the control continues to operate up to operation 6 and stops. If a feed hold is applied again during operation 6, it immediaEely stops. c) Override The feed rate override is assumed to be 100% during the operation of canned cycle G74 or G84.

-93-

Program exampl-e using

Reference point

tool length offset

and a canned eycle

ffi
ffi
ffi

r
F:-i

Ft*
[.:
I
I I :

F. r,'
F

3t:

T8
ffi

/T\ #10

il /t\ #9

,lYi +r' |
/+.
| |

t#6

E.:

t_
I

tr
H

l/1ru
/lll t

ll 7*19
13

Drilling of a 10 mm diameter hole Drilling of a 2O uun diameter hole Boring of a 95 rnn diameter hole (depth 50 rnrn)
F
F
Initial level

Retract position
Z

I
I

l-x

F
F.

F
E

/--s
_T__

fF=

tl rF=
T-T-

tl

Tll

Ti5

F
E

Fr__-__J

L_u

i-U Ln
-94-

-n -E
No.

Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.1l, *190.0 is set in offset +150.0 is set in offset No.3l.

l5,

and

F
ft

Program example

N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Coordinate setting at reference poinr N002 G90 G00 2250.0 T11 M6; Tool change Initial level, tool length offset N003 G43 ZO Hll; Spindle start N004 S30 M3; N005 G99 G8l X400.0 Y-350.0 2-153.0 R-97.0 Fl20; Positioning, then /11 drilling Positioning, then /i2 drilling and point R level return N006 Y-550.0; N007 G98 Y-750.0; Positioning, then //3 drilling and initial level return Positioning, then /14 drilling and point R'level return N008 G99 XI200.0; Positioning, then ii5 drilling and point R leve1 return N009 Y-550.0; Positioning, then //6 drilling and j-nitial 1eve1 return N010 G98 Y-350.0; NOil G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop N0l2 G49 2250.0 T15 M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change Initial level, tool length offset N013 G43 ZO H15; N014 S20 M3; Spindle start N0l5 c99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0 Z-130.0 R-97.0 P300 F70; Positioni-ng, then /i7 drilling, point R 1evel return Positioning, then /18 drilling, initial leve1 return N016 G98 Y-650.0; Positioning, then ii9 drilling, poJ.nt R level return N017 G99 X1050.0; Positioning, then /i10 dri11ing, initial level return N018 G98 Y-450.0; N0l9 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference point return, spindle stop N020 c49 2250.0 T3l M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change N02i c43 Z0 H31; Initial level, tool length offset N022 StO M3; Spindle start N023 cB5 c99 x800.0

Y-350.0 Z-t53.0 R47.0 F50; N024 G91 Y-200.0 K2; N025 G28 X0 Y0 M5; N026 G49 Z0;
N027 M0;
(Note) When the number hole.

Positioning, then /ll1 drilling, point R leve1 return Positioning then i/12, 13 drilling, point R 1eve1 return Reference point return, spindle stop Tool length offset cancel
Program stop

of repeats is specifled by K in G98 and G99, the tool returns to the initial level (G9B) or point R level (G99) from the first

13.2 External Motion Function (G80, G81)

Thi;
Thie

".ur*t"a--Lnables machine tool side from the

punching and cycles on the machine tool side.

an external motion function signal to be sent to CNC every time the positioning to IP is completed qi on:'l thi e _ ^o^^-.- i s used to perform operations such as clamplng, drilling,

G81

]P

the
and and

eionel ic sent every positioning until it is cancelled with a G80 and G -.; code in group 0i command. The external motion signal is not sent during execution of block that does not contain neither X nor Y. Parameter (No. 0011, MCF) determines whether G8l ls used as an external operation function or as a canned cycle.

; *. t
G:

5,

-95-

14. COMPENSATION

FUNCTION

14.1 Tool Length Offset (G43, c44, c49)

14.1.1 Tool length offset A By the command of G43 \ G44J9
.z

or
G43 r
trq 4

,r

The position of the terminal point of the movement command in the Z axis can be

shifted + or - by as much as the value set in the offset memory. This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during progranming and the actual tool length of the tool used when the work is performed into the offset memory. It is now possible to apply compensation without changing the program. Assign the offset direction with a G43 or G44, and designate the offset amount that has been set in the offseE memorv with an H
code.

l) Direction of offset C43 + side offset C44 side offset r- drrJ - LdDE of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount thag has rrr been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of tlne Z axis movement command. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes the terminal point. When the movement cornmagl for the Z axis was omitted, it is taken in the same
way as:
.1, 1 uaJ
^, tr.+

1 cqt znu
J vl LUvLL

- direction in G44. G43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the same group is programmed. 2) Assignment of offset amount ^EE^^+. ADDrErr ^^^i^- Vr!JCL number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the nffcar mamnr\7 is added to or subtracted froro the programmed command value for tlr.re Z axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 - H200. However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for cutter
compensati-on.

and the tool moves by the offset amount in the * direction in G43 and in the

The offset amount may be set in the offset memory through rhe CRT/I,IDI panel. TL^ ^t rrrs -^--^ lerr6e wr values that can be set as the offset amount is as follows:
mm

input
mm

'in^1' rrrLrr

i-^,,+ L f rrPu

Offset

amount

o - +999.999

0 - +99.9999 inch

The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. It iS irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset value. ?\ Cancelling tool length compensation To cancel the offset, couunand a G49 or assign offset H00. L^,rlren H00 or G49 is commanded, the cancelling acti-on is taken immediately.

-96-

:k;
F: 3j

&'

ry.'
Dr.

f,. 't
+
a-

.+

/\

Example

of tool length compensation (No. l, 2 and 3 borings)

";l

I i;

'-----vT-r -\{ i-- I v--

-\/ \t) a -

-,6 ,--'I -1
z\i\G \9 | -rr
t\

/t
I

+Y

1...
+z

= -4.0 (Offser amounr) N1c91 c00 xl20.0 Y80.0; N2 c43 2-32.0 HOl;
H01 N3 c01

e
/t\ ;\ \,
/?\ (,

z-2I.0

F1000;

N4 c04 P2000; N5 c00 22t.0; N6 X30.0 Z-50.0; N7 c01 Z-4t.0;

N8

GOO

Z4L.O;

N9 X50.0 Y30.0;

N10 cOt 2-25.0;

@ @ @

NIl c04 P2000;

N12 c00 257.0 H00;

rn K_v
rfa

Ni3 X-200.0 Y-60.0; Nl4 M02;

(Note 1) When the offset amount 1s changed due to a change of the offset number, the offset value changes to the new offset amount, the new offset amount is not added to the old offset amount. HOI ... Offset anounr 20.0 H02 ... Offset anount 30.0 c90 c43 2100.0 H0t; ... Z vtLLL go ro 120.0 c90 c43 2100.0 H02; ... Z witl go to 130.0
t t

-97-

14.1.2 Tool length offset

ci7) ^,^\ ci8l

GIgj
GITl

:i;l Y b'+'+.,
nrr\

or

]'
,

Glgj u'+'+J The end point of the move command in Z, Y, or X axj-s can be shifted + or - by as much as the value set i-n the offset memory by the above command. The offset axis is specified by Gl7, GI8, or Gl9, and offset direction is specified by G43 or G44. The offset, amount that has been set in the offset memory is designated by an H code. 1) Offset axis The axis being vertical to the plane specified by Gl 7 , GI8, or Gl 9 is designated as offset axis.
Plane selection
^11

Grsl

::ll H

Offset axis
Z axis
Y axis X axis

c18 c19

2) Direction of offset * side offsec G43 G44 - side offset In any case of absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount that has been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to, and in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of the specified axis movement coumand. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes the terminal point. When the movement command for the specified axis was omitted. 1t is taken in the same way as,

The tool offset irtwo or more axes can be commanded bv two or more blocks as shown below. (Exarnple) 0ffset 1 n X and Y axes. G19 G43 H Offset in X axis , GI8 G43 H Offset in Y axis (Offset in X and Y axes is , performed)

and it moves by the offset amount in the + direction in G43 and 1n the - direction in G44. G 43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another G code in the same group is programmed. Assignment of offset amount Assign offset number by H code. The offset amount that has been set in the offset memory is added to or subtracted from the programmed command value for the specified axis. The offset number can be assigned by H00 to H200. However, there are 200 offsets to be used jointly with the H codes used for cutter compensation. The offset amount rnay be set in the offset memory through The CRT/I'DI panel. The range of values t.hat can be set as the offset amount is as follows:

GI7'l c6?t Z0l crsi ."'++) Y0f :;;l GlgJ xo,J

-98-

mm

input
mm

inch input

0ffsec

amount

0 - +999.999

0 - +99.9999 inch
It is

4) Cancelling tool length compensation To cancel the offset, command a G49 or assign offset H00. In t.he case of offset in two or more axes, the offset in all axes is cancelled by G49 command and the offset in the axis specifled by plane selection G code is cancelled by H00 The canceLling action 1s taken immediately after G49 or H00 is comrnanded. (Note l) Tool length offset A and B can be selected by the parameter No. 0003
TT T-D

The offset value corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. impossible to set H00 to any other offset value.

(Note 2) In the case of the offset in three axes, if t.he of f set is cancelled by G49 code, the P/S alarm 015 is generated. Cancel the offset by usinq G49 and H00. 14.2 Cutter Compensation
B {G39

G42\

Thic ffinnfinn nolssits the tool to be offSet by the tool radius value given, that is, to pass through the offset path. Thls offset command is specified by a G-code function on CNC tape or on the MDI unit. The offset amount (tool radius previously be stored in the memory correspondingly to the H code value) shall via the MDI unit. This memory is called the Offset memory, and it can be stored maximum 200 kinds of offset value. Offset number is specified by the H code. H code is modal. The G functions related to this offset are as in Table 14.2.L.
a

14.2.1 Cutter compensation function

Table

14.2.'l

G functions related to cutter compensation

G code
c39
G40
L:4 I

Group
00

Frrnction

Corner offset circular interpolation

Cutter comDensatlon cancel

07

Cutter compensation left side Cutter compensation right side

G42

If G4L ox G42 is specified, the equipment. is said to be in the offset model if G40, in the cancel mode. When the power is turned on, it is in the cancel mode. These cutter comDensation modes are not affected by the non-modal G function
(c39). G4L and G42 belong to group 07. These codes are specified mixedly with C00, GOl, G02 and G03, and cooperate with each other to define a mode related to tool
movement (Offset). The program sha11 always terminate

al

i
;,

with the cancel

mode.

-99-

The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to max. 200 offsets. (However, they are 200 offsets in total for tool length offset and cutter compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the program, and shall be set via the CRT/l-DI. (For details, refer to item III I0. I. l). The range of values in which the offseE amount can be set is as followsl
mm

14.2.2 Offset amount (H codel

input

inch input

Offset

amount

0 - +999.999 mn

0 - +99.9999 inch

The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. irnpossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
14.2.3 Offset vector

Ir is

In Fig. 14.2.3, in order to cut a work shaped as lndicated by A with an R-radius too1, the path for the center of the tool to pass through must be the figure B which is separate R fron the figure A. The tool- being separate some distance like this, is called offset. That is, the figure B is the path which is offset R frorn the figure A. The offset vector is a 2-dimensional vector equivalent in size to a specified offset amount, and this value is kept stored in the control unit, and its direction is rewritten from moment to moment as the tool moves. This offset vector (cal1ed simply vector later) is, in order to know how much offset is to be made i-n the directirn of a tool, etc., created in the control unit, and is used to calculate a path offset by the tool radius from a given figure. This vector always belongs to and follows the tool as it advances, and it is very important in programming to know the behavior of the vector. As shown in Fig. L4.2.3 the vector is usually at right angles with Ehe direction in which tool advances, and faces toward the tool- center as seen from the work.

Fis. 14.2.3 Offset and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by Gl7, GIB and GI9, (C codes for,plane selection.) This plane is called the offset plane. For instance, when the XY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are carried out using (X, Y) in the program tape and the vector is eomputed. The coordinate values of an axis which is not in the offset plane are not subject to the offset, and the command values programmed is used as it is. In the sequel, what vector is created, what offset calculation is made, by an offset command, will be discussed on assumption that an XY plane is selected. This discussion applies also when another plane is selected. The offset vector is cleared by reset.

14.2.4 Plane selection and vector

-r00-

& & g:
$a

14.2.5 Corner offset circular interpolation (G39) Y_ The G39X _ ; or c39

I J ; in c0l, c\Z or c03 mode pernits eieiuiing offset circular iit.rpof"tion wittt the tool radius at a

eorner. A new vector is created to the left (G4i) or to the right (G42) looking toward (X, Y) from the end point at right angles therewith, and the tool moves along the arc from the polnt of the old vector toward that of the new vector. (X, Y) is expressed in a value according to the G90/G9L respectively. (I, J) 1s expressed in an increment.al value from the end point.
center path

,Tool

(X, Y) or (I, J) Gr_ ___

New

1T
ord

New vector

*(*,")
or (r. J)

vecto/

tl

I
(a)
In case of G41 Fig. 14.2.5

t\
\\
(b)

,'ha- Tool

center path

Old vector

Fig. 14.2.5

In case of G42

This command can be given in offset mode, that is, only when G4l or G42 has Whether the arc is to turn clockwise or already been specified. counterclockwise, is defined by G4I or G42, respectlvely. This command is not moda1, and executes circular interpolation, whatever the G function of group 01 nay be. The G function of group 01 remains even through this conmand is specified.
The command G40X
14.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (G40)

;:
=i

i:

Y ; in G00 or G01 specifies each axis to move straightly from tnlpo-int o}-tn. old vector on the start point toward the end point in G01 mode and eaeh axis to move at rapid traverse in G00 mode. This command speeifies the eguipment to enter from the cutter compensation mode into the cancel mode.
Tool center path

:J

*-

Old vector Start point

{g':

s
::
+

i I

When

only

moves

G4O; is specified, and X Y is not specified, the tool the old vector amount in the opp-E3Fe diffion.

* *
ri

*.

* t

-rot-

14.2.7 Cutter compensation left (G41) I) Case of c00, cOl

ThecommandG4lX

(I, J) on the end point, and the tool center moves toward the point of the new vector from that of the o1d vector on the start point. (I, J) is expressed in an incremental value from the end point, and is significant only as a direction, and its amount is arbitrary.
center

specifies a

new vG-r t6JF"."iFat@i-t

anffi with the direction

of

patl
New vector

\
Start

point

(I , J)

programmed path

In case the old vector is zero, this command specifies the equipment to enter from the cancel mode into the cutter compensation mode. At this time, the offset number is specified bv the H code.
New vector

Start poinl

Tool center path

(x
Programmed path

*o(r.J)

or J is omitted, (I, J) is assumed to be the same as (X, Y). That is, Y the conrnand G4 I X ; specifies a new vector at right angles with (x, Y) to be creatEdlIII
New vector

rY Yl

Programmed path

Old

vector

Start point

If, however, G00 is specified, each axis moves independently at. the rapid traverse rate. 2) Case of c02, G03

'1'

The commald
;

specifies a tteffitorE-be cEl-ea to the left looking toward the direction in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end point, and the tool center to move along t,he arc advancing from the point of the old vector on the arc starE point toward that of the new vector. This is, however, established on assumption the old vector is created correctly. The offset vector is created toward the arc center or opposite direction agalnst the arc eenter.

G02(c03)X

-102-

*: f e

Tool center path

vector
New vector

(X,Y)
Tool center path

(X,Y)
Progammed path
R

Old vector

Start point

14.2.8 Cutter compensation right (G42)

G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offsec ro the right of work looking toward the direction i.n which the tool advanees. That is, the vector created by G42 is toward the direction opposite to that created by G41. Except for this, Ehe o.ffset method is quite the same as in the case of G4L. 1) Case of G00, c01

G42XYIJ

P$,J)
I
Programmed path

x
I

/t/'-

New vectot

t
$

G42X

New vector

Start point Tool center path

Old vector

In the case of Eraverse rate.

G00,

however, each axis

moves

independently at the rapid

-r03-

z) Case

of c02,

G03

G42X
Programmed path

(x,Y)
New vector New vector

Tool center path

Start point

-_\R
Old vector

Programmed path

Tool center path

Example 14.2.8(a)

Y axis
I
I

-xoi,

Unit:

mm

c91 c17 c41 c01 X15.00{y25.00 Ft80 H05; c39 135.00 J15.00; x35.00 Yl5.00; G39 r25.00 J-20.00; x25 .00 Y-20.00; c39 15.00 J-25.00; G03 X25.00 Y-20.50 R25.50; (Ineremental programming)
Example 14.2.8(b)
Tool center path
Programmed path

Y axis

**,

Unit:

mm

c9r c17 c41 c01 x50.00 y50.00 F150 H06;

c02 x96.57 Y-40.00 R56.57; G01 Y-40.00; (Incremental- prograraming)

14.2.9 General notes on offset

1) Specification of the offset number The offset 4umber ls specified by the H code, and can be specified anywhere before the flrst ehange from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode. Also, once speclfled, the offset number does not need to be specified agaLn, unless lt has to be changed'

-104-

2) Change

4)

from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode A move command at the time of change from the offset cancel mode to the cutter compensation mode, must be positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used. Change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode A move command at the time of change from the cutter compensation mode to the offset cancel mode, must be positioning (G00) or li-near interpolation (G0l). The circular interpolation (G02, G03) cannot be used. Switch between cutter compensation left and cutter compensation right The offset direction is switched from left to right, or frorn right to left generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be s\,/itched not through it only i-n positioning (G00) or linear interpolarion (G0l). In this case, the tool path is as showl be1ow.

Tool center
path
New vector

/' / -/ -(X, Y)

Newvector 2$'t)

Tool center path

(Generally not straight) Old vector

\
Programmed path

vector

c41 GOOG42X Y
5)
Change

GOlG41X
Switch of offset direction

c42

Y
I

The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in the offset caneel mode' but can be changed in the offset mode only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01).
Tool center pa*r
Programmed path New vector
Nerv vector

of the offset

amount

Programmed path

,/

,t6
GO1X _Y_H05;

(H0s irdicates new

offset number)

Old vector OId vector

Change of the offset amount

6) Positive/negative offset amount. and tool center path If the offset amount is made negative (-), it is equal that G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the work it will pass around the inside thereof, and vise versa. D^l1^,.i-^ : ^ rur-tuwru6 rrgiur shows one example. Generally speaking, the offset amount ehall lro nrnol4mmed to be posi_tive (+). When a tool path is programmed as in (a) if the offset amount is made negative (-), the tool center moves as in ' (b), and vise versa.

-105-

(a) Tool center pa*t

(b) Tool center path

Tool center path made in accordance with positive or negative value of tool offset

For a cornered figure (involved in corner circular interpolation) in general, the offset amount naturally cannot be made negative (-) to cut the inside. In order to cut the inside corner of a cornered figure, an arc with an apPropriate radius must be lnserted there to provide smooth cutting. 7) If the tool length offset is commanded during cutter compensation, the offset amount of cutter compensation is also regarded to have been changed.
14.2,10 Programexample

axis

t
I
I

X axis

Unit: mm

Zero point

c9l cr7 coo c4r

Y2o.oo rio8;

@ G}I Z-25.00

(H08 is a tool offset number, and the cutter radius value should be stored in the memory corresponding to this number).

F100;

o Y40.00 F250;
/:\ \) x40.00
@ @ c39 r40 .00
J.20

.00

Y20.00;

G39 r40.00;

@ @ @ @

c02 x40.00 Y-40.00 R40.00; x-20.00 Y-20.00 R20.00; c01 x-60.00; G00 Z-25.00; c40 Y-20.00 Ia02;

-106-

;'. ., .'

14.3 Cutter

Compensation C (G40

G42l

In the figure below, in order to cut a workpiece indicated as A with an R-radius tool, the path for the center of the tool must be the B which is separated R distance from the A. The tool being separated some distance like this is called offset. By the cutter compensation function, the tool path being separated some distance (name1y, offset) is computed. Therefore, the workpiece shape ls programmed with the cutter compensation node by a programmer, and in machining, if the cutter radius (offset amounts) is measured and set to Ehe CNC, the tool path is offset (path B) regardless of the
program.

14.3.1 Cutter compensation function

Offset and Vector

14.3.2 Offset amount (H code)

The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to 200 offsets. (However, they are 200 offsets in total with tool length compensation.) The offset amount depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the program, and is set via the CRT/MDI. . The range of values in which the offset amount can be set is as follows;
mm

input
rnn

inch input 0 - +99.9999 inch

Offset

amount

0 - +999.999

The offset amount corresponding to offset No. 00 or H00 always means 0. impossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.
14.3.3 Offset vector

Ir is

The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the amount assigned by H code. It is calculated inside the control unit, and its dj-rection is up-dated in accordance with the progress of Ehe tool in each block. This offset vector (hereinafter called veetor) is produced insi.de the control unit in order to find out how much the tool motion should be offset, and is used to comPute a path offset from the programmed path by the tool radius. The offset vector is deleted by reset. This vector always follows the tool as its progress, and it is very important, when making a program, to understand the siatus oi the vector. Read Ehe following description carefully to understand how the vector is generated.

_, 1^l

6ut usitg (X, Y) )t (I, J) in the program tape and rhe vector is comThe coordinate values of an axis not in the offset plane are not subject lf.lEli;"'offset, and the command values for that axis on the program tape are used
aa theY are. in stmuttaneous
comPensated.
3

"na Eion is carried out in the plane determined by Gl7, Glg and Gl9, igo; plane selection.) This plane is ca1led the offset plane. For Iwhen the xY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are

axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is

The offset Plane must be changed dur:ing the offset cancel mode. If it is performed during the offset mode, an alarm (No. 37) is displayed and the machine is s topped.

G code
Gl7
GI8 GI9

Offset plane
X-Y plane Z-X plane Y-Z plane

14.3.5 G40, G41 and G42

Using G40' G4l and G42, the deletion and generation of cutter compensation vectors is commanded. They are commanded simultaneously with G00, G01, GOz or G03 to define a mode qhich determines the amount and direction of offsec vectors, and the direction of tool motion.
G code
c40

Function

Cutter compensation cancel Cutter compensation left

G42

Cutter compensation right

A G4l or G42
command

command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and a G40 causes the equipment to enter the cancel node. The offset procedure, for example, is explained in the next figure. The block Q) is called the start-up. In this block, the offset cancel mode is changed to the offset mode (G41). At the end point of thls block, the tool center is translated by the cutter radius in the direction being vertlcal to the next block path (from Pl to P2). The cutter conopensation value ls specified by H07, namely the offset nurbber is 7, and G41 means the cutter compens"li-otr 1eft. -> After being startiup, when the workpiece shape is programmed as PI + p2 P8 + p9 + Pl, the cutter compensation is performed automatically.

In the block (! , the cutter returns to the start_ point by corornanding G40 (of f set cancel) . At the end point of the block @-, the cutter center is translated vertically to the prograrnmed path (from P9 to pl). At the end of the program, the G40 (offset cancel) must be commanded.

-108-

program of cutter compensation C Example of

cr (700,
P4(s00,11s0)

1300)

Ps(900,11s0)

@
(-l
c3
s0

c2 (1sso , 1sso)

izso , soo)P3

(4so eoo) '

(1

ls0 , s50)

r0\ \:/

(^/

"l

Unit: mm

/'(\
Y a-ris

a7\ tol
art poin

rn Nl c90 c17 c00 c41 H07 X250.0 \v /l \:/ N2 cOl Y900.0 F150;

G92 XO YO ZO;

Y550.0

\v /:\
\)

o /;\

N3 X450.0;

In advance, the offset amount must be set with the offset number 07.

N4 c03 X500.0 Yr1s0.0 R650.0; N5 c02 X900.0 R-250.0;

@ N6 c03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0; (, N7 cOi xl150.0; @ N8 Y550.0;

@ NlO x 250.0 Y550.0; @ Nll c00 G40 x0 Y0;

N9 X700.0 Y650.0;

109

*"i$fj

14.3.6 Details of cutter

In thls item, the details of the cutter compensation C ls explained. i) Cancel mode At the beginning when power is applied the control is ln the cancel mode. In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center coincides wlth the progralnmed path. The cancel mode (c40) should programmed before the end of a program. I{hen the program ends in the offset mode, positioning cannot be rnade to terninal point of the program, and the tool position will be separated f the terminal position by the vector value. 2) Start up In the cancel mode, when a block which sacisfies a1I of the following co tions is executed, the equipment enters the offset mode, this is called start up bloek. a) G4I or G42 has been commanded. Or, it has already been commandedr a11d centrol enters the G4l or G42 mode. b) The offset number for cutter compensation 1s not H00. c) A nrove in any of the axes (I, J, K are excluded) in the offset plane been cornmanded, and its commanded move is not 0. In the start up block, arc commands (G02' G03) are not a1lowed, as the al (No. 3i) is generated and the tool stops. At start up, two blocks are After the first block is read and executed, the next block enters the cu compensation buffer (which cannot be indicated). In the ueantime, in the case of single block mode, two blocks are read the mrrchine stops after the first block execution. There.qfter,2 blocks are read in advance normally, lnside the CNC, there three blocks, the block under execution, and the next two blocks which entered into buffcr. (\'ote\ The meanlng of trinner-sidet' and of ttouter-sidet' encountered later as follows: An angle of intersection created by two bloclcs of move commands, referred to as ttinner-sidett, when over 180o and as ttouter sidett ' 0" to 180", as measured at the workpiece side.

compensation C

Inner side

Workpiece side

Progtammed

180"

Ou:er .side
hoglammed path

0"S a < 180"

-110-

a)

When

going around an inside corner (180"

s0)

i) Linear + Linear

ii) Linear + Arc

Programmed path

path

/t

Hereafter, in the figures 1 S means a single block stop poinr { L indicates a straight line. t C indicates an arc.

\\

.\
Programmed path

Tool center path

b) When the tool

goes around the outside of (90" Sct5IB0"). Tool path in start up or cancel has two types ed by paraneter SUPM (Data No. 0016).

a
d

corner
rnd
R.

dL

an obtuse angle

and

they are select-

Type A i) Linear

->

Linear

fi) Linear + Arc

Programmed paih

Tool center path

Tool center path
Programmed parh

Type

i) Linear + Linear

ii) Linear -) Arc

II
Programmed

;3/.[_
/\.
'r

/ ll

(Note) The intersection is the point where two offset paths calculated by continuous two blocks are intersected.

Programmed path

In tersectlon

Tool center path

III

c)

Llhen going around

the outside of
+

an

acute angle (a < 90.)

Ilp" A i) Linear

ii) Iinear -) Arc

Programmed path

Tool center path

Type B i) Linear + Linear

.,

Progr'immed paih

Tool center path

When

the tool goes around the outside linear + linear at less than I degree, compensation is performed as follows. an

acuce angle

Tool center path

t. \

anl r \ \ Less than

Programmed path

deg.

LTz

*
E. {'

i
3)

In offset mode In the offset mode, offset ls performed correctly, if non-positioning commands such as auxiliary functions or dwell would not be prograrutred in two or more successive blocks. Otherwise overcuttlng or undercutting wi1l,occur. Offset plane must not be changed during offset mode. Otherwise an alaru is displaved and the tool stoDs.
When

a)

going around the inside (a > 180')

i) Linear + Linear

ii) Linear + Arc

Programmed path

L Tool center ,,S Intersecting ,/ / L Point

path

,r lr,r"rr..rir)r\ t t, / LPont \ ,'-

Programmedpath

iii)

Arc + Linear

iv) Arc -) Arc

Programmed path

/S
lntcrcaa+in-

Tool center path

point

Ct..

Plogrammed

fc
I
I

Tool center path

v) Straight line to straight line in the case in which it goes around at a narror{ angle (less than 1o) and the offset vector becames abnorrnally
1arge.

Progranrmed

Also in case of arc to straight 1ine, stralght the reader should infer 1n the same procedure.

to arc,

- lI3 -

b)

when going around an

outside corner at an obtuse angle (90 < c < Ig0o) ii) Linear + Arc

i) Linear + Linear

r{.____

Tool center path

i-i t"l
polnt

Intersecting Tool )enter

path

iii)

Arc + Linear

iv) Arc + Arc

lntr$ecting

pornt
lqteriecting

T,

point

Tool mer path

\ C"

ho$ammed path

'Iooi center path

-IT4-

- - -.r+!'.,r

,:+siF..
'_' ;1a: ' lil: rl'-;i

g
g

c)

L4ren

going an outside corner ac an acute angle i)Linear + Li.near ii) Linear + Arc

Programmed path

Tool center path

t.r,

Programmed path

Tool center path

iii)

Arc + Linear

iv) Arc + Arc

Programmed path

Tool center path

d) Exceptional cases i) The end point of arc is not oq the arc If there is an arc, lead-in line as shown, assume an imaginary circle which passes through the arc end point and is concen-trical to the arc, and draw vectors for comp ensa t ion , on th e as s ump t i-on that the cutter compensation has been carried out for the imaginary circle. As a result, a path for the cutter center, is established, which is differenr from the path compensa t ed according to the program that regards the arc lead-in l-ine as a straight 1ine. Similarly consider a case of
2Ta-A?.

Imaginary

-\

Programmed
Lead

End oi arc

arc\
,

\ \ \,i

\l

u.S

/
{^o'

,.\'

- ll5 -

ii')

There is no inner intersecting point

\\rhen the

off \EL

Al alarm occutes .n an the tool stops nd

amount is lar
When the offsel amo small Progranrmed parh

fn. centel .of t he arc B

The center

of the arc A

In regard to the left figure, the intersecting point of the arcs is present on the offset path if the offset value is smaIl, but it may disappear if the offset value is quite large. In this case, alarm (No. 33) occurs at the end point of the preceding block, and Ehe tool will stop. Concerning the left figure, there is an intersecting point P of Ehe offset paths for the arcs A and B, if the offset value is smal1, but the intersecting point cannot be found if the offset value is quite 1arge.

iii)

The center of the arc is identical with the start Doint or end Doint If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end point, Alarm No. 38 is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end point of the preceding block.

(G4I
F

rnode)

An alarm is generated and the tool stoPs

Tool center path

N5 c01 X1000; N6 GO2 XIOOO IO JO; N7 c03 Y-1000 J-1000;

Programmed

4) Offset cancel In the offset mode, vrhen a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the equipment enters the cutter compensation cancel mode, and the action of this block is ca11ed the offset cancel. a) G40 has been commanded. b) H00 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter compensation. Lhen performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not available. -'If a circular arc is commanded, an alarm (No. 34) is generated and the tool stops. In the offset cancel, the control executes the instructions in that block and the block in the cutter compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and stoPS. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed without reading the next block. Then the control is in the cancel mode, and norma11y, the btock to be executed. next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is not read into the buffer for cutter compensation-

116

a)

When

going around an inside corner (o > 180")

i) Linear + I.inear
Programmed path

ii) Arc + Linear

o,l0

/(\
Programmed

path

Tool center
path

b)

When

going around an outside corner at an obtuse angle (90" <0<

Ig0')

Type A i) Linear + Linear

ii) Arc + Linear

Programmed path

(o{ 2)

/L

Tool center path

L

path

Programmed

Tool center path

Type B i) Linear + Linear

ii) Arc + Linear

o40

Programmed path

/L Programmed

path
,f

,/

..t C

Intersection

Tool center path

- I17 -

c)

When

going around

outside corner at an acute angle (q < 90,) i) Linear + Linear ii) Arc -> Linear
an

path

Programmed Tooi center

path

path

i) Linear

Linear

ii) Arc

->

Linear

Programmed

path

Tool center path

d) L4ren

the tool goes around the outside linear less than I degree, compensation is performed + li.near at an acute angle as fo11ows.

Tool celrter path

Programmed
parJr

Less than 1 deg.

- ll8 -

.:i'
))
Change

F.
F

of offset dlrection in the offset mode The offset direction is decided by G codes (c41 and G42) for cutter pensation and the sign of offset amount as follows.
(inolo --t=\ nf nffcor
amOUnt

com-

G code
G4l
\r4 L

Left side offset Right side offset

Right side offset Left side offset in the offset mode. block and the block conception of inside The offset amount in

fn a special case, the offset direction may be changed However, the change is not available i-n the start up following it. When the offset direction is changed, the and outside disappears to become common for all cases. the following example i-s assumed to be positive. i) Linear + Lj-near ii) Linear + Arc

/
Programmed path Programmed path

Tool center
Path

iii)

Arc + J,inear

iv) Arc + Arc

Tool center path

- il9 -

v) Llhen an intersection

is not obtained if offset is normally

performed._
and

intersection with the offset Path is not required, the vector normal to block B Ls created at the start point of block B. i) Linear + Linear
G42, if

Programmed

path

Tool center path

Programmed path

Tool center

Path c'

ii) Linear + Arc

L --'

Programmed path

-120-

iii)

Arc + Arc

Block A (G42)

(G42)

rl
w./

/\
An arc whose end

point is not on
the alc.

Progtammed path

^-

TooI center path

\
Center

iv)

the length of tool center path becomes more than a circle because of cutter comDensation @Stnopossibi1ityofgeneratingtheabovesituation. However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J, and K the above situation can oecur.
When
a

Programmed path

Tool center

path

(G42)

/
/D
/

N5 c02 c9l x5000 Y-7000; N6 c4l c02 J-5000; N7 G42 G01 X5000 Y7000:

Y
L'

p\

I
\

compensation is not performed with more than one

In this case, the cutter

circle circumference: an arc is formed from Pl to P2 as shown. (Depending on the circumstances, an alarm may be displayed due ttlnterference to the Check" described 1ater. ) To execute a circle with more than one ci.rcumf erence, the circle must be specified in segments.

121

6)

rf the commands below are speclfied in the offset mode, a temporary offset cancel is actuated and thereafter the system will restore the offset mode automatically. Refer to 14.3.6(4) Offser cancel and 14.3.6(2) Starr-up, for detalls of these
operati-ons.

Tennporary

offset

cancel

a)

G2B

automatic return to reference point If G28 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point, and the offset mode will be automaticallv restored after the reference point is reached. If the offset vector remains at the reference point return in such a case as the current position being the intermediate point, the CNC makes it to zero for each axis of which reference point return was completed.
G

28

lntermediate point

-5

(G42 G00)

s
Reference point
F

b) G29 automatic return from reference point It G29 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point r ard the offset mode will be restored automatically fron the subsequent block.
When cornmanded inmrediately

after

G28

lntermediate poinl

-t
(G42 G00)

Reference point

-122-

$
A When cornmanded

not irnmediately after

G28

lntermediate point

7)

Cutter compensation G code in the offset mode The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block, irrespective of rnachining on inner or outer wall, by commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42) in the offset mode,
independently. If this code is specified in a clrcular command, correct circular motion will not be obtained. When the direction of offset is expected to reverse by the command of cutter compensation G code (G41, G42), refer to (5). Linear + Linear

G42 mode)
f

+--I

Arc + Linear

(G42 mode)

-ts ,/c

-L23-

8) Comrand for tenporary cancelling offset vector During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programrning) is conrnanded, the offset vector js teuporarlly cancelled and thereafter offset node is automaticallY restored. In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from the intersectirrg point to the coumanded point where offseE vector 1s canceled. Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the intersecting point.
Tool center path
S (Intersection)
S

(In!ersection)

t-4' -/\

'

/-\

-t\

I\

)'-

/
/t

--r

\ssl-

G92 block N7

(G4l

rnode)

N5 G9I G01 X 30O Y7000; N6 X-3000 Y6000; N7 G92 X 1000 Y2000; N8 G90 G01 X 4000 Y8000;

(lJote)

SS

indicates the polnt where the tool stops twlce ln the single block

mode.

9) A block without tool ncvement The followlng blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks , the tool will not move even if cutter radius.compensatlon is effected.
.. o.. O M05; S2I; A G04 XiO000; . .... () @ clo Pol xloo; O (cI7) Z,2000; ..
M code outpur S code output Dr.'ell
Move cornmand

@ Geo; @ cel XO;

offset varue serring not includea in the offset plane.

C code only
Move

No movement

distance is zero.

Move distance

ls zero.

-r24-

a) When commanded

at start-up If a block withouL tool novenent is vector is not produced.

commanded

at start-up, the offset

G40 c91

N6 X1000.0 Y1000.0; N7 G4I XO; N8 Y-1000.0; N9 Yi000.0 x-:1000.0;

b) When cornmanded in offset

When

a single block without tool movement is commanded ln the offset mode, vector and tool center path are the same as those when the block is the not connanded. (Refer to item (3) Offset node) This block is executed at the single block stop point.

mode

N6 c91 X100.0 Y200.0; N7 c04 X100.0; N8 Xl00.0;

-t25-

However, when the move distance is zeto, even if the block is commanded singly, tool motion becomes the same as that when more than one block of without tool movement are commanded, which will be described subsequently.

N6 c91 xl000 Y2000; N7 XO;

NB XlOOO;

Two blocks without tool movement should not be commanded consecutively. If comrnanded, a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block, so over-

cutting may result.

N7 Nq.. (Note 4)
N9

N6 c91 x100.0 Y200.0 N7 S21; N8 G04 X1.0; N9 Xl00.0;

\
\

Blocks N7 and N8

/N6

are executed here.

(Note)

SSS means

that tool stops three times by single block operation.

-126-

&,
P.

+' t!fi

*Y.

c)

I^lhen commanded together with offset cancel When a block without tool movement is comrnanded

together with an offset cancel' a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a direction normal to tool motion in the earlier b1ock, the Vector is cancelled in the next move command.
N7

N6 c91 Xr00.0 Y100.0; N7 G4O; N8 X100-0 Y0;

l0) When a block contains aG40andI

plane

included in the offset the

i)

When

of the previous block ls G4L or G42 In this case the CNC assumes that the movement frorn the end point of previous block in the direction of (I, J or K) has been commanded.
the
mode
E (x,y)
Tool comes here
by G40 block. (I, J)

Center of tool goes to X in (G42) block.

Programmed path

(G 42) N1 tu4z mode) N2 b.+ ul\ ^.J.,

-t27-

In this case, note that the CNC obtalns an intersection of the tool irrespective of whether inner or outer wal1 machinlng ls specified. _/ _/
Tool center path

path

-. x-/ a+c\

--/ --/

--\ -

---tt\

mmed path

-\ -\
-

CAz
_r_ (l,J)

When

an i.ntersection is not obtainabJ-e, the tool comes to the posltion normal to the previous block at the end of the previous b1ock.

x
-_
0, J)

Tool center path

Programmed path r

128

11) When the length of the tool center path becomes more than a clrcle.

,1,/ :r
Programmed

,P2

(G41)

N5 c01 G91 X10000; N6 c02 J-6000; N7 c40 c01 x5000 Y5000 r_100J_lo0;

In the above case' the tool center path does not go around a circle but moves only from point PI to p2 along an arc. According to under some ci-rcumstance, an alarm may be generated by the interference check described 1ater. (if lt is ddsired to move a tool around a circle, a circle must be conrnanded with partitions.) ll) Corner
movement When two or more

vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement. If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isnrt performed and the latter vector is ignored.

This vector is ignored,

avy<av limit

if avx< aV limit,

-129-

If AVx<AVlimit and AVycAVlimit, the latter vector is ignored. The AVIimit is set in advance by parameter No. 0557, CRCDL. If Ehese vectors do not coi-ncide, a move is generated to turn around the corner. This move belongs to the latter block.
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the feed rate is equal to that in block N7 If the block N7 is G00 mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse rate, while if it is G01, G02, G03, the tool is moved at the cutting feed rate.

However, if

the path of the next block is semicircular or Eore, the function is not performed. The reason for thia j-s as follows:

above

/-,

P2

P3,P4

P5

I
I
I

N4

c4l c91 cOi

\
\

N5 N6 N7
N8

x1500 Y2000; x1500 Y2000; G02 J-6000; c01 xl500 Y-2000; G40 Xl500 Y-2000;

)
Tool
center path
l\/

\-/ \--

If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as f ollor+s: P0 + Pl + P2 + P3 + (Circ1e) + P4 + P5 +P6+P7 But if the dlstance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the polnt ignored.. Therefore, the tool path is as follows: P0 + Pl -> P2 + P4 + P5 + P6 -> P7 Nanely, circle cutting by the block N6 1s ignored.

P3

1C

-130-

-s;

:,

* i:'
j

12) Interference check Tool overcutting is called rinterferencet. The interference check funetion checks for tool overcutting i-n advance. However, all interference can not be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if overcutting does not occur. a) Reference conditions for interference The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path. (From 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths). rn addition to the above condition, the angle between the sLart point and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point on the prograffred path in ci-rcular rnachining. (More than lB0 degrees)

t::

Example

g'
,:i

of condition O

:
;?;

Programmed path The directions of these two paths are quite different

(180" to each other)

Tool nose center path

Programmed path

The dtections of these two paths ale

quite different (180" to each other)

1f

Example

of condition @ /

Tool center

oath ,/- -

Programmed Path

t.'
/
f

,,/

,/"ou

\
I

Center

(c41) N5 c01 c9l x8000 Y2000 HOi; N6 c02 X3200 Y-r600 r-2000 J-8000 H02; N7 cOl x2000 Y-5000; (Offset value corresponding to H01 : r = 2000) -1 (Offset value corresponding to H02 : t2 - 6000)

In the above example, the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant. But after cutter compensation, the arc is placed in the four quadrants. b) Correction of interference in advance O Removal of the vector causing the interference When cutter radj-us compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors Vl, YZ, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5 , V6, V7 and V6 between B and C are produced, the nearest veccors are checked first. If interference occurs, they are ignored. But if the vectors to be i-gnored Cue to interference are the last vectors at the corner, they cbnnot be ignored. Interference check between vectors V6 and Vc -- Interfere V4 and V5 are ignored
Check

between V3 and
Check

VU

Interference

Ignored

between V2 and V7 Check between V 1 and Ve

Interference Ignored Interfere Cannot be lgnored If, whl1e checking, a vector wlth no interference is detected, subsequent vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular movement, a Ij-near movement 1s produced if the vectors are interfered. -

-132-

Exarnp

le

I)

The tool Floves li-nearlv

c--/
Tool nose center path

Programmed

path

\
I

I \
I

I
V4, V5 : Interference

If the tool is stopped by single block operation at block A, the tool center moves to Vr.
(Example 2)

I
\ I or O2

, V6: Interference Y2,Y1 Interference V1 , Vs: No interfere

V3

The tool moves linearly as fo11 ows: T'ooI path: V r +VZ+V7+ Vg

L
v6,

v2

su,
L
!l

vl

Tool nose
center path

I'if---

\C

Programmed path

If the tool is stopped by single block operatj.on at block A, the tool center moves to Va. Then puttiig the operatlon into start moves t.he tool to \,7_ or V^. /d

or o:

V4, V5 : Interference V3, V6 : Interference V2, V7 : No interfere

-133-

@ If the interference occurs after correction O , the tool is

stopped

wi-th an alarm. If the interference occurs after correction O or if there are only one pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors interfere, the alarm (No.41) is displayed and the tool is stopped jmmediately after execution of the preceding block. (If the block is executed by the single block operatj-on, the tool is stopped at the end of the block.)
Tool nose center path
Stopped

v2, v5

Interference Interference

v1,v6:

After ignoring vectors V, and V5 because of interference, interference also occurs between vectors V1 and V6. The alarm is displayed and the tool is stopped. c) interference is supposed though there is no actual interference Several examples will be given. (!) Depression which is smaller than the offset value
When
Tool center path
Programmed path Stop

There'is no actual interference, but since the di-rection programmed in block B is opposite to that of the path after cutter compensatlon the tool stops and an alarm is displayed.

-134-

O Groove which is smaller than the offset value

Programme<1

path

Tool center path

Stop I

Like O, l3) Input

command

the direction is reverse in block fron

MDI

B.

Compensation is not performed for conmands input from the MDI. However, when automatic operation using the NC tape composed of absolute commands is temporarily stopped by the single block function, l'{DI operation

is performed, then automatic operation starts agains, the tool path is as follows: In this case, the vectors at the start point of the next block are translated and the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks. Therefore, from point Pc, compensation is accurately performed.
V.
D2

"t, (

Programmed path in absolute command

NTDI

operaLlon

VB

\'

/ ;\
When points Po, Po and P" are programmed j-n an absolute command, the tool is stopped by thb single block function after executing the block from P^ to Pp and the tool is moved by MDI operation. Vectors V-, and V-. ^are t?anslated to V'-, and V'-^ and offset vectors are recal3illated fBi the vectors V^, ana 4,t^ betweenbflock p--p^ and p^-p*. t"lrr"" lr3"tto, Vo, However, is not scalucutatef, afain, compensation is accurately performed from po{n-t P".
I
4

) Manual operat i.on For manual operation during the cutter compensatlon, refer to item III-4.5.

135

15) If the tool leneth compensation is executed during cutter compensation, the compensatlon amJunt of the cutter is regarded to be changed. 16) General precautions on offset a) Offset value command The offset value is cornmanded by a H code which specifies an offset value a H code rematns valld until another H code is commanded or cleared. In addltion to specifying the offset value for cutter compensation, the H code ls also used to command offset value for tool offset. b) Changing the offset value In general, the offset value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when changing tools. If the offset value is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point of the block is calculated for the new offset
value.
Calculated from offset value in block 6.

number. Once eomnanded,

Calculated from offset value in block 7.

c) Positive/negative offset amount and tool center path If the offset amount is negative (-), distribution is made for a figure in which G4Irs and G42's are all replaced with each other on the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool eenter is passing around the outsj-de of the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vise versa. The figure below shows one example. Generally,'the offset amount is programmed to be positive (+). When a tool path is programned as in (a), if the offset amount is rnade negative (-), the tool center moves as j-n (b), and rrise versa. Consequently, the same tape permits cutting both male and female shapes, and any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset amount. (applicable if start-up and cancel is A type).

Tool center path

(a)

Tool center path

136

d) Overcutting by cutter compensation i) Machining an inside corner at a radius smaller than the cutter radius hthen the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because the inner offsetting of the cutter: will result in overcdttings, an alarm is generated and the NC stops at the start of the block. In single block operation, the overcutting is generated because the tool is stopped after the block execution.
Tool center path An alarm is Senerated and the operation stops

Programmed path

An alarm is generated and the operation stops here in single block operation.

'

If the NC does not stop, overcuttlng occurs.

ii) Machining a groove smaller than the tool radius Since the cutter compensation forces the path of the center of the tool to move in the reverse of the prograromed direction, overcutting will result. In this case an alarm is generated and the NC dtops at the start of the block.
An alarm is generated and the operation stops. Tool center path

Programmed

{ Z*\

Overcu!ring if the operation rvould not stop.

137

iii)

When machining a step smaller than the tool radius When machlning of the step is commanded by circular

machlning in the a step smaller than the tool radius, the case of a program containing path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to the programmed dj-rection. In this case, the first vector is ignored, and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block operation is stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued. If the step is of linear, no alarru wil1.be generated and cut correctly. However uncut part will remain.
Linear movemenl

End point of single biock

Tool center path

Circular

-.

Prosrammed path

CEntor of circular machining

The fust vector is ignored

An overcutting will result if the first vector is not isnored

iv) Ttre start up and the movement in Z axts on the cutter compensation C It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axi-s after the cutter compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining. In the case above, if it is desired to divide the uotj-on along the Z axi-s into rapid trave.rse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below. Nl c9t c00 c41 x50000 Y50000 Hl; N3 G01 2-30000 Fi; N6 Yi00000 F2; In the program example above, when executing block Nl, blocks N3 and N6 are also entered into the buffer storager arrd by the relationship amon thero the correct compensati-on is performed as in the figure to the rieht.

N6: Offset mode

Move command

in Z axis.

Start up

138

Then, if the block N3 (move comrnand in Z axis) is divided as follows:

Z-25000i --r N5 cOl 2-5000 Fl:r N6 Y100000 F2;

Nl c9l c00 c4l

N3

x50000 Y50000

Hl;

N3, N5; lvlove command in Z ads.

As there are two move command blocks not included in the selected plane and the block N6 cannot be entered into the buffer storage, the tool center path is calculated by the information of NI in the fi-gure above. That is, the offset vector is not calculated in start up and the overcutting may result. The above example should be modified as follow: The move command in the same direction as that of the move command after the motion in Z axis should be programmsd.

N2 Y10000; N3 2-25000; N5 cOl 2-5000 FI; N6 Yi00000 F2;

Nl c9l c00 c41 x50000 Y40000 Hl;

N6

(The direction of the move command N2 is the same as that of N6.) /N2

N3, N5 lvlove command in Z axts

When

executing the block Nl, the blocks N2 and N3 are entered into the buffer storage and the correct comDensation is performed by the relationship between Nl and N2.

- rJ'-{ -

14.4

Changing of Tool Offset Amount (programmable data input) (G10)

The offsec amount, which are used in tool length offset and cutter compensation, can be set by G10 command in programming. The command format. is as follows.

G1OP R t P: OffseT number R: 0ffset amount The offset amount is absolute or incremental depending on the G90 or respectively
14.5
Scaling (G50, c51)

G9l

Scaling is commanded to figures specified by machining programs. To specify scaling, effectuate it by setting parameter (No.36 SCLX, Y, Z) first. G51r J _K_P_; IrJ,F-S.afing cettter x,v,Z coordinate values (Specify the absolute posirion) : Scale factor (Least input increment: 0.00I or 0.00001 .... P parameter selection (No. 36 SCR)) By this command, the subsequent move command is scaled by the scale factor specified by P, starting with the point specified by I,J,K as the scaling This scaling mode is cancelled by G50. G50 : Scaling mode cancel command G51 : Scaling mode com:nand The scale factor can be specified within the following range: 0.0000f - 9.99999 or 0S0L * 999.999 times
center.

Pa

P3

\.Po'

l-T

Pe'

,/ P!'

l,'t1t: -l-

P2'- --

Pl - P4 : Figures of machining program PIr - P4': Figures after scaling : Scaling center Po If P is not specified, the scaling factor preset by the I{DI & CRT is applicable. If I,J,K are omitted, the G51 comrnand point serves as the scaling center. This scaling is not applicable to the offset quantities such as cutter compensation amount, tool length compensati-on amount, tool offset amount, and others.

-140-

---\
l12 scalng

L)l

(Note l) Specify G51 in an independent block. Cancel G5I by G50 without fail after scaling. (Note 2) The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. (Note 3) If a setting value is employed as a scale factor r^rithout specifying P, the setting value at G5l courmand time is employed as the scale factor, and a change of this value by another command, if anlr is noL
(Note 4) Whether the scaling function is effective or not, it can be set by a n'rtmprer for each axis. The scaling function always becomes effecti-ve for the clrcular radius coruoand R in the G5l mode, irrespecti-ve of these parameters. (Note 5) Scaling is not effective for manual operation, but is effeeLive for the tape, memory, or MDI operations. (Note 6) Scaling is not applicable to the followi-ng movement in case of the canned cycle Z-axj-s movement * Cutting depth Q and return relief of deep hole cycle (G83, G73). x X, Y shift quantity in fine boring (c76) and back boring (c87). (Note 7) Specify G27, G28, G29, c30, and G92 in G50 mode wiChout fail. (Note 8) If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In chis a case, the block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the cutter movement by cutter compensation C.

effective.

14.6 Coordinate System Rotation (c68, Gj9]_. A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the posi-tions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling

it after rotation.

- l4i -

Center

of
t

rotation

,i

14.6.1 Command format

i

Icl7 ] cl8 |
I

c68

RR

G19.'

o,B: Designate two axes among X, Y and Z (coordinate value of rotational center) rhar correspond to cI7, Gl8 and Gf9. (G90/G9l mode 1s effective.)

Angle of rotation ('r+rr is the CCW direction. Comnand with an absolute value. An incremental value can also be comnanded by the setting of a parameter. (No. 4i RIN))

After this command is specified, the subsequent cosmands are rotated by the angle specified with R around the point designated with cr and B. Command the angle of rotatj.on within the range of -360,000<R5360,000 in 0.001 deg.
increment.

,/
(a,0)

-r42-

The rotation plane depends on the plane (G17, Gl8, Gl9) selected when G68 is designated. Gl7, GIB or Gl9 is not required to be designated in the same block as G6B. When o and B are omitted, the position where G68 is commanded is Set as the

center of rotation. As for the incremental commands up to an absolute position command' following a G68 cornmand, it is assumed that the rotary center were not specified (the point where G68 was commanded is the center of rotation). When R is omitted, the value set to parameter is regarded as the angle. The coordinate system rotatj-on is cancelled by G69; G69 may be designated in the same block as the other commands. Tool offset, such as cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or tool offset, is performed after t.he coordinate sysLem is rotated fo? the command
p

As for the incremental position commands designated between the G68 block and a block with an absolute comnand; it is regarded that the center of rotation is not designated (that is, it is regarded that the point where G68 was designated is the center of rotation). (Note l) When a value with a decimal point is designated for R, the position of the decimal point becomes the unit of angle. (Note 2) If a movement command is specified with G69, the following lncremental command does not move the tool in the incremental motion.

rogram.

Nl c92 X-5000 Y-5000 G69 G17; N2 c68 G90 X7000 Y3000 R60.000; N3 c90 GOl x0 Y0 F200; N4 G91 X10000; N5 G02 Y10000 R10000; N6 G03 X-10000 r-5000 J-5000; N7 G0r Y-10000; N8 c69 c90 x-5000 Y-5000 M02;
(c9r xs000 Y5000)

(Exarnple I )

a/-\

.\ \

comnd s desrtsnated in the \l blk rm parenlhcsis)

Tuol palh whn rhe incremnrdt

Origimlly programm.d
tool palh

60. \ {
a

Center

0f

.otalion

(7000,3000)

(-5000, -5000)

(Note 3)

Do not change the plane selection in the G19 in the G69.mode).

G68

mode (command

Gl7, G18 or

-I43-

14.6.2 Relationship to other functions l) Cutter ComPensation C

IE is possible to specify G68 and G69 wit.hin cutter compensation rotation plane must coi.ncide with the plane of cutter comDensation C.
(Exarnple 2)
H01

C.

The

NI G92 XO YO G69 GOI; N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 Fi000 N3 G68 R-30000; N4 G9 I X2000; N5 G03 Y1000 r-1000 J500: N6 G01 X-2000; N7 Y-1000; N8 c69 G40 c90 X0 Y0 M30:

\*)r-

hogrammed shape before coordinate s),stem rotation

Programmed shape after coordinate system rotation

(0, 0)

Tool path

2) Coordinate system rotation in the scaling mode. If a coordinate system rotation corrmand is executed in the scaling mode (G51 mode), the coordinate value (cl,B) of the rotat.ion center will also be scaled, but not the rotation angle (R). When a move eouuland is issued, the scaling i e annl i od first and then the coordinates are rotated. Therefore, the commands must be specified in the order shown below for programming.
(Example

G5f . .. . . .; (Scaling node) a:t . . . ...; (Coordinate system rotation

G69 ......; G50 ......;

1)

0N)

A coordinate'system rotation command (G68) should not be issued in cutter comPensation C mode (G41, G42) on scaling mode (G51). The coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior to setting the cutter
compensation C mode.

(.Coordinate system rotation QFf): (Scaling mode cancel)

-r44-

i@

Repetitive Commands It is possible to store one Program as a subprogram and recall the subprogram by changing the angIe. (Exaurple 4) Setting the parameter RIN (No. 4I ) to I
G92 X0 Y0 G69 Gi7: GOl F200 H01; M98 P2100; I"198 P072200 L7; c00 c90 x0 Y0 M30;

o o

2200 G68 X0 Y0 c9o M98 P2r00;

MqQ.

c9l

R45.0;

.r42 Y-10.0; x7.07r Y-7.071;

x4 G40; M99;

2100 G90 c01 c42 x0 Y-10.0;

(
I I

When offset is not applied

i
I

I {

wn.n offset
awned

is

\l

\_-_

l___ f-

_ _J
S$b-!loSB$r

-146-

(Example 2)
(

Cut

G51

c68

ter compensation cancel) ..; (Scaling mode) ..; (Coordinate system rotation
..; (Cutter compensation
C)

0N)

uar

(Example 3)
G92XOYO;

c5 1X3000Y1500P500;

c68x2000Y I 000R45000 ;

c01x4000Y1000. Y1000; X-2000;

Y-i000;
x2000;
When only coordinate system rotation is applied.

When scaling and coordinate system rotation are applied.

z'B' -r7- - -1

When

only scaling

/l

is applied.

' A cutting

program

-145-

Actual motion Motion without skip signal Skip signal is

input here.

\\4' t'

(3oo,1oo)

\t-//

\// L<:- - u',

1"
200 300

100

The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom nacro because they are stored in the custom mrcro system variable #5061 to /15064, as follows: #5061 . X axis coordinate value 1t5062 . Y axis coordlnate value 115063 . Z axls coordinate value 115064 4th axis coordinate value The skip functlon can be used when the movement distance is not known as in the standard-size feed in grinders. Refer to the manualg published by the machine tool bullder. (Note 1) If G3t comnand is issued while cutter compensation C is applied, an alarm is displayed. Cancel the cutter compensation with the G40 command before the G31 comrnand is specified. (Note 2) Dry run, override and automatlc acceleration/deceleration are in_ effective for skip function. However, it is possible to make effective them by parameter setting (SKPF, parameter No. 0015)

-r4B-

15. MEASUREMENT

FUNCTTONS

15.1 Skip Function (G31)

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move followi-ng the G3 I command' like GOl. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, executlon of the comrnand is interrupted and the next block is executed. G3l is a one-shot command and is effective onJ-y in the block in which it is specified. The motion after the input of the skip signal depends on whether the next block is an incremental or absolute command. l) When the next block is an incremental command: The motj.on in the next block is performed incrementally from the position at which it is interrupted by the skip signal. (Example) C31C9lXI00.0F100; Y 50.0;
Actuai motion
Skip signal is
5

\
0.0

Motion without
skip signal

\ \ .\
-=\2)
When

100.0

--

the next bl-ock is an absolute command with only one axis specified: The specified axis moves to the commanded position. The axi-s which was not specified remains at the position when the skip signal is input.

(Example)

c31c90X200.0Fr00;
YI

00.0;

Actual motion Motion without

skip signal

Skip signal is

irput

here.

A
3)

6x = zoo.or

lihen the next block The tool moves to

signal is input.

is an absolute cornmand with t\^'o axes specif ied: the posiEion specified by next block even if the skip

(lixample)

C31C90X200.0F100;

x300.0Y100.0;

-r47-

16,1 Custom Macro

Command

The custom macro command is the command to call the custom macro body. Custom macro or subprogram can be called by the following commands.
16.1.1 M98 (Sinsle call)
Command format is as follows: M98P_; t- Called macro body program No. With the above command, the macro body specified by P is called
16.1

.2

Subprogram call using M code

The subprogram can be called using M code set in parameter. N G X ... M98 P<pt; iiitEa-of commanding as above , the same operat ion can be commanded using

following command: N_G_X_... M.mt;

The correspondence of M code <m> which calls subplogram and the program number <P> (09001 - 09003) of the called subprogram shall be set by paramerers (tlo. 0240 UMMCDI - No . 0242 UMI'ICD3) ffi5p"Cram caff , E -maiirnuru of 3 among M03 - I'1255, except M30 and t"l code which does not buffer (parameter No. 0035,'0036 MBUFI, MBUF2) can be used.

(Note l) Sirnilarly to M98, signal MF and I"1 code are not output. (Note 2) Delivery of argument is not possible. (Note 3) Subprogram call M code used in the subprogram which is called by M or code does not,executes subprogram call but as an ordinal M code.
16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code

When parameter (No. 0040 TMCR) is set beforehand, subprogram (09000) can be called using T code. T<t>; N G X the above command resul-ts in the same operation of command of the following 2 blocks

i/I49 = <t> i N_G_X_... M9B P9000; The T code <t> is stored in a

common

variable

/10149_as

j1"_:ryIsrrl.

(Note 1) It is not possible to command with a same block as that. of subprogram call using I'1 code. (Note 2) Subprogram call T code used in the subprogram which is called by M or T code does not executds subprogram call but as an ordinal T code.
16.1.4 G66 (Modal call) The command format

is as follows: G66P : L Called.macro body program No. The above command selects the macr.o modal call mode for NC. In other words, every time each block subsequent to the above command is executed, the macro designated by P is called. A1so, an argument can be designated by a block subsequent Eo the above command. For this argument, refer to 16.1.3. The macro modal call mode is cancelted by the command below.
G67 ;

r50 -

s
re,.

Gt Gr

&:.

* g
1
g il
ti

&

16.

CUSTOM MACRO A

li

i
:

Machine tools builders are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fai1. If. it is necessary to replace part program. storage memory due to a failure, FANUC sert'icemen or end users operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of custom ruacro for the purp-o-56-oTElTiring the trouble immedi-

Request

ately.

A function covering a group of instructions is stored in menory lhe same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instructiori, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca11ed a "custom macro bodytl_ and the representativeinstructionisca11eda''cuStom'""'ffiThecustommacro body may simply be cal1ed a macro. And the custom nacro instruction may be ca11ed a macro eall command.

Custom macro body

A group of instructions for a certain function Custom macro

instruction

Programmers need only remember representative macrg i.pslructiong to remember all the instructions in a euEEom-EEEi6-6oty

without having

The three most significant points on custom macros are that [yg!Se? can be used in the custom macro body, .$!'Ei?ITin$ can be performed on-EiiaLles and actual values\ can be asslgned to cne vartabl-es in custom macro instructions.
'1

-r49-

Table 16.1.5

(b)

correspondence between group number of G code and variabre numbers

Variable

(value)
#8030
#803
1

number

Variable number (flag)

#8130
#8131

G code group
number
00
01

Remarks

One shot and others

G00, G0l, c02, c03

#8032
#803
3

tt8t32
#8133 #8135 #8136 #8137

o2 03 05 06
o7

Gl7, cl8, cig

c90,
G94

c9

l
I
G42

#8035
#803 6

c20,

G2

#8037

G40, G4l,

#8038
#8039

#8i38
#8

08
09

G43, G44, c4g

r39

c73, G74, G76, c80 coR

vtvt

c8g

#8040
#804 r

#8 140 "?18141 #8 145

t0 l1 I5
16

coa v//
G67

G66,

#8045
#

G6I, G62, c63,

G64

8046

tt8L46

c68,

c69

//8I00rs variables are flags to indicaEe whetehr an argument has been speci f ied or not every call. These variables are I if an argument is specified, and 0 if no argumenE is specified. #8000's variables show a specified value, if an argument is specified. However, they become as specified below, j-f no argument is specified. i) Reference in NC command The address itself is neglected. 2) Reference in macro command (G65 block) This value is undefined. Use it after confirming 8f00's numbers. If plural G codes are specified a arguments in the same block, a value is input to variables in each group as shovrn in Table L6.1 .2 (b). In rhis case, /18010 is the smallest group nuuber out of the numbers specified at a time. No value can institute into //8100's and 8000f s variables.

-L52-

16.1.5 Argument specification

An argument means an actual value given to a variable employed in a salled dll ^-^"ment can be specified at all addresses employable'in this CNC V. llldLr ^- 4! 5u except for 0. The format of argument specification is f-he same as in normal CNC command. The llmitation at each address as a normal CNC command, such as decimal point, sign, maximum number of digits, etc., is also applicable t.o the format. The following table indicates the correspondence between argument specification addresses and variable numbers.
Table 16.1.5

(a)

Correspondence between addresses and variable numbers

Variable

(value)
#8004 #800s #8006
#800
9

number

Vari.able

(flag)

number

Address

Remarks

#8104 #8105
#8 106 #8 109

I
J
K
-f

#80 r0

#8i10

#80rr
#8013

#8llt
#81

H
M

l3

#80r4 #80r6
#8017 #8018 #8019 #8020 {t8024
#80 25
tf

#8r14

N P

#8rl6
#81i7

a
R J

#8IIB

#8rl9
#8120

tt8l24
#8125
I

8026

{t8r26

- l5l -

variable_s according to variab1enumbers,andtheiram;,,d"h'...i:.'"romeachother. 1) Common variable //100 to ilt49 and //SO0 to ii 531 Common variables are cornmon to main programs and each macro called from these main programs. That is, i/i in a macro is equal to /li in another macro. Common variables //L00 co--_il_I49 are cleared when the power is turned off, and reset to "0" jusr after por6Fw66 turned on. Cbninon v-arial tEslSOO ro rI53l

16.22 Kind of variables Variables are sort.ed into

conmon vari-ab1es

and system

2)

"jg_,r'-otunchanged 51'stem variable

clea:9{,= _:ygl

_ i{"."._poy_er

is turned ,- of f ,-- and - thJii--vaiu-eF:-ena-in

The system variables are defined as variables whose appllcati-ons remain f ixed a) Tool of f set amounr #L - 1199, IIZOOO - llZ2OO The offset amount can be known by reading system variable //l to ll99 values for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by substituting them into system variables llL to 1199. Among these offset numbers I to 99, those which are not used as offset amounts can be treated as hold tvDe cofftron variables (#500 to ilS:t) . The system variables il200L to ll22O0 correspond to the tool offset numbers 1 to 200. They can be read and substituted as the same as /ll to 1199. b) Inrerface inpur signals i/1000 to /ll0I5, llLo3z Interface input signals can be known, by reading system variables //1000 to #1015 for reading interface signals.

zrs 2r4
DI
UI

2r2

2rr
1

r1o 29 28

2l

I5 UI14 UI13 UI I2 UI1

":

26 25 24 23 22 2l

zo
UIC

UIlO UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1

#1014
#1015
#

| #ror2 I #roio liiroos llrrooo lltrdoa l+rooz llrr 000

10

1013

i/1009

#L007

/l

l00s

1003

/i1001

Input signal
Contact closed Contact opened

Variable value
I
0

By readi.ng system variable lt1032, all the lnput signals can be read at
once.

tt'L032: L /t(i000
i=0

l5

-f t)

^1 x I

(Note I) No .r"1rl. can be substituted into system bariables #1000 to llL032. (Note 2) System variables #1000 ro i/tOt5 can be <iisplayed by diagnostic
f

uncti-on.

(Note 3)

DGNOS No. i10 UlO to Ul7 DGNOS No. lll Ul8 to Ul5 System variables i/1000 to llLO32 can be used only when FANUC is comblned.

PMC

-154-

s s
3

16.2 Custom Macro

Body

]n the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary ala command variables, calculation, and branch command can be used. The custom macro body starts from the program No. which irunediately follows 0 and ends at M99.
De^^e^.. r rl^

c6EoT-.

, ,
t

rvSr4ur

rrv. command

Calculation
CNC command

G90c00x/r 10 r

using variables

c65H82

Branch

command

End of custom Eacro

Fig.

16.2 Construction of the custom macro body

Instead of dj,rectly providing a numeral to an address in the macro, a variable can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying the calculated variable when calling t,he macro or when executj-ng the macro itself. Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable numbers. I ) How te-exol:ss--lari-ablesVariables are exPressed by variable numbers following /l as shor^m below. ll_i (i = l, 2, 3, 4 ...... ) (Exarnple) !!5, tJQ-- #199:2) How to quote variables A numeral following an address can be repraced by a variable. Assume that <Address> //i or <Address> - /li is programmed, and it means that the variable value or its complement serves as the tommand value of the address. (Example) . "G it139" indicates that G3 was commanded when /1130 = 3. When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as tt//ill00tt, for example, but expressed astt//9100". That is, rrgtr rr.*t to ttlftj indicates the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be rep laced. (Example) If*/i 10O--=_._!_Q5- and /1105 = -500 , "Xi/9100" indicates that X-500 r^ras commanded, and "X-/19100" indicaCes that X500 \4ras conrmandJ.".
g"

16.2.1 Variables

: ]'i-fl?3:: il:i::::: :H: ;:;,;';":"Hilfi":n;il"11'li,J I'i,0.

(Note 1) No variable can be quoted at address 0 and N. Neither 0#100 nor N//120 can be programured. (trtote 2) IT-Is not possible to command a value exceeding the maxi-mum comnand value set in each address. When #30 = I20, M/130 has exceeded the maximum command value.

3)

How

to display and set a variable value Tt is possible to display a variable value on the variable value to a variable by MDI key.

CRT screen

or set

-r53-

e) Number

of necessary parts, number of machined parts It is possible to read and substitute the number of necessary parts number of machined parts by use of system variables.
Kind
Number Number System

and

variable

of machined parts of necessarv parts

#390I
#3902

(Note l) Do not substitute a negative value.

f

) I'Iodel inf ormation /f400L - #4120 It is possible to know the current values of modal information (modal command given ti11 irnmediately preceding block) by reading values of system variables #4001 - li4120.
Variab Ies
#400 r
114002

Model information
G code (group 01) G code (group 02) G code (group 03)

#4003 #4022 tt4L09

lf

G code (group 22)

F code

tt4rt4
{t4IL5 tt4t19 ll4t20

4t13

M code
Sequence No. Program No. S code

T code

(Note l) The unit will be the one being used when .the

command

is given.

C) Position information //5001 to /15083 The position information can be known by reading system variables ii500I to #5083. The unit of position information is.0.001 mm in metric input and 0.000I inch in inch input.

156

c) Interf ace ourpur signals //t tOO to /l lll5, #t132, #I133 A value can be substituted into system variables sending the interface signals. 2r5 214 213 212 2Lt I 10
DO

#1100

to
.,

#1 1

l5 for
2"

29

28 27 26 25 24

23

2' 2'

1n

J0l5 uo14 uol

u0l2

u01

uol0 uo9 uo8 u07 u06 u05 u04 uo3 u02

/11106

u01 uoc

llLLr4 | llrrl2 I /t1110 l/tl108 I

I)

I /il104 |

#1102

#rro

I 109

{trro7

#1 105

#r103

111101

Variable value
I
0

Output signal Contact closed Contact

opened

By substituting
(uoo

to u0l5)
i5
r-v

can

value into system variable Itll32, all be sent out. at once.

^I

output signals

I|LL3Z

= L

#(1100 -tr-)xz

32 interface signals

(UO100

to

U0131) can be sent out by

#II33 at

once.

#ii33= r il(24*vi) Vi = 0 when Vl = 1 when

(Note 4) If
i=0

^n JU

-z3L UO (100+i) is LOW. UO (100+i) is HIGH.

any other number than '0' or ' I ' is subsEituted into system variables #1100 to /ll1l5, it is treated as 'l'. (Note 5) It is possible to read the values of sysrem variables /llt00 ro /lll33. (Note 6) System variables /lll00 to #1115 and #1133 can be displayed by diagnostic function. DGNOS No. 126 UOO to UO7 No. 127 U08 to UOl5 No. 196 U0100 ro u0107 No. 197 u0108 ro U0ll5 No. I98 U0116 ro U0123 No. 199 UOl24 ro UOl3l (Note 7) System variables #1f00 to llll3z can be used only when FANUC PMC is
combined.

d) Clock inf ormation /i 301I , ll3Ol2 It is possible to know the year,

Kind

reading system variables #3011, ll30L2.

mont.h, day, hour, minute, and second by

System

variable

Year, Month,

Day

#3011

Hour, Minute,
(Example)
When i-t is May 20, #30 I 2 = 19870520,

Second
PM

#3Alz

It30L2

L98l 4: 17 5"

16r705

-155-

(Meaning) i/i
(Exanple) p/l100
P#

ttj @ #k I
Operator Q#l0l
Q/i l0 r Q-100

Speci f ied
Rii 102

Hm)
#

100

i00

RI5
R/i 102

#r00
# 100
#
/r

P# IOO

P# 100 P# 100

Qr 20

R-50

= //l0I = //l0l = -100

100

Q-# l0

= 120

+ + +
+

R/i i 02

I00

= -/1101

en -JU

t02 I5 l!r02
tno2

(Note
(Examp

I)

le)

No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meanlng of each vaLue is the same as that designated without decimal point when quoted in each address.

(Note 2)

(Example) 100 (Note 3) H code

/1100 = i0 X#100 0.01 mm (metric input) Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree, and the least input increment is 1/1000 degree.

specified by G65 does not affect any selection of offset

Table of macro i nstru ctions

0,1"

amount

G code

H code
H0l
Def

Function

Definition

inition,

substitution

lti = lli
ili=#j+i/k li]-=#J-ilk lli=lll+tlk
ili=i/jx/lk
{t1

tl tl tt
tt

HO2

Addition
Sub

H03 H04 H05

tract ion

Produc

s
sum

ni.,i^i^-,,' uLv L>LwLL2/

HII
il

Logical

= tij .0R. #k
/lk

Hl2
HI3
H21

Logical product
Exclusive
Snrrrro 0R

#i = #j.AND. Iti = llj

tl

.xOR. #k

rnnl-

ll

H22

Absolute value
Remainder

#i = {tE //i = I/rjl

#i = #j - rrunc (//j///k) x trunc: Discard fractions
less than I
(#j)
llk

tl

H23

tl

H24
H25

Conversion from BCD to binarl Converslon from binarv to

Cornbined
BCD

/li = BrN (//j)

/ii =
BDC

tl

nzo
H27

divislon
.^-L-'*^r uurlutLlcu

multiplic

aLion /

lli=(#ix#j)+/ik

tl tl

Combined square
>Yuot g

root I
root
2

*i = frjz-a16r
tli='fr42-1;pz

H28

-158-

Q\/cl-pm rl ev-"'

variab
#500

1e

Position information
Rl ne k end nni nl- n^q'i f i nn nf

Re:d'ino

while moving
Possible

Cutter and tool length compensation

Not considered. Position of tool nose (program command position)

115002

X axis (ABSI0) Block end point position of

Y awi q

#500

Block end point position of Block end point position of 4th axis
X axis coordinate position Y axis coordinate posi.tion Impossible

#5004
It502L tf 5022

Considered.
roForanoo

#5023 {t5024
{t5041

Z axis coordinate position 4th axis coordinate oosition

Present position of X axis
(ABS0r)
I frnnccl h I a

Position of tool
nninl-

(Machine coordinate) Considered.

raFaranaa

tt5042

#5043 {ts044
#506

Present position of Y axis Present position of Z axis Present position of 4th axis

Position of tool
nnini

as ABSOLUTE indication at POS)

(Same

#5062
#50 63
tf

Skip signal position of X axis Skip signal position of Y axis Skip si-gnal position of Skip signal position of 4th axis
Value of cutter compensation Value of tool length compensation (X axis) Value of tool length compensation (Y axis) Value of tool length compensation (Z axis)

Possible

Considered.
roforanno

Position of tool
nninf

5064

#508 0

Possible

#508

{t5082
#508
3

(Note !.)

It is not possible to substitute any value into system variabtes /lS00l ro /15083. (Note o\ When the skip signal doesn't turn on, the skip signal position is the end point of that block.

16.2.3 Macro instructions (G65)

Generar I orm
G65 Hm e/i
m

tti ltj
Itk

Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99. Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded. Variable name I to be operated. A constant is also acceptable. Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.

i qili

n/ik;

-r57-

h) Exclusive 0R /fi G6s H13

(Ex.)

= //j .xoR. #k P#i Q/ij Rifk; c65 Hl3 P#l0l Q/i102 R#103; (#I0l = ttroT .XOR. #i03)

r) Square root /ii = /#j G65 H21 P/l j. Q//j; (Ex.) c6s H21 p/ll0r Q/i102; (#l0r = /#ro2)

j)

nUsolute value

/i

(Ex.)

G65 H22 P/li Q/13; G65 H22 p//10r Q//102;

i = l#j

(//l0r = l+rozl

k) Remainder lli- = ltj - trunc (/lj///k) x i/k trunc: Discard fractions less than (Ex.)
c6s H23 P/li Q/ij Rilk;
G65 H23 P//101 Q//102 R//103;
BCD to binary /li = G65 H24 P/lr. Q/li; G65 H24 p//l0l Q//102; (iil0r

(//r0r = llt02 - rrunc(lfLOzlltrO3) x ilr03)

BIN (//j)

f) Conversion from (Ex.)

= BrN (#102))

m) Conversion from binary to

(Ex.)

G65 H25

BCD i/i = BCD (#j) P#i Q#j; c65 H2s p//r01 Q//r02; (/ir0r = BCD (#102))

n) Conbined multiplication/division (/li x i/j) + //k G6s H26 e;[i Qili ni/k; (Ex.) G65 H26 p/lr0l Q#r02 R/i103; (//10r = (#101 x /i102) +
o) combined square roor I lli = {iliT +-tl? G65 H27 P#i Q/ij R#k; (Ex. ) G65 H27 pill0l Q#102 R/i 103; (#101
n) rt

/1103)

= ltltoZ2 +

1lLO32

Combined square root 2 11i = /142 - 1S1rz G65 H2B r/ll Q//5 ni/k; (Ex. ) c65 H28 p//r01 Q//102 R//103; (/i 101

= /llL022 - llLnz
SrN (#103))

1l

Sine //i = //j . SIN (i/k) (degree unir) c65 H3r P#i q/li n/lk; (Ex.) G65 H31 p//r0r Q//r02 R//r03; (#r0L = llro2
COS (#k) (degree unit) G65 H32 e//i qi/t n//r; c65 H32 p//r01 Q/i 102 R//103; (/lr0r

r) Cosine lti = lli

(Ex.
J)

= llr02 cos

(#103) )

Tangent

(Ex.) (rx.;

TAN (//k) (degree unit) cps H33 P//r Q/ii Ri/k; G65 H33 p/ii0r Q#102 R//103; (//l0r =

lli = ltj

#ro2

TAN (#103))

r) Arctangenr lti = ATAN (#j/#k) (degree unit) c65 H34 p//i Q/lj n/lk; (0"</li<360")
c65 H34 p/ll0l Q//102 R#103;
(Note

(#l0r = ArAN (llLozllll03))

(Note (Note

1) Angle in (q) to (t) must be indicated by degree and the least f rrPu L increment is l/1000 degree. 2) If .either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation was not indicated, i-ts value is calculated as t0t. 3) A11 figures below decimal point are truncated if each arithmetic result
includes decimal point.

160

._."_*4$ry

U LUUE

H code
H3l
H32
H33

Function
Sine
Co

Definitlon
lli = ,'J lli
tli = ,,J ll:
.

c65
tr

crN /ilr,\ ultl \rrN/

nnc (il1,\ vvu vN/,

sine

It tl tl

Tangent

ttj-

= ltj .

TAN (//k)

H34
H80

Arctangent

/ii = ArAN (tti/#k)

G0T0n

Unconditional divergence

H8i
tl
!l

Conditional divereence Conditional divergence

IF i/j = llk, rF

GO TO n

H82
H83 H84 H85 H86 H99

rF #j + lfk, Go TO n

Conditional di.vergence 3 Conditional divergence Conditional divergence Conditional divergence

P/S alarm occurrence
command
4 5
6

//j > {lk, Go ro n

GO TO n

It

rF #j < llk, G0 TO n

rF /ij z /ik,

IF /ij : /lk,

G0 T0 n
n

P/S alarrn number 500 + oecurrence

I) Variable arithmetic

a,, uer].n]-c1on ancl substitution of variable lli = #i c65 HOl P//i Q/ij; (Ex. ) c65 H0l p/tl0l Q1005; (/i 101 = 1005) c6s H01 P#101 Q//r10; (//101 = #110) c65 H01 p//101 Q_/i 112; (li 101 = _#LLz)

b) Addirion //i = #j + ttk . c6s H02 P//i Q/tj R//k; (Ex. ) c6s H02 pitlol Q/ir02 R15; (#101 = #L02 + 15) -:-' c) Subtracrion //i = /li - +t< c6s H03 r/tt q//i n/tk;
(Ex.

c65 H03 p//r01 Q#102 R//103;

c65 H04 r/ti Q//5 n/ik; c6s H04 p#101 Q#102 R/t103;
#k

(//10

r = #102 -

#103)

d) Product i/i = #j x

(Ex.)
(Ex.

(//l0l = #ro2 x

/1103)

e) Division /ii = /li + iik c65 H05 Pili Q/tj R//k;

c6s H05 pii r0r Q#102 R#103; (i/101 = #r02 + i/r03)

surn

f) Logical
(Ex. )

c6s c65

/fi = //j .0R. #k Hll P/ti q//i n//k; Hr r p/ll0l Q//102 R//103;

(/t101 = #r02 .oR. #i03)

g) Logical product lti = lli .AND. #k c65 H12 P#i Q#j R//k; (Ex. ) c65 Hl2 p#l0l Q#102 R#103; (ttl01 = #to2 .AND.

#103)

-i59-

2)

Control command a) Unconditional branch G65 HBO Pn; n: Sequence number (Ex. ) c65 H80 PI20; (Diverge ro Nl20)
b)

Conditional divergence I ilj EQ. #k (=) G65 H81 Pn Q/lj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H8l Pr000 Q/ll0l R/ti02; /lI0l = llt02, go ro N1000

#t0l I lll02, go ro nexr

Conditional divergence 2 //j . NE . #k (l)

(Ex.)

c65 H82 Pn Q//j R/lk; n: Sequence number c6s H82 P1000 Qillol R//102; IIIOL + llT02, go ro Nt000 lll0l = lllo2, go ro nexr

d) Conditi-onal divergence 3 ilj cT //k (>) c65 H83 Pn Qilj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H83 Pr000 Qllr0l R//102; /1101 > ltLO2, go ro N1000
#

I01 < ltLO2, go to nexr

Conditional divergence 4 /lj LT /lk (<) _q05--H9-4 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H84 P1000 Q#lOi n/1102; #i0I < llL02, go ro N1000 #101 Z llL02, go ro nexr
L)

Conditional divergence 5 /ij cE /ik (>) c65 H85 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: SequencE number (Ex. ) c6s H8s P1000 Qi/101 R//i02; //f 0l Z tlI02, go ro N1000 //101 < lll02, go ro nexr
G65 H86

C) Conditional divergence 6 /13 LE . #k (<)

(Ex.

c65 H86 P1000 Q//iOl R//102; /1101 S lfloz, go ro N1000 # l0 i > ltI}z, go ro nexr
Alarm No. +500

fn

Ql/5

n/tt; n:

SequencE number

h) P/S alarur occurrence c65 H99 Pi; i:

(Ex. )
I)

G65 H99 PI5;

P/S alarrn 515 occurrence

(Note

If positive numbers were designated as sequence numbers at branch designations, they are searched forward first and then, backward. If negative numbers were designated, they are searched backward first and then, forward. (Note 2) Sequence number can also be designated by variables. (Example) c65 H8l P#100 Q#l0l R//102; When conditions are satisfied, processing branches to the block having the sequence number designated with #100.

- 16l -

16.2.4 Notes on custom macro l) How to input "//"

key is depressed af ter address G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S, T, P or Q, i/ code is input. 2) It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the I'IDI mode. However, address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation. 3) Addresses H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after G65. Address 0 and N only are writable before G65. 4) Single block Generaliy, the macro instruction block does nor stop even if single block stop is turned on. However, by setting parameter SBKM of parameter No. 0011, it is possible to make single block effective. This is used for macro testing. 5) Variable values can be taken within a range of -232 to 232-t, but they are not displayed correctly, except for -99999999 to 99999999. If they exceed the above range, they are displayed as *ti*?k****. 6) it is possible to nest subprograms up to four tj-mes. 7) Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the operati,on results with decirnal numbers, the figures below decinal point truncated, if an arithmetic result contains a fractj-on part. Particularly be carful with the arithmetic sequence, accordingly. (Ex.) When /1100 = 35, /ll0l = I0, lllo2 = 5 the followlngs results. //110 = /1100 + /lI0l (= 3) #l1l = #110 x #102 (= 15) llr20 = i/100 x /i I02 (: I75) ItL2I = //120 + /i101 (= tl) /tI11 = 15 ard lf L2I = 17 8) The execution time of macro instruction differs according to varj-ous conditions (for example, if the axis is under movement or not). It may be several
when l#l Eens msec. on an average.

9) When a custom macro is loaded from a paper tape in the EIA code, '&' code is treated as t'//tt, because there is in no "//t' code in the EIA code.

-162-

Examples of Custom Macro

$.3.1 Bolt hole circle Drill n pieces of, holes Set ref erence Point -(X-0, Y o) at the center of a circle. rtn?r on the circumference of the circle having radius (r), squally divlded.. bY

Jiartittg with angle (a).

Reference

point (X6, Ye)

(n- I )th

hole

Present position

X,,, Yn : Coordinate values at the reference point of bolt hole circle. U: Radius r : Starting angle a n : Number of holes I The following variables are used: #500 X coordinate value at reference point (Xo) ii 50r Y coordinate value at reference point (Yn) {t502 Radius (r) #503Starting angle (a) Itso4 Number of holes (n) However, when n > 0, counterclockwise (n pieces) when n < 3, clockwise (-n pieces) The following are used as r.rorks in custom macro: #f00 : Counter showing the drilling of the i-th hole in progress (i) Last value of counter (= l"ll (ie) #10r Angle of the i-th circle (ei) ItLO2 X axis value of rhe i-ch hole (Xi) #t03 Y axis value of the l-th hole (ti) It LOA
U

-163-

Custom macro
o90

N100 c65 HOr P//100 Q0: c6s H22 P/t101 Qitsoa; N200 G65 H04 P//102 Q//100 R360000; G65 H05 PllLO2 Q/i 102 R/i504; G65 H02 Plfr}z Q#s03 Rillo2 i G65 H32 P//103 Qll502 R/1r02; c6s Ho2 P/1103 Q/1500 Ri/r03; c65 H31 P/1r04 Q/1s02 R/1i02; c6s H02 Pillo4 Q/1s01 R#104 t G90 H00 x#r03 Y/1104;
M10;

t0;

instructions are

programmed

as follows:

ie = l"l
I

{-n I_U

I
I
)

tJ].=at-

.360o x
n

Xi=Xo*rCOS (ei) Yi=Yo+rSIN(0i) Positioning to the i-t.h hole Output of hole machining M code
Wheni<ie,branches ie pieces of holes
be
as
r lr
l-

'l
)

c6s H02 P# 100 Q// 100 Rl ; c6s H84 P-200 Q#100 R/li0r;

to N200 to dri1l follows:

The program to call thls custom macro, for example, will

o00

M99;

r0;

G65 H01 P#500 Q100000; G65 HOl P#50I Q-200000; c65 HOI Plt502 Q100000; G65 Hol P/1503 Q20000 i c65 H01 P//504 Q12;

Xn = 100 nrm Yo = -200 mm r = 100 nm

c92 X0 Y0 lI98 P9010'

Counrerelockwise (n = t2)
Custom rnacro

a=

20"

Z0

;0"

;6f

.r

call
necessary

i1500

to i/504 can also be set by MDI operation. rn this case, blocks with G65 of the above program are not
16.3.2 Pocket machining

M02;

A pocket milling cycle to machine the area illustrated below can be programmed by custom macro. Area cutting is done with a certain depth and another area cutting is done after the tool is cut-in along the Z axis.

Rapid traverse

FeedrateSxe
Feed r3le e or f (e : Z direction f : XY plane)

Starting point (x, y)

r
I

I ---r-I

I
I I

lil
lii

"l
-164-

Respect ive variables mean as follows: X axis absolute coordinate value #500

at left lower part of pocket, starting point (x). #50 I Y axls absoluLe coordinate value at left lower part of pocket, starting point (V). 11502 Z point absolute coordinate value (z) R point absolute coordinate value (r) #503 Cutting quantity at one time (q), positive number lls04 /150s Length of X axis direction in area (i), positive number Length of Y axis direction in area (j), posltive number {t506 11507 Finishing margin (k) #s08 tZ when machining width is set to cutter diameter x tZ TooI radius (d) # 509 #s l0 Feed rate in XY plane (f) #51 r Feed rate in Z axis (e) Tool is fed at a rate of 8 x e until it reaehes I mm before the starting point of cutting. /1100 to i1113: Used as a work for calculations. Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows:
09020;

c6s H02 P#100 Q#s09 R/1507; c65 H04 PltLO2 Q#509 R2; c65 H26 Pllro2 Q#508 R100; c6s H02 PllLO2 Qi/102 Rl; c65 H02 P#103 Q/1s00 R//100; c65 H02 PllLO4 Q//s01 R//r00; c6s H02 P//10s Q//s00 R//505; c65 H02 P//105 Q//10s Riir00; c6s H02 P/1r06 Q//s01 R//506; c6s H03 P#106 Qil106 R/i100; c6s H02 PitLOT Qilso2 R/1507; c 90 c00 x/l 103 Yil i 04 ; z{1503; c65 H0l P//108 Q//503; N 100 c6s H03 P# 108 Q# 108 Rit5 04 ; c65 H85 P110 Q#108 Ri/107; c6s H01 P#108 Qi/107; Nl10 c0l zllIoS F/t511; xlll0s F//510; c65 H01 P#109 Ql; N 120 G6s H04 P# I 10 Q# 109 R/l 102 ; c65 H02 P/tl l0 Q/t110 R//r04; c6s H86 Pr 30 Q# r l0 Ril i 06 ; c6s H01 P#1 t0 Q// r06 ; N 130 Y/l l 10; c65 H23 Pil I I I Qil109 R2 ; G65 H8l Pt40 Q#l ir R0; x//r03; c65 H80 P150; N 140 xi/ 105 ; Nl50 c65 n02 P#i09 Q#109 Rr; c6s H84 P-120 Q#l r0 R/l106; c00 zll503; x// 103 Yil r 04 ; c6s H86 P200 Q//108 u/107; c65 Ho2 PlltL2 Q/lr08 Rl000; c6s H04 P#t 13 Q//s l r R8; c0l zllLr2 Filrl3; c65 H80 P-100;
N200
M99;

-165-

16.3.3 Interface signal Read signed BCD 3 Structure of DI

digirs by address swirching ln

27

//100.

zr5 zr4 2r3 2L2 zrl zlo z9 28

26 25 24 23

22

Used for

other

ign

Purpose -

Data send signal

Structure of

DO

zB 27 26

25

24 23 22

2r

20

Used for purPose

u

Address

Address send signal

prograrnraed

Custom macro 09 I 00;

instructions are

as follows:
Address (7) send Address send signal
ON

G65 H12 PllLr32 Q/11132 R480; G65 HIl PllLr32 Q/11 132 R23;

N10 G65

P#r00 Q//r032 R4095; c65 H24 P//r00 Q//100; c65 H8l P20 Q/11012 R0; l

c65 HT2

H8l P10
P// r

Q//10r3

R0;

c65

H01

N20
MQQ.

c65

00 Q-/1100; I HI2 Pltrr3z Q//1132

I^/aiting for data send BCD 3 digits read Conversion into binary number Addition of sign
R495;

Address send signal

OFF

-166-

16.3.4 Shearing machine

X axis

I I
I I

+ _---

I I I

Cutter
Workpiece

(r) (o) First margin {t502 (Ax) Shearing width #503 (B) margin for grasping workpiece lf )u4 Distance from reference point Eo cutter (h) Custom mac ro instructions are programmed as follows:
#

500

#50

Width of workpiece

091 10;

c65 H03 P#100 Q#s00 R//50i; N10 c65 H03 P#r01 Q//s04 R/l t00; c90 G00 x#l0l
M?n.

0-n

X axis positioning

//r00

c65

uo)
M99;

H03 H85

P#100

Q#

100

n/i502 ;

P-10

Q#r00

n/i

503;

Cutting command ilr00 -A{ IF #100 : B, c0

TO N10

The macro call program, for example, will be as follows: 00009; (i1500 to ii504 are set by l"lDI operation.)

G92 M98
rr v t

XO;

P9110;

Mo?.

16.3.5 Program examples

Conversion from cartesian coordinate system (X-Y-Z) into cylindrical system (r-e-Z). r = tQr +l;20 = arcEan (y/x) (-180" < e < 180')

coordinate

-167-

Common

=X ll5o2 = Y //505 = r //506 = e

i1501
{1507

variable

employed:

#Ilo, //Ill, llrr2,

01000

Sequence number at the /1120 = I,trork

call

cOmrnand

Nlr00 c92 X0 Y0 z0;

N1200 s2000 M03 T02; NI300 G00; NI400 xl00.0 Y100.0;
N1500 x200.0 Y-200.0;

c66

G90; P8000;

Absolute

command

08000 is called every block Coordinate system setting

in
O

nodal cal,1 rnode.

(X, Y, Z) = (0, 0, 0) Point (r, e, Z) = (0,90.000,0)

(X, Y) = (100.0, 100.0) (r, e) = (141.42I, 45.000) (X, Y) = (200.0, -200.0)

poinr

N1600 x0

Y-I00.0;

(r, e) = (282.842, -45.000) (X, Y) = (0, -100.0) (r, ) - (100.0, -90.000)

sec.

point
poinr

N2000 c04 P1000;

N8000 G67 i N9000 M02;

hrell I
Modal

call

node cancel

lm.0

-168-

16.4

Pattern Data Input Function

This function is provided to enable users to make CNC programrning by taking numerj.c data (patcern data) only out of a drawing and setting thesd numerical values from CRT/MDI panel without any need of programming using an existing NC With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can freely prepare a hole machining cycle (boring cycle, tapping cycle, or the like), for example, by utilizing the custom macro function, and load the hole machining cycle lnto the
program memory. language.

f) This cycle is designated as pattern names like BORI, TAP3, DRL2, .... An operator can select a desired pattern out of the menu of pattern names being displayed on CRT 2) A cycle should be prepared by using variables (pattern data) which are specified by the operator. The operator can identify these variables as depth, return relief, feed' blank, and other pattern data names. The operator gives values (pattern data) to these names.
16.4.1 Pattern menu display When depressing

ffi sl'l t"y again after selecting an offset or custom macro variable screen by depressing the m k"y, Ehe following pattern menu screen is Pr*'rl
IJFS

displayed

FNJ

: HOLE PATTERN 1. BOI-T FLE 2. GRID 3. LIIE NFE.E 4. TNPPII 5. DRILLII.G 5. EmIfS ?. PMGT 8. PEG<
>. tESl

OtW NLw

1O. BrcK
SELECT =

EIT

HOLE PATTERN

Menu

title
name

BOLT HOLE

Pattern

An optional character string l2 characters. An optional character string l0 characters.

1S

settable within settable within

1S

The machine tool builder should program the character strings of menu title and pattern name by the custom macro, and load it into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500". l) Macro instruction to describe the menu title Menu title

ci cz t3 c+ cs ce cl cg cg cto cii
Cl, CZ ....

ctz CtZ : Characters of menu t.it.le (L2 characters)

-169-

l'lacro i-nstruction
c65
H90
p

TJ H90P p Q q R UJNKi : Specifies the menu ri_11e : Assuure a, and a, be the codes of characters C, and C^, L Z' P=atx1O3+a, p CCO OOO

-L

Code

a, of character c. Code a, of character C

L

See 16.7.3

for character
Assume

codes.

q r i j k

: : : : ,

or.lO aO be the codes of characters C, and C4, q=a3xl0-*aO Assume a. and a. be the codes of characters c. and c., )?b56 r="5x10-+aU Assume rr rld a, be the codes of characters C, and C' t=^7x10"*a, Assume ao and a.,.., be the codes of characters C^ and C t"t coqes or cnaracters cg ttd L10' , =;";";r-;.t'0^"A=".*l f.,' and 0" rhe codes of characrers c.. and n rr '"12' ? "'", ^. t="lrxl0'*^I2
macro
;

(Example) Assume that

c6s H90 Po72 079 Q076 069 R032 080 1065 084 J0B4 o0g K082 078 HOLEL_IP ATTERN For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item i6.8.3.
2) Macro

the rnenu title is "HOLE PATTERN", and the instruction is given as follows.

instruction to clescribe pattern Pattern name

name

'4 'l cto Characters of pattern nane (10 characters) L1acro ins truct ion G65 Ii91 P n a qRrI iJiK H91 Specifies the pattern name n Specif ies the menu number of pattern name (n = I to I0) Assume a, Y ., be the codes of characters C., and C,r,

ct t3 'z cl' c2 ""

to

tg tg tto

'q=atxl0-*a, r
f J^a

"lO
1

Assume aa and ar, be

the codes of characters C, and CO, the codes of characters C, and CU, the codes of characters C7 "rd
Cg,

.=t3xl0-+aO
Assurne

a_ and a)?b

be

t=u5xi0-+aU
Assume a_ and t?d

a^

be

j=arxlo-'+au k="9x10"*r,,0
"g

Assume

uld r b. the codes of characters Cg rrd Cl0, l0

170

(Example) Assume that the pattern name of menu No. I is "BOLT HOLE", and the macro instructlon ls glven by; G65 H9t pl Q066 079 R076 084 1032 072 JO79 076 K069 032 t

BOLTLJHO LEL-l (Note) If a part of characters are not specified by P, Q, R, I, J or K which designace character strings, but they are omitEed, the characters (two characters) at that part are regarded as space characters.
CRT

3) Pattern number selection Enter a desired pattern number by keying operation from the pattern nenu as fo11ows, for example.

Etr

The selected pattern number is set to system variable "//5900". The custou macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program number search) with an external signal and then, referring to system variable #5900 by the program.

4)

Menu title: 09500;

Example of custom mrcro to describe pattern names

HOLE PATTERN

Nl c65 H90

P072 079 Q076 059 R032 080 1065 084 J084 069 K082 078; N2 c65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084 T032 072 J079 076 K069 032: N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068; N4 c65 H9l P3 Q076 073 R078 069 1032 065 J078 071 K076 069; Ns c65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080 1073 078 J071 032; N6 C65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076 T076 473 J078 071; N7 c65 H91 P6 Q066 079 R082 073 1078 07 1; N8 c65 H91 P7 Q0B0 079 R067 07s 1069 084; N9 c65 H9i P8 Q080 069 RO67 075; N10 c65 H9i P9 Q084 069 R083 084; Nit c65 H91 PrO Q066 065 R067 075;

i. 2.

BOLT HOLE
GRID
ANGLE

3. LINE

4. TAPPING 5. DRILLING
I

6. 7. 8.
q

BORING
POCKET PECK

TEST
BACK

Nl2

IO.

M99;

171

16.4.2 Pattern data display

When

a pattern

menu

is selected, necessary pattern data are displayed

t.,FRIABLE

5@ Tm-541 KIJIN

}.tr.

t*HE
X

DnTC
6
A

01@ N1@
qf'ENT
*E[LT Fg-E
CIRCLET

Y 5A3 RADILF 5er s. $E56 l{-E. l. %a g7g

5@ KlJll.l

SET

PRTTERN

UR. r',5@-585.
DATA TO

MTUL PCEITIO{ (RELCTII.,E)

f.5. W=

6 6

x z

@.w
@.w

Y
S
MDI

@.m
6T

BOLT HOLE TOOL

: Pattern data title An optional character string : Variabl.e name An optional character string
characters.

is
l-s

settable within settable within

12

....

10

characters. *BCLT HOLE CIRCLE* : Comnent statemelit A comment of an optional character string can be displayed up to 12 characters/line, and B lines. The machine tool bui,Lder should program t.he character strings of pattern data titler pattern name, and variable name by utilizing the custom macro A, and load them into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500 * pattern number" (O9501 - 09510). 1) I'lacro instruction to describe patlerrr data title

Pattern data title

ct cz t:
G65

" r' c2 "" Ilacro instructic.rn

Hq?pn
t'

"4 cLz'

ts

te tto tr "t of 'g title t 9n characters) (12 nenu Characters

qRr JjKk;

t6

H92
Y

Specifies the uenrr title Assume a, @rlu a, be the codes of characters C, and Cr, I p = al 10" + ^z Assune .lU a O be the codes of characiers C, and CO, ", q = a^ x10-*aO J Assurne a anC a be the codes of characters C and C 6' 5 ? 6 5 r - a- xI0-*a, D .) Assume a_ and a^ be the codes of characters C_ anci C^, 8' t 7 ^ B

-:-^ o7 xI0r+aU t J*O

i-^

Assume

r o and a ]n be the codes of character" Cg ,nd CI0, t.\

x 10" *.10
11
-' ^ dr t

Assume
IN

x l0'* a,^ LL For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item 16.8.3.

*;- - L2 and a be the

codes of characters C

and C 1r "^'- "12'

172

(Example) Assume that the pattern data title 1s ,,BOLT HOLE", and the maero instruction is given by; c6s Hez t99_q gp Q076 084 R032 072 r07s 076 -f ! 032 B o L r L__,- H o f J06e i-_l- , L2) Macro instruction to describe varlable name

Variable

t,

Cl'
He3
n t

t, t, au ,-, ', 'o t Variable ag a, C2...- Cl0

r r e : sp.lfri!" tllGri"rfGur" 9=arx10"*a, Assume a" and a, be the J?4 Q n

name

a,.

name (10 characters)

Macro instruction

G65H93P n

Specifies the varlable number (n = 500 to 531) Assune al and a" be the codes of characters C, ^aL
codes
cod.es

and

c2' c4'

t="3x10"*aO Assume a. and a - be the )?6 t="5x10"*aU Assume a, and a. be the l^O

of characters C, of characters C,

and

and

c6'

codes

j=a7*IOJ+au

of characters C, and C'

(Example)

", "10."10 b" the eodes of characters cn "rd cl0, k="9x10-*"10 Assume that the variable name of variable No. 503 is ,,RA_Drusr,, the macro instruction is given by; p503
Assune

and

c65 H93

Q082 065 R068 OZS rb8s 083

(Note)

varlable names are designated by 32 co 'non varlables are not cleared by turning off power supply.
comment

-R--T- -D-T

/1500

- lt53I which

{l

Macro instructlon to descrlbe a One comnent line

a,. ,, a, ,o a, a6 ,, aa an

CI, C2.... CIZ, Macro instructlon

aro art Characters string of one

T2

comment

Line (12 characters)

c6sH94_p_LQ q R r H94 : Specifies the couunenT p : Assume .lO a, be rhe ", p=alx10-*a,
q

JjKk;
codes of characters C, and C,,
CO,

Assume

a. and J^r1 q=a3xl0"*aO ).b r=.5x10'*aU

, be the codes of characters C, and

r
f

Assume a_ and

a- be the codes of characters C, and

CU,

j
k

., "lO a, be rhe codes of characters C, and CU, ,=^7x10-*a, : Assume g . " "lO ,0 b. the codes of character" C9 "rd Cl0, i="9x10r*"10
Assume

Assume

tr, ""X.r, 1=rlrxl0-*^12

bu the codes

of characters cll

"nd

cl2,

-173-

A comment can be displayed by 8 lines. The comment consists of the lst line to Sth line in the programmed sequence of G65H94 (Example) Assume that the corunent is "*BOLT HOLE", and the macro instruction is given bY; c65 H94 p042 066 Q079 076 R084 032 T072 079 J076 069 ; *BOLTL_]HOLE Example of custom macro of the prerrious CRT 4)
o95Or;

Nl

N2 c65 H93 P500 Q084 079 R079 076; N3 c65 H93 P501 Q07s 073 R074 085 1078 032 J088 032: N4 c65 H93 P502 0075 073 R074 085 1078 032 J089 032; N5 c65 H93 P503 O0B2 065 R068 073 r085 083; N6 c65 H93 P504 Q083 046 R032 065 r07B 07 I J076 n?, . N7 G65 H93 P5 05 Q07 2 079 R076 069 r083 032 J07 8 079 K046 032; N8 G65 H94; N9 c65 H94 PO42 066 Q079 076 R084 032 IO72 079 J076 069; .. NlO G65 H94 R032 067 1073 AB2 J067 076 K069 042; Nll c65 H94 P083 069 Q084 032 R080 065 1084 084 J069 092 K078 032; N12 c65 H94 P068 06s Q084 065 R032 084 1079 032 J086 065 K082 n/,e. NI3 G65 H94 P078 079 Q046 0s3 R048 048 1045 053 J048 053 K046 0321' N14 I'199;

ro79 076 J069 032:

c65 H92 P066 079 Q076 084 R032 072

VAR:

BOLT HOLE /1500 TOOL /1501 KIJUN X

#502 KIJUN #503 MNIUS #504

S.

ANGL
NO

#505 HOLES
Coroment

instruction

*BgLT

H6LE

CIRCLE* SET PATTERN DATA NO VAR.

No. 500 -

505

r74 -

16.4.3 Character.to-codes correspondence table

Character
IJ

Code

Comment

Character
7

Code

Conrmgnl

065 066
067

054
8
9
t

C D

F
G H

068 069 070

055 056
057 032 Space

07r
072
1f

I
J K

L
M N

073 074 075 076

077

)
&

033 034 035 036

037

Exclanation mark Quotation mark

Dollar
Percent

Sharp

svmbol

o
P

078 079 080

081

038 039 040

041

Ampersand

ApostroDhe

*
+
,

o
K

082 083
084

042 043 044

045

Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Asterlsk

PIus sign
Comma

T
T]

046
o47

Minus sign Period

Slash CoIon Semi-co1on

w
X Y
Z

t
z

085 086 087 088 089 090 048 049 050

051

058 059 060

061 062
?
@

Left angle bracket Sign of equalitv Right angle bracket

Question mark Commercial at mark left square bracket
Yen syrnbol

063

t
u

064
091

J
a

092
093 094 09s

052 053

Underline

Right square bracket

175

Subprograms employed in pattern data input function

Subprogram No.
o9500 o9s0 I 09502 o9503 o9504 o9505 o9506 o9507 o9508 o9509 o9510

Functlon

Speclfies character string of pattern data menu display Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 1. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 2. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 3. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 4. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 5. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 6. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 7. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 8. Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding pattern number 9.
EO

Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 10.

Macro instruction employed in pattern data input function

G code
c65 c65
G65

H code
H90
H91

Function

Specified menu title

Specifies pattern

name

H92
H93

Specifies pattern data title Specifies variable Specifies

comment
name

c65 c65

H94

System variable employed in pattern data input function

Svstem variable
"\.,1*.:

Meanlngs

,,]:ts_i. : r,.1,,. $i.l'

#5900

Pattern number selected by user

176

17-

CUSTOM MACRO

Machine tools builders: You are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fail. If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of your custom macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.

Request:

A function covering a group of instructions is stored i.n memory.'the same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instruction, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca1led a trcustom macro body" and the representative instruction is called a ttcustom macro instructionrr. The custom macro body rnay siurply be called a macro. And the custom macro instruction may be ca11ed a macro call command.

A group of instructions

for a certain function

Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions to remember all the instructions ln a custom macro body.

without having

The three most significant points on custom macros are that variables can be used in the custom macro body, operations can be performed on variables and actual values can be assigned to the variables ln custom macro instructions.

r77 -

G55P9011A101s:
X=l
I I I

(
Z = 4:

() )/'

I
l i

Calls custom macro body 9011 and defines variables =1 and

#4 10 and 5 respectively.

Variables ;1 and #4 can be used instead of the unknotsn traverse distance.

This enables the user to improve the CNC performance by themselves. Custom macro bodies may be cprovided by the machine tool builder, but they can be created by users, EOO.

Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be rnade easily'. Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programned and registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting function. Programmers can use the bolt hole circle functj.on by using the following command only:

c65P Pr.R t A o B B
r

r
li

Macro number Radius

k ; " of Em-hole circle

circles

Start angle Angle between

Number

of circles

-r78-

Address of the argument assignment I

Variable ln custom macro

#19

body

T
U

#20
#21

V
In

#22
1t

zJ

#24
I Z

#25

#26

b) Argument assignment II ABCIJKIJ In addition to the fact that arguments can be addresses A, B, and C, a maximum of ten sets of arguments can be -ssigGE--in set for addresses I, J and K. When several numbers are assigned in the same address, they must be assigned in the determined sequence. Addresses not requj-red can be omitted. Addresses assigned jn argument assignment II and the number of the variable used in the macro corresDond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment II

Variable in user macro

lt L

bodv

1rL

1tJ

r1

Jt
Kt
l^

tt5 #o

tf/
tt8
#9

,z
Kz
T

#t0
{
tfll

K^
T

#12
lf L)

-4

-r80-

17.1

Macro Call Command (Custom Macro Command)

A macro can be called from a single block, or modally from each block in the call mode Note) A macro call command cannot be specified in the MDI rnode.
17 .1.1 Simple calls When the following command is executed, the custom macro body identified by P (program number) is ca11ed. G65 P(ptogr"* f(it.r.tio" ti*"") <argument assignment>; ""*b"r) When it is necessary to transfer arguments to a custom macro body, the argument is specified by <argument assignment>. The followlng tTr/o types'of <argument

asslgnment> can be specified. The argument menti-oned here is the actual numerical value assigned to a variable. (Note) G65 must be specified before arguments in the G65 block. The negative sign and the decimal point can be used regardless of addresses in
<argument assignment>.
D

a) Argurnent assignment I

An argument can be assigned for all addresses except G, L, N, 0, and P. Assignment need not be made in alphabetical order. Specification is made according to word address format. Addresses not required may be omitted. However, when I, J, and K are used, assignment must be made in the alphabetical order. pAn UdU. I K valid T B_A__q .....J ! . .. . . i -,.^-l .' 'l f trv4rlu Addresses assigned in argument assignment I and the number of the variable in custom macro body correspond as follows:
Address of the argument assignment I

A-B-q

...

.z

Variable in qustom macro

lt L

body

4r

B L
D

1tJ

E
F

#8 tt9
#11

I
J

lft
ltO flJ

a
R

ttLT
//

18

r79 -

(Example)
G65AI

It). )

;l?iT":-]n
.

.082.0r-3.014 .0D5.0Pi000;

{t3: ll4 z-3 i/5:

#6 tl7 :

In this example, even if arguments I4.0 and D5.0 are specified to variable ll7 , rhe latter is effective.
17 .1.2 Modal call The macro call mode can be specified by executing the followlng command. G66P program number L repetitive count <argument assignment>; The <argument assignment> is the same as for a simple call. The macro call mode can be cancelled by executing the following command;

)bt{

5.0

(Note

G67 ;

1)

(Note 2)

rn a G66 block, G66 rnust be specified before any arguments. Decimal points and signs can be used in the arguments. G66 and G67 should rnake a pair in the same program.

During the macro call mode, the specified macro call instruction is called every tj-me a motion command is executed.. (Example l) Drilling Cyele At each positioning-point, the drilling cycle is operated.
Auxiliary
X move function Flow of program

ll ll
1l 1l

ll

li ll
U

lr
Ir
U

Dwell

Dwell

uoo P9082R(R
X
M I

point)X(Z point)X(Dwell);
The drilling

,
)

cycle is performed at each the motion block in this region.

end

of

Macro is o 9082 t
GOO Z

G67 ;

as follows.

(In case of incremental programming)

//tB;
#26; #24:

GOI
GO4
GOO

Mqq.

Z- lROUND

[/ilBl

+ ROUND

ttt26));

182

Address

of the

argument assignment

II

Variable in user macro

ttr4
1f

body

t4

It

Jl1 / #1r)

J.

{ttt

#18

T. I

b o

#L9 ll2A
JI. lILL
1I
1

K.

Tl

Jlaa LL

Jl
K.t

tt L)

tt24

I^ at
J^
o
6

ll2s
It26

I^ 9
J9
K^
1

#28
#29

#30
)l. 'IJI
1

rto
Jto
Kto

ttJZ

#33

Suffixes I to l0 of I, J and K indicate the sequence of the assigned set. Coexistence of argument assignment I and II No alarm is generated even if arguments of both assignment I and II are specified in the same block with a G65 command. If an argument of type I and an argument of type II are specified to the same variable, the argument specified later is effective.

-181 -

'17.1.5 Subprogram call with M code

An M code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.

NGXY

That is, instead of

tE;E-r ow i n g s i*pTJ-c o*tnf,T-t be specified. can N G X .... Y ^^ As f or ltg8, tt* 'i""Effiiort *^ urDproJeq vrr the ro ,*^-1^.,^'1 M codes are not transmit.ted.
1

M98PAAAA;

program check screen, but I"IF and

FI
N

The correspondence between the calling M code xx and the program number AAAA of the ealled subprogram must be set as a parameter. Up to three 11 codes can be used for a subprogram call. hrhen these M codes are specif ied in a macro called wit.h a G code or in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code, the subprogram is not ca1led, but these M codes are treated as ordinary M codes. Set the following parameters.
M code used to call subprogram: 9001

i."f
F-t
,rffi-G

M code used to call subprogras:1" 9002

M code used

to ."ff subprogram:

9003

A T code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.

17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code

" .....T

t; is equivalent to the foltowing two blocks.

N G X Z M98P9OOO; r-coae t ir ETea-lT .n argument in comnon variable 1ll4g. The T code is displayed on the program check screen, but TF and T codes are not. transmitted. When this T code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a subprogram called with an M or T code the subprogram is not called; buE this T code is treated as ordinary T code. Set. the following parameter.
0 0
0
TMCR

When parameter code.

No. 0040,

TLICR

= 1, a subprogram is called in a block with a

calt)

17.1.7 Difference between M98 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body a) G65 can include arguments; I,198 cannot.

b) ItgA is used to branch to a subprogram after executing a command other than M, P or L in the block; G65 is used to branch only. c) When a I'198 b'lock includes an address other than O, N, P and L, execution of the block stops as single block stop, a G65 block does not. d) COS changes the level of local variable; M98 does nor. That. is, /ll specified before G65 is one thing and /lI in the calling cusrom macro body is another. . iil specified before M98 is the same as /i I in the calling subprogram. e) Up to four G65 calls, includ.ing G66, can be made in addition, M9B cal1s can be made up to eight calls rogether with calls by G65 and G66.

r84 -

!,.,':j

?r.

17.1.3 Macro call using G codes

A G code can be set by a parameter to call specifying N_G65PAAAA <argument assignment

can be used.

macro. That is, instead of the following simple command

Gxx<argument. assignment> ; correspondence between the calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of The the called macro must be set. as a parameter. -\ calling G code xx and the program number AAAA of a called macro are set in a parameter. Up to ten G01 to G255 commands can be used to call macros. G00, G65 to G67 cannot be used. In case of macro call by G code, the P code does not indicate a program number but an argument. The P code is stored in lfL6 as an argument. These G codes cannot be specified in a macro called with a G code. These G codes cannot be specified in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code. Set the following parameters.

Data No.
G code used to call macro: 9010 G code used to call macro: 90il

G code used to call macro: 9019

Macro can be ca11ed with an M code set by a parameter, namely, the following
command:
a

17.1.4 Custom rnacro call with M code

N G65 PAAAA <argument assignment>1 ifQ-nivalent to the following -ommand: N_ M X X <argument assignment>; Coordinate with t.he M code X X which executes macro calling and the macro program No. AAAA accessed with a parameter. I'IF and M codes are not issued the same as to call the subprogram with an 1"1 code. When this ll code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a subprograrn called with an M or T code, the macro is not called; but this M code is treated as ordinary M code. Up to l0 codes of l10l - M97 can be used to call macro. Set the following
parameEers.

M code

to call macro:

9020

!1 code

to call macro:

9021

l{ code to call macro:

(Note) These

9029

ln{ codes are different from usual M codes and theY must be commanded at the star t of a block (just after the sequence No., if there is).

- lB3 -

Main program

Macro (Level I )

Macro

(Level 2)

Macro (Level 3)

Macro (Level 4)

o--

G65P

G65P

G65P

G65P

M99

M99

Local rariable (Level 0)

(Leve1 1)

(Level 2)

(Level 4)

l) The main program is provided with ill to /133 local variables (leve1 0). 2) When the macro (leve1 1) is called with G65, etc., the local variable (level 0) of the main program is stored, and llI to #33 local variables (level 1) for lihe macro (1evel l) are prepared. Argument transfer is possible for this purpose. (This also applies to (3) below). 3) The loca1 variables (level I, 2,3) are stored each time the macros (leve1 2,3,4) are ca11ed, and new local variables (level 2,3,4) are prepared. 4) When the operation returns from each macro with M99, the local varlables (1evel 0, l, 2,3) stored in (2) and (3) are set in the same conditions as when they were stored.
17.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodv
The format of a custom macro body is the same as that of a subprogram as
belorv.

17.2.'l

Custom macro tiody format

shown

(Prograrn Number);
Commands

(Variables, arithmecic operation and control '' instruction can be

sPsLrr rcu.
,l

Mqq.
LL,2 ,

Program numbers are determined as follows: 1) Or - 08999 for programs that can be freely registered, cancelled and

2) 09020

-.09899

for programs that cannot be registered, cancelled or edited without setting a parameter

edited.

-iB6-

n'i!k;i

.8 Multiplex calls l) Multiplex ca11s Similarly to a subprogram ca11ed from another subprogram, a macro can be called from another macro The multiplicity should be less than or equal to four including simple and modal calls. 2) Multiplex modal calls In modal calls, the specified macro is called each time a motion command is executed. When several modal macros are specified, the next macro is ca1led each time a motion command in the first macro is executed. Macros are successively called from those assigned later.
17.1

(Example 1) G66 P9i00;

z 10000; (1-r)
G66 P9200; z i5000 t (L-2)

G67; G67;
o

z-zsooo; (l-3)
9100;

P9200 cancelled P9100 cancelled

X 5000; (2-L)
Mao.

z 6000; (3-i) z 7000; (3-2)

) ft -?\

9200;

MAO.

Sequence of execution (A block vrithout a motion command is omitted in

this chart.
(1

1)

(Note )

A rnodal macro is not called after (l-3),

mode.

which is not in macro call

3) Custom macro level and local variable l^lhen a macro is called with G65, G66, or a G code which calls a macro, the level of t.he macro increases by one. As a result, the 1evel of the local variable also increases by one. Namely, t.he relationship between the macro call and loeal variable is as follows.

-185-

3) Undefined variables The value of a variable whi,ch has not yet been defined is called <vacant>. Variable #0 is used for a variable that is always <vacant>. An undefined variable has the following naEure: 'a) Quotation When an undefined variable is quoted , the address itself is also ignored.
When

//l = <vacant>
I

When

//l = 0
I

c90x1002/l l c90x100

c90x1002/l l
G90X10020

b) Operation

<vacant> is the same as 0 except when replaced by <vacant>.

i4'hgn

#l = <vacant>
I

When/il=0
tl2=lll
It2=0
I

ll2=#r
/12=<vacant>

ll2=lllx5

ll2=lll*'5
I 112=0

*zlo
ll2={lI+lll
It2=0
I

llZ=lll+ttt
1t2=0
I

c) Conditional expressions <vacant> differs from 0 only for EQ and

When

NE.

/il = <vacant>

When

ill = 0
/10

ill

EQ #0
I

#1 EQ
I

Established

Not established

#lNEO
Established
I

#lNEO
Not established
I

#i cE /i0
Established
i

#l

cE
I

#0

Established

/ll cr 0
Not established
i

ill

cT
I

Not established
CRT screen.

d) Display and setting variable values Variable values can be displayed on the also be set in the MDT mode.

Variable values

can

-lB8-

gariables can be used j.n a custom macro body. Also arithmetic instructions control instructions are commandable. Actual values for variables are specified with a macro call command.
17.2.2 Variables

and

Variables can be used in the macro instead of numerical data. The user can assign any value (within the allowed range) to them. Using variables allow custom macros to become much more flexible than the conventional sub-routines. Several variables can be used, and each variable is identified by a variable
number.

1) Varlable expressions
A (Example I ) lt5
tf

variable is composed of the code /i and a //l(i=L,2,3 ,4.....)

Lo9

number as shown belovi.

The following format can also be used where numbers are replaced bv <Formula> (Example

#1005

2) # t#1001

il [<Forrnula> I

Variable lli explained hereafter can always be replaced with variable

[<Forrnula> ]

#[#1001-ll # ltt6l 2l

ll

Quotation variables The numerical value following an address can be replaced with a variable. <address>i/i or <address>-ili indicates that the value of the variable or its complement is substituted for the command value of the address.

3) F#33 If /133 = 1.5, ir is rhe same as FI.5. Z-ltl8 If i/18 = 20.0, ir is rhe same as 2-20.0. c#130 If //130 = 3.0, ir is rhe same as G3. a) using a variable with addresses/,:, o and N is prohibited, (i.e.,:1127 or N/f I cannot be used). The value of n(n =l to 9) in an optional block skip/n cannot be used as a
(Exarnple
h\

variable. A variable number cannot be replaced by a variable. when 5 in tls is replaced with #30, it does nor become llll3O but ii t#301. The value of a variable cannot exceed the maximum set for each address. For example, when #140 = 120, M// 140 exceeds the maximum (an l"t code must be less than 99). d) When a variable is used for address data, its value is rounded to the significant digit. e) By using <Formula>, as explained later, a numerical value following the address can also be replaced with <Formula>. <address> [<Formula>] or <address>-[<formula>] indicates that the value of the <formula> or its complement is substituted for the command value of the address. Note that a constant with no decimal point used between brackets is assumed to have a decimal point at its end.
(Example

4) xI li24+ltl8*c0s t/lr 1
z-l
#18+1t261

-187-

List'of
Variable
#1000
number Dr

System Variables

Variable
#5041

number

#1015, llro32

115044 Work coordinates

/lli00 - llllt5, lltr32, #1133

D0

#506I

- {i5064 Skip signal position

#2000 - 112200 Tool compensation value

/l50Bl - #5083 TooL compensation #510i - #5I04 Servo deviation

1f2500

#3000
l/3001

Llacro alarm
Clock

, lf3}02

(X axis)
it2600
lf27O0 #2800

- 112506 Work of f set value

#3003

, 113004 Cycle operation control

Setting

(Y axis)

112606 Work

offset

value

#3005
//301

(Z axis)

- #2706 -

Work

offset value offset value

1 - #3AL2 Clocktnf ormation

(4th axis)

112806 Work

#3901

- #3902 Number of parts

/1400f - #4L20 I1odal information

il500l - /15004 Block end position

lf5A2l - t|5024 Machine coordinates

a) Inrerface signals /1f000 ro /ll0f5 and tlL032, /i1100 ro /lir55 and llLl32,
/ill33
T--..+ IrrPuL

The status of the interface input q'i on: I i q dof orm'i values of the system variables /I1000 to /f I0l5 , li1032.

^-i ^'.^1 -rStrdr

narl

hrr

rorrl

i no

the

190

.;.i,..:4,

Variables are classified into local variables, conmon variables and system variables, depending on the variable number. Usage and properties are different for each EyPe of variable l) Local variable lll to il33 The local variable is a variable local1y used in the macro. That is, a local variable /li used in the macro and called at one point in time, is different from iii used in the macro (whether it is t.he same macro or not) ca11ed at another point in time. Accordingly, when macro B is called from macro A, as in a multiplex call, a local variable used in macro A is not destroyed by beins rrsed in macro B. A local variable is used for an argument transfer. For inforfnation on the correspondence to the argument address. A local variabie without a transferred argument i-s vacant in its initial status and'can be used freely. 2) variable #100 - #L99, /1500 - //53i Just as a local variable is used locally in the macro, a comnon variable is in common use throughout the main program, throughout each subprograrn called from the main program, and throughout each macro. That is, llL used in a certain macro is the same as /ii used in another macro. Accordingly, the calculated value of a conmon variable lti in a certain macro can be used in
Common

17.2.3

TYPes of variables

another macro. The use of common variables is not specially determi-ned in the system. can be used freely. 3) System variables
Use of a system variable is fixed in the system.

They

-rB9-

Interface output signals can be issued by assigning values to variables #1100 to /11115, Itrr32, #1133.
System

Output signal

system

variable

Point
I
1

Interface output signal

#1r00
#1101
tf

ILo2

#r r03
#1

llrr04

I I

,0, 2;
2\ 2;
4

i
I

r05 #1i06 #rr07 #IIO8 #i109

#1110

I I I
1

I
I
I
1 I

#i111
tf

IIt2

2; 26 2; 2; 2; 2in 2;; 2;;

uoooo uo00r uo002 uo003 u0004

U0005

rj0006 u0007 u0008

#1113

#rl I4 #1ir5

t
I
I

2;; 2:: 2::

u0009 uoOr0 u001 r uoor2

z')

uool3 uoot4 uoor5

System

variable Point
r6
32

Interface output signal

lt1 i'1.')
'T

u00
u100

I I JJ

- uol3l

uols

Value of variable

Output signal Contact closed Contact open

(HIGH)

(LOW)

t6 and 32 points output signals can be issued at one time by assigning value to the system variable /llt32 and #1 133,
tq /1111?

= j tI

#fL" " ll0o+il

xZL

l-v -n an JU -

r^a rrrrJJ = L tz * Vi) - 2-' * VJI r-w Jlrraa

When When

UO[100+il

UOIi00+i] is High, Vi=l

is Low,

Vi=0

-r92-

System varj-able
# 1000

Po

inL I I I

Interface input signal o rTr nnn ?

'1

//r00r
#1002 #1003 #1004 #1005
// r

I
I

006

#1007 #1008 #1009

I I

i i

2; 2; 2;, 2; 2; 2; 2;
)" -q
2:
1

ur001 ur002 ur003 ur004 ur00s ur006 ur007

rTT

ong

I I I I I
I

#r0r0 #i0l I tf t0L2

#

^ )Lv -t
)rz -t ?
laJ

Ur009
ITTor o

2:: uroll
2:: 2r, 2^'
rTTnr?

l0r3

urOi3
UrO14

#10i4
i/1015

ur015

System
#

variable
t032

Point
lo

Interface input signal

UIO

UI15

Value of variable I
n

Input signal I
Contact closed
ConEac! open
(HIGH)
(LOW)

a:

Since the variable value read is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, t.he unit system must be considered in preparing a macro. The readlng system variable 1t'1032 is used to read 16 points lnput signals at one time.
li

1032 = I

15
/l

j [1000+i] *2'
rerm

t-u
'j.

i;
a!

System

i-n a calculation

variables i/1000 to /lt0t5, llL032 cannor be used as a lefr side

command.

i;
d

F
q.

191

&

b) Tool offset amounr ll2o00 to ll22o0 The tool offset amount can be determined by reading the value of the system variable ll200l to ll22o0. The offset values can also be modified by assigning a value to the system variable //1. (rn case of
System variable numbers for tool offset amounr memory c and compensation numbers are uo to 200)

Offset
i
2

number

Variable
lt2001 {t2002
1f

20.03

199

tf

200

2199 {t2200 The

(Note) The value of variable number /i2000 is only used to read the value. value is alwavs 0.
c)

be chansed.
Axis
X

System variables for work zero point offset values tt2500 - 112906 By reading the values of system variables ll25OO - ll29O6, work zero point offset values are determined. By assigning va,lues to these variables, work zero point offset values can

Work zero point offset value

System

variable

No.

External work compensation G54 (Work coordinate system l)

G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)

lt2500
#25.0r

112506

External work compensat.ion G54 (Work coordinate system l)

G59 (Work coordinare system 6)

#2600

ti260l *zZoo
#27 00

External work compensation G54 (Work coordinate system l)

G59 (Work coordinare system 6) 4rh

lt2t 0I
lf 27

06

External work compensation G54 (Work coordinare system

ll2800
1) #280

G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)

{t2806

-194-

-;r;ts;:#

The last values of the system variable #1100 to #Ill5, ltLl32 and #if33 issued are stored as 1.0 or 0.0. (llote) When a value other than I.0 or 0.0 is assigned to //1100 ro //1115, <vacant> is assumed as 0 and values other than <vacant>,and 0 are assumed as l. A value under 0.00000001 is indefinite. (Example l) 1) llacro used to read three digits of BCD data with a sign by address switching. Structure of DI
zLs 2r4
2r3
2ro

e2E 21 26 2s 24

23 22

2L

Used

for

Stgn

102

10r

100

other purposes

Structure -of

DO
2E

27

26

2"

24

23

22

2'

20

Not used

Used

for

Address

other putpose

Macro call cornnand c65P9100D (address); The custom macro body

09 IOO;

is specified as follor.rs:
Address feed out Timer macro Reading in of 3-digit BCD data Sign
a

llll32=lll132 AND 496 oRllT t c65P9101T60; /i 100=BIN llt1032 AND 4095l ,

rF[/l10r2EQ 0] coro9r00; /l r00=-il r00;
N9 100M99;

2) Read eight types of signed 6-digit BCD data (three digits to the left of the decimal point and. three digits t.o the right of the decimal point) by address switching in #101. Machine tool composition When D0 2 = O, three digits to the right of the decimal point ? - l. r I three digits to the left of the decimal point When DO 2- to 2- = 000, data No.l 001, data No.2
11

Macro call
09101 ;
/f

, data tlo. 8

c65P9l0lD (data number) ; The custom macro body is specified as follows:

c65P9l00D I lt7*2+I) i

command

l0l=/l100;

c6 5P 9 l00D I lt7
#

x2] ; L)r=lf r0 l+/r r00/ l 000 ;

1199;

-193-

(Example 3)

llacro call
0908 r ;

Drill cycle (For incremental (Equivalent to G8l)

command

programming)

c65 P9081 L (Repetition time) R (R point) W (Z-point); The custom macro body is specified as follows:
#3003=l; c00w /llB;
G0lI^I i/23
Mqq.

c00w-[RouND[#r8] + ROUND /t3003=0;

llt23)l;

The single block stoP is not executed. #18 corresponds to R and ll23 corresponds to W.

(Note) The state of //3003 is cleared by resetting. g) Feed hold, feed rate override, and exact stop check suppression specified in /13004 hllaen the following values are assigned to the system variable /l 3004, feed hold and feed rate override are suppressed for subsequent blockq and the exact stop check is not performed. Pressing the feed hold button during execution of a block for which feed hold has been suppressed: /a\ A-) Executes feed hold at the start of the first block outside the suppression range (when the button is kept pushed). Lights the feed hold lamp, and does not execute feed hold at t.his (, point, but at the end of the first block outside the suppression range, (when the button is pushed and released).
#

3004
U

! eed nolcl
0

Feed rate override

o 0

Exact stop check

0 0 0 0

2 3

0 0
X X

l
0:
F'f f o n t i rra
L:Yv'

V.

Suppressed

(Note) The state of {i3004 is cleared by resetting.

-196-

.iil

"

?'.:

d) Alarm #3000 hlhen detecting an error in the macro, an alarm can be generated. When an alarm number is specified in the system variabte /i3000, the alarm lamp is turned on and the alarm status is entered after the proceeding block is
(05n<99), an alarm No.=500+n An alarm message of less than 26 characters can be specified in the section between control-out and control-in. e) Clock #300I , 1t3002 The clock time can be determined by reading the values of the system variables #3001 , 113002. The time can be preset by assignirfg a value to
processed. /l 3000=n (ALARI
MES

SAGE) ;

the system variable.

System
I
2 /i

Kind

variable Unit time I

msec

At the time of
Power-on

Counting
Always

Clock
Clock

3001

Reset to
Same

lf

3002

hour

as at the time of power-off.

1

While STL signalis on. overflows at 65536

The accuracy of each clock is within 16 msec. Clock

msec.

(Example 2) Timer I'licro call command G65P9l0l T (Awaiting time) msec; This macro may be specified as follows:

09I01; /f 3001 = 0; wHrLE[#300r LE ll2OlD0l;

ENDI;
MOO.
LLJ / ,

: :

Initial setting Wait for the prescribed. length of time

+l

The suppression of the single block stop and the wait for the auxiliary function end signal. lrrhen the following values are assigned to the system variable #3003, the single block st.op function is suppressed and execution advances from one

block to the next without awaiting the end signal (FIN) of auxiliary functions (S, T, 1"1 and B). When the end signal is not awaited, the distribuEion end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. Be careful not to specify a subsequent auxiliary function without awaiting the end signal.
#3003

Single block stop

Not suppressed

Auxiliary function end signal

Awaited
Av/aited

I
2

Suppressed

Not suppressed
Suppres
s

Not awaited Not awaited

ed

-i95-

{ I
.{
1l
'd

I { j

:
Sv

stern variab
#400

le

Modal information of preceding block

G code (group 0l) G code (group 22)

:
a

114022

{t4L02
#4 109

#4i11 lt4Lt3 ll4LL4 tt4LI5

tf lt

B code F code H code

M code Sequence number Program number

4It9
4t20

code

code

f) Positional information /15001 to ii5106 Positional information can be determined by reading the system variables #500i to #5016. The unit of posit.ional inf ormation is inxn or inches depending on the input system. System variables 1i5001 to /15106 cannot be used as the left-hand-side term of an arithmet.ic command.
System variable
#500

Positional information
(ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0)
(ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSI'{T)
(PI"IC)

Reading in

during movement
Possib

{t5002 #5003 #5004

lf

X axis block end coordinate Y axis block end coordinate Z axis block end coordinate 4th axis block end coordinate X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate
X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate X axis skip signal position Y axis skip signal position Z axis skip signal position

le

502r

#5022 {t5023 #5024

1i5025

Impossib 1e

it5026

(PMC)

Its04r
tf lf

(ABS0T)
(ABS0T) (ABS0T)
(PMC) (PMC) (PMC)

5042 5043 i|5044 {t5045 t!5046

#506

Impo s sib 1e

lf 5Ub. Z

(ABSKP) (ABSKP)
(ABSKP)

#506 3

Possib

le

{t5064

4th axis skip signal position

(ABSKP)

r98 -

ii.

h) Variable corresponding ro the serring #3005 By substitution of system variable /13005 by a value, the setting data can
be set.

07
SEQ

06
ABS

05

04
INCH

03
ISO

02
TVON

0l
REVY

00
REVY

REVX REVY TVON ISO INCI{ ABS SEQ

X axis mirror Y axis mirror

image image

TV check Changeover of code system ISO/EIA Changeover of input unit system inch input/uun input Changeover of absolute/incremental command Automatic insertion of sequence No.

15

L4

13

12

lr

10
IAPEF

09
REV4

08

REV4 4th axis mirror image TAPEF t0/11 /L2 Tape format conversion
al

Clock information ii3011, /13012 It is possible to know the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second by reading system variables il30i1, ll30l2.
Kind
System variables

Year, Month,

Day

#30rr ll3roz

Hour, Minute,

Second

J) Number

of parts, //3901 , 113902 It. is possible to know the count value by reading the
//390r and //3902.

(Exanple) When it is May 20, 1987 4:17 5" PM 1t3}l2 = 19870520, #30I2 = I6L105

system variables

Also it is possible to change the count value of parts by substituting the system variables.
Kind
Number Number Svstem variables
#390

of machined Darts of necessary parts

{t3902

(Note 1) Do not substitute a negative value.

k) Modal inf orrnation i14001 ro 114120 Modal commands specified up to the preceding block can be determined by reading t.he values of the system variables #400f to ltl+I20. The unit specified is effective.

-t97-

The tool moves to a point appropriate to the machine tool (xp, yp, zp distant from a reference point) through a programmed intermediate point; and after processing a sequence of operations, returns to the original point. Macro call command G65 P9300 X(Intermediate point)Y(Intermediate point)Z (Intermediate point) ; The custom macro body is specified as follows:
09300;

(Exaurple 4)

ill=//5001;
ttZ=tt5002:' //3=/i 5003; G00 z1126; xll24 \1125; G04; (Move is interrupted to read ll502l G9 I x Ixp-//502i lY Iyp-i|5022]zlzp-115023)
z

to

/i5023)

./ :

,ntocessr.ng/

x#24 Yltzs zlt26; x#L \lt2z

uil

Mqq., ... .

"

!t2.. J,

17.2.4 Arithmetic

commands

A variety of arithmetic operations can be performed on variables. An arithmetic command must be specified the same as in general arithrnetic expressions. /li=<Formula> <Formula>, the right-hand-side of an arithrnetic command is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators. A constant can be used instead of li i and #k. A const.ant without a decimal point used in <Formula> is considered to have a d.ecimal point at the end. l) Definiti-on and substitution of variables

2) Addition arithmetic ili=il j+#k lli=#i-#k Iti=lll OR /lk lli=llj XOR /ik 3) Multiplication arithmetic
llj-=ll

lli=tl

Definj-tion, subst.itution
Sum

Logical

Subrracrion

surn (ar every bir of 32 bits) Exclusive 0R (ar every bir of 32 birs)

jxtlk

tti=lti AND #k 4) Functions

li

ll.l=lfi llfk
i=srN #i=cos

Product Quotient

Logical producr (at every bir of 32 bits) Sine (degree unit) Cosine (degree unit) Tangent (degree unit) Arct.angent (degree unit) Square root Absolute value Conversion from BCD to BIN Conversion from BIN to BCD
Rounding off

j /i i=TAN Iil j
[ /l

[/ij

ili=Rreni#j l/ t#kl i/i=sQRr[/lj] /li=ABS [//j

/li=BrN

/li=Rcnfrli
/li=FIX
[ /l
[,/l

[#

//i=RouND I /lj I

jI
j

#i=FUP

Discard fractions less than I Add i for fractions less than

-200-

,$,iffi#

System

variable

Positional inf ormation lst axis Tool offset value 2nd axis Tool offset value 3rd axis tool offset value
X axis servo position deviation Y axis servo position deviation Z axis servo position deviation 4th axis servo position deviation

Reading in

during

movement

#508 r

{t5082 #5083

Impos

sib le

#5I01
ll5LOz #5103 #5104

Irnpossib 1e

Abbreviation
Meaning

ABSIO

ABSl'17

ABSOT Couunand

ABSKP

End point

Command

coordinate of the preceding block

Coordinate
-J
D

present coordinate

Position
where skip

PresenE

coordinate

signal has turned on in the G3l block

coordinate
sysEem

LEU

Work coordinate system

Machine

coordinate
sysEem

tlork coordinate
sysEem

Work

Tool offset Tool length

of f set

Not considered

Considered

Considered

Considered

Cutter
comPen-

Tool top position

Tool standard point

Tool standard point

Tool standard point

sation (Note 1) The tool length offset amount is not the amount. in effect just before the block is executed; it is the amount for the current block. (Note 2) The block end point (ABSI0) of the skip (c31) is the position where the skip signal has turned on or the end point of the block if the skip signal has not turned on.

-199-

t) Prgcision

Always consider the precision of a custom macro function used for Preparation

of programs. a) Data format Numeric data handled by a custom macro is in a floating decimal point format as follows: F. " 1"1* 2 where M: l-bit sign + 31-bit binary data E: l-bit sign + 7-bit binary data b) Operational precision An operation executed once generates the following error. These errors are accumulat.ed with each repeated oDeration.
Operation format
a =
b^"c

Average error
I.))
. ^-10 X IU

Maximum
1+.OO

error
rU -10

Type of error

a = b/c
^-./vd-fu

q.oo x ru -10
i.24 x l0-q

1.86 x l0-g

Relative error
e

3.73 x l0-q

a=b*c a=b-c a=SINb b=COSb a=

ATAN

2.

, IU-

^ l0

5.32 x I0-I0
I.U X IU -R

mln.

(;,:)

-q 5.0 x 10 -

Absolute error

degrees

b/c
TAN

1.8 x 10-6

3.6xI0" -6

(note) Function
8) Notes on decreased

perforrns SIN/COS.

precision a) Addition and subtraction Note that when absolute values are used subtractively iloaddition or subtraction, the relative error cannot be held under l0 ". For example, suppose that the real values of /iI and JlZ are as follows. ttr = 98765432L0123.456 ll2 = 9876543211711 .777 Performing operation ll2 - /ll does not produce

since the custom macro has a precision of only eight decimal digits, the values of /fl and ll2 have a precision as lcw as approximately tir = 987 6543200000.000 liT respectively. (The internal values differ =.9876543300000.000, somewhat from the above values because they are binary numbers.) ll2 - lll = 100000.000 which generates a large error.
Consequently,

tlz-lll=67654.321,'

-202-

How

to use function ROUND 1) If function ROUND is employed in an arithmetic operation command or in an IF or WHILE conditional expression, the figure in function ROUND is rounded off (counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disrdgarding the rest) as is ordinary data with a decimal point.
(

Example)

ROUND [//2 ] is 4. 0 it ltz is 3 . 567 . 2) If function ROUND is employed in a command to an address, it is rounded off to the least input increment of the address. l
F

i/r=RouNDlr.2345l; /ll becornes 1.0. rF[#1 LE ROUNDlllZll G0r0 l0;

Ytmn

case. (Exarnple)

c0lx IRouNl [//r I I ; If /ll is 1.4567 and the least input increment of X is 0.001, this block becomes c01 Xl.45L. In this example, the conmand is the same as GOI X /l1; command. Function ROUND in an address command is used rnainly in the following

Program to move incrementally by /11 and ll2 oni-y and then return to

the starting point Nt //1 = I.2345i N2 tlz = 2.3456; N3 c01 X ill F100; : X moves 1.235. N4X//2; : Xmoves2.346.

I 5) Combination of arithmetic operations The above arithmetic operations and functions can be combined. The order of priority in an arithmetic operation is function, multiplication arithmetic then addition arithmetic. /ii=//j+/lk*srN llltl \[xampre L )
fF

N5 X -lll].+ll2l; : X moves -3.58, since #l + llL is 3.5g01. Since I.235 + 2.346 = 3.581, the progr.oo d6e" not return to thE-starting point by N5. Assume N5 X- IROUND Iii I ] + ROUND tll2ll ; It becomes egual to N5 X-[1.235+2.346]; and the program returns ro rhe starting point.

_rt\_ \7
,4\ _-_-\1/--

__-4\_ \:-/
arithmetic operations
Sequence of

6) Uoaifi,cation of arithmetic sequence using A portion to be assigned priority in an ari-thmetic sequence can be enclosed

in t l.

t I can be nested up to five times (including t ] used j-n functions). (Example 2) //i=sru t t tiij+litl*//!,+//rnl*/lnl (Three f o1d nesting)

(r)
{?)
\J/ v

/^

Sequence of arthimetic operation

- 201 -

(Lxampre l)
tn

ttI20=I; NI WHILE #T2O LE

N2 WHrLE //30
N3END 2;

IO

DO 1;

EQI

DO2;

Repeated ten times Repeated while variab le //30= I

llL20=ltl20+l
N4END

I;

(Note

1)

Notes on
OO

r,ru"a be specified before

REPEAT ptograrnming.

END m.

END 1; (No)

nn l.
D0 m and END m must correspond to each other in one program.

DO

DO

(No)

END

I;

DO

F\TN

1.

(No)

END 1;

-204-

b) Logical operation EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction. Therefore, be careful of errors. To determine whether or ' not //l and ll2 are equal in the above, for example, rF ltr EQ ll2 is not always evaluated correctly. When the error is evaluated as in IF ABS IIL _ II2 LT 5OOOO and the difference between /i I and tl2 f.a1-1s within the range error, both values must be considered equal. c) Trigonometric functions Absolute_Frrors occur in trigonometric functions; but, since they are not under l0 " be careful of integration or division after using'a trigonometric function.
The program flow can be controlled by using the following commands.
17.2.5 Control commands

1) D;{ergence (G0T0) tiJ IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTOn the next operation is When <condltional expression> is satisfied, executed in the block with the sequence number n in the same program. Sequence number n can be replaced by a variable or <Formul-a> . When the condition is not satisfied, the control proceeds to the next
b

IF [<condltional expression>] can also be omitted; and when it is, the control passes to block n unconditionally. The following expressions can be used for <conditional expression>.

1ock.

#j EQ#k #j NE iik #i cr /lk #j LT /ik /li cE i/k #j LE ltk

forward direction. 2) IteraEion WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m (m = L,2,3)

END
m

<Formula> can be used instead of lli and /lk, and a variable or <Formula> can be used instead of n. (Note l) In the block with the sequence number "n" which will be executed after a GOTO n command, the sequence number must be at the top of the block. Branching in the reverse direction takes more time than that in the

While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks DO m to END m are repeatedly executed, That is, Ehe condition of DO m block ls examined and when the <conditional expression> is satisfied, control passes to the next block. But when it is not satisfied, the block after END m is executed. WHILE [<conditional expression>] can also be omitted 'as with IF, and if omitted, blocks from D0 m to END m are executed eternally. WHILE l<conditional expression>] D0 m and END m must be used as a pair. Identification number m identifies this pair.

-203-

DO

ranges cannot be intersected.

:

no l.

DO -, -- ?.

.
FNtn I . !t

(No)

F\]n LL| v

L ,

A branch can be made from inside to outside a

D0

range.

nn t.
.f

coTn qnnn.
'vvv,

.
F\tn
1 rt
.

(yes)

N9000.....;

-206-

(?)

The

same

iden

if ica t ion number can

be

used many times.

no r.

tr'I\in r

(Yoe\

no r.

[i\u I;

DO

statement can

be

nested up to three times.

nn r.

nn ?.

Dn ?.
\ tcD/

END 3;

,c,t\U I;

trNn r.

Custom macro bodies or subprograms can be range. D0 statements can be nested up to custom macro body or in the subprogram.

called from inside a D0 three times more in the

arar t

c65. . .

(Yes)

G66.....; G67.....;
FNIN !L!U
1. I

(Yes)

(Yes)

nn t.

MOa rrlv.....

(Yes)

END 1;

17.2.6 Macro and CNC statements

The following blocks are called macro statement.s.

i) Operation command (block including=) ii) Control command (block including G0T0, DO or END) iii) Macro call'command (block including G65, G66, G67 or G codes calling macro) The following blocks have the same features as the macro statements: i) A subprogram call block (a block including subprogram call comrnand by M98, M, or T code) which does not include any conmand address oEher than O, N, P and L.. ii) g block which includes !'199 but does not include anv command address other than 0, N, p and L.

-208-

A branch cannot be made from outside to insj_de a D0 range.

GOTO 9000;

D0

1;

(No)

N9000.....;

FI\IN

1.

nn 1.

N9000.....;
(No)
END

I;

GOTO

9000;

207

(Example 3) N lXl 000;

N2i/ t0= 100;
N3Y I 000; N4/11 100= 1 ;

I'tacro statement

Block currently executed Firs t

CNC

alreadv executed

N5/i l=

l0;

N6X- 1000;

statement I'lacro statement executed Iulacro statement executed Second CNC statement

Execution of
macro stalement

Execution of
CNC statemcnt

When the second CNC statement after the block currently executed is the no-movement b1ock, macro statements up to that and next to the second cNC statement (i.e. the no-movement block) aft.er the block currentlv executed are executed. (Exarnple 4) N lXi 000; Bfock currently executed N2//10=100; Macro statement already executed
N3Y 1000;

N4/iIr00=1;

N5//l=I0; N6Z IOOO;

NTilli0l=1;
u8il2=20; N9X-i000;
Execution of
macro statement

First CNC statement Macro statement executed Macro st.atement executed Second CNC sEatement (no-movement block) Macro statement executed Macro statement executed Third CNC statement
N5

N4

Execution of
CNC statemenr

(b)
When the firsr- CNC statement after the block currently executed no-movement block, the macro stat.emenE is not executed. (Example 5) N lY 1000; Block currently executed

is the

N2ilI100=l;
N421000;

ll3/i l= i0;

N5/l1l0l=l;
N6i/2=20; N7X-1000;
Exccution of
CNC sratenrcnt

Ilacro statement already executed Ilacro statement already executed First CNC statement (no-movement block) Macro statement execuEed l'lacro statement executed
Second CNC staternent

-210-

Blocks other than macro statements are sometimes referred Eo as CNC statements. The nacro stat.ement differs from the CNC statement, in the following points: i) In the normal single block mode, the single block stop does not occur. (See item (3), Chapter 8) ii) The macro sEatement. is not regarded as the no movement block in the cutter

iii)

compensation c. The time of execution differs. iii) j-s described below in further detaj-l. a) The macro statement existing next to the block which does not buffer the next one (b1ock of non-buffering M code, or G3l block) is executed after that block is executed. (Example l) NlXt000M00; Block currently execut.ed N2i/1100=l; Macro statement
Execution

of macro statement

Execution of
CNC statement

b) llacro statement existing next to the block buffering the next one. i) When not in cutter compensation C mode When the current. block starts to be executed, the nexE nacro statement is imnediately executed. The macro statement up to the next CNC statement is executed.
(Exarnple 2)
N2/il i00=1; N3i/ l= l0;
N4X2000;
Execution of
macro statement

N1G0 1X1000;

Block currently executed Macro statement executed Macro stat.ement executed Next
CNC

statement

Execution of
CNC statement

ii)

When

(a)
When

in cutter compensation

C mode

the first CNC statement next to the block currently execut.ed is noc the no-movement block (block containing no movement command in the cutter compensation plan).
rT) \j.,/ When t,he second CNC sEatement i-s

The macro statement, after the first currently executed, is executed.

not the no-movement block. CNC statement. next to the block

-209-

A block including a macro call command (G65, G66, G67), arithmetic command and control command is not stopped even by single block operation. The following parameter setting executes a single block stop for commands other than macro call commands. This function is used for testins a custom
*^^-^ ulo!!v L^l-, uugy.
U

SBK}I

single stop is done in every macro stalement. A block in which a macro statement has executed a single block stop, is assumed to have no movement in the cuEter compensation mode. Sometimes incorrect compensation is performed. (This case is handled the same as it is for a movement amount of 0 although a move has been speci,fied.) L+) Optional block sklp l, appearing in the uiddle of <expression>(right-hand-side of an arithmetic formula, or j-n ), is treated as division, and not an optional block skip. s) Operation in EDIT urode The fo11o\,ring settings can be used to protect registered custom macro bodies and subprograms from accidental destruction.
When SBI(M=I,
0 0

I
PRG9

(Setting operation is effective) to I specifies that custom macro bodies or subprograms wich program numbers 9000 to 9999 cannot be cancelled, and edited. However, this affeets Ehe deletion of al1 programs during turning on. Setting
Reset I^lhen a cleared

status is produced by a reset, all local variables and eommon variables ill00 to if 149 become <vacant>. System variables //1000 x ll Ll32 are not cleared. Call condition and D0 condition are cleared by reset. However a cleared status cannot be produced by the parameter (No. 040, LOCC,
EMC).

7)

8) Feed hold

Display j-n PROGMM RESTART page The M and T code" rrqerl fnr errhnrsgl4m calllng are not displayed like

M98.

Macro statement execution stops at the end of the biock by turning on feed hold. (It also stops by resetting or by alarm generation). 9) Other llmitations a) Usable variables //0, llL to /i33, #100 to tll49 , #500 to /1531, sysrem variables.

h) V:1id veriable values Ilaximum value +10+ /

v/

c) Constant value-rralid in
I'laximum

Minimum value TtO-29

<FormuIa>

,t\ Arithmat-ir --i v)

' Precls].on Eight-digit decimal number e) I'tacro nesting

.value +99999999 Minimum value +0.0000001 Decj-mal point can be used

Maximum of four f) Iteration identification number 1to3 g) Nesti-ng of Llaximum of five h) Subprogram nesting Eight (Subprogram call and macro call)

-2r2-

* t
'i
;, *-

The following code can be used in the program codes used in conventional programs. 1) rso
Meaning
t
8
7

17.2.7

Codes and words used in custom macro

of the

cust.om macro

in addition to

* I
x

:.

I
0 0

Character
f
!

:
i
::

o 0 0 0 o 0

o
0

n 0

0
o

a
+.

OO
o 0 0
o

0 0 0 0 0

nl UJ
1l

ll

*
o

o o
o 0 0

tl

oo oo

.*
0 o 0

z)

ErA
8
7

Meaning
r
L

Character

Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter

(Data No. 0053) (Dara No. 0054) (Dara No. 0044) (Dara No. 0042) (Dara No. 0043)

i
1 s

0, the same code 0 as in the program number, must be used. The hole pattern ll, + and = in EIA code must be set as parameters (Data No. for . 0042 Eo 0044, 0053, 0054). Ilowever, the character with no punched hole eannot be used. Note that alphabetic characters can be used, but when used as /1, they are not used in their proper sense. Special words used in custorn macro are: . OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, ANd LE. AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE,
DO,
END

:
:

17.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body

I i

A custom macro body is similar to a subprogram; it is registered and edited in the same \^iay as a subprogram. The memory used to register custom macro bodies is included in the storage capacity of the CNC. 17.4 Limitations
r) MDI operation Macro call and subprogram call command cannot be specified in MDI mode. However, if I'IDI operation B function i.s provided, subprogram call command can be performed.
2) Sequence number search
1)

in the custom macro body cannot be searched for. Single block A block, other than one including a macro call command, arithmetic command, or control command, can be executed as a single block stop even when in the
Sequence numbers macro.

E i;

- 2rl -

18.3 Key Position

The location of keys is shown in the figure below.

trtrtrtrtr
tr trETE tr
trMMMM
Parameters

B-4rh-D

+l

18.4
1 L/

Each Address Restrictions

\ rf

rha nffeol No. is commanded by address D, the modal value of H is also rewritten. (Distj-nqs use of addresses D and H cannot be done.)

18.5 Setting of Setting

The format conversion can be set by setting parameters. By setting the page as " (SETTING 2)" and by rewriting of "TAPEF", it becones

follows:

as

TAPEF =
Ot

Format conversion v41id Format conversion invalid.

PARAMETER

02000 N0130

(SETTTNG 2)

PWE :O _TAPEF = 0

(0:

DISABLE

I:

ENABLE)

No. 18.6

TAPEF

MDI

Cautions of each Function

1) Subprogeram call To call .61 srrlrnrnorom i f a command of more than 4 digits is used for designati." *". (address P), the last 4 digits become the ";"i;""" if the subprogram No. and"lfot"*t"* times of repetitive calling (address L) is not specified, the tj-mes of repetition becomes one. .

-214-

18.

10/11 TAPE FORMAT

Memory

b) c)
F
i

operation of the progran registered by 10/ll tape format is possible for rhe following funcEions with setting of the seEting parameters. a) Cutter compensation (G40, G4l, G42)
Subprogram call (UlAl Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80
Points of Tape Format

G89)

18.1 Difference

Difference of tape format between 0/00 and 10/11 is shovm in TabIe below.
Function

IO/II
rGl7.
L

OM

Cutter comDensation

ictsi ic+ri D-; r LG42)

G19

rG40r

r Gl7
L

icrai ic+ti H-; r LG42)

G19

r rG40r

P:
Subprogram

(One

D: Offset call
M98

of X, Y, Z or 4th)
No.
;

P: (One of X, Y, Z or 4th) H: 0ffset No.

M98 P 1l1pppp ;
P

P_r_

P: Subprogram No. L: Times of repetitive call

Canned cvcle
i
ln.

111: Times of repetive call pppp: Subprogram No.

;
G73-r
t

rG73r X iCllrt, Z
rG8lr F I'
rlt
LG89I

ic76i 0L:

R_

X
Z

pL

ttGT4tl

I
i

i cgr

1G76

RP.n

t
F

L.Atl
K: Tirnes of repetition

&

Times of repetition

18.2
t

Address and Range of Command Values

which could not be used for 0/00 series can be used by format conversion. In this case, even if format conversion is set, restriction of 0/00 format is applied to the range of conaand values being used for the basic address, and if a value out of the 0/00 fornat range is registered, a P/S alarm is generated. Added basic addresses and their range of command values are mentioned in Table below. 0ther addresses will have the same specification as address in 0/00 series.
Some addresses

Function Times of repet.ition

Address
L

rnm

input

ineh input

0ffset
t
ii
e

No.

I - 9999 0-999

l - 9999 0-999

-2r3-

III

OPERATION

iii)

Manual handle feed (See Section III-4.4) By rotatlng the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance correspondlng to the degree of handle rotation.

?\ Toor movement by prograrni-ng

- Automatic operation (see Sect ion III-5)

Program

Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the ereated program. It includes memory and MDI operations. i) Memory operatiorf

Memory

Memory operation

After the program is once registered in memory, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is cal1ed memory operat ion.

2IB -

F I

1.

INTRODUCTION

1)

Manual operation a) Manual reference point return (See Sectlon III-4.1) The LNC machine tool has a position used to deternine the machlne posi-

tion. This position is called the reference point, where the tool is replaced or the coordinates are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned onr the tool is moved to the reference polnt. Manual reference point return is to move the tool to the reference point using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator's pane1.
Op"r"tor's panei

ooo
Orrl oo |

ooo

The tool can be moved to the reference point also with program cornnands. This operation is called automatlc reference polnt return. (See Section

rr-6.

I)

b)

Tool movernent by manual operatlon Using operatorrs panel switchesr pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be noved along each axis.
a

\
'i

Operator's panel

ooo oo
Orrr oorrr

Manual handle

ooo

Work

j
a

The tool can be moved 1n the followlng ways: i) Manual conrinuous feed (See Secrfoi ffi-+.2) The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed. ii) Step feed (See Sectlon III-4.3) The tool lDoves by the predetermlned dlstance each tlne a pushbutton ls pressed.

-217-

ii) Start and stop (See Section III-5.5)

Cycle start

Feed hold
reset

Automatic operation

Program Program

stop end

I
)

Stop caused by program

PressLng the cycle start pushbutton eauses automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. trrlhen one process machining ls completed, aulomatic operation stops.

iii) Handle interruption

Tool
r--.1

I
I

Workpiece

Depth of manual handle feed

Depth-ofcut specified

by the program

While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle.

-220-

&

a g

1i) I,IDI operation

MDI operation

After the program is entered, as an eornrnand group, from the I"IDI keyboard, the nachine can be run according to the program. Thls operatlon is called MDI operation. 3) Automatic operation 1) Program selection (See Secrion III_5.2.I)
Data format in
0 1001

memory

Program number

Work-l program
M30
0 1002
I

Program number Program number search

Work-2 program
M30
0 1003

Automatlc

operation
Program number

I.lork-3 program

select the program used for the work. ordinarlly, one program is prepared for one work. rf two or more progra*s are in me'ory, select the progran to be used, by searchlng the progra' number (Sectron rrr-10.4).

-2t9-

ili)

Single block (See Sectlon III-6.7)

w
Cycle

Tool

(.r/,/

r,/,4 (/^
t,/ ,/ )

lLz-t
Stop Stop

When the c]'cle start

pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation

cycle start again, the tool

cxecutes the

then stops. By pressing the

ne\t operation then

stops. The program

in this manner.

is

checked

Single block

b)

How to view the posicion display change without running i) M,achine lock (Sef Sections III-6. I and III-6.2)

the machine

ll *rT
w.zt

(//)

CRT/TTDI

V)

V7j tool
VA

Change caused by

machine movemcnt

The tool remains stoppcd, and only the posi'

rional displays of the axes change.

Machine lock

ii) Auxiliary function lock When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off' etc.) are disabled.

r-i:,'i =T
::,:l:

4) Program test

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine). a) Check by running i) Dry run (See Section III-6.6)

Remove the work, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on the operator's
panel.

i -'l-----

-- -- -L I --__ _ _t: L'

It

|t;

Drv run

ii)

Feed rate overrlde

Feed rate specified by program:

50 mm/min.
Feed rate after feed rate override:

Adjust the rate value smaller

than l0

that specificd

by

the

Program.

mm/min.

Overside is 20%

Feed rate overrlde

-221-

i)

Off

set value

(See ,sectlon

III-10.1.

Tool compcnsation Tool compensation

number 2

number I

Screen

Tool compensation
Keys

number

CNC memory

The

tool has the tool dimension (length, dianeter). When a workpiece is machlned, the tool movement route depends on the tool dlmensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that perrnit any grol to cut the work shape specified by the program. Tool dinension data is cal-led the offset value.
-] | | r I i

lrl

orir.t

value of the 2nd tool

-224-

5)

Parr program editing (See secti-on III-9) After a created program is once reglstered in memory, it modlfied from the CRT/MDI panel.
Program registmtion

can be correct.ed or

Program correction

or modification

Nl

T/MDI

N2.

h
{}
NC tape (program)
PPR

This operation can

6)

be

executed using the part program storage/edit function.

( See

Data display/setting

Section III-10.)
Data setting

display

Screen
CRTi
NTDI

Keys

Data

CNC memory

Data stored i-n

sc

NC

reen.

menory can be displayed and corrected via the

CRT/MDI

-223-

ii) Displaylng and setting parameters (See Sectlon III-10.4)

Parameters

Rapid traverse rate Positional control system Reference point return sYstem Backlash compensation data

Screen

KeYs

Pitch error compensation data

CNC memory

Machine

operation

The

functions have versatllity ln order to take actlon in characteristics of varlous machines. For example, CNC can specify the following:
CNC

I ) Ra,gld-l:la;zerse-rat-e--of=each, axis 2) Whether incre.qe_ilE-sy-stem is based on metric system or lnch system. 3) How ro ser @Avg -' Data to make the above speclfication is called pardmeters. (See Sectlon III-10.4) Parameters differ dependlng on machine tool.

-225-

iii)

Displaying and setting operatorrs setting data (See Section III-I0.2)

Setting data
M^irror image machining on/

olt

setttng

Screen

Keys

CNC memory

Operational
characteristics

Machine

operation

Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator rn operation. This data causes urachine characteristics to change. The above data is called setting data. iv) Data protection key (See Section III-I0.6)

Operator's panel

Data

CRT/MDI

protection key

Program

Offset value
Parameters

Setting data CNC memory

A key called the data protection key can be defined. rr is used to prevent the program, offsetr pararneters, setting daEa, etc. from being registered, set, modified, or deleted erroneously.

-226-

Display

i) Prograrn display (See Section III-1

I . 1. )

Active program
number

Program.tontent

The cursor indicates the currently executed location.

Program contents

01

01057 01245 01556.... 02006 02567 03456...,

002

01 046

Program list

The contents played.

of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled next and the'program list are dis(See Sectlon

ii) Current position display

III-11.3)

"l

ir ti.,
ll' +x
system

I x OOOO @O I Y oo@ ooo I z OO@ OOO

I

Work coordinate

CRT screen

The current posit,ion of the tool ls displayed The distance from the current position to the displayed.

with the coordinate values. target position can also be

iii)

Alarm display (See Section IIL-11. s) is displayed at bottom, pressing the button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below. l-ALAffil
When an alarm occurs and ALARM

AJqRI

iSSISE
O.ER TRA\jEL
OUER TRFIJEL

W : :
+X +Z

I'W

518 SA

iv) Parts count display When this option is selected, two types of run time
are displayed on the screen.

and

number of parts

ACTLH- POSITIOq CRBSOLUTE)

a2@@@ NATSA

x Y z

-1,2.54@ -42.5@A
@.a@@
.r.,-ETT,Sfl

RLN

rrF *r-

*.J

r;-ir;ln;tffit

-228-

.'. .'i::{

v) Graphic display (See Section III-12.5)

Display on the XZ plane

Display on the

YZ plane

Display on the

XY pla4e

Three dimensional display

Programmsd tool movement can be displayed on 1) XY plane

the follcfuing planes:

3) XZ plane 4) Three dimensional display

2) Yz plane

229

"tr' -

.,--l-..:

B)

Data output (See Section III-12)

Tape reader Portable tape read et

FANUC PPR Memory

/A\ V

Paper tape

Reader/puncher

ITANUC cassettc and cassette adapter

interlace

Floppl,disk

Automatic programming
system

The program, offset, parameters, etc. input in NC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.

Ir-. -;:.'

'-;'1.--.:

'

1.:

:,.
r

-230-

2.

OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Panel

2.1 CRT/MDl

The CRT/|'lDI panel consists

following illustration.

of a

CRT

display (9"

amber) and keyboard

as in the

l)

CRT/MDI

panel for

0-I1B
CRT character display (9")
Reset key

Data input key

EAEEE

EEE EtrEB tilEtr trBE

Program

edit key

Input key

@BOONME
Page

change key

Function key
I

Start/output key

Cursor

moYe key

2) Full

key
Reset keY

Data input key

I

POftR

Program edit key

l,*l
lo*'
g

EMMBBMH
Cursor move key
Page change

rtr
key

rtrtr

trEtrE
@tr@E
Function key

Input key

Start/output key

23r -

2.1.1 MDI

keyboard Table

2.1.1 MDI keyboard functions ('l12)

Func t

No. ( 1)

Name

ions

RESET key

Pr:ess this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, elc.

(2)

START key

Press this key to start the IIDI conmands, or to start the automatic operation cycle. Since this key's operating method differs according to the machine tools, refer to the rnachine tool builderts operation manual.

(3) (4)

Address and numerical key

INPUT key

Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.

When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the alphabet or the numeral is input once to the key input buffer, and it is displayed on the CRT screen. To set the data input to the key input buffer in the offset register, etc., press the INPUT key. Thls key is equivalent to rhe INPUT key of the soft keys, so the same results can be obtained by pressing either of them.

(5)

Cancel (CAN) key

Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT screen. When the address key or the, numerical key is pressed next, the position where the alphabet or the numeral is inserted next is indicated by rt lt
lflnen the cancel (CAN) key is pressedr the character immediately before the rr rr is cancelled.

Example:

I,Jhen

(CAN)

played.
(6)

the key in ut buffer displays >N00lxl0002 and rhe cancel key is pr ssed, Z is cancelled and >NO0ITIOOO is disThere are two kinds of cursor shift key described be1ow. * : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the forward direction. t : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the reverse direction.

Cursor shift keys

a')a LJL

Table

2.1.1 MDI keyboard function (2/2)

No.

Name

Functions
Two kinds of page changeover keys ar: de-

(7)

Page changeover key

scribed be1ow. + : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward direction. i : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the teverse direction.

(8)

Soft keys (option)

The soft keys have various functions ' according to the Applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. Left-end soft key [< I : This key is used in order to exit to the initial stats (condition when the function button is depressed when each feature has been operated vla soft
Right-end soft key Dl : This key is used when operate functions which have nor yet been displayed.
keys.

2.1.2 Function buttons Function buttons indicate

large items like

chapters in a document.

@
lTffid-l
I opsnr

Indicates the current position.

Conducts the following:

In EDIT mode ... edits and displays the program in the In MDI mode ... inputs and displays the MDI data In automatic operation ... displays command value.

memory

Setting and display of offset value, setting and display of variable. Setting and display of parameter
pane1.
and

@
t-otrR--l

dlsplay of diagnostic

daEa.
s

I I

Alarm nurnber display and setting and display

of soflware operatort

ALARM

GRAPH

Graphic function.
I

Several pages are inciuded in the chapter selected wlth each function button. The page is selected with PAGE button. (Note) The data displayed on the screen disappears when one of the function buttons and the lffil key are pressed. Thereafter, when either function button is pressed, the corresponding screen is dlsplayed again. When the unit is not used with the povrer turned on for long time, turn off the screen. This ls effective to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.

-233-

2.2

Machine Operator,s panel

The operatorrs panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations of a typical operator t s panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bv the machine

tool builder.

/A ((
.\j/
Si^'-'f

ra v

)'i

o
FEED

""2 ,ffi \r'*"^""6 I \ltll 1,n,, lt ri +x +\' o,''

,#,'JRu

o
+?

HOLI)

o
OFF

v(o66 \r' \/ v
-,,0.

roL&sTEpFr:Fr)

(N)
-

ON

\z/

\)l7 \)Z N
DR'Rt

'?'J!"!i,"

rHIiH{it*

,*vlR,, *,.,, ovERRtDE

((\l
IOO n \ ,/

\r/
m/mm

HA\DLE

STEP FEED

AMOUNT

""(N"'i
rFF ,.-=\

nN z'

\)/ MACHINE
LOCK

i dlD) o dlD\ \tll' .t,,. \lIeY o-\

FEEDRATE OVERIDE
JOG FEEDRATE

r:ro

N, v
HANDIE AXIS

I /-1\

\\\/

/rN-\

xloo

r"TJil3.',?*

Fig.2,2 An illustration for operator,s

panel

-234-

Table

2.2

Element functions

Name

Function By selecting an execution program then pressing this pushbutton, automat ic operation is started . During automatic operation, the lamp inclicating automat ic operation is on.
hlhen

Cycle start button

l'eed hold button

Mode selection but ton Rapi-d traverse

this pushbutton is pressed drrring automatic operation, the tool decelerates then stops. Select a mode, depending on the operation type.

By pressing this pushbutton, the tool is fed rapidly. By pressing this button, manual continuous or sEep feed is executed. By rotating the handle, the tool is rotated in the corresponding direction. By placing the single block switch in Ehe 0N position, automatic operation is executed by one block. By placing this switch in the 0N position, the optional block skip is executed. Bv placing this switch in the 0N posiEion, the dry run is executed. By placing this switch in the Oll position, reference point return is executed.
Lhen the rapid traverse override is to be executed, this

Jog & step feed

Handle

Single block
Optional block skip switch
h rrr ".J rr rn

Reference point

return

Rapid traverse override Step feed amount

Emergency stop

element selects the amounE of override.

This element selects the

amounE

of one steo of steo feed.

Bv pressing this button, the machine is stopped emergently.

Lock selection

Selects display or machine Lock.

hhen manual operation is to intervene during automatic operat j-on, this elemen! selects the amount of movement by manual operati-on be set in the absolute register or not
opera t ion.

llanual

ab

solute

Feed rate override

Selects the amount of override for automatic or

manual

Jog feed rate

Handle axis

Selects the manual continuous feed rate.

Sel-ects the axis moved bv the manual handle.

selection

Handle multiplying

selectlon

During manual handle feed, select the multlplier moving amount per step.

of the

-235-

2.3

Tape Reader

Portable tape reader j-s used for the tape reader'

2.3.1
Portable taPe reader

t)

Name

and description of each section

A

Tape

6.

Grips

3.

Capstan

opera.tlon swrtcn

reader

i _

,1

1- Cable stored

p a11

2.

Optical
reader part

r sourcell t[ Light 1| lll

Metal ll lil fittingA ll lll Twinderll lil

l-ll I ll

)3."., lock
l
10.

fl] ,111_

_-]---r

lj l: .l ,

13.

Readeri puncher

,lr ii

interface

lll

Lowering
Iock
Iever

Photo

amplifier

5. Tape
box

Fig.
Tabte

2.3.1

Name of each section

2.3.1

Descriptions {or each part (1/4)

Functi-ons

Light Sources

An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted for each channJl and for ihe feed hole (9 diodes A built-in Stop Shoe functions in total). to decelerate the taPe. The light source is attracted to the optical reader by a magnet so that the tape will be

held in the eorrect position. Thls unit can be opened upward, by turning the tape reader control switch to the RELEASE position (this turns off the magnet).
Reads data punched on the tape ' through a glass wlndow. Dust or scratches on the glass window can result in reading errors' Keep this window cLean-

Optical

Reader

Capstan Roller

Controls the feeding of tape as specified the control unit.

by

-zJo-

Table

2.3.1 Descriptions for

each part (214l.

No.

Name

Functions

4.

Tape Reader Control Switch

A 3-position switch used to control the

Reader.
RELEASE

Tape

The tape is allowed to be free,

AUTO

...

or used to open the light or source. When loading this unloadi-ng the l tape, position is selectbd. The tape is set to fixed position by the Stop Shoe. The feed and stop of the tape is controlled by commands from the Control Unit. During a taPe-controlled operation or data input from tape, the Light Source must be closed and this position must be The tape can be fed in the If forward reading direction. another position is selected, the tape feed is stopped.
selected.

MANUAL

Tape Box

A Tape Box is located below the Tape Reader. A belt used to draw out a paper tape is located inside the box. The paper tape can easily be pulled out using this belt.

6.
7.

Grips
I^linder

For carrylng the portable tape reader.

Used to supply or rewind tape.

-237-

Table

2.3.1

Descriptions for each part (3/4)

Functions

Metal fitting

Push

To remove rewound tape, decrease the internal diarneter by pushing the fastener as shown in the above figure.
Cover lock

While the tape reader is being carried, sure to keep the cover under this lock.

be

Lowering lock lever

I^lhen the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism secures the reader. As a result,

the tape reader is not lowered. The latch is locked with this lock lever. Thus, the latch is not released by raising the tape reader with the grips. I{hile the tape reader is kept under the 1ock, the lever remains horizontal. When storing the tape reader, release the lock by pressing this lever. Then, raise the reader wlth the grips, and release the latch. After the latch is released, the tape reader can be stored in the tape box. After storage, secure the tape reader wlth the cover lock.

-238-

Tabf e

2.3.1

Descriptions for each part (4141

No.

Name

Functions

ll
1')
'I ?

Cable storage block

The power and signal cables The cable length is I.5 ro.
Tape reader photoamplifier.

are rolled

up.

Photoamplifler
Reader/puncher interface adapter

200 VAC z 5 YDC power supply puncher interface adapter pCB.

+ reader/

2) Tape reader handling a) Preparations (1) Remove the cover lock (9). Raise the tape reader with rhe grips (6) until a click is heard. Then, lower the tape reader. At this t1me, the tape reader is viewed and seeured. Check that the lowering lock lever (10) is horizontal. @ Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage box (Il). Connect the signal cable and the poner cable to NC's reader/puncher interface port and power source, respectively. b) Tape loading IP Set_ the Tape Reader swirch to rhe RELEASE position. (, Lift the Light Source Uni-t, and insert an Nc tape between the gap. The tape must be posltioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.

Feed hole

<\__ -----l

Direction of tape feeding

d) Sto rage rr ) Store (2) Press

!y1r- the tape until the top of the tape goes past the capstan roller. check that the NC rape is correctry pbsllionei by the Tape Guide. (q) Lower the Light Source. (6) Turn the switch to the AUTO position. }x Suspend the top and rear-end of the tape in the Tape Box. \1-i c) Un1 oading the NC tape (i) Turn the switch to the RELEASE position. X (2) Lift the Light Source and remove the tape. /1\ Lower the Light Source.
(41

the cables into the cable box (11). the lowering lock lever (r0) dor,mward at both sldes. (, Raise the taBe reader wlth the grips (6) (ratch release operation). Then, lower it. (A t!!"t setfing the cover lock (g), carry the tape reader with the grlps (6).

-239_

2.3.2

1) Precautions on tape loading When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within rhe tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape should be set as shown in the figure below.

Note for handling tape reader

(
Ir tt
|
Set the tape so that this section
is under the glass
I

|l.-...'----.-'...---* lhe program which should he read

CR

window.

Actually, the end of block code (;) is in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.

2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable Don't disconnect or connect CNC +-) tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC and tape reader po!/er supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of CNC controller nay be broken. Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before dj-sconnecting or connecting the connection cable, accordingly.

2.4

FANUC Cassette BllB2lF1

Data can be stored in afcassette with bubble memory (Bl/82).

be input from this interface.

cassette co the NC. The interface

FANUC CASSETTE

NC data can also is reader/puncher

CASSETTE ADAPTOR

NC connecting connector

Fio^f

l-"-.

In the case FANUC cassette B1 or 82

See the FANUC CASSETTE Operatorrs Manual (B-53484E) for rhe FANUC CASSETTE operat ion. See Chapter III-12 in this rnanual for data input/output operation from and to FANUC cassette.

-240-

2.5 FANUC

PPR

An I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and prlnter in'one systep. Interface is reader/puncher interface.

Printer

Reel unit tape punch

Paper tape reader

Switch unit

FANUC PPR

Printer characters per line

Printlng
See the
speed
FANUC

Paper tape reader read speed Paper tape punch punching speed

150 ch/sec or more 50 ch/sec 40 ch. (dot lnpact method)

1.2 line/sec

PPR

Operator?s Manual (B-54584E)

for the

FANUC PPR

Operatlon.

3. 1)

POWER ON/OFF

Turning on the power q2 check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. lD Turn on the power according to the instruction manual of the machine tool data a Check that somefan is being displayed on the q!) Check that the motor is rotating.

builder.

CRT

screen.

NOTE: When

pressing the POWER ON k.y, do not touch any other CRT/l-DI panel Ja llvL keys. Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed t uv -^+ ts^"^L LvuLll keys are used for the maintenance or special operation purthem. Some pose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.

z) Tur ning off the power ri\ Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel /;\ Check that all movable blocks of the NC machine tool is stoppi.ng. (3) If I/O devices such as the tape punch unit are connected to the NC rnav chine too1, turn off the power to these devices. e) Contlnue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds. >.< (q Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to the machine.
)

j I

-242-

,* 'd
5

't,
-:';tj
:.i:,i:;.t

4. 4.1

MANUAL OPERATION
Manual Reference Point Return

,t-

Ser the

MODE SELECT

swirch to Ehe
MDI

JOG

position.

@ Turn on the REFERENCE

POINT

RETURN

switch.
ON

OFF

REFERENCE POINT RETURN Switch

Jog Feed

to reference polnt dlrection by each axis

Keep this switch on until th,e reference point is reached.

The tool Boves along the selected axis to the decelerated point rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference point at the FL at the speed. A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse
moti.on.

-243-

@ fn" machine stops at the reference point lighring the

RETURN COMPLETION LED.

REFERENCE POINT

/A/n\/A\

Yl\/_Y

REFERENCE POINT RDTURN COMPLETION LED

(Note

REFERENCE POINT RETURN COI.IPLETION LED light s at the completion of reference point return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN swirch is rurned off. (Note 2) The REFERENCE P0rNT RETIIRN COMPLETToN LED is extinguished by either of the following operations: (i) Moving from the reference point. (ii) Entering an emergency stop state. (Note 3) For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to reEurn the tool to reference point, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

1)

Once the

4.2
The

Manual Continuous Feed

machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows. Set the MODE SELECT sr^ritch to the JOG position.
MDI

o"'o

uo,,

lS1,o"
+Y

{ {N

\'rEP/HANDLE

@ S"t."t the axis ro be moved.

A A A\ V V V
+X

+Z

(())

/A

-X

/A /A V
-Y

_Z

\\

\r'

))

The selected axis moves in its direction.

(Note i) rf 3 axes are selected simultaneously by three swi-tches, I axis selected at first only moves because Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. (Note 2) when the mode is switched to the JOG mode while po\rer is oD, axis will not move even 1f it has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.

-244-

@ Select JoG feedrate

{^frtl\ .\ \t'Jy I,,uo

JOG

FEEDRATE mm/min

Feedrate

Position on rotarv switch

Metric input
mrn/min

Inch input inch/nin

0

0
I

)n
1t

0. 08

2 3

0. t2

5.0
7.9
12.6
20
32

n, 0.3 0.5 0.8

4
5

1.2

I
9

50
79

2.0
3.0

r + t
? F 3

10

t26
200 320
500

5.0 8.0 l2
20

lt
L2 t.3

i
a "{

:
i

t4

790
L260

30 50

t *
$ ;

l5

(Note 1) The feedrate error (about +3%) affects on the feedrate in the table
above.

-245-

@ Rapid traverse

To execute the rapld traverse by manual mode, push RAPID too.

TRAVERSE

button

.RAPID TRAVERSE

It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed. (Note 1) Feedrate, time constant and rnethod of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in
prograrmed
command

4.3 STEP Feed

/;\ Set MODE SELECT switch ro u,

STEp

posirion.
MDI

STEP

feed is available for the machine without manual pulse generator.

movement.
x1000

Select the desired amount of

xr0
XT

x10000 x100000

Input system Millimeter input Inch input

l\|

xl0
001
rnm

xl00
run

x1000
rnn

0.

0.01

0.1

L
0.

rnm

0.000I inch

0.001 inch

0.01 inch

I inch

'i

-246-

:9

*
lt: 3

@ Select the axis

Wtren

the switch is pressed once, the axis Eoves by the anount speclfied in lts direction. Then when the switch ls pressed after releasLng it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.
(Note 1) The feed rate is the same as the jog feed rate. (Note 2) The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse over-

rlde is effecttwe during rapid traverse.

4.4 Manual Handle Feed

The

feed rate can be adjusted precisely by usLng the manual pulse generator. ri) Set the MODE SELECT swltch to the IIANDLE position. s./

Awo

//

----l-t-

srep/HaNor-e

..*( @),""
O Select an axis.

i'
t
I

t t
F

-247-

O Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.

/A v

a
clockwise rotation counterclockrrise rotation
(The

a
* direction

direction direction varies with the machine tool builder.)

selector

Movernent amount In some cases, thejperatorrs panel is provided with the following switch. xl0 nultiplies the movement amount.by l0;x100 by 100.

xl0
X100 (Note 2)

Handle Multiplier

Movement amount

per degree
x100

Input

system

XI

xl0
0.01 nn
0.0O1 inch

Metrlc input Inch input

0.00I nn
0.0001 inch

0.1

nsl

0.01 inch

(Note 1) 9!6"1 amount may be usecl depending on machine tool. (Note 2) rf the handre is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there ls a difference between the handle rotation amourrt and the machine Ioovement distance. (Note 3) Rotating the handle too fast when X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.

-248-

4.5

Manual Absolute ON and OFF

Ihis switch selects whether the amount of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value. 1) Wtren the switch is ON.
Yaxis

Xaxis

The coordinate values change by the amount

2) When

the switch is

of

manual operation.

OFF.

x2 x1

The coordinate values do not change. (Exanple 1) Suppose the next tape comands
:

G0lc90xr00. 0Y100.

x200.0YI50.0
x300.0Y200.0

0F0 10;

a)

Wtren

Y-axls +100.0) at the

Y

block @ has been

executed after nanual oDeration end of movement of block O:

; ;

(X-axis +20.0'

r2o.o,2oo.o)

Qzo.o '250.0)

Manual

opetation( 1 00.0 , 100.0 )

200.0 , 150.0 )

When manual absolute switch is ON

-249-

b)

l.then the feed hold button is pressed while block @ is being executed, manual operation (y-axls +75.0) is performed, and che cycle start button is pressed and released.

( 200.0 ,225.0)
( 150.0 , 200.0 )

[{anual absolute switch ON

Manual operation

+
(

200.0 , r s0.0 )
( 1s0.0 , 125.0 )

1ioo.o,2oo.o)

c)

the feed hold button is pressed while block is being execured, manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) i_s performedr the @ iontrol unit is reset with the RESET button, and block @ is read again.
I'ltren
(300.0,275.0)
( 200.0 ,

225.0)
Manual absolute srvitch OFF

(l

sos ,200.0

.-\ -e_
lr{anual absolute srvitch ON
(

300.0 , 200.0 )

Manual operation
(

200.0 , l 50.0 )

( 1s0.0

,I

2s.0 )

( r 00.0 , 100.0

-250-

Fd, axls

When

returns.

there is only one axis in the following

cornmand,

only the

-ri
conmanded

Nlc0 1c90x100. 0Yl 00.0F500;

N2 X200.0; N3 Yl50.0;

?
I

I
Manual absolute switch ON

Manual absolute switch

OFF

e) When the following' commands are incremental conmands, operati-on is the same as when the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set to OFF.
(Note 1) The followlng occurs when manual operation
compensatlon.

ls performed during cutter

1)

Tfre I{ANUAI ABSOLUTE swl-tch ts OFF and cutter compensatlon is being performed. Afteilnanual operatlon ls performed with the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ln the OFF position durLng cutter compensatlon, autonattc operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if nanual novement had not been performed. The anount of separati;n eguals to the amount that was performed nanually.

""'ot

oo"r"rrol
/ /

Cutter center path

-251-

" ,.t:il .- l.-+T;i*

2) The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON and cutter compensation is being performed. Operation of the machine upon return to automatlc operation after manuaL intervention with the manual absolute switch in the 0N position during execution with an absolute command Program in the cutter compensation rnode will be described. The vector, the remalning part of the current block and the beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel the amount of manual movemenL performed is included in the calculations of the vectors of the two blocks subsequent to the current block. This also applies when manual operat ion is performed during cornering. a) During block executj-on
(Exarnple 1)

vaz

VO ,/l
r6

a\

t,

VBl

\--,/,
Pp

-/1vc2

\ \
Absolute command program Path

VBl'

Y
\
\

Tool center path

-(\ \

\rn
)\
Tool center path before manual operation

'\l '\ 'I

(\
Manual operation

.'i-t'I
\/
PH'

-252-

Assume
*
i

t'

that the feed hold was applied at. point Pr. whlle moving from p^ to of prograrmed path P^ , Po, and P^ and that th6 tool was manually ntved td PHr. The block end^polfrt Po moVes to the point Po'by the amount of nanudl movement, and vectors V-i and V-^ at P- also mo'7e to V-,t e.nd V-^t. Vectors V.' and V", between tff6 next tfso blo"cks Po - t,- anf,!,- - prrofre discarded "alnd new "vbctors V^r t and V^"t (V..rt = Y ni in t'he examlle aSove) are produced from the relaUton betwE'en Po*'- P""?nd Pn - Pn. However, since Vor t is not a newly calculated vecflor, co"rrect olfset "ls not performed trf block Pr' - PC. 0ffset is correctly performed after PC.
Po
(Example 2)

l'B2

l/rt
\..
t''cz

lrBl

s
\,-' \
'.
t"\

--\ \

\
Absolute command program path

vBl
*
(r

i.\.Y r. _==\41
Y.-.-\
,,.

vB2'..t /\\ /\

/,

\YB\
\\\ \\ tt\

a\

_t

Tool

\ ) center puth t

\\ \\ \

l'A2

ru\,i VAI
Manual operation

t.
f t
F E.

V,aZ'

Pn'

V.A.

l'

-253-

This is an example when manual operation is performed during cutter compensation cornering. VAZt, VBlr' and Vg2t are vectors moved in parallel wlth V62' VBl and Vg2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from VCt and YCZ. Then correct cutter compensation is performed for the blocks following Pc. b) Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated single block stop.
by

l'B2

VCl

VBl

Manual

operation

Vn

t'

,/

vst'

/4

\/" \
Absolute command program path

Tool center path

vectors Vg1 and vg2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation Subsequent processing is the same as case a) described above. An MDI operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation. The movement is the same as that by manual operation.

-254-

5.

AUTOMATIC OPEBATION
Operation Mode

5.1

5.1.1 Memory operation

Load the program to the memory (III-9) Select the program to be operated Set the node selector to the AUTO posltion
MDI

--r---.-\ Awo'/

,o,,(
@ Press the cycle start button.

srpp/rHNor_s

),""
Cycle start tamp lights

/A
@

V
hltren

Cycle start

pressed, automatic operat.ion beglns and the cycle start larnp lights. be entered frour the CRT/UDI panel- for execution.
I

5.1.2 MDI operation One command block can

1) For example, X10.5 Y200.5; a) Set the mode select switch to

ouro-

MDI mod.e.

|
b)
Push rhe l-pRocRAlt

/ ,4)t \-

/--]\

srEp/HANDLE

uo,,\
I burton.

\tt"y ^t

il\

1,o"

-255-

c)

Push PAGE button

to display a screen with llDr at the top left.

PROGRFT'I 0'rDI )
(|'{]DA_)
tr

|W

GAR
G1? P G96 A G94 H G21 N GzlAS

BI9
GBA

GE

Are.

?
I'IDI

d) p""h
e)

button. The dara, xlO. 5 , is inpur and displayed. lrf you are aware of an error in _the keyed-in number before pushing the fTNryil buttonr push the [CAil but,ion and key in rhe correcr number again. If notice an error after ttre I fnFUfl button is pushed, key in rhe data again from the beginnins. rTr rtr Fl -l-0-l "[ I . t-s-r kevs in this order. f) e""nl i s s

nl, H, H, E'"0 E push tt'tFEFl

I' L.l'
I

keys

in this order.

p) o/

I 1_3l'"dl ; I rnstr l-rllFuT-l key. The dara, y200.5 is input and displayed. If you pushed $tong number keys, correct the operation following the instruction described above.
PRSRtr'1 0,'rDI) X Y
(F0m_)

l'

I'

TW

LS.WB M.ffi

GMR GgI

GT? P G96 e

E1

t'l

G4A S G49 T

B8

9=
Rm.
I{D I

h) p"sn l-sranr-l burton.

Push the cycle start button on the machine operator's panel (depending the machine tool).
on

-256-

2) canceling Y200.5 of XI0.5 Y200.5; before pressing tn" I-SfAnfl button (cycle
D
+^' F L4r L
L.

r lVrr/ '' UUL r ^- \

and the [El,.N] buttons in this order. "r,a l-rllpJTl h) Prrsh the I S1'ART I brriton or the evcl e sf erf button on the machine opeI

a) Push the lTl u", ' tY

rator t s pane1. (Note) Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data again.

Wlth the MDI operati.on - B specification, it is possible to prepare a program and execute it similarly to usual registration program, in che MDI mode. l) Program preparation If the I'IDI program screen is selected, display of the format below is
PROGRAM

5.1.3 MDI operation-B

shown.

(}DI)

00010

N0010

00000

(MODAL)

c00 c17 F R
ADRS

c90 G2t G94 c40 1000 P Q

CURRNT

G49 c80

c98 G67 H M03

G54
G64

5300
T0i01
I'IDI

Tho nrnor'- No. t'00000tt is automatically inserted. Thereafter, prepare the program to be executed by operation similar to normal program editing.
Word search, address searchr program

Insertion, modification, deletion of word star! search, etc. Since a prepared program is noE deleted by a reset operationr perform the operation of Note 3) to delete the program.

Note 1) Operation on the regi-stered program is not possible. (Registration, deletion, punch, comparison, etc.) Note 2) The length of a program which can be prepared is limited to one page of

impossible. Note 3) To erase all the prepared program, operate O "DELETE".

a CRT screen. In the above case' the longest program is 6 lines with specification of the Parameter (No. 0028 MMDL), if the mode is switched to Ehar of no modal information display, up to t0 lines of program can be prepared. If the number of lines of program exceeds the limir, Z(ER) will disappear and insertion and modification operation will become

L)

2) Program execution

(mr1 00000 c00 xr00.0 I'103 i c01 2L20.0 F500; P9010 ; M98 20.0 ; c00
PROGRAM
o/

Y200.0;

00010 N00r0

(I'IODAL)

GOO G9O GzT c17 G94 G40 F 1000 P

G49 c80

G9B G67 H

G54

G64

M03

s300
r0r01
MDI

ADRS

CURRNT

3) Cautions a) Programs registered in the program tnemory can be called as subprogram. In thi-s case, the nest of subprogram is up to 2-loops combined with automatic operation (AUTO) program. (If a custom macro option is provided, up to 4-loops combined is possible.) b) If the custom macro option is provided, even in the MDI mode, custom macro program preparation and execution is possible. However, macro call is not possible. c) A program to be prepared in the MDI mode uses program memory vacant area. If there is no vacancy in the program memory, program preparation in the MDI mode is not possible. d) Programs prepared in the MDI urode will be erased in the following cases: i) In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed. ii) In AUTO mode, if memory operation is perforned. iii) In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed. iv) Background editing is performed. e) The editing operation during the stop of MDI operation will start from Ehe cursor position which makes start, but not from the current cursor Dosltion.

Set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermedi.ate point is possible. ) Push "START" key or Cycle Start button on the operatorrs panel. By tiris action, the prepared program will start. When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed, the prepared prograrn will be automatically erased and the operation will endr. By command of M99, return to the head of the prepared program is performed.

d rif

-258-

5.2
i
?

Starting Automatic OPeration

I',1emo

r)

ry operation Select AUTO mode. Select execution program. Press cycle start button on the machine operatorts

pane1.

5.3

Executing Automatic Operation

Afr er automatic operation is started, the following are executed: A one-block command is read from the specified program. (2) The block command is decoded. at The command execution is started. >< The command in the next block is read. (' Buffering is executed. That is, the cornmand is decoded to allow irnmediate

e
6

executi-on.

@ Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the nexE block can be started. This is because buffering has been executed. I{ereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the st.eps @ to

a;\ \v'

5.4

Stopping Automatic OPeration

There are two means to stop the automatic operaLion. One is to command a stop command in a program where the exeeution is to be stopped (See 5.4.1 - 5.4.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate button on the operator's panel (See 5.4.4 and, 5.4.5).

Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all exlst.ing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by specifying an | NC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)

5.4.1

Program stop (M00)

Similarly to M00, cycle operat,ion is stopped af ter a block containing I"10 1 is executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operatorts panel is set to 0N.
5.4.3

5.4.2 Optionat stop (M01)

l) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory. 2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.) 3) OnIy M30 The control is rewound to Ehe start of the program in memory operation. (This differs with the machine tool builder. Some machines indicate rewind with M02.)

Program end (M02, M30)

-259&,

5.4.4 Feed hold When Feed Hold

button on the operatorrs panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time. I Press the feed hold button.
Fecd hold lamp lighrs

Ileed hold button

I{hen pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cyc.le start lamp turns off.
Turns off

t()l
At i) ij-) iii)
5.4.5

Cycle start

Feeding stops if the tool is moving. Dwell execut.ion stops, if executing. l'1, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.

this tine,

tF

Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be rnade to the reseE state by using RESET key on the CRT/IDI panel or e*ternal reset signal. 5.5
Program Re-start

Reset

'i !i at
l!

il
fi

This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be re-started when a tool is 'broken down or when it is desired to re-start machining operation after a day off, and re-starts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used as a high-speed tape check function. I) When a tool is damaged (P tYPe): a) Press "Feed Hold" to escape the too1, and replace it with a new one. I'iodify the offset amount if it varies. b) Turn the program re-start switch on the machine operation panel 0N. c) Press t'PRGRI'I" to display the present program. d) Find -the program head. Press "RESET". , During memory bperation, select ttAUTOtt mode, and press o t. e) Press P "Sequence No." +, and search t.he block with Sequence No. to be re-starEed. When the same sequence No. appears many times, for examplet when the subprogram is accessed several times in searching Sequence No. in the subprogram, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequence No. in lower 4 digits as illustrated
below.

P.r

2 3 4 0 r 2

Frequency Sequence

No.

-260-

time, the upper 4 digits can be onitted. Furtherr the leading zero can be ornitted except Sequence No. when the frequency is specified. f) After completion of block search, the CRT screen is changed to the progran re-start screen.

When the block is the first

FR@Ffi

GA IM1B RESTffiT cDESTtMTIfi) I'fls a1a 6tL @ gls @r9 gv 6 w u4 x L@.m 65wgnwffi Y Ln.w d7? @. w2 @. gLs z L@.@ A&.444 UA 955 ... A A.W (DlSTFr.tCE TO @) ..r r.. r.. 2 x L@.w 3 Y Lg3.@L r gLgL @. s w 4Z e,@. 8...." A.@ 1A

t**''-l t""*".l I '*'-l

l"**l

**l

machining re-start posi-tion. The figure at the left side of the axis name shows the order (parameter settj-ng) described later when the tool moves to the re-start posit.iotr. M..... Shows M-code commanded recently 35 tirnes in the past. Shows M-code commanded recently 2 tiures in the past. T..... S ..... Shows S-code command in the last. B' . . . . . Shows B-code command in the 1ast. Display the most previously commanded code in the head. Each code is cleared with the program re-start command and the cycle stalt command in reset condi-

(DESTINATION) shows the position where the machining operation is re-started. (DISTANCE T0 G0) shows the distance between the current tool position and the

tions. g) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 c0) flickers. h) Check the screen, and if M, S, T or B code should be output, select the MDI rnode, and output M, S, T or B code from MDI. Each code in this case is not displayed on the program re-start screen. During memory operationr select "AUTO" mode, and check that the distance i) of (DISTANCE T0 GO) is correct, and that the tool does not hit against the work and others. If it is about to collide with an obstacle, move the tool manually to the location where it does not collide, then press '?Cyc1e Start" button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axis in the order set to the parameters (No. 0124 to OI27), thus re-starting machi.ning operation in succesWhen

2)

re-starting machining operation after the following cases (Q type) polrer is turned OFF once the emergency stop buEton is depressed once the coordinate system is changed after auEomatic operatj-on is previously stopped For example; I When G92 was set from MDI 2 When the coordinate system was shifted 3 When the automatic coordinate sysEem was set by the reference point return 4 When the coordinate system was nodified by "RESET". i) ii) iii)
When When When

sion.

/h

a)

When power Notes )

is turned 0N or emergency stop is released, perform all necessary operati-ons at that time, including the reference point return. (See

b) Move the tool manually to the program starting point (machining start point), and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the same conditions as at the machining start. c) lf necessary, set and modify the offset amount. d) Turn the program re-start SW on the machine operation panel ON. e) Press "PRGRM" to display the program. hhen it is not the specified one, search the specified program. f ) Find the program head. Press t'RESETtt. Du::ing memory operation, select t'AUTOtt mode, and press o t. C) Press Q t'Sequence No.t' +, and search a block with Sequence No. to be re-started. When the same sequence No. appears many times, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequency No. in lower 4 digits. h) Upon completion of block searching, the display on the CRT screen is ^L^'.^^l cnangeo +^ tne program re-start screen. Eo i) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 G0) blinks. j) Check the screen, and select the MDI mode if there are M, S, T or B codes to be specified, and output M, S, T, or B codes from MDI. In this case, each code is not displayed on the program re-start screen. k) During memory operation, return the operation mode to ttAUTO" mode, check that the distance (DISTANCE TO GO) i-s correct, and thar the tool does not LjrL d6qrrlD rrI '^''r-^t a fork and others when moving to the machining re-start position. If it is likely to hit against an obstacle, move the tool manually to the position where it does not collide, then press the cycle start button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axj-s in the order preset to the parameters (No. 0124 to 0127). (Note l) Under the following conditions, the program re-starting of P type is not executed. i) l{hen no autornatic operation is performed after power ON. ii) When no automatic operation is performed after releasing the iii)
emergency stop. Lhen no automatic operation is performed after the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted (the external work zero point

{
* I l
*.

offset amount is changed). P/S alarm (No. 9l) for i), ii) above or after releasing P/S alarm (No. 94 ro 97) P/S alarm (No. 94) irtleen the coordinate system is set P/S alarm (No. 95) When the coordinate system is shifted P/S alarm (I{o. 96) When the coordinate system is changed The blocks to which the tool can be correctly returned by the P type program startup are those for which coordinate system is set and modified just before the machining operation is interrupted. (Note 2) When the tool moves to the machining restart position by one axis with type P or Q,lt is possible to stop the tool each at a single block ,after completion of single axis operation. However, it is imposiible to intervene IDI there. l'Ianua1 operation is possible there, but the already returned axis does nof move by the returning operation. (Nntp ?'\ , T)rrrinr -t ----..g searching operation, the tool will not return to a correct machining re-start position if the conditions of input signal and offset amount, etc. are made idential to those for machining. Even with the single block switch 0N, searching operation is continued.

-262-

(Note

4)

Lrrhen

(Noce 5)

(Note 6) (Note
7)

"Feed Hold" is applied during searching or when re-setting operation is performed during searching or after searching, re-start Ehe program re-start operation frorn the beginning However, after search completion, resetting operation in the MDI node is according to the parameter No. 045: CLER. When the program re-start SI^l is 0N, the cycle start is ignored. Perform manual operation with "Manual Absolutett ON before and after the machining. As a rule, the t.oo1 cannot be returned to a correct posit |on under the following conditions. i) When the tool is operated manually with "Manual Absolute" OFF. ii) when the tool is operared wich the machine ro6t and Z-axis

(Note 8) (Note 9)

(Note

10)

iii) When the mirror image is used. iv) When the coordinate system is noE set at the beginning of a program in the incremental mode. v) I,rhen manual operation is performed in the course of axis movement for returni-ng operati-on. Vi) When the machine lock is released after directing the program re-start under machine lock conditions. vii) When the program re-start is commanded for a block between the block for skip cutting and subsequent. absolute command b1ock. viii) When the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted after completion of searching operation. However, for (3) above, resetting operation is possible in P type for the ON-OFF switched blocks. At this time, maintain the mirror image signal in the same conditions as during inEerruption. rn any case, it should be noted that no alarm is produced. When no specified block is found, P/S alarro (No. 60) occurs. When a move conmand is given with MDI before axis movement afcer completion of seareh operation, P/S alarn (No. 99) is produced. "RSTR" flashes at the lowermosE part of the CRT. display screen until Ehe last axi-s completes returning after the program re-starE is commanded.

ignored.

(Note I l) When the 4th axis is a rotary axis, the reference point return direction is rr-rr, and G28, G30 or subsequent incremental couunand is given just before a block for which re-start is commanded, the absolute position of 4th axis may deviate 360 degrees. (Note l2) When an absolute pulse coder is provided, no operation for reference poi-nt return is requi-red when poTrer is turned ON or emergency stop is
released.

5.6 Manual Handle Interruption

The movement by manual operation of handle can be done by overlapping it wiEh the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operat.ion mode.
5.6.1 Handle interrupt oPeration The handle interrupti-on can be done by rotating the manual pulse generator under

the following conditions. l) Mode Other than HANDLE and TEACH IN HANDLE mode. (Norrnal handle feed is done in JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode, if the manual pulse generator is effective. ) 2) Operating condition Operating conditions other than machine lock and interlock. 3) Handle interrupt axis selection signal Llhen Ehe handle interrupt axis selection signal (HIX, Y, Z) is turned on in the axis to which the handle incerrupc is attempEed. (The FANUC PMC is required for inputting this signat.)

-263-

$ 5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt l) Move amount a x

E
t:

The move amount by handle Interrupt is determined by the manual Pulse generator scale and the handle feed magnification (xl, xl0, x100). Since the interrupted move 1s not accelerated/decelerated, xl00 magnification is not selectable. The move amount per scale at xl magnification is 0.001 nur (mrn output) or 0.0001 inch (inch output). (Note) This move amount is 0.001 mrTr (nm input) or 0.0001 inch (inch input) in
manual handle feed.

This move amount is overlapped with the move amount by the automatic operation in the automatic operatj-on mode. 2) Relation with various signals The following table indicates the relation between various sienals and the movement by handle interrupt.
u r6.rdr

Relation
Machi-ne tool does turns on.

l-fachine lock

not

move when

this sisnal

Interlock Mirror
image

Machine tool does not move when this sienal

turns on.

Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction command, even if this signal turns on.

3)

Relation with various posirion display The following table shows the relation between various position disolav data and the movenent by handle interruDt.
Display

Relation

Absolute coordinate value

Interrupt pulses are not added. Interrupt pulses are not

added.

Relative coordinate value

Maehine coordinate value

Interrlrpt pulses are added.

4) Display of move amount by handle lnterrupt If the handle interrupt function is provided, one page of position display screen is added, and the move amount by the handle interrupt is displaved on *t^ l, +L LrlE aLrI -^-^ PdEE. The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently on the handle interrupt move anount display page. a) Handle interrupt move amount in i-nput unit systeur (rNpur uNrr) b) Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system (OUTpUT UNIT) c) Position in relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)

{
.r.

-264-

:5i

E 5 ?

d) Residual move amount

(DISTANCE TO GO)

HANDLE INTERRUPTION

02000 N0150
(OUTPUT IJNIT)

(INPUT UNIT)

x r.0000 Y 0.0000 z -0.3937 (RELATIVE) x 10.2468 Y -5.9713 z 2.3358

BUF AUTO

x 25.400 Y 0.000 z -10.000 (DISTANCE TO GO) x 5.9706 Y -13.4680 z 0.0000

The handle interrupt move amount ls cleared r"rhen the low speed reference point return ends every axis.

l[hen the lnput unit and output unit are different from each other, the machlne coordinate value (MACHINE) does not always become 0 when the high-speed reference point return (G28) i-s executed on the axis in which the handle interrupt move amount is not 0. However, the reference polnt return end signal is output even ln such a case. (The devtation of the nachine coordinate value is maximum 2 pulses when the high-speed reference point return ends.) If the handle interrupt ls done during the reference polnt return, lt is possible that the reference point return end signal ls output, even if the nachine tool does not return to the correct reference point yet.

5.6.3

High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis

-265-

6. 6.1

TEST OPERATION

AllAxes Machine Lock

When

the switch is set to the MACHINE LOCK position, move conmand pulses are suppressed. Consequently, the position dlsplay is updated as specified by the program, but the tool does not move. This function is used to check a program.
OFF
DISPLAY LOCK MACHINE LOCK

Display Iock/machine lock switch

(Note 1) When a G27, G28 or G30 command ls specified, the tool does not go to the reference point and the REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED does noE go on. (Note 2) The M, S, T and 2nd auxl-liary function (B) are executed.

6.2

Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)

When

the switch is set to 0N position, the axis does not move during manual/ automatlc operation.,r Position display updat.es as if the axis were moving.

SINGLE BLOCK

Machine lock on each axis (Z-axis)

6.3 Auxiliary Function

When

Lock

the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operatorts panel, M, S, T and B function operations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch. (Note) M00, Mol, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed, even if the switch is on.

-266-

6.4

Feedrate Override

With this dlal, it ls posslble to overri-de the feedrate designatdd by the program.

Feed Rate Override dial

Feed Rate Override dial

An override of 0 to l50Z can be applied. (Note 1) In some machines, thi.s switch is common to the jog feedrate switch.

6.5

Rapid Traverse Override

The rapid traverse override switch of lO0"A, 502, 25il and, Fo is provided. When the rapid traverse rate is 10 n/min and this dial ls set to 50y", actual rate becomes 5 n/nin, t'Fo" is a constant value specified by the mnchine tool_ builder.

Thls function is available in the following movements. t) Rapid traverse by G00 2) Rapid traverse durlng canned cycle. 3) Rapld traverse in G27 and G28. 4) Manual rapld traverse. 5) Rapid traverse in manual reference point return.

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

6.6

Dry Run

If thls sv/irch is set to ON in the Cycle Operatlon, the feed rate specified the progran is ignored and becomes as follows:
OFF

by

DRY RUN switch

Rapid traverse burton Rapid traverse button Rapid traverse button (Note

Prograu
ON/Opf'

Conrmand

Rapid traverse
0N
OFF

Cuttlng feed
I'Iax.
1) JOG
JOG

Rapid traverse
JOG

feed rate

feed rare (Note

feed rate

l) This
RDRN

speed can be ser to the rapid traverse rate by settlng paraneter No. 0001.

-267-

6.7 Single Block

This function stops the machine after executing one block of the program. t) Set the single block switch to ON.
OFF

Single block

block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again.
One

(Note 1) For G28 and G30, the single block function is effective at an lntermediate point (Note 2) I! a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of O, @, and (0 shown below. When rhe single block function is eFfective a-points O or @, the feed hold lamp lights.
F------t!)

+?
(D

G)l

t
,A I'

/A

- .-

Rapid traverse

.'-..-..-..-------.-...* Feed

(Note 3) Single block stop is not performed in blocks conraining M98P_; M99; and G65. However, single block stop is even perforrned in a block with M9BP or M99 command, if the block contains an address other than O, Nir P.

-268-

7.

SAFETY FUNCTIONS

7.1 Emergency Stop

If

movement

you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operatorts panel, the rnaghins stops in a movement.

EMERGENCY STOP

This button ls locked when pressed. Although it varles wlth the machlne tool builder, the button can usuaily be unlocked b-y twisting Lt. (Note 1) EI"IERGENCY sroP interrupts the current to the motor. (Note 2) Causes cjf trouble must be removed before the button ls released. 7.2 Overtavel
When

the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the nachine tool linit switch' or when lt enters , the stored stroke linit inhlbltion area spectfled by the setting data or the program, an OVER TRAVEL ls dl.splayed and the tool slows down and stoPs. In this case, press the reset button to reset the alarrn after moving the tool to the 'safety directlon by manual operation. For detalls on operation, refer to the operatorfs manual of the machine tool bullder.

-269-

8. WHEN ALARM 4RlsEs*

Check the following items i-f normal operation cannot be done. 1) h''hen error code is displayed on the CRT

If an error code is displayed, refer to APPENDIX 9 "List of Error Codes" to check the cause of the error. If the error number ranges frorn 000 t'o 128, the error is related to the program or setEing data. Correct the program or the setting data. 2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT There are cases in which the system is executing some process and it seems like the machine operation is stopping. Refer to Maintenance Volume, Section 2.4 rrCNC slatus display". 3) Refer to Maintenance Volume, Chapter 2 "Troubleshootingrr.

-2lo-

$ ttt.tt '

9.

PART PROGRAM STORAGE

&

EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.1 Preparation

for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation

The following preparatlon is necessary for the part program storage and edltlng

operation. l) Set the reader/puncher. 2) Set the data on reader/puncher. (See il.3) 3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY). Some system doesntt provide this key. 4) Set the operation mode to EDIT rnode. 5) Press the PROGRAM key and display the program.

g.2

Registering Program

to Memory

9.2.1

Registering with MDI key \ l) Select EDIT mode. \ 2) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 3) Key in address 0. 4) Key in the prograrn No. 5) Push the [-ttqsRT I key. With the above procedure, the program No. is registered to the memory. Thereafter, key in respective words of the program and press the [fnS-nT I key to register them.

f R\ \U)

9.2.2 Registering from NC tape 1) Se1ect EDIT or AUTO uode.

2) Set the NC tape on the tape reader. 3) Push the PRGRM button. 4) lJhen there is no program No. on the NC tape or when the program No. is to be changed, input a program No. (This is unnecessary if there is a program No. on the tape and lt is not to be changed.) i) Key in address 0. ii) Key ln the program No. 5) Push l-Nut I key. 9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory

(B)

0222

M30;

n?1?1

Mn?. rrv4,

Proceed in the same \ray as registerlng the NC tape to the memory. Data is read up to ER, and many programs are registered. Program No. is set as follows: l) When the program No. is not set from MDI. a) The value of O (N of the first block when there is no O) ls set as the

program No. b) When a program having no 0 nor N appears on the NC tape, a value obtained by adding I to the previous program No. is set as the program No. 2) When the program No. is set from MDI before the NC tape is registered. The value of 0 on the tape is ignored, and the set value ls set as the program No. The subsequent program Nos. are set by sequentially adding l.

27r

9.4 Program
trrlhen

Number Search many programs

there are

in the memoryr one of them can be searched.

or97
2

.-

Program No.

is searched.

1) Method t a) Select EDIT or AUTO node. b) Push the PRGRIi button. c) X.ey in address 0. d) Key in the program No. to be searched. . CURSOR e) Push r---'button. ' l+l f) When searching is over, the program No.searctred is indicated at the right top of the CRT screen. 2) Method 2 a) Select EDIT or AUTO mode. b) Push the PRGRM button. c) Key in address O. button. If it is kept pushed in the EDIT mode, the regi-stered programs dre disglayed sequentially. (Note) After displaying all program Nos. registered, the display returns to the first one. 3) l,Iethod 3 a) Select AUTO inode. b) Reset the machi-ne. c) Set the signal for selecting the program No. on the machine si-de at 01 to 15. (For details, see the instruction manual of the machine tool builder. ) d) Push the cycle start button. The program No. (0001 to 0015) correspondlng to the signal on the machine side is searched, and automatic operation starts. (Note 1) The program No. is not searched when the signal on the machine side is d)
Push
CURSOR

1fr"

lnnl

(Note 2) Alarm No. 59 is indicated if the program corresponding to the signal

on

the rnachine side is not registered in the memory. (Note 3) In the reset condition, the cycle operation larnp is off. instructi-on manual of the machine tool builder.)
zAr

(See the

9.5 Deleting a Program f \1 \

\v/

To delete a prolram registered in memory.

t) Set the mode select swltch to EDIT. 2) Push the PRGRM button. 3) Key in the program number and push the I keyed in number will be deleted.

DELET

I button.

The program with the

272

9.6

Deleting All Programs

(9)
and

To delete

2) Press the PRGRM button. 3) Kev in address O. a) xey in I:1, lTl, [-tl, l-tl,
t'1

all programs registered in memory. l) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.

Fl

and push

the t DELEr 1 button.

.gi
3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

;Punching a Program

To punch out a regi-stered program in the memory l) Make the Eape punch unit ready. 2) Set the punch code by setting parameter

Set the mode select switch to EDIT. Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. Key in O. Key in the program number. Push the l-ffiTl punched out.

button, and the program with the keyed number will

ER

be

ER

Q)t 3 feet of feed holes

Program

t (z)

3 feet of feed holes

(Note 1) The space code for the TV check is automatically punched. (Note 2) Trro CRs are punched after LF in ISO code.
LF (Note
CR
CR

3) If the feed of 3 feet is too 1ong, push the TeAil button to stop ing feed holes nidway. (Note 4) pushing the I RESETI iutton stops punching.

punch-

9.8 Punching All Programs

To punch out all the registered programs in the memory. l) Make the tape punch unit ready. 2) Set the push code by setting parameter.

3) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 4) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Key in the address 0.

27_1

6) Key in

Fl, [-tl, l-e l, l-tl, l-tl,

Fp.
/o/\ \/o)

and l-srARr

lbutton
spaces Program

3 feet of feed holes

- -

I foot of
Program

rogram

rogram

I foot of spaces
(Note) The order of punehed programs is irregular.

3 feet of feed holes

9.9

Sequence Number Search

Sequence Number Search finds a sequence number halfway in a program and it is usually used to start or restart the program at the block of that sequence number. A block or blocks skipped during the search does not influence the NC; the coordinate values, M, S, T or G code, etc. in skipped blocks do not change the coordlnate values and nodal values of the NC. So specify necessary M, S, T or G code, coordinate system setting, etc., in the first block at which the program is to be star$ed or restarted with the Sequence Number Search. The block searched for by sequence number search is usually at a break point in Ehe processlng. If it is desired to search and start a block during process, examine the condition of the nachine tool and NC and specify M, S, T and G code, coordinate system setting, etc. from the MDI as required.

ol1

11

02222 . ,. N4030

...

03333 ....

I,II'

\/")

Object sequence
number

Searched from its beginning (only within the program)

Selected
program
number
1\

Sequence number search for a program in a) Set the mode select srvirch to AUTO. b) Push PRGR-II button.

menory

274

c) Select the program number to which the sequence number to be searched for
belongs.

Program selected Range searched

to d) when the program contalns the sequence number; Otherwise, execute Program Number Search to select a program number to whlch the
Proceed

d) Key in N. e) Key 1n the sequence number to be searched for. . CURSOR .button. f) Push the 61 lYl g) The sequence number searched will be displayed top right on the
(Note
the search is completed.
1)

sequence number belongs.

CRT when

Coordinate values and modal data are not altered during a search. Specify these data from the MDI after the search ends as requlred. (Note 2) During a search, the following items are checked. o Optional block Sktp ' P/S Alarm Check (Alarur No. 003 to 010) (Note 3) M98Pxx:o<(subprogram call) is not executed during a search. Searching for a sequence number within a subprogram called frou a currently selected program in AUTO mode generates alano No. 060.
01234

Subprograu
05678

M98 P5678

N8888

In the above example, searchlng for N8888 generates an alarm. 9.10

Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape

Turn on the protect k"y, execute the same operation as the registration of NC taPe lnto memory, and the reglstered progran and NC tape will be co1lated. 1) Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO). 2) Lock the protect key. 3) Load the program tape to be collated into the t.ape reader. 4) Push PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Push fINPUfl burron. 6) When the tape contalns several programs, collation ls performed rrntil ER (7") is encountered.

275

(Note I) A rnismatch during collation generates rhe alarm (p/s No. 79). (Note 2) If'the above operation is executed wi th the protect key released, the program will be registered into the memoryi the prograrn will not be co 1lated.

:.'

{
r

'1

j
+
:

9.11

Insertion, Changing and Deleting the Word

:
,.1

This function is used to modify a program in memory. I) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 2) Push the pRGRM key. 3) Select a program. When it has been selected, proceed to (a); otherwise, perform a Program Number Search. 4) Search for the hrord to be modified. A scan or a word search can be used. 5) Modify, i-nsert, or delete the word. (Note 1) Words and editing unit A word includes an address and the number following it. But in user macros, the concept of a word is not clear. Consequently, "editing unit" is used. This is the object of modification and deletion in one operation. One scan causes the cursor to indicate the beginning of the editing unit. In insertion, data is inserted after the editing unlt. Definition of editing unit I) From one address to the next address exclusive. 2) The address is an alphabetic charaeter, IF, WI{ILE, GOTO, END DO, =, or; (EOB). According to this definition, a word is also one editing unit. The word referred to in the following explanation on editing should strictly dle termed the editing unit. (Note 2) It is not allowable to conEinue a program again after changing, inserting, or deleti-ng data to the program while temporari.ly suspending the machi-ning by single block stop, feed ho1e, etc. during the execution of the program, otherr,rise the program is not always executed correctly as specified by the program data being displayed on CRT after the continuance of rnachining. If it is desired to change memory data by parE program editing, change them under the reset condition, or perform a reset operation after editing without fail, before executing the program.
9.11.1 Word search 1) Word scan
CURSOR \ rusn tnef+ a) N I 'tcey

F
.* ?:

{ .L
11

$
E * a

*
:
t

Nl 234X1

00 . Ozl250

3 S I 2 ; N5 67 8M03

tr TTEE E
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor displayed below the address character of a selected word.

It:

276

. o) vusn cne

CURSOR

I-T_l

burron

N1234X100

. 0z L250;

S5

6;

N56 7BM0

=-J

'-1-

E tilEE

The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; trrie cursor is displayed below the address character of a selected word.
(Example)

Scanned here.

PRGRFT4 CEEffi t lllz34 X1n.6 ZIm s12 ; FE6?t I'[l3 ;

YPP. t

ffiB N123
t

r--l
c/
Keep pusnlng cne
CURSOR

EDIT

r-;t

key to make a continuous search. [Fl . PAGE d) Push the|-+_l key ro display the following page and search the first

. or the

CURSOR

of word the page.

PAGE e) Push the r:*l key to display the preceding page and search the first -lf' word of that page

f)

Keep pushing

.n" ffi tvtt+

o. ffi

key ro display one page afrer anorher.

-217 -

2)

Word search

A specified word is searched for from the current position in the

direct ion.

forward

Nl 234Xi00
Currently searched word (word indicated by the cursor)

. 0ZI

250 ; S I 2 ;N5 67 8M03

SI2 to be searched for
Search dlrectlon

a) Kev in address S. . b) Key an I H I ano f-t]l. IF .l .. (Note i) Keying in only SI does not execute a search for Sl2. (Note 2) Keying in 59 does not execute a search for S09. Key in S09 to search for S09. "0" of S09 cannot be omitted. n\ Prrchino k"y -!..." CURSOR 1---- starts the search. The cursor is displayed v,/ ! uolrrrr6 rh- -il" below S in SL2 at the end of the searctr.

Til
I

rf pushing the PlslR 1"r, the search starts 3)

Search

backward.

A specified address is searched for from the current position in the forward

for

addresses only

direction.

N1234XI 00. Oz 1250; s t 2; N567I M03 Current searched -word (word indicated by the cursor)
a) Key M03

to

be searched

for

in address M. Pushing 1ir" CPT9 key starts the search. The cursor is displayed below -l+l aE the end of the search. M . CURSOR If pushing the ;:-1" key, the search starts backward.

4) Returning the cursor to the head of a program

O

I 1 0'0
Head of program

0 0 0 I X L 2 . 3 4 3 Z I 5 . 6 7.; c 0 I X I 2

5;

Current searched word (word l-ndIcated by the

cursor
)

*
(r

-218-

::

..{

't

a)

Merhod I

b) Method 2 c)

Press th" I ngSET I key when the EDIT mode is selected and E.he program screen is selected. f,he program will be displayed from its head after completing the heading.
Execute a Program Number Seareh. Method 3 Set a Pushthe mode select s\^rirch ro d Key the PRGRM keY. () in 0.

AUTO

or

EDIT.

Push the

ffi*

u"r.

g.11.2 lnserting r*rorU

( I ) \u/
T15

to be inserted

Nl 2 34xl

00 . O21250;
To be searched for

S1 2 ; N5 57 8M03

1)

2) Key

l-r I Keyinlrlandl.. l-tl

Search for or scan the word immediately before the insertion location in T (an address to be inserted.)

r:r

LJ-l'

4)

ru"tt I rllsFill tey.

PRMRtrl Wt
j422. ,

W Zlm
i

NL?5/.

NI23/ xLn.A s12 :

t66?Er 1tr3 ;

N}1.

EDIT

Before Insertion

-279-

PRmRFf1 Wj
s12
;

0ffi8

N123

N1234 X1uB.6

Zrm Tl5

t'66'Ul

j@., z

ttt3

EDIT

After Insertion
By a push on "INPUT" k"y instead of ttINSRT" continuous words can be inserted according to the setting of parameter (No. 18, EDTB=1). However, finally, press ttrNSRTtt or t'EOBtt key.
(Example)

Y456.F100; can be inserted at a time.

Key

i" col t iNpurl xI23. t rNpurl y4s6. t iwuil

Froo

Iroal'

cotxt23.

(Note) The last word qE a block can be inserted as follows: lTlt1 (instead tTtil Key in zt00 of 2100 [ rNSRr lt r.gj lrtlsnnrl. rhe resulr is l;6; | the same. ) /(d\ 9.11.3 Changinsaword ( \t \u/
)

N1234Xl

00 . Ozl 250T 15 ; S I 2
To be changed to Ml5

1) Search forlscan the word to be changed. 2) Key in the address to be changed. In the above exarirple, key in address 3) Key in data. ( [l )

M.

4) Push IETER I ;"P

N123

4x I

00

. oz L 2 5OEJJ; s I 2 ;
Modified program

-280-

9.11.4 Deleting .

*rrd (

8) UI
I 5;
S

Nl 234X1 00 . 0zI250T
21250

I 2;

to be deleted

2) Push the l-onrEr I butron.

l) Search for/scan the

word

to be deleted.

9.11.5 Deletins up to an EOB

a\ D)

Program

after deletion

Current sea rched word (word indic ated by the cursor) N

23

4l

x I 0 0 . 0 z L 2 S 0 r I s M r 3 ;l s I Z ;
deleted

Pushing the I flR I and the I DELET I key deletes up to an EOB and causes rhe cursor l_"* I to move to below the address character of the next word.
e.11.6 Detetins arcars

ffi1

( 8 ) \u/

The area from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified sequence number is deleted. Current searched word (word indicared by the cursor) N2233 to be keyed in
I
I

N1234M10;M15xl0

0;

Tt2;N2233'S12;

Area to be deleted

1) Key in address N. 2) Key in, 2, 2.3, and 3 in this example. 3) Push the l-5ftEt I key. The program up ro the N2233 block is deleted. cursor moves to the address next Eo the deleted block.

The

281

P,n I
'j

i,)l

i'g.lZ \__

Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.

By setting the setting pgI3*9!9f_ffe;i-9:

EDIT mode. When EOB is keyed in and ttren [-ttqSRtl key is pressed, the sum of the current sequence No. and Ehe incremental value (value set to SEQINC of parameter No.

I " it is possible to automatically insert a sequence No. to each block-when programming via the MDI keyboard in

0550) is automaticalty stored in the memorv. I) Set the setting parameter S-EQ to I.\
4\

z) >erecE. trIJrt mooe. 3) Push I PRGRM I key. 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in the initial value of N, e.g. 10. 6) r,-,sh [-JNsRtl key. 7) Insert each word of the dat.a in one bIock. lti-l 8) Key i" I l.i" l.
9

) Push [_]N$!J key. EOB is stored in the memory . In case 2 is set at the incremental value parameter, Nl2 is inserted to the next line and indicated.
PRmRFT'1 Wt NlBG92nYAnt
ul2
cEtulS

twrz

EDIT

(Note (Note

l) If

N12 is desired qgt lo be inserted in the next block in the example above, push tft" FELET-l key ro delet Nl2. If Nl00 is desired to be inserted to the next block instead of Nl2 in the example above, key in N100 and push fgf,fgRl key. Wirh rhis, Nl00 is registered, and the initial value is changed to 100.

9.13

Background Editing

This function permits background editing regardless of mode selection and CNC nnn.lirinnc (in automat.ic operatlon or not, etc.). No alarm which takes place during background editing affects foreground operation. Conversely, background editing is not'affected by an alarm in foreground.

-282-

9.13.1 Registration from MDI

l) A push on the soft

program screen displays the background

key "BG-EDT't

after pushing El ". the right side on the editing screen.

)
Eq^eq NZZgq

PPO@fr1

B.i-EDIT

Ql,{=.

,-*.1;\[;"lf-_-][_-lE;;1
2) Specify a program to be edited. a) When generating a program: 01234 trNSERl-], f or example b) When edi ting th.e existing program: 3) Program edit
0L234

FiUT|]

[TER-fl, for

example

The program editing is' the same as with the foreground program editing operation. Graphic conversational programming can also be carried out in the same manner as with the foreground program editing operation.

PRmRFf4 N16 G92

BG-EDIT

xB YA AA t r@ W xLA6. YtW. t l.EB @1 ZLA. FtA.s ,

W.t

AAAA2 NAZZA

Mg Y1g.
r'5 t'114 ;

rB T61S1

f'133
;

Y7AWXAY8, t@;
ADRS. NUTO

4) Background edit end It is necessary to save a program completely edited in background into the
foreground program
r3-d:END-l
memory.

':1i4::..j
5:
-1.

-283-

9.13.2 Registration from

CNC taPe

Registration operation is the same as r^Iith the foreground editing operation method, but in this operation, the Program is registered to the background editing area. The background edit end is required to register the program into the foreground program qemory like the back ground editing operatj,on. t) l-01 TProg;mNolf INPUf-l or [-rNpurl : It is registered from CNC Tape. 2) [BG-ENp ]
9.13.3 CNC tape punch CNC tape is punched

in the same procedure as in the foreground operation. As function is concerned, it is possible to punch out a program belng far as this selected in foreground as we11. O E I Prosr"' No.l l-srenrl : The specified program is punched out. The whole program is punched out. [=;te3l l-sreRrl @

(Note

In background editing, it is possible to edit programs other than a program being selected in foreground. If an attempt is made to edlt a program being selected in foreground, BP/S alarm (140) occurs. On the contrary, if an attempt is made to select a program being edited in background, in foreground (program number search and program access by external signal), P/S alarms (059, 078) occur in foreground. (Note ,\ No program can be input/output by the external start signal (MINP) or by the I/O device external control during the background editing. (Note J) For the background alarm, a P/S alarm similar to one which is seen during foreground program editing occurs; however, "BP/S" is displayed on the data rinput line of the background edit screen in order to discriminate between background and foreground alarms. This alarm is reset, automatically by editing operation (some input
1)

(Note 4)

operation) . background editing is carried out, a vacant area (not used) may be present in the program memory. This area cannot be used as program memory as it is. Therefore, it is necessary to compress program memory in order to eliminate such a vacant area. This program memory compressing operation can be performed by a push on the soft k.y ttC0NDNS" or ttRESETt' on the foreground program direcEory screen. (Note 5) During background editing, all programs cannot be erased.
When Menu Programming

9.14

To assist programming in EDIT mode, the following menu is displayed on the CRT. 1) When G is keyed in, the G code menu is indicated on the lower half of the CRT s creen. 2) htren a G code selected from the menu in (t) is input, the standard format of the one block corresponding to the G code is indicated. For example, when G is keyed in after inserting N102, the G code menu dD shown below. is indicated on the CRT.

-284-

PROGRtrI'1 8L% , N10G92ruYAz3t r@ W xlw. Y-fi.

bFa ./

NPB
t

NWI38

Gffi : POSITiSIIi
FA2
G81 GA3

: 1i1.g1A 1P1. : CIRCLLAR IH_. ClJ : CIRCLL-CR IH-. Ccl.t @4 : DITELL

l.r_t'1.
G
ilt
I

<O)
<O>

after G04 can be sequenrially indicared by pushing rhe lTl ot l-+l k"y. For example, when selecting G0l, key in 0 and l, and rhen prr"n rlrsnr-l I but ton. At this time, G01 is inserted to the memory as shown below, and the standard format of the G01 block is indicated on the CRT screen.
The G code menus
PRIERFI1 UI@ t N1BG92}Y8zlJt f@ GPB XLW. Y-9. fa6 861 ffitffi
t

l2B3

X(Z,Y)_ 4re.
@1

tl_ s_ T_
EDIT

Insertion of x

one

block is cornpleted by keying in as follows:

I -rr^nm III\JKI |

_ l-IffiTl,

Ir -I

l-NsnT-],

TltrnDl I

lvu

PRmRFr.l ffi7n Btn t N1BG92reYAZIjt FeA GA Xtn. Y-fi. t fBa Ga1 >@. Y-&. FW M ;
N48

12248

EDIT

-285-

'.)^'^'
..g.q.-Program Loading by TEACH lN Mode
HANDLE mode

,n" rEACH IN JOG mode and the rEACH IN If the prtyu."t-op;;;;;;;;l are added. In these modes, the machine position obtained by the manual operation is stored in the memory as a program position and a program can be created. The words other than X, Y and Z (O, N, G, R, I, J, K, F, H, II , S, T, P, Q, and EOB) can be stored in the memory in the same way as that conducted in the EDIT mode. l) Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 2) Move the machine co che required positi.on. 3) Push the PRGRM key. 4) Enter the address ,X.* 5) Push the [-rllsnf Lt ey,-F.r, the machine position along the X axis is stored in the rnemcif!. X10.521 Absolute position (for metric input) Xl052l Content stored in the program 6) Push ril I, I INSRT | [-E-lI and I fNSnf I tey, then the machine position along the |; |I IIi Y and Z axes is stored in the memory.
Note 1) After entering the address X, 'I or Z, enter a numerical value and push I INSRT I key, then the value entered is added to the machine position. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. Note 2) The coordinate value registered in this way will be an absolute coordinate value. Enter G90 (Absolute programming) at the beginning of the program. {r Note 3) The command to be entered before and after machine position shall be the same ' entered byregisteringoperation as that conducted in the EDIT mode before and after the machine position, respect.ively. f t tn Note 4) Insert the EOB ( l;6; | ), the block registration completes. Example) 01234 Ni G92 X Y Z ; ... Point P0 N2 c00 c96-x-v-; ... Point Pl N3 cOl Z_Fm; ... . . Point P2 N4 1402:
P0 0----{P
I I

t^

t
I
I I

rz

The program of the above examplezis stored in the following procedure. I) Set the setting parameter "SEQt'to I (For the incremental value parameter, t'It' is assumed. ) 2) Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 3) Make positioning at P0 by the manual pulse generator. 4) Push the PRGRI'I button. 5) Enter the address O, numeric value 1234, and push tftu l-fllSnfl t"y. Then the program number OI234 is stored in the memory 6) Enter the address N, numeric value l, and push the I INSRT I key. The sequence number I is stored in the memory as the initial value of the automatic insertion.

:l

i
'*
:#

ii

*
i

-286-

E
s

7) Enter the address G, numeric value 92, and push tn" Fllffl tey. Then the G92 is stored in the memory. 8) Enter the address X, and push tn" f-iGiill t"y. __lEnter the address y, l-rNSRTl, address Z and push rhe I l;l I u"r. Then the machine position at p0 is stored in rhe memoiyl9) After the step (8), the EOB is inserred and inpur of rhe block AL234 Nl G92 X Y Z ; completes. 10) ny ttre step (g), NZ is stored in the memory by the sequence number automatic insertion function. ll) Make positioning at Pl by rhe manual pulse generat.or. 12) Enter the address G, numeric value 00, IINSRTI k.y, addrels__lQr_ numeric ^ I rxsnt value 90, r--=:----------- I key, address X, ENSRI_I k"y, address Z, ana I i;i I in this
sequence so that the 2nd block N2 G00 G90 X

N3 is stored in the memory afrer srep (12). 14) Make positioni,ng at P2. 15) Enter the address G, numeric valg1Ol, I lusnEl k"y, address Z, I rtqsnr I tuy, -T1]]'l| address F, numeric value 300, l;i; I in this sequence so that the 3rd block llvul N3 G01 Z---F300; is stored in rhe uemory. 16) Then the N4 is stored in the memory. Enter address l'I, numerie 02 and to store the final block N4 M02; in the memory. With lhis, registration of the program example is .completed. The contents of the program can also be checked in the TEACH IN mode with the same operation as in the EDIT mode.

i3)

memory.

; is stored in the

lEUpl

PRIERF}T CRELATILE) x 3.ffi Y 23.T23 z 4.fi

OIZU
N1
t

x Y z

(AESO-UTE)

OLZU

rW

23.723

3.ffi -a.ffi

69 XtWY8ZIZzffi, f Gm Gg >gEP5 Y2Tf8 t fS m1 Z-fr FW t t.]4l'@i

z

Are.
Tlt{D

-287-

9.16

Conversational Programming with Graphic Function

Programming

9.16.1

l) Depress the PRGRM function button. The screen will be displayed shown as follows if the other program has not. been entered. If the other program has already been entered, the currentlY selected program will be displayed on the screen wi th the usual format.
PRGAI1 W IAM

S
EDIT

OT

Fis.9.16.1 (a)

2) After inputting address O and the program number of the newly registered program for entry, depress the EOB key. When desired to entry the program of program No. 10, forFinstance, depress the EOB key after inputting 0, 1, 0 by key operations. A new program is then entered. 3) L{.hen depressing the soft key "IAP" on the screen of Fig. 9.16.1 (a), G code menu shown as following in Fig. 9.f6.1 (b) is displayed on the screen.
wla vm
C1,J

PRIERFI1

Gffi :

GP1 : LINEAR IPI-. G@ : CIrctLtrR IPL. GA3 : CIRGIAR tPL. CO! B4 : U,ELL G16 : CFFSET \JALLE SETTII'G 61? : X/ Pt-$E G18 : Z< PLSE Gi9 : YZ PIAE PB : IFrchl @1 : I,ETRIC @11 : REF. POINT RETLRN CtEg< nm' EDIT

POSITIONING

<o) <0)
<C)

Fig. 9.16.1 (b)

(b), input G code corresponds to the function 4) On the screen of Fig.9.I6.I one desires to program, by key operations. When desiring positioning, for instance, the G code menu shows G 00, so input G 00 by key operations. If functions desired for programming are not displayed on t.he screen, depress the Page Key I-+l and then allow to display the next G code menu. Repeat this operation ti11 the function desired for programming appears. If the function desired to program is not G code, leave it without key After Ehat, when depressing the soft key "I,IENU", a detailed screen of the G code inpuE by key operations is displayed. An example of the detailed -288operationb.

screen of G00 is shown in t.he following Fig. 9.16. I (c). When inputting anything by key operation, the detailed screen standard format is displayed. (See following Fig. e.16. i (d) )
PROGRFT'I

of

the

Gm : POSITIONIT

WrA tWB Y,:,

PRMRff
STCNMRD
FORT'IAT

WL 122ffi

c@GG6 x L@. Y 56. _z -H OFFSET NO,

t1

,'

(x, ,'

-GGGG XY
z
JI

HF R14 JK P8

1/ B/'

E.'-'-rlnn

EDIT

Fig. 9.16.1 (c)

Fi9.9.16.1 (d)

(c) or (d), allow to travel 5) In the detailed screens of examples Fig.9.l6.i the cursor ti11 obtaining required data while depressing the cursor key. During this time, the address in the figure corresponding to data shown by Input numeric data by depressing numeral keys, the cursor will flicker. depress the INPUT key after completing to inputting one piece of data. Then, the inputting of one piece of data is completed. By repeating these operations, input all data required for the G code. (See following Fle.9.16.r (e))
PRIERNT GZI : POSITISIING WGGG x L@. Y z
H l1
J. B

WBLA

ISLA

54.

OFFSE

f NO.

<x,Y,z, r' "

>

7/

ull

E'B{,lnf-_.1
Fi9.9.16.1 (e)

b)

?\

With screen 9.16.1 (e), depress the INSERT key. Thenr orr block of data has (b) is registered in the program nemory. G code menu in Fig.9.16.I displayed on the screen, and another block of data is permitted to 'be entered, so repeat the operations from (4). After the registration of all programs is completed, depress the leftmost The programs that have been registered are then displayed on soft-key S] the screen, converted into the conventional format. Depress the RESET key to return the programs to the program head.

-289-

:,1?ff

9.16.2 Confirmation of

program

1) Depress the PRGRM function key. Search the program for which confirmation is desired by using the MDI key. (Depress the cursor key l-+l after inputting address 0 and the program number which you desire.) The program is displayed on the screen in the usual format. (See following Fig. 9.16.2 (a))
PROGRRh WLA t frtw eaa xraa. Yffi. tffi t"t?.2 ;
owlg tW
:

gI
EDIT

Fis.9.16.2

(a)

2)

After allowing the cursor to travel till the heading of the block for which confirmation is desired on the interactive conversation type screen, depress the soft key rrIAPrr, and then contents of its block are displayed by changing them onto the inte;:,active conversation type screen. (See following Fig. e.16.2 (b)) When contents of a block are displayed on the interactive conversarion type screen, eontents of its next block can be displayed on the interactive type screen by depressing the Page Key | * | (for instance) on the screen of Fig. 9.16.2 (b). Besides, by depressing the Page Key | + I as the same, contents of one block before can be also displayed on the int.eractive conversation type
screen.
F@r4 ffi : POSITIOTIING G G ffi-6 z
H 11 5,'
J/

wlg rwm

OFFSET

NO.

z'

<x,Y,z, .r'

B/
ull

Fis.9.16.2 (b)

9.16.3 Editing of

program

While displaying the contents of the one blockr s program on the interactive conversation type screen, their contents can be edited. Editing of the program with the usual format was executed by one word units, including basic insertion, replacement and deletion. On the oEher hand, on the interactive conversation type screen, they are all edited by one block uniE.

-290-

Replacement of block

Allow contents of the block desired to replace to be displayed interactive conversatj-on type screen. After allowing the cursor to traveI till the heading of the block one desires to replace on the usual format screen, this can be executed by depressing the soft keyttIAP"; or from the beginning, by depressing the soft key rrIAPrr and bringing up the display of the interactive conversation type screen, and then repeating to depress Page Keys l-t-l or Fl. When replacing data, except G code which will be a headline, input new data by depressing the INPUT key after allowing the cursor to travel to the data required by using the cursor key and inputting a numerical value by depressing the numerical keys on Ehe interactj-ve conversation type screen. When replacing the G code itself which becomes the headline, depress the soft k.y "G.MENU", then the G code menu is displayed. Accordingly, select the G code required and input its numerical value by operation keys. For instance, when replacement is required to t.he feedrate, the G code menu shows G0l, so input 0i by k"y operation. After that, when depressing the soft key "MENU", the detailed screen of G codes that are already input will Accordingly, refer to 9.16.1 (l) and input dara. When having completed the above replacing operations, depress the ALTER key. By this operation, one block of the program can be replaced just as it is. ,\ Insertion of Block Allow to display the block just before the section desired to insert a new block by using the Page Key on the interactive conversation type screen. On the usual format screen allow the cursor to travel till just before the section desired to insert a new block by using t.he Page Key or Cursor Key. After allowing to display the G code menu by depressing the soft key "c.MENU", refer to item 9.f6.l (4) and 9.16.1 (5), and inpur data of a new block. When completed the above inputt.ing operations for the data of one block, depress the INSERT key. By this operation, data of one block is inserted just as it is. ?) Deletion of a Block I A1low contents of the block for which deletion is desired to display. After that, by depressing the DELET key, contents of the block displayed in deleted from the program memory. On the screen, the contents of the next block is displayed with Ehe interactive conversation tyDe screen. 9.17
Number

aPPeare.

of Registered Programs
programs:
125 programs

Number

of registered

(Standard; 63 programs)

9.18

Part Program Storage Length

i) Part program sEorage length Part program storage length

?\

can

No. of offset pairs 231641991200 pairs

Lo / 20 / 40 / 80

I r20 / 320 n.

be seleeted

from

the

followine:

-29r-

9.19 Editing

Operation Using Full Keys

The following operations have been allowed by full keys:

1) Editing of custom macro B 2) I'lodification and insertion of numeric value only. (However, deletion
search cannot be made.) 3) Several words and blocks can be edited simultaneously. (However, the of characters edited should be within 32.) Note) Set the STDP of parameter No. 0014 to 0.

and

number

A program is edited when the program protection of EDIT mode has being cancelled in the same way as in normal editing. But the following points differ.

a) Shift key Press thettSHIFTttkey once to change the key i-nput cursor, which appears next to the key input data, from norm"t tt.tt tottntt. In this status, press the key with symbols or characters marked on the lower right corner of key top to a11ow those symbols and characters to be input. Input one character to a1low the key input cursor to return to normaltt<tt. Also, the key input cursor can ret.urn to the normal tt.tt by pressing the shift key again after pressing it once. b) Cancel key Press t.he eancel key I'CANrr once to delete one character in the key lnput If the key input cursor is shifted, namelytt<tt, one character is deleted and the shift status is cancelled at the same time. (The key input cursor returns to the normal tt.tt.) c) Deletion, changej-and insertion of prograrn When the custom macro which has already been input is editedr the cursor can be moved to the position where only t.he following characters and symbols are located: I) Address 2> // of top of left side of substitute statement 4) Top characters of IF, WHILE, GOTO, and DO One blank character is set before characters and symbols above on the CRT screen. A program is deleted, changed, and inserted with the area fron the above cursor position to Ehe position one character before the next cursor position being one unit.
Example: Position of cursor area.

3) /, (,=,

N00I xr-//100
?Ft = Noo+

Tzt

5oo7 12 ]x .r2til31 ; N003 x-sQRr t#313 x ltt4

i-itz z+r : NOOS 7S = 1 +1 - /t10 ; rr itlT Ne 0l coror0 ; wHrLE ufz LE 5l DOl ; Ttzooo + +2) = +7 * To ;

+ rll

Itz=#2+I;

lnoT

-292-

Note 1) The cursor does not stop

Example)

within
;

parentheses.

ThE-cursor does not stop at these posidions. However, when the parentheses are not a pair, the cursor moves as

( XI00. Y100.)

following:

in

the

Cursor forward

LTo' jto9-tti"

.rrr"or does not stoD here.

Cursor backr"rard ( x100. Y100.

- T---:f-

,ihe cursor srops here.

Note

2) The cursor position

Example) By

uay be changed by rnodifying programs.

nodifying rhe 2200 ia Xt00 z:200g using the 100,'ALTER" key, the XI00200 is obrained I{owever, there is no change in the following case; when insertion is made using the 100 ttINS'r key at the 2200 of X100 2200 ; , XL00 7200 f 001 resulrs. Never perform this procedures at the program number.
two

d) Abbreviation of words of custom macro B When the words of custom macro B are changed and inserted, the top characters or more can be used instead of the whole word.
Namely,
wD XO

c0 SQ BI R0 -

\^II{ILE, XOR, cos, SQRT, BIN, ROUND,

manner.

WH

TA AB FI EN AN

WI{rLE, AND, TAN, ABS, FIX,

END

GO

AT

- ATAN BC - BCD FT] - FUP

S] -

GOTO

SIN

Exaurple) Keying in WI{ [AB [/|2]LERO I#3ll is rhe same as rhar of WHILE [/lzl LE ROUND t#31 l. A1so, rhe program is indicared in rhis

IABS

e) Control out/in
Comments can be

Example) O000i (FANUC

wri-tten in programs. 0 SERIES) ;

Note l) The words of macro cannot be abbreviat,ed. However, do not input them by dividing them into two or more sectors since they rnay be converted. Note 2) The ttOtt, tt tt can also be input. Hotrever, cautions must be taken when inputting them by dividing thern into two or more sectors. Note 3) No period can be input af ter the rort and rtNrr even within the parent.heses ( ) .
f

-293-

10. 10.

SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Offset Amount

10,1.1 Setting and display of tool offset values (function t eyr lottretl)

Parameter IOF (No. 0001) selects absolute input and incremental lnput. I) Input of absolute offset value. a) Push [oFsgTl tey. (For the soft key, press the soft key lorrsEfll when the other screen is displayed.) b) Push a PAGE button to display the requlred page where the requlred offset number is given. W }'W FFSET Fn. mTA mTA ttr. ffi A-W LA.W _ffir Atg ta.effi w -L.ZzB a.w af. -n-w n3 g.em a.w atz w n.w 813 ffi A.W a.m a14 re 8.2ffi 6.m Bls w7 a-?ffi g.w aL6 m 0.828 MTLFI- POSITIO.{ (RELRTIL) x a.w Y s-m
l.O. Wl

s.w

=
I'IDI

c) Move the cursorto the offset number to be changed.

Method I

Continuously
Movine the
Page.

push

the

CURSOR

key.

The

cursor will

move in seguence.

[Tl

CURSOR

l+l

cursor beyond the

page changes the screen to the next

Method Key in

and

offset

number,.and press the

l-rNFilfl tey.

d) Input the offset value (input with decimal point is also possible) with the data input keys. e) rush [-tNPuT I key.- The offset value is input and indicated. (Exanple) I,"hen 15.4 is input for offset No. 25.

W |W FFSET h0. mTA mrA t'tr. g.w !5.M ar? Jffi m A.W 8.W a1B @7 A.m s-wB 619 @ a-m a.wB w @ 6.WB A.?n at a3a a.zffi 6.w @. a-m 431 a3 z.nB g.w 632. a-m w4 (RELATILE) rcTLH- PGITISI Y 8.w x s.w g.w z htr. m=
MDI

-294-

2) Input of incremental offset value Input an increase or decrease value of the offset value a) Shift the cursor to the position of the offset number to be changed. (Same as l)-c)) b) Input the incremental value (input with declmal point is al-so posslble) with the data input keys. c) Push t INPUT-I button. ih" ittcremental value is input, and the offset value corresponding to the sum of the incremental value and the current offset value is indicated. This value indicated is the new offset value. (Exarnple) Offset value currently set z 5.678 Value input (incremental value) :' 1.5 New off set value z 7.178 (= 5.678 + 1.5.t (Note) When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the neht offset value does not become effective immediately. It becomes effectlve after the H code specifying the offset No. corresponding to it is designated.
1O.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: lFFRAfvtl)

t) Set the mode select switch to

MDI.
MDI
STEP/HANDLE

2) Push

key.

3) Push

PAGE

button to display the setting parameter.

PFRFT'ETER

@mt@B

-FEu( = 6 RELn/ A

(SETTII.G 1)

= TIIN = O IS[l = I

IlGl = A (g:l'tl l/o =g

(6:EIA

lsu )

Ir.0{)

r.o. RE\x

4) Push a CURSOR key and move the cursor to the iten to be changed. 5) Input I or 0 according to the following description. a) REVX Setting X axis mirror image I : X axis mirror image 0N 0 : X axis mirror irnage OFF b) REVY Setting Y axis mirror image I : Y axis mirror irnage ON 0 : Y axis mirror irnage OFF

-295-

'

-}.'.\

-(Note) If X and Y axis mi.rror images become effective, the X and Y axis movement directi,on in AtlTO mode is opposed. However, the movement direction in manual operation or the movement { direction between the reference point and the intermediate point in auto- i'{{ matic reference point return are not opposed. i
-1

c)

TVON

d)

TV check when registering a program from a paper tape into a memory. 1 : Perform TV check 0 : No TV check rso Setting code, IS0 or EIA, when punching a program in the memory onto
nrnar l-tna

{
1

e)

I : IS0 code output 0 : EIA code output

INCH

f) L/o - Setting reader/puncher device for prograrn input/output with reader/puncher /' interf ace. Select a device of a channel I set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STEP2 (parametaer No. 0002) and BMTED (parameter N0. 0552) . Select a device of a channel 1 set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STP2 (parameter No. 0013) and BMTE1 (parameter No. 0553) . Select a device of a channel 2 set by parameGrs NFED, and STEP2 (paramet6,er No. 0050) and BRATE2 (parameter N0. 0250). SeIect a device of a channel 2 set by parameters NFED, and STEP2 (parameter No. 0051) and BMTE3 (parameter No. 0251). g) ABS c.-.l+nL'i-^ between absolute and incremental comrnands in MDI mode. owrLgrrarrS I : Absolute command 0 : Incremental command h) sEQ Qarrino eequence number insert.ion automatically when registering a program in the memory using the keys on the MDI panel. (See section III-14. ll for details) I : Perform automatic sequence number insertion. 0 : Does not perform aulomatic sequence number insertion. i) Setting the tape format of l0/il series conversion. I : Tape format is converted. 0 : Tape format is not converted. 6) Push I INPUT I key. Each paramerer is set and displayed.

Setting a program input unit, i-nch or metric system 1 : Inch 0 : Metric

-296-

15. MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION

15.1 Outline
The amount of machine movement according to the stress other than motor driving power in servo off condition is reflected to various coordinate system of CNC

control unit. In CNC control unit, the nachine movement is followed up as if move conmand r{ere com-anded. So, when the servo po\^rer is turned on, the uachine position and the NC coordinate system value match each other. So, by using this function, it is possible to move the machine by hand using the mechanical handle. For this function, PMC is required.
15.2 Follow-up
Signal *FLWU

DGN.

No.

0104 *FLWU

*FLWU

I
0

Not follow up in servo off condition Fcllow up in servo off condition

This signal becomes effective when the system is provided with the mechanical handle function (optlon) and PMC. When the circuits for signals SVFX - SVFZ are closed, the servo off (No current flows to servo motors) condition is set. Since the positioning control does not function under thiF condltion, an error is produced when the machine tool moves. For thls deflection arnount processlng, the following remedles are selectable according to whether the clrcuit for signal *FLWU i.s open or closed. o When the circuit for signal *FLWU is closed; No follow-up function is alive. The servo error amount ls recorded on the error counter. In this case, the machine tool moves to cancel this error when the circuit for servo-off slgnal has been reset to be open. o When the clrcuit for signal *FLWU is open;. The fo11ow-up function is a1lve The present posltlon of the control unlt is changed to reset the error counter to zero, assumlng that the command has been applied by the moving amount of In this case, the machine tool remalns devlated even after the circuit fot servo-off signal ls reset to be open. However, since the present position of the control unit changes ln correspondence to the rnachine tool position, the machine moves to the correct position when the absolute cormand is applied
next.
No

the machine tool.

follow-up functlons durLng the

emergency stop

or servo alarm.
0

15.3

Input'Signal

DGN.

No.

0105

SVFZ

SVFY

SVFX

svFx, Y,

zo

XrYorZaxls X,YorZaxls

servo is turned off. servo ls turned on.

-330-

14.2.3 Tool path drawing

1) Depress the soft key lmFfl after depressing the function the following will be displayed on Ehe CRT screen.

key

GRAPH/AIIX

wt rcnLz x a.m Y g.w z a.w

S
flJTO

BT

the automatic operation. Note 1) Since the graphic drawing is done when coordinate value is renewed during automatic oPeration, etc., it is necessary t.o start the program by automatic operation. When necessary to execute only drawing, '
Note 2) rn case the feed rate is high, drawing may not be executed correetly, decrease the speed by dry-running, etc. to execute drawing. Note 3) When the aut.omatic operation is started under reset condition, the program is executed after deleting the previous drawing automatically. Note 4) When necessary to display a part of the progran, search the display start block by the sequence No. search, and set the sequence No. of the end block to the PROGRAI'I STOP N of the graphic parameler before starting I the program under continuous operation mode.

2) The following machine movement are drawing by starting

therefore, select the machine lock

mode.

-329-

14.2.2 Details of graphic parameter

1) AXES

. Set the plane to plot.

2)

AXES=0Select(1) AXES = 1 Select (2). AXES = 2 Select (3). AXES = 3 Select (4). AXES = 4 SelecrJ5). AXES = 5 Select (6). The rotating angle (horizontal , vertical) for isometric di.spaly of 5 and 6 is fixed at 45" in both cases. RANGET (uax. (MrN.

xJ= l=

),

)(=

l=

Set the maximum value/ninimum value of graphic range desired to display the screen. o Setting range: 0 - +9999999 (unit: 0.001 nm or 0.0001 inch) In this case, the value of MAX needs to be greater than that of MIN. Set the graphic ruagnification 3) SCALE o 100000 (unit: 0'01 range: 0 - ioooo0 (unit: 0.01 tine) Setting
4) cRT

on

.ENTER
[= |= /,=

Set the coordinate value on the work coordinate system at graphic center. Llhen MAX and MIN of MNGE are set, the values will be set automatically once drawing is executed.
s)
PROGRAI"I STOP

.t

Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partially The value is cancelled automatically once drar.ring is executed.

dispaly.

6) AUTO ERASE

1. Erase .the oldest drawing automatically when the automatic operation is started under reset condition 0. Not erase automaticallv.

* -328-

Example

Gc (=30mmJ0mm)

Graphic origin

Graphic origin = work coordinate

origh

When the corninand dashed line (---).

ls given, the graphic point ls The tool path is shor.m with broken line for rapid feed
G92

of

moved

as

shown by the

cutting feed.

and

with full line for

14.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter

14.2.1 Setting procedure of graphic parameter

Various parameters need to be pre-set for plotting. These parameters can be set under any mode.

l) When the funcrion butron l@E-7ffi]

is depressed, Ehe parameter setting screen is displayed. In case the screen ls not displayed, depress the soft key the screen is displayed. I

following graphic FGlffil, by

which

GRTFHIC

PNRfl'ETER 92ffi2. NO',$ AXES 4 -ts (XY 4, YT- t, ZY=z, )C=3, )C/Z-:4, Z{y=S) R$GE ct'p<. ) x= 115@F rWS (NIN. ) RFI.GE )F AY= ab SCFLE K= n
GRFFHIC CENTER

X=

5?5m

PRTERFI1

fl.JTO

ERffiE F
P=

ST(P IF

Y=

mF8 g'
1

t'oI

oT

2) Depress the CURSOR [L [Tl t" move the cursor 3) After keying in the nun r-ir data, depress ttre

4)

to t,he desired posirion. by which the graphic lffil, parameter is set. Perform the above steps 2) and 3) repeatedly to set all graphic parameters.

-327 -

As shom in the example of the above flgure, the maximum drawing range will be the area of approx. 144 nrn (wldth) x 108 mn (length). In case the range to draw ls greater than the maxlmum drawing range, the drawlng magnification is used. The drawing ruagnificatl-on is 0.01 to 100.00 times, which is usually determined as follows; o Drawing rnagnificatLon = Drawing magnification (H), or drawing rnagnificatlons (V), whichever is smaller o Drawing magnification H (length on program to horlzontal dlrection axis) o Drawing magnification V = o/ = R/(length on program to vertical direction axis) c : 144 nrn B: 288mn The drawing magnification is always based on the center of screen. Gc: Center of screen
magnification
Program Gc

After magnification

In case the tool path will not exist near the center of screen, enlarging the screen will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the drawing range. To avoid such cases, the following four graphic parameters are prepared t (range: X MAX.) " RANGE x (MAx.) (range: X MIN.) " RANGE x (MIN. ) O MNGE Y (MAX. ( range : Y llAX. ) ) (range: Y IIIN. ) " MNGE Y (MIN. ) O RANGE z (MAX. ( range : Z I'{AX. ) ) (range: Z IIIN. ) " MNGE Z (MIN. ) With the above parameters, the center of screen (Gex, Gcz) can be calcuLated as follows; Gcx=X(MAX.)+X(MIN.) Gcz=Z(MAX.)+Z(MIN.) The value will be 0.001 rnm or 0.0001 in. depending upon the input unit. The graphic origin and graphic center point will not be changed even if the work coordinate origirr is changed. In other words, the work coordLnate origin is always consistent with the graphic origin.

-326-

14. GRAPHIC
14.1

FUNCTION

Drarruing Range

makes it possible on the screen.

It is possible to draw the prograrmed tool path on the 9-inch cRT screen, which to check the progress of machining, while observing the path

rn addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen. Tool path drawing is possible on six coordinate sysEems.

The size

of drawing screen will be as follows;

Gc: Center of screen

t
I

54 mm

72nm

?2 mm 54 mm
I I

-325-

Selection key PRGRAM

Software key PRGRAM

Software key LIB OR Selection key PRGRAM

Library screen

Software key PRGRM OR Selection key PRGRAM

Software key FLOPPY OR Selection key PRGRAM Software key FLOPPY

Software key

READ

.Software key PUNCH

Software key

DELETE

Software key

SRHFIL

Software key

RET

Selection key PRGRAM

-324-

3) Delete

Press the soft key "DELETE".

DELETE

The cursor indicates

File

No.

FILE

Press the soft key "EXEC". Delete the file with File No. designated by FILE NO. After execution, subsequent files are shifted up one by one. 4) File search Press the soft. key "SRHFIL". The cursor indicates File No.
SEARCII

e Input File No (?)

FILE NO. = I
NUM.

EDIT

First,

Ent,er File No. Press the soft key

ttEXECrr.

the file

designated by FILE N0. is displayed at the head of the

screen.
13.7.3 Other precautions t) "CAN + INPUT"

of FILE NO. and PROGRAI'{ NO. becomes blank. 2) The left-end soft key when the soft key is indicating "EXECt' is a return key, which returns to the display screen of screen fornat No. I or No. 2. 3) Shift the screen from the directory display screen to other screens, and press the function key "PROGRAM": a normal program screen is selected. 4) The device type shall be a floppy cassette. Set parameter channel 1to No.0.0038 (RSCI,ID = 0), DEVFL = 1). Set paramerer channel 2 ro No. 0.0038 (RSCMD2 = 0, DEVFL2 = l). 5) For the numeral input ln the data input area with FILE N0. AND PROGRAM NO. ' only lower 4 digits become valid. Example: l{hen file No. = L2345678 is entered, 5678 is an actual data as Flle 6) When an improper data is entered into FILE NO. AND PROGRAM N0., an alarm (P/S 71, P/S 86) is produced. -9999 and -9998 of FILE N0. becone invalid. 7) Program read . with KEY (edit protect) signal OFF corresponds to program 8) The parameter is input and output on the parameter screen in the same manner as usual. Ilowever, the output file naue is reglstered as 9) The offset is input and output on the offset screen in the same manner as usual. However, the output file name is registered as "OFFSETi'. l0) Enter 0 in FILE No. and PROGMM No. "1" is displayed. 1l) On the program screen (not exclusively for the floppy cassette), no program can be selected autonatlcally for punching, and the program is punched at At this time, the designated prograrn No. , the last of registered file. becomes a file name. (The file name for 0 to 9999 is registered as "ALL
PRGMM". )
''PARAMETER''.

No.

check.

-323-

(Example)
FLOPPY A

(No.): L (No.): No. :

13.7.2 File input/output 1) Input (Read) Press soft key
READ

Means Itcontinuerl Means ttlasttt

No. of floppy disks

"READ". The cursor indicates FILE indicates File No. previously cued.
_FILE NO, = I
PROGMM

NO.

At this time, FILE

NO.

NO.

NI]M.

EDIT

2)

Deslgnate Filesl{o. to IIFILE NO. tt. Press the soft key "EXEC". At this time, input program No., program can be replaced and read. After execution, File No. is I up automatically. Output (Punch) Press the soft key "pUNCH". The cursor displays Program No.
PIJNCH

No.

NIJM.

_FILE NO. =

PROGRAM

NO.

EDIT

At this time, if no File No. is entered, punch a program at the last of the registered file rf F1le No. is entered, the program is punched at File No. designated. However, i-f File No. already in use is designated, subsequent files are deleted and .File Name is registered as ttFCA3". when all programs are punched in one fi1e, input -9gg9 to program No.

Press the sof

Input

Program

No. Program No. turns into the file t key t'EXEC".

name.

-322-

Screen format No.

DIRECTORY (rLoPPY) NO. FILE NAME

(METER)

0001. 0002. 0003. 0004. 0005. 0006. 0007. 0008. 0009.

PARAl"lETER

OFFSET ALL. PROGMM

00002 00003 00004 o0010 o0020 o0030

20.5 40.7 32.2 7.5

t0.2
2.6 4.9
11.8 5.5
EDIT SRHFIL

5) In screen format No. I or No. 2, when other soft keys than depressed, the display is as shown in screen format No. 3.
Example: I{hen

"PROGR.M,t

are

the soft key

3

"RLAD|'

is

depressed:

Screen format No.

DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)

NO. i. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FILE

NAME

00001 N0001 (METER) VOL.

20.5 40.7 32.2 10.2

PARAMETER

OFFSET

ALL.
00002 00003 00004
OOOIO

PROGRAM

7.5

'

6. 7. 8. 9.

00020 00030

2.6 4.9 1r .8
5 PROGRAM

.5

C01

READ

NIIM.

_FILE NO.

=I

NO.

N0.

FILE
VOL.

NAME

(METER)

Indicates File No. Indicates the file name. The file capaclLy is converted to a paper tape for display. It can also be expressed in t'(FEET) ", using setting parameter (fnCU=t1. Indicates the status when the file has a multivolume.

321

Slide the write-protect key in the dbection indicated by the arrow.

Fig. 13.6.3

(b)

Write-protect key for FANUC CASSETTE

13.7 Floppy Cassette Directory

outpuE

Display

This function displays the directory of floppy cassette for file

13.7:1 Display

input

and

The directory is displayed in the edit and background edit nodes. Following the display operation.,_ 1) Display a normal pfogram screen. 2) Press the soft key "FLOppy" or selector key "pRoGRAM" twice. 3) Screen format No. I is displayed. Screen format No. I
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)

1S

NO.

FILE

NA},IE

(I,TETER) vol,.

0000r

N0001

4) Here, press.the page key: screen format No. 2 is displayed.

-320-

il

for cassette Note 2) When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request the cassette but reset after replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, has been rePlaced.
13.5.2

The red and green lamps of the 1) Red laurp lights Writable: This larnp lights protect slide of 2) Green lanP lights Readable: This lanp lights 3) Red larnp flickers Write in progress 4) Green lamP flickers

Cassette adaptor lamp conditions

cassette adaptor lndicate operating conditions.

when cassette is inserted after setting the write

cassette uPward

(RECORD

side).

when cassette is inserted.

5)
6)

Read or searching of file head in Progress Red and green lamps alternatety flicker cassette is not lnsert.ed, or cassett,e exchange request Red and green lamps concurrently flickers File deletion in Progress

is in progress.
alano

Note

l) Atl alarms occurred in the cassette adaptor are displayed as

No. 86.

The cassette is provided with a write-protect key in order to Protect data written in the cassette when data is input, when file deletion is performed, etc. I) Writable Slide the write-protect key Ln the direction indieated by the arrorr (see diagraro). Data can not be written in the cassette'

13.6.3 Write'Protest ksy

Fig. 13.6.3

(a)

Write-protect kev for FANUC CASSiTTE 81/82

r:

-319-

13.4.2 Offset data input

The following operation enabl-es offset data input from the cassette to the

1) Z) 3) 4)

Selecr the EDIT mode. Select the of f set screen by pressing I-brSET-l tey. Operate as same as program input operation. The input offset data will be displayed on the screen in the form of offset value input by prograrnming (GI0), after completion of input operation. R GIOP : 5) Select che ofGt data display screen and check that. the offset dara has been correctly set.
Thg following operation enables
CNC.

CNC.

13.4.3 CNC parameter input

CNC

parameters input from the cassette to the

l) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Press the. EMERGENCY STOP butron on the machine side. Select the paramerer screen by pressing l-pAffi.l t.y. Set the setting data P\^IE to 1. Alarm PSI0O is displayed ar rhis rime. Operate as same as program input operation. NC parameters are input to the memory for NC parameter by this operation. Normally, alarm PS000 will activate after completion of paramet.er reading. 6) Set the serring dara pWE to 0. 7) Turn on the NC power over again if alaru ps00o activates. 8) Release the emergency stop button of machine side.

13.5 File Deletion

The file

2) Push I-PRGRI,I l. 3) Turn off the protect key r@\ ). \ lt 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in file No. I to 9999 to be deleted. 6) Push ttre l-sffiTl tey. With this operation, the k-th file input in (5) is deleted. Note I) After the k-rh file is deleted, file Nos. k+l to n change to Nos. k to n-I. Before deletion After deletion t to (k-r) I to (k-1)
(k+1) ro k ro (n-l ) Note 2) Deletion is possible only when the write protect key of the cassette is set to the upper posirion (RECORD side).
13.6
Precautions

in the cassette 1) Select EDIT node. -

can

be deleted as follows:

Deleted

13.6.1 Request for cassette replacement l^ihen one file has been entered

over two cassettes, the red and. green lamps on the adaptor fla'sh alternately on completion of data input/output between the first cassetce and the CNC, prornpting cassette replacement. In this case, take Ehe first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/output will continue autoroatical-Iy. Cassette replacement is pronpted when the second cassette is required during file search-out, data input/output between the CNC and the cassette, or fil-e deletion.
Note I) Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptorr oo special operation is required. The CNC will inrerrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserLed into the adaptor.

i
:{

-318-

The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette. i l) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Select the tool offset data display sereen by pressing OFSET key. 3) Press the START key. 4) Specify file search-out when required. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.3.3 CNC parameter output

13.3.2 Offset data output

The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette. I) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Specify file search-out when required. 3) Select the parameter display screen by PARAM key. 4) Press che START key. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.

13.4 Data Input Operation

Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette to the
13.4.1 CNC program input
CNC.

A program can be input fron the cassette to the CNC by operatlng as described ln "CNC tape input" after searching the file head in EDI'T or AUTO node as described
above.

1) Search the file head. ' Push Nl to N9999, N-9999.or N-9998 l--ffil t.y. 2) Push INPUT button again. (Data is input by this operation.) (When changing the program No. r push as follows.: f O-l r program No. +

button. ) (Note) If the above input operation is conducted by turning on the protect key r(d\. ( V ) the program in the memory is collated with that in the cassette '

INPUT

tr*"rpriiti;*r"."ring
(Operation I)
N2 [-rNPUr

second

to'fifrh files of the "r"".ttj ro the memory.

(Operation 3)
N2

(Operation 2)
N2

l-rNPUfl
l-iNP-uT-l

INFUT-I

... ...

Second Second

file

head searching

t-irFdf-l
N3

FN-FU-f-l
N-9998

file input

frNFur I

N-9999

l-rNPufll
[TN-mtl |_Txmtl

rTN'mrl
N4

| rNpur I ... Third file head searching [TFFU-T-] ... Third f ile input
t-lN-FTf] .. . Fourth f i1e head searching

ITTFI-fl]
| ?t\lDrrT I rrrr ur
I
I

N-eeee

t-ffi]
N-eeee l-lNFtrT-l

... Third file input

Ns

I rNPUfl

fTFmil ...
Quick

Fif th f ile head searching

f rNPUr I
Slow

frNpur
Quick

Fifth file input

Head search tlme

-317-

Note I) when files exist in the cassette, designations of N0 NI the same effects. However, when the files do not exist and the resulr in in an ararm is indicated if Nt is designated (since there 1s cassette, no first file). When N0 is designated, an alarm is not indicated since the head is searched regardless of the existence of file. N0 head searching when writing the programs from the beginningconduct cassette of the "fil.". after cancelling a new cassette or a1r of the Note 2) An alarm is not in'uoediately indicated in the cNC unlt even "*i"ai'g an alarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or whenlike). the P/S alarm 86 is indicated when the inpui/output operation is performed arEer Enat. Note 3) The same result is obtained both by sequentially searching files by specifying Nos. Nl ro N9999 and by firsr searching one of the ro N999b Nl and then using rhe N_9999 searching nethod. The searching tj_me is shorter in the latter case. 13.3
Data Output Operation

The file next to that accessed just before is searched. d) N-9998 When N-9998 is designated, N-9999 in (c) is automatically inserted each time a file is input or output. This condition is reset by the designation of (a), (b) or (c) or reser.

c)

N-9999

Observe the follcwing procedure to output data from the CNC to the cassette.
13.3.1 CNC program

output F A program can be output frorn the cNC Eo the cassette by the folrowing operation. 1) Output of one program . o + program No. + [-srenFl tey 2) Output of all programs o + _e999 * l-stenFl ruy lfith this operation, the program is output as the. new file after existing in the cassette. A new cassette or a cassette in which old the files files are made invalid and new files are to be written from the beginning, use the above output operation after the N0 head searching.
Note Note

Note

Note

Note

r) when P/s alarm 86 occurs during program output, the cassette i,s restored to the condition before the outpuc. 2\ when program output is conducted after NI to N9999 head searching, new f_ile is output as the designated n-th position. rn this case, the r to n-1 files are effective, but the files the old n-th one are deleted. rf an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n-I files "rt", are restored. 3) The cassette is provided with the wrj.te protect slide. the slide to the upper position (RECORD side) and inserr the cassetteset rhe adaprer. ro rn thie condition, make sure that the red lamp lights. Then, start output operation. 4) Head searching with the file No. is necessary when the file output from the cNC to the cassette is again input to ir," cNC memory or conpared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, irnme4i3g"1, after the file is output from the CNC to the cassette, record the file No. on the memo sheet of the cassette. 5) To efficiently use the memory in the cassette, output setting parameter NFED of parameter No. 0002 or 0012 to 1.the program by

.a

-316-

..1r"r,

13.

DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1IBZIF'II

What is a File

13.1
The

unlt of data, which ls lnput/output between the cassette and the CNC by one input/output operation (pressing the l-REID-l or l-?ffiettl k"y), is called a ttf iletr. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette, for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file. Files are assigned file numbers I,2,3r4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
Flle I
One Cas-

File

File

File n I

Blan]c

flle can also be written over two cassettes as folLows: File I File
2

sette I
Cas-

File

File(k-1) I File n I

FrLE k

sette
Onee

ntinuation of file k

File (k+l )

Blank

file numbers. This correspondence cannot be data contents and file numbers are outPut to the CNC and verified, unless the displayed. Therefore, wtren,writing data Ln the cassette, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo column.
ence between the data contents and

written ln the cassette, data

can subsequently

be read out by correspond-

Entry example on MEMO File File File

NC parameters

Offset data
NC

progran

00100

Ftle (n-1) FiIe

13.2 File
When
n
Heading

NC program 00500 NC program 00600

the program is input from the cassette, the file to be input first nust

be

For this purpose, proceed as follows: l) Select EDIT or AUTO node.

searched.

2) Push l-Pnffil t"y. 3) Key in address N. 4) Kev in the file No. 5) Push ttre l-rllPur I tey.
a)
N0

The following head searching occurs aecording

to the nurnber speeified:

The beginning of the cassette is searched. b) One of NI to N9999 of rhe file Nos. I to 9999, the designated flle is searched.

-3r5-

12. DATA

OUTPUT

12.1 Tool Offsets

The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the offset data input (programnable data input - G10 -) format specified by the tape command. l) Seting the data output interface. Set the data output interface in the parameter. Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casset.te, or ASR33/43.

2) Setfing the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press OFFSET key. 5) Press START key. 6) Offset values are started to be output and OUTPTTT is displayed during output ting . 7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of remaining offset data cannot be started.
12.2
Parameters

The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the parameter tape format. 1) Setting the data ousput interface Set the data output interface in the parameter. Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casserte, or ASR33/43.

2) Setting the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press PARAM. 5) Press START key. 6) Parameters are started to be output and "OUTPUT" is displayed during out7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of rernaining parameters cannot started.
Put t ing
.

be

-314-

11.9 Clock Time is displayed on the status indication line (line l5) setting I screen.
PARA]"IETER

and

thg parameter

00001

N000i

(SETTING

I)

= REVY = TVON =
REVX

rS0 =0 (O:ErA INCH=0 (O:MM (0:INC ABS =0 sEQ =0

0 0 0

1:rSO)

1:INCH)

1:ABS)

NO. CLOCK ='

I7H251"105S

Correction of time can be urade on the parameter setting I screen. llove the cursor to the itern'to be corrected, enter correct time, and then press the rrrNPUT" key. However no time is set if a negative value is entered or the maximun value ln each item is exceeded.
Item
Year I'1onth
Day

Maximum
99
L2 31 23 59 59

value

Time

Minute
Second

Note) The time at the status indication line (1ine l5th) is not displayed rhe "NOT READY'I is displayed.

when

313

HOLE PATTERN

An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. BOLT HOLE Pattern name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters. The machine tool builder should program character strings of menu title and pattern name by custom macro, and load thern into the program memory. Enter the desired pattern number by keying operation. r--] -;l: I TJIINPUT l, for example

Menu

title

2) Pattern data display When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are di.splayed.
UAR.

: BOLT HOLE M1@ t&glz NO. ].|ANE DNTA COHHENT Tma _5S8 541 KIJUN X E .BoLT HOI-E SAzKIJUNY A CIRCLE* 543 RNDILIS 8 SET PRTTERN 544 S. ANGL B DATA TO UAR. 5Z5r{_E. No a ND.5AA_5A5.
a 5A? a ACTUq- POSIT IOI.I (RELRTITE)

566

x 6.ga@ g.w z f,. W=

@.w S gT
I

I1D

BOLT HOLE

TOOL

....

*BOLT HOLE CIRCLE* :

Pattern data title An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. Variable name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters.
Corment statement An optional charaeter string conment can be displayed

up to 12 characters/line, g lines. The machine tool builder should program the character strings of variable name and comment statement by custom macro, and load thern inlo the prograrn
memory.

Enter necessary pattern data value. set the, cursor to a desired variable by
udLd

cuRSoR

q | _ ll J llo v ll Tl\.]F"h r Iof I - tl il ll rr\rul I, '

vdruE.

tf

keys, and inpur rhe

After inputting all pattern data, select the AUTo mode, and depress the cycle start key, and the desired machining can be done.

example

-3L2-

,i*Ffi;i

b)

Usage

When

parts and the number of nachined parts ar Therefore, create the program so that t
the _proce
xs

the

command

of

M02

or

1,130

is

executed, the re

total number of dbv one.

machined

ar -eJ eggg e- 4-*-eJeJJ- !-lne i"_9!_ ot. -par_t.-iE Furthermore, even if the M code set to Ehe pararneter ry count.ing is made in the sinilar manner. Also, it is possiJrle- to-*itle counting even if the M02 or M30 is executed

$e:e the When

number of marc.--h1_-ed parts reaches the number of required parts' signal is output to the PMC. However, when the number of require-d. paEts is ttOtt (inf init{ maximum), no outPutismade.Fordetai1s,Sachinetoo1builders.
Alarm Display (Function t<ey.

11.7

IEAF'M])
ALARM

When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displdyed at bottom, pressing the button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below. See APPENDIX 9 for the meaning of the alarm number.

CL.RI,I

I'EsSME 514 GrR 1gq-n : 536 o|.,|:R TRT.E- :

WEB IWB
+X

+Z

Note) When an alarm occurs the alarm message is usually automatically displayed. 11.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Display

l) Pattern menu display a) Select an offset or custom macro variable cRT by depressin,

Et#rlo.r.

b)

Depres"

key again.

I.E}{.J

: HX-E PNTTERN

Ot@ NIWB

6. Bmlls ?. FOQ<ET 8. PECK 9. TEST 1el. mK el=IFCT=

1. Bg_T t-g_E 2. GRID 3. LIF NN-E 4. TAPPII.G 5. DRILLII.

S
MDI

gT

311

I
PART COUNT
:

RUN TIME

CYCLE

TIME

Indicates the number of parts. I^Ihen M02 or M30 is executed, it is increased by +I. To preset the PART COUNT to "0", press P and CAN key. Indicates the total run time during automatic operation' excluding the stop and feed hold time. To preset the RUN TIME to "0", press R and CAN key. (It is not preset Lo "0" by cutting off power. ) Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is automatically preset to ttOrr when a cycle sEart is performed at reset state. (It is preset to "0" by cuEting off power.)

1.6.2

Parameter setting screen

PrnflIER
(SETTIhG 2) -RElr4 = A TNPEF=

(m1 h@

pt = 1 (O:DISAH 1:ElRHl) g

PffiT

I TgTfl- = A 15 PART CIII.IT = 1Ht6r,l cYol Tll anlgtE!; Ftl.t rric fO. RE\4 = FDI 29:3:l:43
Pffif FFT|JIROE
lPffi*4

llFGll

ll

ll

a) Display contents and setting l) PART TOTAL (tota1 number of machined parts) It is incremented by one when the M code specified by M02, M30 or parameter fnO. --7T-91. i.s. commanded. The setling cannot be made on this screen. On-FTetting of parameter :(\0: !ll2)'can be made. PART REQUIRED (number of parts required)2) It is used for setting the number of machined parts required. When the trOrr is set to it, there i-s no lirnitation to the number of parts. A1so, its setting can be made by the parameter FO:lqC] 3) PART COUNT (number of machined parts) It is incremented by one along with the total number of machined parts. 4) RllN TIME (operation time) The operation time added during automatic operation is displayed. 5) CYCLE TIME (cutting tine) The run time during one automatic operation is displayed.
Note 1) Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of ttMtt andttStt of run time is valid from 0 to 59. Note 2) Even if a negative value is set to the parameter nunber 0779 of the total number of machined parts, a positive value can be displayed. Do not set a negative value since the value is decremented by one when
counted.

-310-

iv) Actual rate display The actual feedrate per ninute of machine can be displayed on the current display screen and program check screen by setting the parameter (No. 0028
DACTF).

The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:

n4

Fact

i=I

r (fi)z

where,

n fi

: Number of axes : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axls or rapid traverse rate Fact: Display speed
The display unit: mm/urin (Input in units of mn).

inch/rnin (Input in units of inch. However' t\^to places below the decimal point are displayed.)

In the case of per revolution feed and thread cutting, the dtsplay speed is displayed by the speed per minute rather than that per revolution. Note 2) In the case of shift of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the shift speed of rotary axis is 50 deg/rnin, the following is displayed: 0.50 INCtiiM Note 3) Display is made only during automatic operation on the program cheek
Note 1)

screen.

11.6 Display of Run Time

and Parts Count

When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are

displayed on the screen.

11.6.1 Actual position
screen

'

MN.r{- POSITI(N (ASILUTE)

o2@@@ NA19A

x Y z

-1,2.5@A -42.5@@

@.@@@

RrN

t;_ll-.*lr*Jfun

rrFE *,r- .*-ETIAfl -.J

-309-

ii) In the relatlve coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft

key I REfl. )

rcTLrL PGITISI (RELATILE)

a@@@L

x Y z

224.359 285.449
1H1$1 Crc-E

L9@.299
PRT qINT
l'lDI

N@A@@

-l[*'11-ll-l t"* lf*Reset oDeration

R.H

TIt Ff,T.F tw 29: 18:21

llv'tl

TII A.l 1l'143S

The relative position is displayed in which the position reset by operaEor is zero.

an

ffi;
lii) '

thG-G-Aisplayed, prss the l-Xl, l-Fl or l-ilI tcey. The address on the display witl flicker. Then press the l-Tffi-l key. The relative position of the flickering address will be reset to zero.
Overall display
simultaneously:

(It can be displyed by pressing soft key lTi,L-].) The current position in the following coordinate system is displayed (a) Position in the relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) (b) Position in the work coordinate system (ABSOLUTE) (c) Position in the machine coordinate system (MACHINE) (d) Residual movement amount (DISTANCE T0 G0)
trruf_ P(FITtg{

x &.*156 Y G.
z

(REIJTII)

X E_641 Y W.Tn 7 1g,.5E,62 PRT CCI.|.|T 15 R_N TIt ltAl CYCLE TIl Or 61455 FCT. F t@ rwtl 21:35: S llDI

4I.45 (Fm{r) x 34.35Et Y .234 z &L.g?

x &.* Y
(DlsTF}G

(SEILIJTE)

tE61

r.@

S. 156 Z 4r.97
TO Gn)

IRE IIREL llflr

ll

ll

The residual movement amount lndicates the uovenent amount remalning in one block of a conrnand, and is displayed ln AUTO or MDI mode. The unit of the machine coordinate system is the saue as that of Ehe -achine system.

-308-

W2 IW, CHECK Wt ira egz ><B Y8 F8 , t@ w xLffi. YLa. t t{fi @l Z16. FL6.5 t (G) (PFSA-UTE) (DIST TO GO) 6.@A W VA 6? '/, -ts.na x a.w GL? g9 Gg '( -5.%6 Y a.qaa G% w 64 z -15.n4 z A.AW G94 GS A -a.sw A GzL t=Jg trPHS ttr657 P o
PRMRFfl
RDRS.

f,JTO

F**'l I.*-*l l-**l F**l

f*l

The data is displayed only in |'AUTO" mode. For the display of a Page of block being executed withi.n the memory, the block being executed is displayed at the

top. The position (ABSOLUTE) in the work coordinate system or relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) and remaining movement (DIST T0 G0) are displayed.
11.5 Current Position Display (Function key. lilSl)

(1) Push tne IETI tey.

(2) Push a PAGE key. Data will be displayed in one of the following three ways. i) In the work coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-AEil.)

rruH.

PCSITI(N CNF(IUTE)

o@@@1,

x Y
z
RrN

27I.58?
*"-

N@A@A ' 22A.261

339.483

I"*ll
displayed.

6 PrRT CofiT TtrG 1Ht3,| Crc-E TIt An il'ets ACT.F ten l'nfl llDI 2g:15:B

ll*ll-lt-l

The current value in a prograrmed coordinate system seE with G92, is

-307-

r
I

111)

Command

il

values entered fron the MDI or nodal values prevlously speclfied are displayed. (It can be dlsplayed by pressing soft key llmt l.l
PR$RFr'r 0'1D I ) x Y . (]2m
(ttrDnt_)

M138

La'fl2 M.ffi \

G@R
G1?
GgB G21

F
P
O

&B
2
15

GgtH
N

fi
Are.
iiil

. BlaS G49 T
GM
Gga

w.

6?

l**'l l"*".'ll-*l [_*;l T-_l

Display in MDI mode only

I'IDI

Hii

il

lv) one page includLng a block currently executed in the p 1ayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-FRGRM l. )
PRfERtr,I W: \t<9
N1@ G32
N11A G!f1

program

ls dls-

TPM tg138

\g m. t VB Y-'78. : t Nlz Z-n. N13a G1? 4L GaL X1?.5 l FnzB t N74Z U2 G39 l-l?.s :
N1s6 Br1 GA3 X-1?.5 Yi.?.s R1?.5 ; N16A G81 X-?F. t

Nr? GzP

N18[| G61

N1*t

BErt

p?.5 Y27.5 V7.5 X-15. ;

)<Et

YEt ;

Are.

flJm

A cursor 11.4 Display for

ls indlcated at the beginnLng of a block belng executed.

Program Check

The program check screen is displayed by pushing the CHECK soft key. The display includes the page for a program block in memory being displayed at present, th'd present positi-on, and modal value previously conuranded.

-306-

11.3 Command Value Display (Function key:

[FR-GF-M)

i) Push tt'e I-FIcnt't] tey. 2) Push a PAGE button. Data will be displayed in the following four'ways. (Each screen can be selected by soft keys.) i) Cornrnand values being executed, and modal values previously specified are
displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing sofr t.y l-cunnrlrl.)

PRGRFT.I (CI-RRENT) x L?.v9 G61 F XEB G1?H 2

(l'nDfl-)
GA1

tP@ l130 m
2

uL
G8A Bf

F R 6I?P G91 0 63lH @1 M er1 s

G49 T
GBA

SEl
s6?
AJTO

11) Cornrnand values being executed or to be executed next are displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft tey I nnxrl.;

PRGRFT,{ (ORRENT) x I?.frB G61F W G1?H 2

G41

(FEfi)
G3Er

tP@

I.813B

-t?.VB

BA

l'-*''11""...-l[_*;lnn

Ef

RUTO

-305-

a) b)

PRoGRAM

NO.

USED

The number of the programs registered (including uhe

FREE MEMORY AREA USED FREE

C)

PROGMM

LIBMRY LIST

The number of programs which can be registered additionally. The capacity of the program memory .in which data is registered (indicated by the number of characters). The capacity of the program memory which can be used additionally (indicated by the number of characters) .. Program Nos. registered are indicated.

subprograms)

Also, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting the parameter No. 0040 (NAMPR). 0n the program name display screenr. the program number and program name are displayed.

PROGMM SYSTEM EDITION PROGMM N0. USED : I'IEI'{ORY AREA USED :

PROGMM

8 FREE : 321 FREE z

0615

00010
01

N0001

55 37 44

I !

00001 00002

LIBMRY LIST
(MACRO-GCODE. I'lArN)

(MACRO-GCODE. suBl) OOOIO (TEST-PROGRAM. ARTHMETIC NO. 1)

00020 00100 00200

(TEST-PROGMM. FrO-MACR0) (INCH/Ift,1 GNVERT CHECK NO. 1)

(MACRO-MCODE. MArN) (MACR0-MC0DE. SUB1)

or000

O2OOO (OFFSET TYPE-C CHECK PROGRAM)

ADRS.

EDIT

Note l) Always register a program name beEween the control out and control in codes irnmediatelv after the program nunber.

oDfrl

(aaaa. -__I

Program name (up

Program number

to 31 characters.)

Note 2) Note 3)

Up to 3l

characters can be used for naming a program within the parentheses. If 31 characters are exceeded, the exceeded characters are no! displayed. Only program nuurber is displayed for the program without any program
name.

-304-

11.

DISPLAY
Program Display and

11.1

A progran number in the photo.

sequence number

are displayed at the top right ' as

W
T:BL?9.

seen

PRMRtrI
@;
N1@ G92 \i<9 N116

Yg Zn. t m1 6n Y-79. , lll?fj Z-',n. t N138 Gl? BI1 GB1 X1.?.s IJaP. FAEB ' Nr4E H2 Gi39 I-1?.5 ; N158 Bl1 m3 X-1?.5 Y1?.5 R1?.5 ; N16g GA1 X-8. t N1'7g GEP }u7.5 Y27.5 p7.5 , N1E[| GA1 X-15. ; N1*t G@ ru YA t
ADRS.

l**.1t"**.'ll '-.'l f-__l f--l

Wtren

IIJTO

the program ls being edlted tn EDIT mode, the program No. being edited and the sequence number just prior to the cursor are indicated. In case other than program edit, the program No. and the sequence No. executed last are indicated. Or, lnnnediately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the program No. .and the sequence No. searched are indlcated.
11.2 Displaying Program Memory
Used

Proceed as follows:

I ) Select EDIT rnode. 2) Push the PRGRM button. (For sof t key, press scf t tey [TnCml l. ) 3) Kev in address P.

4)

p"strlrllpurlbutton.
Or re-push the

PRGRM

button instead of the step 3) and 4).

PRGRtr'I

(]2@ l.o1$ WB _ 6L : S I FREE : 36 FREE 2 37TO I'E}.FV ARSR IJSED : PRTER*I LIMFff LIST EEBI WzB CEEEB VE$) BtN OT& u9@. wB3
S/STE}I EDITI$I PRmRfl1 l.O. LEED

EDIT

-303-

#
6)

Shift the cursor to the offset number position in the l-6-1 rhe of f ser value
rrNpur r played as an offset value.

same

r---T,1

way as in setting
".,0

7) Depress

;",' ;'J:l#

::ij.

JJj

::r"ffi..:Jr:r|,*+1":n,,.

o,"-

Reference

tool
This difference is set
as an offset value.
I

I
I
I

Fixing point

(Note)

rf

n", is H "'E coordinate depressed or Y axis relative value is

either

insread or t.r in 6), the l-9-l input as an offset value.

.:

,t

!t

-302-

CPERITO?'S

FFIL OLW IW3B SKIP : IOFF El.l -B-OA< B-OCK : Sltg-E FF l0.l lGCtlll LOO( : IFF S{ : IFF S{ DRI Rtfi PROTECT KEY : TPROTECT RELEffiE : IOFF til FEED F0-D
MTLNL

x z

P6ITIO{

g.w g.w

(ABSO-UTE)

g.w
6T

t"-"".lffi--il_-1l---1n
c) Push
d)

the desired condition. 2) Jog feed operation a) Push the key to display the screen of the software operatorrs
b) Select JOG node c)

[Tl or fTl key, and march rhe cursor ro the position of the desired Push l-Fl or [Tl key to march the mark ! ro an arbitrary positlon and set
switch.

panel.

Jog feed can be performed by pushing the desired arrow key. Jog rapid tr.averse can be conducted by pushing the key together with the arrow key.

Note l) When the CRT indicates other than the software operatorrs panel screen, jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed. Note 2) The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (paramerer Nos. 0f30 to 0135). 3) General-purpose switches Eight optionally definable switches are added as an extended function of che software operatorts panel. The name of these switches can be set by parameters as characEer strings of max. 8 charact.ers. For the meani.ngs of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
I/

/ 10.8 Tool Length Measurement --l:I Setect a reference tool, and attach the reference tool to the rnachine fixing point (or fixing point on the workpiece) manually. 2) Display the relative coordinate positlons by depressing l-pOS I and PAGE keys. tAl 3) Preset the Z-axis relative coordinate value- to a.by depressing |)L |ana -zero a,t.,t.1 |

4) Select an offset

U"t. l_&_lit to the 5) Select a tool to be measured, and aitach

page by depressint

l-aAN

lkeys.>Ar z Zlaoecn^T*#''on' Cozt)

same fixing point manually. A difference between the reference tool and the tool to be measured is displayed as the relative coordinate va1ue. (This is also displayed on Lhe offset page)

-301-

10.5 Pitch Error Compensation

Data

The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. rf it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In principle, the end user must not alter this data.

10.6 Data Protection

key

A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of parE program input and editing. For where the kev is mounted, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
1O.7 Software Operator's Panel

I^lith this function, functions of the switches on the machine operatorrs panel can be conducred from the CRT/MDI pane1. The following can be conducted via the CRT/MDI panel. a) Group I : Mode select.ion b) Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapid traverse c) Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse g"o"irtor feed axis, selecgion of manual pulse magnification xl, xlO, xl00 d) Group 4 : Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override e) Group 5 : optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock, dry run f) Group 6 : Protect key g) Group 7 : Feed hofd Whether to operate from CRT or uachine operator's panel can be determined bv the parameter OPGI to OpGT (No. 017) for each group. I) Setting of mode selection, etc. t-- EE-r a) Push | ALARM | .."::t-1. I.

b) ry"n ffi "I1a key to display rhe necessary page (rr can be disptayed by pressing soft t"v ftpft-l]l

Pfl\FL 01@ tt&I3A ; IF1DI FUTO EDIT t+{U_ JG ZRN _IODE FFNq-E RXIS : IFrX I{Y IZ. f-FND-E FllT. : l*1 'L@ RnPID O,RD. I ate2Y. gz 'f@ n4, FA Jm FEED : 5cE1 tt'l,,t'ltN Err FEED O.RD. : fff-r...... ACTI-H- PGITIS.| CNBSS-UTE) g.w x Y 9.@
UcEqqTO?'S

i
I
'

a.w

g1
t"tDI

-300-

in a__p.ereqgter value by data input keys. Depress lT?u-il. The paramerer value is input and displayed. s) h) After all parameters have been set and confirmed, turn to
f)
Key

?)

the setting screen, and return the PWE setting to i i) Depress the RESET key ro release the alarm condition. When alarm No. 000 has occurred, turn off the power supply and t,hen t.urn it on, otherwise Ehe alarm is not released. Setting of parameters using a tape This method is effect.ive only when the reader/puncher i.nterface option is combined. Parameters can be input from the tape reader or teletypewriter
ASR33/43.
L N

7o

L
F

L N F
(e)

L
F

Vo

(a) N

I
(b)

L
F

\+

(c)

(d)

Fis. 10.4.2 Parameter setting tape format

a) Punch 7" (ia case of ISO code) or ER or CR (in case of LF of EIA code) at the start of the tape. b) Punch the data number following address N next to the end of block code (lf i.n ISO code or CR in EIA code) . c) Punch Ehe data to be set after address P. Punched data at the address should correspond to the parameter number punched at address N. d) Punch the end of block code. Continue steps b), c), d), as required. A data number following address N must be punched at the start of each block. Leading zeros of parameter data following P are omittable. F (in case of rso code) cR or t )--f) Punch LF and Z input from the tape orfinished ER (in case of ErA code) finally. Data with'the input of these is t codes. E t Parameters not speclfied on the tape renain unchanged even if the parameter setting tape is input The Parameter setting tape prepared by the above procedure can be input f according to the following proeedure. i) Ser PWE = I (CRT/MDI lanet). ii) Select EDIT mode on operator's panel. iii) Select PARAI'I on CRT/MDI panel. iv) Turn on INPUT button on CRT/MDI panel. v) SeE PWE = 0 (CRT/MDI panel). vi) Turn on RESET key on CRT/I'{DI panel. (Turn on and off the pov/er of CNC, if alarm number 000 occurred.)

(rf

?.

Note l) The tape stops traveling when any of the following alarus ls detected. i) TH or TV (with TV check rurned on) is in pariry error. ii) An address other than N and P was input. iii) An N or a P value is disallowable. Note Ll Depress RESET k"y, if iE is desired to stop setting from the tape halfway. Note 3) A part of parameters doesnrt become effective unless power supply is turned off (when alarm No. 000 occurred). Note 4) Parameters related to the reader/puncher interface must be set from MDI, etc. before inputting paramet.ers from the tape.

-299-

10.4.2 Parameter setting

1) Setting of parameters by using buttons on CRT/MDI panel paqE-l . a) Press I LEGI n"r. display setting parameter Press page key to page. (Ir can be displayed by pressing sofr key fSETmil.)
PFRtrTER
(SETTI}S 2)

IWB

jPtE = 6 (A:DISAE-E l:EMB-E) REU4 = A

m.

PlEi

TT-] _ Press cursor button and set the cursor ro PI^IE. Key in I j f l rurut l, and i n t-parameter is able to be written. NC is placed to P/S alaru No. 100 con-

dition.

b) Select tp_MD.lnFde (or ser rhe emdrgency stop condition). c) Depress I PaneU I key ro display parameters on the CRT screen. d) Depress the page key to display a desired parameter Daqe. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key lTExr l.l '
I

PARFTTM f0. mTF _mt wtffi w. wffit @3 Wt w ww7 w6 w^r ffiwr@t6w w7 wwffi! w@w@raw wE w @74 Wtn
I'O. @11
=

W IefEN hn. mTA e6tl w taIz w @13 W @74 W @ts w eftt1 11111111 e3L9 W @ @
MDI

| il IPRR4
e)

r-----l lloaruos ll u
--_-.|

Method I
CURSOR

Shift the'cursor Eo the position of the parameter

number

to be changed.

Depress FdGsoE-l tey. If this button is depressed continuously, the cursor shi.fts sequent ia1ly . If the cursor exceeds a page , the next page appears on the CRT screen.

Parameter number

a.'a

lrxFirill.
!

I
I

I I e

I
1

-298-

10.3 Custom Macro Variable

The
common. variables (/l|100 to /1131, #500 to /153t) can be displayed on the the following procedure.

CRT by

\NRIRH-E mTA fn. fo. rw 1@ _l@ T61 6 LW L@. -W LLA 143 6 ItI IU t?sffl.L LIz 166tL3f, 16 a L14 fn6115A rcI,.H- PGITIO.I (RELFTIl,E) x s.w Y

|WEb
A

mTA

$EM L$Pffi
1

mffi
6.WE

z s.w hE- L@
=

lrDl

When

the absolute value of variable exceeds the value 99999999, rr**********tr is displayed. l) Display \ Push t;:-:_ a) s .IMENT-I| .butron. I urJlr b) Display the desired page by pAGE butron. (It can be displayed by pressing sof t key I I,tecno-l.l 2) Serring a) Display the desired page. b) Move the cursor to the desired variable number. (Sane as item 10.i (l)
I

(c)

c) Key-in the variable value by data i.nput kev. d) Push I-INPUT lkey, and rhe input value is displayed. ' 3) Setting the coordinate value to variable a) Move the cursor to the desired variable number b)J* [-fl tr.. X axis) , (ror Y axis) or l ; | (for Z axis) while pushing

k.y.

lLl

c)-pustr'I INpUT I burron. The relative coordinate value for X, Y or Z axis is input and displayed on the variables. 10.4
System Parameter

Parameters must be set correctly so that' the servo machine tool specifications, and machine tool functions NC is connected to the DC servo motor or nachine tool. meters depend upon machine tools, refer to the atEached by the machine tool builder.
10.4.1 Parameter display

motor charact.eristlcs, are fulIy displayed when Since contents of paraparameter table prepared

l) Depress [-F-AnMl button on CRT/MDI panel. 2) Select a desired page by depressing page k"y (,T1,[r]).

-297 -

15.4 Caution

1) Work coordlnate system revlsed by follow up becomes effective {rom the next automatlc operation. 2) Inch/uretrl.c converslon functLon can not be used with this function.

.:

, ".r*;ii!'i"'

, / .,.

;'Jd;*t4t*ciuz

'

-331-

16.

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF

OO-MB

The CRT/IDI panel of 00-I{B consists of a CRT display (14" color) and keyboard.

Contents of display and operation by k.y input are completely different depending on whether the CNC screen or I'ffC screen is displayed on the CRT/Mnf panel. In this manual, the operation when only the CNC screen is displayed ig described. Refer to the manual of machine tool builder for MMC screen.

Reset key

MMC/CNC switch keY

Shitt key

Start/ output key

Program

edit key

Input
key

Function key

Fig.

16

CRT/MDI for 00-MB

-332-

*63ii'#

^:'!6*^

.t

16.1 Display

Press "CNCtr key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen when the MMC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/I{DI panel. The bnC screen consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the part that is surrounded by the fraue at t.he bottom right, and its display contents are the same as displayed on the 9" CRT display of O-MB. Therefore' the screen selecEed by function k"y, page k"y, cursor k"y, and soft key is

displayed. The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display contents are position data, operation time (optional)' modal data,. and S, T command value, as shown on the screen in the Fig. 16.1. Display -iterns of this section cannot be changed by the screen selecEion operation. However, its display contents are always renewed.
N.E F(EI'IOI 6EOIJIE)

x
Y

z
I

c!'|rn e .@60 0a@a9 ffi rl' zn ,i Er' a . oo@ @,a@a N@aag cl.'E'fc o'i"'6
@ N}. _@1 @ @ a4 E G g, @ @ ale DfiN !@tE @11 EW 011181t1 t11t0111 XT ott @12 613 a14 A!5 81118111 @15 at1!R111 017 4$ @Ll ef,t9 u@!4 &D !t@1ss @ q&nt m @ @&D @@ @94 @
rogfim0
hTA

omt 64@F
61?
R

BP 840 EIH 64n

649

0111111t

I F *?

61

l-|r-rrqnntrlrl[ti-ll--l
Fis. 16.1

16.2 Operation Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently arranged on 00-MB. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0-l'IB. The page key t *, cursor key t *, and selection key <- + on the software Press the operatort s panel are of combined use wich the function k.y. key for use as a page key, cursor key, and selection key on the corresponding software operatorrs panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the ttFUNC" key as the function key. Five keys on the righc half ten keys are effective for the varl-able section, and Ehe other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position display data in the fixed section.

-333-

-i

:t
a

:l

.l

t t

,,.,,,

, -:i!#
.::.1

IV

MAINTENANCE

{
*

i-

1.

FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT

When

a fuse blows ln a part of the CNC unit, find and correct the cause of failure and replace the fuse. Fuses used in the CNC unit are as follows:
Specif ication

the

1.1

of

Fuses

Fuses used

in

CNC

unlt are as follows:

Table

1.1

Units mounting fuses and specifications of fuses

Nrtne

of unlt

Parts svmbol
F11, Fl2
Fr3

Capacity

Speclf icat ions

A60L-0001

Use

Power supply

5A
3.2
L

-0194 #5.0
A60L-0001

For 200V AC lnput power

supply

-a046
F14

113.2

For 24V DC for rnpstslr option PCB, and CRT/MDI unit

Not used

5A
1.6
A

A60L-0001

-0046 #5.0

Additional I/O 81

F5l

A60L-000r

-0046 llr.6

Protection from an external defect of machlne side 24V DC line

For 200V AC input power
supply

Input unit
PCB

Fl,
F3

F2

l0A
0.3 A

A60r-0001 -0901
#P41C0H

A60L-000i -0r72
/iDMo3

Fot' power

control clrcuit

ON/OFF

1.2

Mounting Positions of Fuses

Power supply unit

1.2.1

3.2 A fuse

(Fl3)

5A fuse (Fl4)

5 Afuse

(Fll,Fl2)

-337-

1.2.2 Additional l/O

81
1.6A fuse (F5l)

I
.

DI/DO connectors

1.2.3 InPut unit

Input unit rcB

*:n ll+ll :\J l-l >n

-'t'

For input unit

without

servo

-l

F--l .-

:L

=b

rpz

0.3A

(F3)

Fuse

(Fl, F2)

10A Fuse

;
G .;

-338-

-_ *

f
2.
1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
General

2.1

Check

Is the problem in an auxiliary function? What is the alarm nuuber? 2) Check the frequency of occurrence: When did the probleur occur? What is its frequency? (Was another machine also being operated?) What is the frequency on the same workpieces? What is the sequence number? Which program is it; Is the problem related to a specific mode? Is the problem related to tool replacement? Is the problen related to the feedrate? 3) For re-occurring problems: Go through the program tape where the error occurs rePeatedl-y. Check the numerical value in memory of NC and conpare it with the prograrlmed
numerical value. Is the problem due to an external cause? Check the stored offset amount and the amount remaining after distribution. Check the response to override (decrease or increase the override amount). Ask the operator about details of the problem.
Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control .

the type of problem: In what mode is the controller? What is displayed on the CRT/MDI? What is the status dlsplay? Is there a posltioning error? If so, on whlch axis and by what amount? Is there a tool path error? If so, by what amount? Is the speed normal?

2.2

l)

Check the lnput voltage: Are there fluctuations in the input voltage? Is there a drop in the i.nput voltage? Is front or rear door opened (door interlock)? Is there some other device using large amounts of current? Is there an electrlc discharge machine or welding nachine nearby? 2) Check perlpheral conditions: What is the temperature of the controller? Did the temperaEure change? it excessive? Is the fllter dlrty? Is the tape reader dirty? Is there oil or cutting fluid about? Are there any vibrations? Is the unlt in direct sunlight? 3) Check for any external causes: Has the machine recently been repalred or adjusted? Has the magnetics cabinet recently been repaired or adjusted? Has the NC unit recently been repaired or adjusted? Is there a source of noise nearby? (Example: Cranes, High-frequency machines, Electric dlscharge machines) Has a new machine been mounted nearby? Is there another NC with the same problern? Has the user adjusted the NC? Has the sarne problem occurred before?

Is

-339-

4) Check phases of operation: Has the operator been properly instructed? Has the operator been rePlaced? Is the operator familiar with the program? Does the program finish too early or vras lt lnterrupted? Does the program contain an incremental command? Is the tool compensation value correctly set? If the tool compensation value was changed, was it done correctly? Does the rnachine change to another mode of operation? Is the block skip function used correctly? Is the tape set correctly? Are there any tape coding errors? Has the machine tool been operated incorrectly. 5) Check punched tapes: Is there dirt on the tape? Are there any folds or wrinkles on the tape? Are joints normal? Did the program previously run norrnal1y? Was the tape copied from a Baster tape? Was it the punched tape? Was the tape correctly punched? Is the tape puncher normal? I{as the wrong tape used? Is the puncher in good condition? 6) Check the program Is the program new? Was the program crated according to the OPEMTORTS UANUAL? Are addresses in the right order? Does the problem occur in any specific block? Does the problem occur in the sub-program? Was the list of tapes created for checking? 7) Check for changes in operation Has any change or adjustment been made in the operation procedure? Has a fuse been blown? Is the NC in the emergency stop state? Is the machine tool ready? Is the NC in the alarm status? Is the MODE SELECT switch set correctly? Is the switch on the tape reader set correctly? Is the override switch set to the zero position? Is the NC in the nachine lock status? Is the NC in the feed hold status? 8) Check the machine itself: Is the machine properly installed? Does vibration occur during operation? Is the tool tip normal? Is there ahy offset due to tool exchange? Is there sufficient backlash compensation? Are there distortions in any part of the machine due to temperature changes ? Was the workpiece measured correctly? (1 meter of steel Was the measurement nrade at a constant temperature? changes lOp in length at a temperature change of loC) Are the cables normal (bent, broken or damaged)? Are the signal lines and power lines separated?

':
;

rit

'z

-340-

9)

Check the lnterface control: Are power lines and NC cables nounted separately? Is the shield normal? Is a noise suppressor attached to the relay, solenoLd, and notor?

2.3 NC System Check (No tools required) 1)

Check

control unit external conditions: there damage to the cabinet? the CRT/I"IDI panel normal? the filter clean? the reader clean? the door of the reader closed? Has operatlon nade with the door open? Check that chips accurnulated on the cabinet did not fall inside when the door

Is Is Is Is Is

2) Cheek inside the control unit: Is there dirt in the control unit? Is the fan motor normal? Is there corrosion? 3) Check the power unit: Is the unit correctly connected? Are all fuses OK? Is the circuit breaker normal? Is the voltage htithin the allowable
.4) The grounding Is the grounding connectLon OK? Is the shield ground OK?

was opened.

Are the shield and cable duct grounded correctly? Is the wiring path OK? Are all terml-nals fully tightened?

range?

5)

6) Check prlnted circult boards: Are all PCBs mounted properly? Is the plug connector OK? 7)

Are cable connectors fully pushed ln? Are there any abnormalities in internal cables? Are there any abnormalities in external cables? Are there any scratches, bends or breaks?

Check

all

cables:

Are physlcal condltions normal (no distortlons, etc.)? What is the PCB editlon? Are connections between prlnted circuit boards good?
Check the CRT/MDI unir: Do the push buttons operate norrnally? Is the tape cable nornal?
CNC Status Display

2.4

When

l-t seems that the CNC is executing nothing during cycle operatlng status, the current status of the CNC is displayed on CRT screen at the diagnostic number 700, 701 or 712 by pushing the DGNOS burton.

-341-

F'

Diagnostic llo.
0
7

CSCT

CITL

COVZ

CINP

CDWL

CMTI\

CFIN

a digit is 'rlr', the corresponding status ls effectlve. CFIN: The M, S, or T function is being executed. CMTN: A move command in the cycle operation is being executed. CDh{.: Dwell is being executed. CINP: An in-position check is belng executed. COVZ: Override is at 02. CITL: Interlock signal (STLK) is turned on. CSCT: Speed arrival signal of spindle i-s turned on.
When

Diagnostl-c
0
7

No.

CRST

CRST: One of the followlng: The reset button on the MDI panel, energency stop, or remote reset is on.

Diagnostic
0

No.
,,

STP

REST

EMS

RSTB

CSU

Indicates automatic operation stop or feed hold states.

troub leshooting STP : The flag which stops the pulse distribution.

These are used for

ing (a) . (b) (c) (d) (e)

RESET:

EMS :
RSTB

: CSU :

This is set at the followcondition. External reset signal has been turned on. Emergency stop signal has been turned on. Feed hold signal has been turned on. Reset button on the CRT/IDI panel has been turned on. The mode has been changed to the manual node, such as JOG, HANDLE/ STEP, TEACH IN JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE. (f) Alarm has been generated. (Soure alarms may not set the flag.) This is set when one of the external reset, emergency stop, or reset button has been turned on. This is set when t.he emergency stop has been set on. This is set when the reset button i.s on. This is set when the emergency stop has been turned orlr or when the servo alarm has been generated.

2.5

Display of Position Deviation (DGNOS No. 800

805)

Diagnostic
0
8

No.
0

SVERRX

(X axis) (Y axis)

SVERRY

SVERRZ

(Z axis)

-342-

Position deviation value of X, Y, Z l4th, 5th and 6th axes in order.

Diagnostic
0
8

No.
J

SVERR4

(4th axis)

SVERR5

(5th axis) (6th axis)

No. 820

SVERR6

'

2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point (DGNOS

Diagnoscic
0
8
2

8251

No.
0

ABSMTX

(X axis) (Y axis)

ABSMTY

ABSMTZ

(Z axis)

ABSMT4

(4th axis) (5th axis)

I

i;

ABSMT5

ABSMI6

(6th axis)

The machine position from the reference point can be displayed on the CRT screen as fol1ows.
i' mTLH_

t.

PtlSITI0.t (RET.CTII) x 19.868 Y -?.*t z -27.?L6 (FM{IF) x 5.141 Y -48. LZ? z L. r73

@24 tWffi X Y Z
CABSA-UTE)

18.86A

-27.7L6
O.qBB

-7.W

(DISTFTG TO E])

X Y Z

A-zBB

A.@B

T;_ll;-l|;_]T**ll-___l
The values displayed under "MACHINE'| are these value.

-343-

APPENDIXES

APPENDIX

1
t'
o

TAPE CODE LIST

6
q

,naracter
I
3
4
5

S0 code
7

3 2

I
o

Character
0
L

EIA code
8
'l 6

4
0

I I

Meaning

o o o o
o o
o

o
o

Nurneral 0 Numeral I Numeral

6
7
at

o o

9 A B
D

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o

o o 3
o

o o o

o o o

o 4 o o 5 o 6 o o o 7
8
9

Nuneral 2 Numeral 3
4
5

o o o o o o o o
c

Nuneral

o
o o
o o
o

o o b o o d o E o f o c h o lo J o o k

o o
o o o

o o c
o
o 0

I
K
T.

o o o o o o o o

o o o o

o o
o o o

o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o

o o o o o c

o
o o o o o o

o o o o o o o

!1

o o o

o 1 o m o o n o o o

n o
o

P
Y
I

o o o o o

R
5

o
o o

T
U

o
o o
U

ti
A I

o o o o o o o o
o o o o
O

p o o o o
o

r
q

o o o o
o o

cant information section in ISO code. Assumed as program No. tn EIA code.
o o o o

Numeral 6 Numeral 7 Numeral 8 Numeral 9 Address A Address B Address C Address D Address E Address F Address G Address H Address I Address J Address K Address L Address M Address N Not used at signifi-

o o o o o o

t
u

o
o o
o

o o o
o o o o o o o o
o

o o
o o

x o t
o z o o o De1

o o o o o o o o o o
o

?
?

DEL NUL

o o

o o o

Blank
o o
BS

BS

Delete (cancel an error punch). x Not punched. Can not be used in significant section in EIA code.
x

Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address

P
Q

R
S

T
U

V
l.rl

X Y
Z

o o

-F ]P
u

or

o Tab
o

NL
c
?

o o o o o o
o

CR
o
SP o ER

or

o o o
EOB

o o o o o
o

o o

* Back space * Tabulator End of block

Jr

Carriage return

:t Space

o o o

(2-4-s)
(2-4-7
)

o o

Absolute rewind stoD Control- out (a comment is started) Control in (the end of a conment)

-347-

IS0 code
Uharacter
.-

6 5

Characte

EIA code
8 7 6 5 o o o 3 z

1
I Meani-ng

o o o o o o o
o o o
o

o o 1-

*
o

o o

o
o o o

Positive sien Neqative sign

Colon

o o o o o o o

o o

Optional block skip Period (A decinal

, Dollar sien
* Sharp

poinE )

It

o
&

*
,

o
o o o o o o o

o o o o o
o

&

o
o o

o
o o o o o o o
o
o

o o o

* Ampersand * Apos t rophe * As teri sk

>t

o o

o o o
o o o o o o

.?

* Semicolon * Left angle bracket * Equal Rj-eht ansle bracket

Js

Comma

o
o o o

Ouestion mark
Commercial Ouotat ion Left brace

G
1t

o o
o o

at

mark

o o

Risht brace

(Note

information section, the codes are ignored. (Note 2) ?: when readr in the signi.ficant information section, an alarm is generated. However, it is stored in the meruory. (Note 3) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct. (Note 4) codes with incorrecc parity cause che TH alarm. But they are ignored without generating the TH alarrn when they are in the comment section. (Note 5) A character wi-th all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm even in EIA code.
1)

*: when read in the 'significant

r
-348-

t t

APPENDIX

FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

The symbols

in the list represent the followings. Y Z

A ...

IP_:X

As seen above, the format cons{sts of a combinatlon of arbitrary axis addresses among X, Y, Z, A, B, and C.

x: First basic axis (X usually) y: Second basl-c axis (Y usually) z: Third basic axis (Z usually)
Functions

Illustrations
GOO ]P

Tape format

Positioning
(c00)
Start point

Linear interpolation
(c0r )
Start point

GOI]P

Circular inter
polation (c02, c03)

c17

{:33}'
lco:l
{:33
f G02't

GI8

' - {l - , _ }' _t
,

Gl8

'

,- [=-_i'

_t

-,{} - * _ i' -,

Dwel1 (c04)

Per second dwell

co4

{X

- i'
R

Exact stop
(c04)

G04;

program (ClO)

of offset value by
Change

GIOP

-;

-349-

;#

Functlons

I 1lust rat ions

o4t

Tape format

Cutter sation
(c3e

compenB

Cutter compensation C
(c40

c42)
c42)

Itl

$lorz /'l'v

/-\/

rcrTl f c40'l 1c18flc41l lcl9J \c42)

H: Tool offset

Yo40

Tool length offset A (c43, G44, c49)

-' H: Tool offset Cancel G49;

Tool length offset B (c03, c44, c49)

Jc43 \ lc44 J

[c44J

c43l 7 vl --"-'
H

"

No.

{:ii}t:n}ii
G49z Cancel

{:[]t:n]offset H: Tool
Inch/metric
conversion (G20, G21) Reference poin return check
(G27 )
Start point

':,

Inch input : GzO Metric input z G2l

-t-/"
G28 IP _; G30 IF _;

Reference point

rerurn (G28)
(c30)

point return

2nd reference

Return from reference point

(c2e)
lntermediate Doint

G29 rP

_;

Skip function
(c31)

i:Tl'-s*

-350-

functions Custom acro (c55, c66, c67)

Illustrations
General format R/i k; m : Specifles macro
c6sHnP#IQ/ij

Tape fornat

c6s HnP/llQ/ljRi/k; Modal call

G66 P

functlons with 01 ro 99 /11: Variable number

G67:

... -;

Cancel

of operatlon
result

#j: Variable number /lk: Variable number

used in operatlon
+

used ln oPeratlon (or constant)

(Meantng) lfi=llt @ #t

Operatlon
Canned cycles

IIm

c80

(c73, c74, c76,

c89)

c80 c73 c74 c76 c81 c89

...

Cancel

xYz

P_-a_R_F_K_;
;
G91

Absolute/incrementaL program-

G90
G91 G90 _

ming (c90/c9l)
Change

_;

Ab'solute rncremental Combined use

coordinate
(ce2)

of

work

G92 IP'

-; -;

Initial point return/R point return (c98, c99)

I point

c98 c99

point
-t

Z point

-351-

#i.

APPENDIX

RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Table 1

(a)

Linear axis {in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system
lou
Standard
0.001
0. 001

o. 1u

Least input
increment
inerement

0.01 0.01
+999999.99

0.000r
0. 000 I +9999.9999

Least

command

Max. programnable
di,mension

+99999.999
100 , 000 rnrn/rnin

Max. rapid

traverse

*l *l

240,000

urm/min

24,000 rnm/nin
12 , 000

Feedrate range Step feed

I -

150,000 mn/urin
0

100,000 nrn/nln

nrn/urir

0.01 , 0. 1, 1, l0rnm/ step

001, 0.01, 0.1,

mur/step

0 0001

0l,

0.1 rnm/ step

0.001

Tool compensation
Backlash compensation Dwe1l time

0 - +999.99

rnm

0 0

+999.999

0 0

999.9999

rnrn

0 - !2.55 m
99999.999 sec

*0. 255

nrn

- 10.255

urn

99999.999
sec

9999.9999 sec

-352-

Table 1

(b)

Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)

Increment svstem
lou
Standard o. 1u

Least input
i-ncrement

0.001 inch
0.01

0.0001 inch
0.001

0.00001 inch
0.0001 -F393.70078 inch

Least

cornmand

increment

Max. programmable
dimension

+99999.999 inches
240

+9999.9999 inches
100

Max. rapid

traverse

*1 *1

'

000 n'n/min

,000

rnm/min

24'000 01

mm/min

Feedrate range Step feed

t{.

0.01

6,000 inch/rnin

0.01 - 4,000 inch/nin

480

inch/min

0.001, 0.01, 0. 1 inch/step

0.000r,0.001, 0.01, 0. I lnch/srep

+99.9999 inches
+0.255 99999.999 sec

0 00001,0.0001 0 001 0 .01

inch/ step

Tool compensation
Backlash compensation

0 - t99'.999 inches 0

199 .99999

inch

!2.ss
99999.999 sec

+0.255

mn

Dwell tirne

9999.9999 sec

l:
p
F'
|:i

-3s3-

:FG

Table 1

(c)

Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)

Increment svstem
Standard

Least input
increment

0.00I inch
0.001 inch
+99999.999 inches

0.0001 inch

0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch +9999.9999 inch 960 inch/urin

Least

command

0.000I inch
+9999.9999 inches

increment

Max. programmable
dimension

Max. rapid

traverse

*l
*1

9,600 inch/rnin 0.01 - 6,000 inch/rnin

4,000 inch/rnin 0.01 - 4,000 inch/rnin 0.0001, 0.00I, 0.0I, 0.1 inch/step

Feedrate range

0.01 - 480 inch/min 0.00001,0.0001,

Step feed

0.001,0.01,0.i, I inch/step +99.999 inches

0.00r,

0.01

inch/ steP

Tool compensation
Backlash
comPensation

0 - t99.9999 inches 0 - +99.99999 -inch 0 - +0.0255 inch 099999.999

caa

- 40.255 inch
o99999.999 sec

0 - +0.0255 inch 09999.9999 sec

Dwell time

-3s4-

Table 1

(d)

Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system
I0u Standard
o. 1u 0.000 l

Least input
increment

0.0r

0.00r

Least

command

increment Max. programmsflg

di-mension

0.001 inch
+999999.999

0.0001 inch
+99999.999

0.00001 inch
19999.9999
uur

Max. rapid

traverse

*l
*1

9,600 inch/urin

4,000 inch/urin

960 inch/min

Feedrate range Step feed

I50,000 rrn/min
10 0
mrn/ s t ep

100,000 rnm/uin

0 0

12,000
mm/min

01, 0.1, 1,

001, 0.01, 0. t,
rnrn/ s

tep

0001,0.001,

01, 0.I
nm/

tep

Tool compensation
Backlash comPensation

+999.99

+999.999

999.9999
mm

*0.255 inch
99999.999 see

+0.0255 inch
99999.999 sec

- +0.0255 inch
9999.9999 sec

Dwell tine

-355-

-!G

qF

Table 1

(e)

Rotation axis

Increment svstem
Standard

0.0001 0.0001 0.0001

deg deg

deg

Least input increment Least

command

0.001 0.001

deg deg

increment

Max. prograromable dimension

+99999.999 deg

+9999.9999 deg

Max. rapid traverse Feedrate range

*l *l

100,000 deg/min

24,000 deg/rnin

1 - 100,000 deg/rnin

L - L2,000 deg/min 0.0001, 0.001 , 0.01, 0. I

deg/ scep
deg

Step feed
Backlash compensation Note to Table f (a) - (e)

0.001, 0.0I, 0.1,

deg/min

0 - +0.255

deg

+0.255

*l The feed rate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC interpolation capacity. When ragarded as a whole system, limitations depending on servo system must also be considered.

t i:
;
Z

it
t

-356.t

APPENDIX

MONOGRAPHS

1.

INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH

The leads of a thread are generally incorrect tn 61 and 62, as sholrn ln Fig, l, due to automatic acceleratlon and deceleration. Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of d1 and 62 in the program.

Fig.

Incorrect threaded length

1) 62 is deternlned by cutting speed V (nn/sec) and time constant (T1) of the servo system as shown below. 62 = Tl . V (m) (1) ..... ..... where T1 i-s in sec., and V is in nrn/sec. v is determined by thread lead L and spindle speed R as shown below. V = R (rpm) t (urn)/60 L (run) Lead of thread R (rpn) ..... spindle-speed o Time constant T, (sec.) of the servo system: Usually 0.033 sec. 2) How 61 is determined The value of 61 is determined by cutting speed V in thread cuttlng, tlme constant T1 for the servo system, and thread accuractttatt as shown below. 6r = {t - Tr * T1 exp (- f')i v (mm) (2) , t. a = exP ,- Tt, (3) , . . o. . . . . . The lead at the beglnning of thread cutting is shorter than the specified lead, L and the allowable lead error is AL.
Then,

a=T AL when the value of rrarr is determlned, the time 1apse, t, until the thread accuracy is attained can be calculated by formula (3) r The tine "t" is substituted in (2) to determlne 61. Constants V and T1 are determined in the same eray as for 62. Since the calculation of 61 is rather complex, a nomography is provided on the following pages. Instructions on how to read the appropri.ate 6l value on the nomography is shown below.

-357-

F.

{G
a

,tr (V = lgpp/sec

y: dQ66/sec)

y: !Q6p/sec

Tirne constant of servo system

<lr

First specify the cl4ss and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy' a, will be obtained at C, and depending on the time constant of cuEting feed acceleration/dece1.r"iion, the 61 value when V = 10 urn/sec will be obtained at @. Then, depending^on the speed of thread cutting the approach distance O, witt be obtained ar @ for other speeds than 10 mm/sec. (Note) The equation of 6-1, 62 is for when the acceleration/deceleratlon ti-me constant for cutting feed ls 0.
Simple Calculation oll Incorrect Thread Length

l) o, =
2)

o,

=#'.
d

ffi

to.)
(-1-1na) =
6z

. (-1-lna)

An t'att indicates the error allowances.

- 1- lna

L: Thread lead (rnm) R: Spindle speed (rprn) * I'Jhen time constant T of the servo system is 0.033 sec. And the "1-lna" follows as below.

i ;

(Exanple)

0.005 0.01 0.015

0 .02
T

4.298
3.. 60s

3.200

R = 350 rpn L=1trmt a = 0.01 ^ 350xI Oz= =ffi = 0.194

nm

6l= 62 x 3.605 =

0.701

2.9t2 T

-358-

J
6
tl

,.1

.l
6 a FI

o
-.t
E

E
O

6 trc
6

'F9

dtr ;6 76 Y> oo tr>

eo

{{

&d

@ N

N^O

Aa
(o o (,
.ri

N @

.!

.3
!,
C'

o o

-o
d

,ui Gt
6zl
I

{3
Ec

.9s E o

Ea .9^ E
Jhh9d

o,
.E

2 EeeE 3
I

i""Ei' rEc{6 6:

o
(! gt

o
E

=a >{r
to .E ; 3 :^ .!9s R g
4..^

1c;

tI

3? d> Ei; R\ >::

_q6

I I
I

q)

I
I

-;3
Ei Ea
'r

ld
I
I

lI I I

6 .,o-

>J:
il'

3? oq
Ec
oh 3 ll

I^

l.E
E E

Ei:
o
N ll

lo
I

r! >J:

l'
6

-359i

2.

TOOL PATH AT CORNER

Inhen

I) Descriptfon

sLrvo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning systern when a servo motor is used) is acconpanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (too1 center path) and the prograrmed path as shovm in Figure 2 (a). Time constant T., of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.

Yz
Programmed Path

Tool Path

",f'

Fig. 2

(a)

Tool patch at cornering

2) Analysis The tool path

t ions
:

This tool path is deternined by the following parameters: a.) Feedrate (V r, .Yz) b) Corner angle Gi c) Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (Tr) at cutting (Tr=0) d) Loop gain of positioning system e) Presence or ab-.ence of buffer register The above parameters are'used to theoretically analyze the tool path. Itlhen actualJy programming, the above items must be considered and programrning must be performed carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the desired precision. In other wo::ds, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision, the comrnands of the next block must not be read until the conrnanded feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used to stop the machi-ne for the appropriate period
shor^m

* t
,{

i:
t

in Fig. 2

(b) is analyzed based on the following condi-

*
.

a) Feedrate is constant at the block before and afcer cornering.

* { i
,1

t
t

t
{
! tt

-360-

b) The

controller has a buffer reglster. error differs with the reading speed of characters of the next block, etc. )
(The

the tape reader, number of

Fig.2

(b)

Gommand

(Conditions exPressions) Vxl=V'cos,/1 Vyl=V'sin91 Vx2=V'cos92 Yyz= V. sin q2

n-(4r-{2)=o

(Description of synbol) V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornerlng Vx1: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of preeeding block , Vyr: Y-axis conPonent of feedrate of preeeding block Yx2: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of following block Vyit Y-axis comPonent of feedrate of followlng block . 0 : Cornerangle and X-axis tt:. : Angle forned by comrnanded path dlrection of preceding block and X-axis path direction of following block ,!; : Angle forned by connanded

-36r-

Initial value calculation -ttt" ittitial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution of the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.

Fig. 2

(c)

Initial value

(I) Vx1 (Tl + T2) : vyi(r1 + 12) Q) Y; time eonstant. (=0) fi, Exponential acceleration/deceleration(Inverse of position loop gain) positioning system Tz2 Tj-me constant of
Xs =

Tool path analYsis +thefeedratesforthecornersectioninX-axis Ttre equations below i.rePresent direction and Y-axis direction.

vx(t) =

t'l - rt' exp,- d,} t Vxr. , -Vx2L1-fr{r1 'exP(-r, - 12 ' exp (- i)) T1+T2 i) t. (- l-tr.exp,-t'rr]+vyz ttr. ""p d) vy(t) =ffi
(Vx2

- vxr) t r - #h;

{rr'

exP CE

+ vx1

(3) (4)

Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the following equations:

x(r) = /f, v"(t)dt -xu

Vx^ - Vxt

Tt l'

Tz

{r? . exp (\41

t', - ta'

exp

(-

+ ] - vx2 (r1
- vyz (rt

Y(y) = ,il Vv(t)dt UVY^ - VYr {r? 'z

exp

,- ,tJ - r?

'exp (- + )

-362-

3.

RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING

When

a servo motor is used, the positionlng system causes an error betyeen lnput commands and outPut results. Since the tool advances along the cornnanded segment' an error ls not produced ln linear lnterpolation, but when especially high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, an error is produced in the radius dlrectlon. This error can be sumnarized as follows:

Ar: Maximum radius error (m) v: Feedrate (m/sec) r: Circle radlus (m) Tl: Exponentlal acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec) at cutting (=0) Tzi Time constant of posltlonlng system (sec). (Inverse of position loop gain)

^r=+
since the machining radlus r (m) and allowable error Ar (rm) of the workpiece ls given in actual machining, the allowable lirnit feedrate y (m/sec) ls determined by equation (1). Since the acceleratlon/deceleration time constant at cutting which ls set by this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool builder's i.nstruction manual.

-363-

'q

APPENDIX

TAPE JOINING

punched tape is to be rnade or tape is broken or in similar cases, tape sections must be joined. Join these tape sections as described below. two a) Butt the two tape sections and paste them together, placing the section on the side on which the tape is fed' on top of the other. b) The joint at which the two tape sections overlap must be approx. 3 pitches.

If a loop of

, _-lr

3 pitches

Less than 0.270 mm

Direction of feed

c) l'lake sure the punched holes of the overlapped cape sections at the joi-nt are correctly aligned. IIse special care with the feed holes.
I F

\Jl-.,
Incorect

fi-t. ll

o
Correct

d) Trin both edges of the joint to smooth

them.

Trim

e) Ilake sure punched holes are not clogged up with the paste.

-364-

APPENDIX

STATUS WHEN TUR NING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

Parameter (No. 045,. CLER) sets whether clear condition by reset or reset condition.

o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued. x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
I tem When on

turning
o

power

When reset
o o

When
o o

clear

serrinE Offset value data Data set by the MDI setting oPeration
Parameter Other data Programs in

o
o

o
o

o o

Contents in the buffer storage

o: MDI
o

x: Other
x
X

mode mode

Display of
sequence number
One

(Note
x

1)

o (Note
x

1)

shot G code

I"lodal G code

Initial G codes. (For G20 and G21 the one eftectivi before cutting off the power is effective.)
Zero
o

Inirial are
noE

codes. (G20 and G21

changed. )

Zeto
o

S, T,

x
x

Repetition
count
(K)

specification
Zero
o o

Work ccordinate value

Action oper-

Movement
Dwe11

x x
M,S
a

x
x

ation

x x

Issuance of and T codes

x Depending on Parameter ttRS43tt

Tool length
compensat
i
I

o: MDI mode
Other
modes

ion

depend on parameter "RS43".

-365-

Item

When on

turning
x x

power

When reset

When

clear

Action

in

Cutter
compensation

o: MDI mode x: Other mode

oper-

ation

Storing called

o: MDI mode x: Other mode

(Note)

x (Note

2)

output

signalsl

ALM

for
of

indicaEron
LEDs

Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm

x

Extinguishes if there is no cause

Extingui shes
d!4lur

for the alarm (Lights in

x

if there is no cause for the (Llghts in

emergency stoP)

NOT READY

emergency stop)
BUF

Extinguishes
x

o: MDI

x: Other

mode mode

Extinguishes
o

REFERENCE POINT

RETURN COMPLE-

(x:

Emergency

(x:

EmergencY

TION LED

stop)
x x
x
o

stop)
o

S, T and B codes
I'1 code

x x
o

M,SandT strobe signals

Spindle revolution signal (S analog signal)
CNC
(MA)

x
o

ready signal

ON

Servo ready

signal
CYCLE LED

0N (When other than servo alarm)

A

0N (When other than servo alarm)

x x

ON (When other

than servo
alarm)
x

.START

FEED I{OLD LED

(Note 1) When heading is performed; the main Program number is displaYed. (Note 2) When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to Ehe head of Ehe main program. Execution cannot be started . frsrn the middle of the subprogram.

-365-

ir
's.

t:

APPENDIX

7.

PARAMETER LIST

1.

PARAMETER DISPLAY
No;

1) Press the "PARAM" k"y to select a parameter screen. 2) Key in Address No. 3) Press cursor key or page key to change the screen instead of Address
too. Set parameters to 0 without fail,

if their usage is not specified in the following detailed description. Parameters dontt always function unless the CNC function (option) is provided, even if their usage is specified. Confirm which paraueter options 3re mounted in advance.
Note) The name of parameters on upper side are used for only T series: f or__Tutning machine (0-TB,..-00-_TB) , the names of Parameters on are used for only M series: CNC for Machining center (0-l[B,
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
CNC

,l
'I

-:1 e'.

.{
1 I

I
;l .l il
,l

Remarks

Bit
RDRN

No. 1:

0:
DECI 1:

Dry run is effective for rapid traverse. Dry run is not effective for rapid traverse.

Declaration signal "1" in reference point retu;n indicates deceleration.

oRc
ir
E.

1: Offset value becomes a radius designatlon. 0: Offset value becomes a diameter designation. l: Offset value is input in incremental value. 0: Offset value is input in absolute value. 1: Offset is cancelled by reset button. 0: Offset it not cancelled by reset button. 1: Offset vectof in G43, G44 rernains in reset state. 0: Offset vector in G43, G44 is cleared in reset state. 1: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel directly actuate the CNC start without going through the machine side (MDI mode only) 0: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel issues the signal to the machine side. The CNC start is actuated when the CNC receives the start signal
from machine side.

F
i

i'

IOF

i t
I

TOC

RS43

DCS

\
t

't'

F'

-367-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

PROD

1:

0:
scI\I

Displays progranmed position in current value displaying for U and W. Displays actual posi-tion.
Less command increment is input in inch system. (Machine tool: inch 'systern) Less command ingrement is input in metric system. (Machine tool: mm system) If you want to change this parameter, turn off
power.

1:

0:

NFED

TJHD TJHD

IiSLE
Pi'OfY2

ASR33

PPD PPD

STP2
l

2 NFED

Ploryt

ASR33

STP2
T
)

Bir
NFED

No. 1:

0:

Feed is not output before and after progran is output by using the reader/puncher interface. (Sg.!_ "1" f or FANUC cassette. ) reEl*ii o"tp"t befd;;;"-a*"ii"r program is ourpur by using the reader/puncher interface. (Effectiver(rhen the setting parameter I/O is 0.) Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG node by manual pulse generator is possible. Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG mode by manual

Ine Daucl rate is set with parame ter No. 0552.

,
* J
.i

TJHD

t:
O:

pulse generator is not possible

HSLE

When

0:

(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the uianual pulse generators are provided for (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regardless of the axis selecting signal.)

the manual pulse generators are provided for two axis, the axis selecting signal is valid

(Note)
PI'O(Y2, I

When one manual

pulse generatgr is provided, set 0 to this parametei

The shift direction in canned cycles G76, GBl .

Pldff2
0 0 0
I

PlorYl
0

Shift direction
+x

i
0

-X
'1-

-Y

-368-

I t t

T {

Parameter No.
ARS33

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

I:
0:

The 2OmA current interface is used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PPR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/punch interface. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0..)
The relative coordinate value is preset when the coordinate system is set. The relative coordinate value is not preset when the coordinate system is set

PPD

I:
0:

STP2

1:

0:

In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit is set by 2 bits In the reader/puncher i_nterfaee, the stop bit is set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
PSG2

PSGl
TLCP
6 GST

OVRI.
OVRI

zt{,4

zM3

ZI,4Z

ztfi.
ztff.

HSLE

zyw

zlu

ZI,[Y

Bir
PSG2,

No.

s43
PSG2

2l

Gear

ratio of splndle and position coder.

PSGI
0

Magnification

xl
x2 x4 x8

0 0
1

I
0

I
r=

Magnification
I{SLE

Number.of position coder rotation

l:

When

0:

the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is valid. (When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is invalid. (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regdrdless of the axis selegting signal.) (When one or two manual pulse generators are provided, see ttOtt to Ehis parameter. )

-369-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

TLCP I:
0:

The tool length offset is perforrned in the axis

direction being normal to the plane specified by plane selection (G17, G1B, c19) (Tool length offset B). The tool length offset is performed in the Z axis irrespective of plane selection. (Too1 length offset A).
Gear shift is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant) Spindle orientation is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant)

GST

t:
0:

OVRI

Setting values 0 and I can determine the direction in which the override value increase. See table 6 (a) in following page for details.
zl44

21"ff, z\N

zl4z,
(0M)

The reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Y, Z and 4th axis in order.

l: Mlnus 0: Plus

(Note) file Uactfash compensation is inirially performed when the axis moves in the opposite direction against the direction which is set by this parameter after the po\^rer is turned on.

zux,
ztq3,

zttz
zl{,4

(0r)

The reference poi-nt return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Z, 3rd and and 4th axis i-n order.

l: Minus 0: Plus

-370-

Pararneter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

Table 6 (a) Relationship between Overrlde Signals and Override

Value

Contact status Machine side

kov

Parameter OVRI=0
on

Parameter OVRI=l
I'tanual

Manual

Over-

ride

I *ov2 *ov4 :tovt

07"

continue feedrate Metric Inch

svstem svs t en
0

Over-

ride

continue feedrate Me tric Inch

svstem sys ten
L2 6 0

50

nm/

inchl
min 0. 0t 0.1

1507"

o
o

o o

o o
o

10 20 30 40 50

min 2.0 3.2 5.0

70

140 130

nm/ min 790

500

inch/
min
30 20
L2

t2.6
20 30 50
79

60
o

0.2 0.3 0.5 0.8

L.2

L20

tl0

320
200
LZA

8.0

o t r
J

70 o o o

100 90 80
70

).u
3.0
JA

79

50
32 20

80
90

o
o
o

I00.
110

r26
200

t ti

o o o
o

120
130
140

320
500

z.o 3.0 5.0 8.0 t2

20
30

1')

60 50 40
30 20

.o

o o o

12.6 7.9 5.0 3.2

790

t0
0

2.0
0

0.8 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0. 0i

0

150

r260

50

(Note

1)

(Noce 2)

(Note

3)

switch. (Note 4) In the above table, the speed error is +32.

o indicates signal is open and blank indicates signal is closed. When the override switch is changed during axis movement, the axis moves at the new speed. Generally, this signal is designated by the override

371

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

DMRX

GRDX GRDX

.+

DMRX

Bir

No.

DMRZ

GRDZ GRDY

D},IRY

Bir

No.

Dl,lR3

GRD3
GRDZ

6
D},IRZ

Bit

No.

D},IR4

GRD4

Bir

No.

-372-

DMRX

to

DMR4

Setting of detecrive mulriplier

Detective rnultiplier
Analogue servo

Setting 654
0 0 0 0 0 0

code

Digital servo r/2

I 3/2
2

0
I

r/2
I I
2

I
1

t I
I

I
0

0
I

I
0

3/2
3 2

s/2
5
7

/2
4

GRDX

to GRD4 Capacity of reference counrer Setting

code

3210
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1

Analogue servo
0

Capacity of reference counter Except for 0.lU 0. lU detector

detector for Digital servo

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 I 1000 I 2000 I 3000 14000 15000 I 6000

for Digital
servo
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 7 0000 80000 90000

I
0

I I I
1

I
0 0

I
I

0 0

I I I I
I I

I I
0 0

2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000

I
I I

0 0 0 0

0 0 0

I
0 0

I I

I
1

I
0

r00000 r 10000 I 20000 I 30000 140000 r 50000 t 60000

-373-

Relationship

among DMR, CMR and

GRD. (In case of System series

T)

Metric

system

l,loving distance

per I revolution of motor (Pulse coder)

12
mm

Axis
X

unit
(um)

Counting (de tec tion)

Command

nult iply ratio

(cm1
|

Detect multiply

ratio

(DMR)

Capacity of
re

Pulse
2000

Pulse
2500

Pulse
3000
4

ference counter
6000 6000 10000 10000 8000 8000

I
1

/0.5
I

z
X

4
.I

,t
* g
* I
6
T I

r/0.5
I
I
r

10

mn
Z

4 4

/o.s
1

'&

F
j

8mm
z
X

I
1/0.
s

zl'+
3
2

6000 6000

6mm
Z

I
1i0.s
t I

I
t

2/4
2

5000/ 10000
5000

nrm

z
X

I
I
'|

1/0.s
I

2/4
2

4000/8000
4000

4mm
L X

/0.s
I

L.5 /3

r/2
I

3000 / 6000

3mm

,
X

I
I

1.5

3000
2000 / 4000

1/0.s I
I

r/2
1

ntm

2000 2000 2000

0.5
0.5

2/r
2

I
I

lmm
X

Note 1) Note

In thq above table, right side value is in diameter designati-on, and lett eiae value is in radius designation in X axis. ?\ Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiplY changed, but in that case there is limit for maximum ratio can be feedrate.

374

t * ,
Relationship among DMR, CMR, and GRD. (In case of series T)

Inch svstem
ltoving distance per I revoluCount

ing

Command

tion of motor
(Pulse coder)

Axis
X

unit
(

(de tec

tion)

Detect rnultiply

urultiply ratio
(CMR)

rario (DlR)
Pulse
2000
3
3

Pu I SE

Pulse
3000

10-4) 1/0. s

2500

Capacity of reference counfer

6000 6000

0.6 inch
Z
l\

I
t
I

2l+
2

I
r

0.5 inch
Z
X

/o.s

2/a
2

s000/ r0000
5000

I
L/0.s

I
I
I

0.4 inch
Z

2/4
2

4000/8000
4000

0.3 inch

x
z

r/0.s
I I

I
I

L.s /3
t\

r/2
I

3000/6000
3000 5000 5000

0.25 lnch
L

/O.s 0.5

I
n L

r/2
2

0.2 inch
Z

r/0.s
I

r/2
I

2000/4000
2000

t
2
2

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

0.15 inch
Z

I.5
1.5

3000 3000 2000 2000

0. I inch

x
7

2
2

I
I

Note r) Note
L)

In the above tab1e, right side value is in diameter designation, left side value is in radius designation in X axis. Data in the above table is standard. Conunand and detect nultiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for naximum
feedrate.

375 '-

Relationship anong DMR, CMR and GRD. (In case of series

M)

Metric

system

oving distance er I revoluion of motor Pulse coder)

12
mm

(detection) unit
(um)

Counting

Command

mult iply

rat io
(CMR)

Detect nultiply ratio (DMR)

Pulse
2000

Capaclty
Pulse 3000
4

1,1

Pulse
2500

re f eretr1,1,

counter
6000

l0

mm

i
1

r0000
8000
2

8mm 6mm 5mm

4
3

I
I r

6000 5000 4000

4m3mm

I
I

I
I I

t.5
I

3000 2000 2000

:'ij -.
r:.-

2mm

I
0.5

I
L

lmm

.'

Note l) Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is linit for maximuur feedrate.

.'.

Inch system
Moving dj-stance

per I revolution of motor (Pulse coder)

(detection) unit
(

Counting

Command

roult iply

Detect rnultiply

ratio I
I I

ratio (DlR)
2500
3

Pulse
2000

Pulse

Pu 1
2

1o-+r;

(cl,IR)

3000

Capacitv of reference counfer

6000 5000

0.6 inch
0. 5 inch

i
I

0.4 inch
0. 3 inch
I

2
1

4000 3000 5000 2000

0.25 inch 0.2 inch

0. 15 inch 0. I inch

0.5
1

2
1

0.5
0.5

1 2

I
1

3000 2000

Note 1) Data in the above table is standard. Comrand and detect mult ip lyratio can be changed, but in that case there is lirnit for maximun feedrate.

376

Parameter No.
E

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

NOFC ROVE ROVE I4FPR ADW2

Remarks

l r

EILK
I

OTZN

ADWI

ADWO

BiE
EILK

No.

F
I

performed for each axis. L is necessary.) 0: Interlock is performed for all axes or for Z axis (it needs that No. 012 ZILK=I) on1y.
(FANUC PMC-MODEL

l: Interlock is

NOFC

l: Offset counter input is not used. 0: Offset counter input is used. I: Z axis sEored strok check is not done. 0: Z axis stored strok check is done. 1: Rapid traverse override signal effective. (1002, Fo) 0: Rapid traverse override signal
(

OTZN

ROVE

ROV2

is

noE

R0V2

is effective.

100%, 507., .257" Fo)

}MPR

1: Manual synchronous feed is done. 0: Manual synchronous feed is not done.

ADI4I1

ADW2,
ADWO

Name

of the 4th axis

ADWI
ADWO

ADW2

Name

0
n

0 0

0
I

A
B

0 0 I
1 t I

I
I
0 0

0
I t

c
U

V w
t\

I
0

-377 -

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

TMF

TFIN TFIN

9 TMF

Bit
TMF

No.

43,2

l0

Time from M, S, T code issue to MF, SF, TF issue. Setting range 16 to 256 msec. (16 msec increment)
Time of reception width of FIN. Setting range 16 to 256 usec. (16 sec increment).

TFIN

T code
TF

FIN

LI I

Fl! signal is ignored,

TMF

because X < T FIN Parameter

TFIN

setting
0

l6

msec

More than 16 msec More than 32 msec More than 48 msec More than 64 msec More than 80 msec More than 96 msec More than l12 msec

0 0
I

32 msec 48 msec 64 msec 80 msec 96 msec

1

0 0
0 0 0 0
0
I

,0
0
0

t
0

I
0
1

0 0
I I

I
I

12 msec

128 msec 144 msec 160 msec

I 76 msec

Mcre than 128

msec

t
0 0 0 0

I
0 0

I
0
I I

More than 144 msec More than 160 rnsec More than 176 rnsec More than 192 msec

I I

192 msec

-378-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series; Lower : M series)

TMF

Remarks

TFIN

Parameter

setting
I
I

208 msec 224 msec 240 msec 256 rnsec

More than 208 msec

0 0
I

More than 224

rnsec

I
I
I

I
0

More than 240 msec More than 256 msec

I
1

APRS

WSFT

DOFSI

PRG9

OFTVY EBCL OFFVY EBCL

ISOT ISOT

I
No.

0
APRS PRG9

Bir
APRS

Aut.omatic coordinat.e system when manual reference point 0: Automatic co.ordinate svstem conducted.

l:

setting is conducted return is performed. setting is not

WSFT

I: The di-rect measured value input for tool offset is set in the work shift memory. 0: The work coordinate system is not shifted. l: The direct measured value input for tool offset is effective. 0: The direct measured value input for tool offset is ineffeccive. 1: The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 are protected. The following edit function are
disabled.
When

DOFSI

PRG9

(l) Deletion of

the deletion of all programs is specified, the programs with program 9000 to 9999 are nor delered.

program

number

(2)

Punch of program These subprograms

are not punched out when the punch of all programs is specified.

(3) (4)

Program number search.

Edit of program after registration.

i I

t-I

-379-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series ' Lo\iter : !1 series)

Remarks

llowever, the followings are possible.

(1) Registration of Program Registration by MDI key and through paper

tape.

(2) Collation of program

(Note) These programs are not normally indicated, because program number search is disabled in the EDIT rnode. However, it maY be indicdted when protected programs alone remain in the memory after deletion of al-l programs, for example, or when a protected subprogram is interrupted while it is running, by a single block stop and the EDIT rnode is set in. In such a case, the program edit is abled.
0:

The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 can also be dated.
PRDY

OFFVY

1:

n.
1:

Servo afarm ls not actuated when VRDY is on before is output. Servo alarm is actuated when VRDY is on before PRDY is output.

EBCL

0:
ISOT
l.

In the display of the nto*t"t stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by * (asterisk). In the display of the program stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by; (semicolon).
Rapid traverse is effective even when reference point return is not conducted after turning the power on. Rapid traverse is invalid unless reference point return is conducted after turning the power on.
PMLI PMLl

0:

MCINP

SBKM

PML2
MCF
ADNW

I
No.

MCINP

G0l

SBIO,I

ADLN

PML2

Bit

543
Program input

2L0
the data input

MCINP

1:

external start signal

Program input

is started with
MINP. MINP.

0:

external start signal

is not started with the data input

-380-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

c0t
SBKM

l: GOl mode when power is on. 0: G00 mode when power is on.
1: Machine
command.

is stopped in single block skip by macro'

0: Machine is not stopped in single block skip by macro command.

(usua1ly set rr0'f)

MCF

l: EF (external operation slgnaL) is output when G8l positioning is completed. 0: EF (external operation signal) is not output when G81 positioning is not completed.

ADNW

l: Select B type for feed rate. 0: Select A type for feed rate.
(A type)

(1)

JoG feed rate

JOG

feed rate of additional axis is the that of basic axes.

same AS

(2) Cutting feed upper lirnit feed rate Tangential speed is clamped at. parameter value for a1l axis.
(B type)
,

(1)

rate rates of basic axes and rotary axis can be set by different parameter (No. 565, 566). When an additional axis is moved with another axis in simultaneously 2 or more axes control, feed rate is the same as that of another axes.
JOG feed JOG feed

(2) Cutting feed upper liurit feed rate When command linear interpolation including addit.ional axis, (G01), clamp each axis feed rate at smaller than the setting value j-n another parameter (No. 567). In circular interpolation, tangential speed i,s clamped at parameter value. (Sane as A type) (3) Minimum rapid traverse rate (Fo) 0n1y additional axis is set by another parameter. (No. 0568) (4) Low feedrate (FL) additional axis at reference point return is seE to another parameter.
(No.0s69)

-38r-

Parameter No.
ADLN

parameter (upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

1: 4th axis is used as a linear axis. 0: 4th axis is used as a rotary axis.
When

4th axis is used as linear axis, there are following restrictions. 1) Circular interpolation including the 4th axis
cannot be performed.

2) Cutter compensation B/C in the 4th axis cannot.be applied. 3) Tool length compensation in the 4th axis cannot
be applied.
PML2, t

Pitch error compensation magnification. The value, with this magni.fication multiplied to the set compensation value, is outDut.
PML2 0

PMLl
0

Magnification
X1

x2 x4

I
I
(Cornmon

Fo
I

X8

to all axes)

I
No. 1:

Bir NFED

0:

G84S

Feed is not output before and after the progran is outPut by using the reader/puncher interface. (Set to "1" when FANUC """""tt" is used.) Feed is_ output before and after the program is 9::l"t by using rhe reader/puncher interface. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.) Type B is effective in canned cycle G74 and GB4 with S analog voltage output. Type A is effective in canned cycle G74 and Gg4 ' with S analog voltage output. (See connecting manual for type A/B.)

Baudrate parameter No. 0553.

is set

by

-382-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

I:
0:
FXCS

In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed without outputting M05. In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed after outputting M05. In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindte CH/CCW rotation is performed without M05 code output. In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindle CW/CCW rotation is performed afcer M05 signal output.
The 2OmA currerlt Lnterface ls used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PRR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/puncher interface. .(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)

l:
0:

w
Relative
parameter

ASR33

l:
o:

ZTLK

1:

0:
1:

Interlock is effective only for Z axis. Interlock is effective for all axes.

No.008i
EILK..

is

0:

In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit 1S set by 2 bits. In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit ls set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
TCW
CI.IM CWM

ORCW ORCW

INHMN GOFC INHMN

GMOFS

GOFU2

JHD

t
No.

3 TCW

J}lD

Bit
TCW,

CWM

Output code at S analog output.

TCI,J

cI.]M

Output code

0 0

Plus ouEpuE for both M03 and

M04.

I
0

Minus output for both !103 and M04 Plus output for M03, uinus output for
M04.

I
0Rct^l

Minus output
M04.

for

M03, plus output for

1:

0:

Minus output in orientation S analog output. Plus output in orientation S analog output.

-383-

.::,*

i$i ':t1

Parameter No.
INHMN

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

l: 0:

GOFC

option is provided. The tool geometry offset is also cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. 0: The tool geometry offset is not cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. l:
1:

The menu ls not indicated even r^rhen the menu a programrning option is provided. The menu is indicated when the menu programming

GMOFS

The tool geometry offset is cancelled with vector

0:
GOFU2

processing, i.e. tool movement. The tool geometry offset is conducted by the shifting of the coordinate system.

l:
0:

The geornetry offset number is designated by two high order digits of the T code. The geometry offset number is designated by the two low order digits of the T code.
The manual pulse generator is valid in JOG mode. The manual pulse generator is invalid in JOG mode.

JHD

1: 0:

T2T4
0 0

vI

I\JA

OFSB

STDP

SMCL

T2D

I
No.

Bit T2T4

3210
I,ltren

I:

0:

the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, it is regarded that the two high order digits are equal to the two low order digits and the T code is set to the 4-digit value. When the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, the two high order digits are regarded as 00, and the T code is set to the 4-digit value.

Parameter No. 014:

ir is
e

only

ffec t ive
when

T2D=0

WIGA

1: Setting of the tool wear offset amount ls lirnited to incremental designation, and the setting of the tool geometry offset amount is lirnited to absolute de s ignation. 0;. The incremental and absolute designations are possible for both tool wear offset amount and tool geometry offset amount.
1:

OFSB

Tool offset is conducted tosether with axis

movement.

o:

Tool offset is conducted by the T code block. (The tool geometry offset by the shifting of the coordinate system is conducted by the T code block regardless of this parameter.)

-384,i

Parameter No.
STDP

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) code are always

T

Remarks

t:
0:

The actual spindle speed and the

displayed.

The actual spindle speed and the

always displayed.
GMCL

code are not

1:

0:
T2D

Does

not cancel the tool figure correction vector by resetting. T code is specified in 4-digits.
CPRD

Cancels the tool geometry offset vector by resetting.

0:

t: T code is specified in 2-digits.

REP
REP

PRWD PRWD

MORB

I
No.
l.

NWCH

CBLNK CBLNK

5 CPRD

Lvt2

SKPF

RILK
2

Bit
CPRD

0:

Unit is set to mm, inch or sec. When the decimal point is omitted in the address for which the decinal point can be used. The least input increment is set when the decimal point is omitted in the address for which Ehe decimal point can be used. the program with same program nuuber in the is registered through interface, the altarm does not occur and the registered reader/puncher program is replaced. When the program with same program number in the memory is registered through reader/puncher interface, the alarm occurs.
When

REP

1:

memory

n.

PRWD I:
0:
MORB

Rewind signal is output by portable tape reader. Rewind signal is noE output by portable tape reader. The direct neasured value input for tool offset and work coordinate system shift is performed by retracting both 2 axes after cutting and pushing the
RECORD

'I .

n.

is necessary for this function.) button is not provided for direct measured value input.
(FANUC PMC-L/M
RECORD

button.

The

Lr42

t:
0:

Makes valid stroke limit 2 (EXrM2 Gr29.6). Makes invalid stroke limit (EXLM2 Gr29.6) .

switching signal 2 switching signal

-38s-

Parameter No.
1:

Parameter (Upper

: T serles, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

0:
RILK

Dry run, overri-de and automatic acceleration/ deceleration is effective in skip function (G3l). Dry run, override and automatic acceleration/

deceleration is ineffective in skip function (G31).

1: Interlock processing is done at htgh speed. (FANUC PMC-MODEL L or M is necessary. ) 0: Normal interlock processing is done. 1: The character "W" is not displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display. 0: The character "I'1" is displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display.
't. 0: The cursor does not The cursor blinks.

NWCH

CBLNK

blink.

I'{DEC

NPRD NPRD SUPM

RSTMB

RSTMA

Bir No.
MDEC

1: M code is output in decode signal. 0: M code is ouEpur in BCD 2 digits.

(not available)

NPRD

1: Input and display with decimal point is ineffectlve. 0: Input and display with decimal point is effective. 1: Start-up B type is effective i-n cutEer compensation
V.

SUPM

* *
I

0: Start-up type is effective in cutter compensation C. For details of start-up, refer to operatorts manual.
RST}ts

1: B group decode M signal (M21A, 1422A) is cleared reset. (not. available) 0: A group decode M signal is not cleared by rest.

by

RSTMA

1.: A group decode M signal (MflA-Al38) is cleared by reset. (not available) 0: A group decode 11 signal is not cleared by reset.

-385-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lo\rer :

M series)

Remarks

OPGT

OPG6 OPG6

OPG5 OPG5

OPG4 OPG4

I
No.

OPG3 OPG3

OPG2
OPG2

OPGI OPGI

OPGT

Bit

OPGT I:
0:

Feed hold is effected with the software operatorrs pane1. Feed hold is not effected with the software

operaEorts panel.

OPG6 I: Protect key is actuated with the

0:

operatorts panel Protect key is not actuated with the software operatort s panel.
Optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock and dry run switches are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. The above switches are not actuated with the sofcrdare operatorf s pane1.
Jog feed rate, override, and rapid traverse override switches are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software operatorts panel .

software

OPG5

1:

0:

OPG4

1:

0:

OPG3

1:

0:

Axis select (IIX, Hy, HZ) and magnification (x10, x100) switches for manual pulse generator are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software3 operatorrs panel.

OPG2 I: Jog feed axis select and jog rapid traverse buttons are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. ' 0: The above buttons are not actuated with
software operatorts panel.
the
OPGl

l:
n.

select (MDl to MD4, ZRN) is conducted from the software operatorts panel. Mode select is not conducted from the software operatorrs panel.
Mode

(Note) The above parameters are effective only when the optional software operatorts panel is selected.

-387-

:{!l'eFfF

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

EDITB
0

TVC TVC
SQTYP

EDITB

NZMP4 NZMP2 NYMP2 NXMP2

Bit No. EDITB l:

Editing on standard keyboard shal1 be editing oPeration B, 0: EdiEing operation shall be as specifie{ in standard specifications. I: TV check at the conment. 0: No TV check at the comment 1: The program restart method should be R type. (not available) 0: The program restart meEhod should be P or Q type. 1: Handle feed magnification xl00 is ineffective for X, Y, Z and 4th axes' resPectivelY. 0: Handlerfeed rnagnif icati-on x100 is ef fective for X, Y, Z and 4t.h axis' resPectivelY.
(Note) The magnification of an axis whose rnagnification xl00 is ineffective becomes xl or x10 by signal MPI. MPI=1:x10 I MPl=0:x

1'
a

TVC

SQTYP

N)O{P2, NYI'IP2,
NZMP2,
NZMP4

DBCD

NEOP l'102NR NEOP I,102NR SRGTP

DCZ

XRC

DC4
C4NG

DC3 }lHPGB

I
No, 1:

9 DBCD

Bit

DBCD

n.

In the diagnosis display' the timer counter data is displayed in decimal. The diagnosis display is d isplayed in binary as usual.
M02, M30 and M99 command the end of registration into part program storage editing area. M02, M30 and M99 do not command the end of registration into part program storage editing area.

NEOP

l:
0:

MO2NR

I:
O:

Return to the head of program after executing Do not return to the head of program after executing M02.

M02.

-388-

Parameter No.
SRGTP

Parameter (Upper : T series

Lower : M series)

Remarks

l.

0:
1:

G135.0 is used for the rigid tap selection signal. G123. I is used for the rigid tap selection signal.

0:
XRC

Diameter designated for Z axis (Disable). Radius designated for Z axis.

1: 0: l. 0:

X-axis is rad.ius desi-gnati.on. X-axis is dianeter desi_gnation.

Diameter designated for 4th axis (Disable). Radius designated for 4th axis

DC4

C4NG

0:
DC3

t: 4th axis neglect signal is valid

4th axis neglect signal is invalid.

t:
0:
0:

Diameter designated for 3rd axis (Disable). Radius designated for 3rd axis.

MHPGB

I: Multi-handle function is specification

Multi-handle function is specification A. (For specification A/B, see connecting manual.)

NCIPS

B.

0
SFOUT

NCIPS BCD3

Bir
SFOUT

No.
1.

to
is output in S4/5 digit even if gear change is not performed. SF is output in S4/5 digit on changing a gear.
SF

0:
NCIPS

1:

In deceleration, the control proceeds to Ehe next block after the specified speed has become zero. The control does not confirm that the machine position meets a specified position. (No inposition

0:

checking) . The control proceeds to the next block after the spcified speed has become zero and confirms that the machine position has reached the specified position

in deceleration.

(Inposition ckecking).

BCD3

l. 0:

B code is 3-digit output. B code is 6-digir output.

i
-389-

ma

.re:
l

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

APCZ

APCX APCX

I
APC4 APCZ
APCY

Bit

No.
When When

16
absolute pulse coder detector is optioned. absolute oulse coder detector is not optioned

APCX, 1: Y, Z, 0:
4

ABSZ

ABSX ABSX

ABS4

ABSZ

ASSY

t f
*
a

.t

t t
3

Bit

No.

A3SX, l: Y, Z, 0: 4

Reference point position in absolute Pulse coder Referepce point position in absolute pulse coder is
se

;
&

ttled

not settled. (It is automatically set to "1" when manual reference point return is executed. Do not change the setting without changing the detecEor') Set "0" without fail when primary field installation and adjustment and when position detector exchanging. And execute manual reference point return after Power on/off.
DITA
DCHI DCHI
DFRN DFRN
DGRM DGRM

DJPN DJPN

DITA

Bir
DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM

No. CRT CRT CRT CRT CRT

5432
screen ls displayed in Italian. screen is displayed in Chinese screen is displayed in French scteen is displayed in
German.
(ROC) -

DJPN

screen is displayed in JaPanese.

-390-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

EDILK
QNI 'IEGWSF INOUT GNSR
UWKZ

Remarks

scTo
SCTO

IGNPM(

.+

LII

1O

IGNP}I(

Bit EDILK

No.

765 Data format: Bit

Interlock signal per axis direction is va1id. Interlock signal per axis direction is invalid.
Automatic selection of tool offset number is
mode. done

1:

0:

QNr

1:

0:
NEGWSF 1:

during offset writing Automatic selection of tool offset number is not done during offset writing mode.
When

0:
UWKZ

work shift amount is input in incremental system, sign is eonverted and input to memory. When work shift amount is input in incremental

systen, sign is not converted. (Usual)

I.

When

0:
INOUT

the work zero point offset value is modified' absolute coordinate value is changed at once. (Not available) After modification, the absolute coordinate value is updated at the initial preProcessing.
Outside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area. Inside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area.
,Progranmed

1:

0:

GNSR

1:

0:

position is drawn in graphic function. Actual position where tool nose radius compensation is thought in is dravm in graphic function.
Spindle speed reach signal is checked. Spindle speed reach signal is not checked.

SCTO LIIlO

1:

0:
1:

0:
IGNPMC

Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.01 unn/O.001 inch. Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.001 mrn/0.0001 inch(Usua1)

t.'..F

Control by PMC is made ineffective. (Same as without PMC) 0: Control by PMC is made effective
1. RSFT
EXTS MMDL EXTS MMDL

I
)ACTF )ACTF
]RCMSG PRCPOS
?RCMSG PRCPOS

8 PSG2
PSG

EXI

OD

Blr

No.

391

!F'

Paraneter PSGl,
2

No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

Gear ratio of spindle and position coder

Scale factor

PSG2

PSGI
0
I

xl
x2 x4 x8
RSFT

0
0

I
I

0
I

1:

0:

value is entered with a radius value in work coordinate system shift. lD( value is entered with a diameter value in work coordinate system shift. (It is valid only when radius designation XRC=I.)
l'fl(

EXlOD

1:

0:
EXTS

External work coordinate svstem shift function: 1O times the input value to the "ttr""porrds external work zero point offset value. The inpu= value corresponds to the external work zero point offset value
Search by external program No. search (01 to 0999 search) Search by external work No. search (01 to 015 search)

1:

0:

DACTF

1:

0:

Actual speed is displayed on the current position display screen and program check screen. Not displayed.
Modal status is displayed in MDI operation B. Modal status is not displayed in MDI operation B.
On

M}!DL

1: 0:

PRCMSG 1:

0:
PRCPOS

the program check screen, a message fron is displayed. (not available) The remaining motion is displayed
On the program check screen, the absolute coordj-nates are displayed. The relative coordinates are displaved.

PMC

I:
0:

-392-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

DSPSUI 0

ADRC

DSP4

DSP3
G6OX

DSPSUi

G604

G6OZ

G6OY

Bit
DSPSUB

No.

0:

t: Displays 5th/6th axis current positions for

Does

not display 5th/6th axis current positions for PMC axis. The axis name is in accordance with the parameters (No. 7130, 7131).

PMC

axis

ADRC

1:

0:

Use ttlil or tfKtr, not ttCtt for the address in chamfering and corner radius (R). For the addresses used for direct drawing dimension prograrnming, use tt,Ctt and ttrRtt (a eonma is put before C and R). For the address in chamfering, corner R, and direct drawing dimension programmingr use ttCtt and |tRtt as

c60x

per the standard specification. (3rd axis cannot be used with address "C".) Specify the approach direction in the unidirectional positioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th in
sequence.

I: Minus direction 0: Plus direction

DSP3

The current position of 3rd and 4th axes is displayed in sequence. l: The present position is displayed. 0: The present position is not displayed.

ADW4O

ADW3O

EACl

EACO

Bit

No.

ADW30, 40

The nane of 3rd and 4th axes is specified in sequence. 1: The name is C and the Y axis control is used. 0: The name is B.

-393-

It, | ,,fr,, ,
l,/rr,tt

",

uoo .

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

PMC

Reuarke

t'ACl: Axis setting for

EACl
0 0
EACO

axis control

ConErolled axis

4th axis
X axis Y axis Z axis

I
I

I
0
1

"l,'
Irtr
lllr1,,

l,E
11o.

CNRST

ESFC

ADDCF RTCT

ILVL

TAPM

SDRT

SNRL

l.

n.
rll'r

At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relative coordinate value is cleared. At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relatiye coordinate value is not cleared.
Even in the turning mode (signal COFF is closed) in Cf axis control, the feedback pulse from the position detector becomes effective. The feedback pulse in the turning mode in Cf axis control becomes invalid.

l:
o:
Alt11,
,

t:
tl.

Signals DRN, GRl,

PMC

GR2

are set to Gl23

(DGN

123) of

l'ltl

Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set ro cl18 (standard specif ications) .

address.

(DGN 118)

t;
t|:

tt\,1

In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, c87), the tool returns to R point level in the course of (B type) drilling. In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87), the tool returns by the retract amount in the course (Type A) of drilling.
updated by resetting.

t.
tl.

In the drilling

cycle, the init ia1 point level is cycle,

no

updated by resetting.
|

In the drilling

init ial point level is

^l,ll

t.
lt:

In the tapping cyele, M05 is sent out first when the spindle rotates CW and CCW. In the tapping cycle, I'103 and M04 are sent out when the spindle rotates CW and CCW.

b=

-394-

Parameter No.
SDRT
l.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)
IS IS

Remarks

0:
SNRL

The spindle indexing direction by M conmand minus. The spindle indexing direction by M cornrnand

plus.

l.

n.

The spindle indexing rnode is released by resetting. The spindle indexing mode is not released by

resetting.
ROTiO

BLIN

?NGMLK ?NGMLK

LIN4

LIN3

a L

Bit R0Tl0

No. 1:

The parameter unit of JOG feed, cutting feed upper limit speed, rapid FO speed and FL speed for

0:
.BLIN
l.

reference point return at the tine of inch output for Cs axis is I deg/min. The parameter unit is 0. I deg/urin.

n.
PNGMLK

For B8-digit input, the input unit when the decimal point is inputted is 1.000 (metric system) and 1.0000 (inch system) 1.000 regardless of the input unit.

n.

1:

In In

PMC axis PMC axis

control, machine l-oek shall be intalid. control, machine lock sha11 be valid.

LrN3,4
1: 0:

Selection of linear /rotary axis for 3rd and 4th axls Linear axis
Rotary axis

ACMR

ACMR

LGCM

NDSP4 NDSPZ NDSPY NDSPX

Blr
ACMR

No.

l. 0: 1:

Optional Optional

CMR

Cl"fi.

is used. is not used.

LGCM

0:

Low-and high-speed gear changing speed rpm depends on parameter SPDWL (No. 585). l.Ihen gear 3-step is used, low- and medium-speed gears, and medium- and high-speed gears changing speed rpm dpend on parameter SPDIO(L (No.585) and SPDUCT (No.586). Gear changing speed rprn shall be the respective maximum gear speed rpm.

-395-

Parameter No.
NDSP4,

Parameter (UPPer

T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

X, Y, Z and 4th Z, \, X, whether the current positions of axes are disPlaYed or not l: The current Position is not disPlaYed. 0: The eurrent Position is displaYed.

Bir
SCR

No.

n.
1:

1:

be 0.001 . The scaling rnagnification incrernent sha1l be 0.0001. The scaling magnification increment shall

GSPC

0:
SCLX, SCLY,
SCLZ

Special G code system "1"11 be C type' Special G code system shall be B type'
Each axis scaling is valid' Each axis scaling is invalid'

1:

0:

Bir No.
PLCOI

be used' 1: A pulse coder of 0'1u detection is to (Va1id for OG onlY) to be used' 0: A pulse coder of b'1u detection is not

SPTPX

to
SPTP4

TypesofpositiondetectoroftheX,Y(Z)'z(ct)andthe fturth axis in this order' as a 1: The separate tyPe pulse coder is to be used detector. be used as 0: The separate type pulse coder is not to a detector.

-396-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lohrer : M series)

Remarks

In

case of the FOG with 0.1U pulse coder, set the following parameters in units of lU. (The set data is multiplied by ten within the CNC) Paraueter
SERRX (X)

No. 0504

Contents

Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of X axis. Limitation value of position deviaEion amount during movement of Y(Z) axis. Linitation value of position deviation amount during movement ot Z(3) axis. Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of 4th axis. Grid shift amount of the X-axis Grid shift amount of the Y(Z)-axis. Grid shift amount of the Z(3)-axis. Grid shift amount of the 4th axis.
when

0505

SERRY (Z)

0506

SERRZ (3) SERR4 (4)

0507

0508 0509
05

GRDSX GRDSY GRDSZ

(x)
(Z) (3)

r0

051i

GRDS4 (4)

Note) Above explanation is applied (No. 0037 bir 7) = 1.

RSCMDl DEVFL 0

the y'arameter "PLCOI"

I

RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3

DEVFL3 DEC34

8 RSCMDl

DEVFLI RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3 DEVFL3

6

Bir
RSCMDl:
DEVFL
1

No.

channel

Setting r/o device of reader puncher interface t

l-

RSCMD2:

DEVFL2

Sett ing channel

rlo device of reader puncher interface

2

RSCMD

DEVFL
0

I/O device

used
PPR

0 0

Bubble cassette,

I
0

Floppy cassetEe
Paper tape reader Paper tape reader, etc.

I I

-397-

Parameter No.
FLKY

Parameter (Upper

: T seriesl Lower :

M series)

Remarks

t:
0:

CRT/MDI
CRT /},ID

keyboard uses a fuIl key I keyboard uses a standard key.

*DEC3/*DEC4 addresses
DEC34

DEC34:

Changes

return

deceleration signals for reference point

.

DEC34

=I
7

:IDEC3

xI9.7
xI9.
5

x16.

*DEC4

xI7 .7

M6TCD

IGIN

IGSK

GRST

TLSK

LCTM

GST2

GSTl

Bit

No.

32
Following is the setring for tool life management.
te

M6TCD

1:

0:
IGIN
IGSK

Regards M06 and the tool group comrnand. Regards M06 and the

same same

block T block T

code
code

as the next
as backnumber.

1:

0:
1:

Ignores tool backnumber. Does not ignore tool backnumber.

managed

0:
GRST

Took skip signal is accepted only while the tool life tool is in use. Tool skip signal is always aceepted.

1:

0:

Clears all group executlon data at the tirne of tool reset signal input. (This is the same with when this operation is performed.) Clears execution data only for the group with the nurnber inputted from the outside at the time of tool reset signal input. (Only the group shown by the cursor positi-on when thj,s operation is performed from MDI.)

TLSK

1:

0:

At the time of tool skip signal input, Group No. is also entered. At the time of tool skip signal input, the group eurrently being selected is skipped.

-398-

Parameter

No

Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

LCTM

1: 0:

Designates the tool life by tirne. Designates the tool life by frequency. Designate the number of registerable groups in tool group setting.
GST2 0 0
I
1

GSTI /GST2:

GSTl
0

No. of groups

No. of tools/group

rl-

16 32 64

i-16 l8 4
2

t
0

rt coMc
COMC.

r1-

I ././.---*--.,--,^\
LOCC

128

TMCR
TMCR

RWCNT RWCNT

NAMPR NAMPR

0
J/

LOCC

Bir No. LOCC 1:

0:

'J <> 'i c) // Does not place 1oca1 variables (/tl to 33) in <vacant> state during resetting. Places local variables (lfl to 33) in <vacant>. state during resetting.

76

.>

s4i,

2r0

i'"i

coMc t:
0:
T},TCR

Does not place conmon varLables (#100 <vacant> state during resetting. P1aces conrmon variables (/1100 to 149)

to 149) ln in
<vacant>

state during resetting.

1:

0:

T code calling subprogram 09000 T code as a normal tool function

Does not count the total number of parts machined and the number of parts machined even when U9?lyiA_erS_ :sessqed . Counts the total number of oarts machined and the

.- RrtefrFl (i.i

*/-/

0:

n"rb";-E-Darts rr"tritt.a "iffi ex_e_cuted

NAMPR I:

Displays the program name on the program directory display unit. 0: Does not display the program name on the prograu directory display unit.

':

W:

6:

-399-

Parameter

No

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

RIN

Bir RIN

No.

1:

Commands

0:

the coordinate rotation angle by incremental command. Commands the coordinate ro t at i-on angle by absolute
command.

ASTCD

I
I

ASTCD
I

EQCD

{+

EQCD
I

SHPCD

SHPCD
l

Bir No.
ASTCD/EQCD/

7
macro B

432

t
f-

SHPCD:

Set the hole parrern of *, =, /l EIA codes in sequence, using 8-bit data.
HSIF
CLER CLER NUASS CCINP
NUABS

custom

RAL
RAL

RDL RDL

HSIF

Bit HSIF

No.

76543210
14/S/T/B code processing sha11 be a high-speed interface. l{/SlT/B code processing shal1 be a normal interface.

I:
0:
1:

CLER

0:

Selects clear conditions, using the reset button, external reset signal and emergency stop. Selects reset conditions, using the reset button, external si-gna1 and emergency stop.

-400-

Parameter No.
NUABS

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

1:

0:

Returns to the status when the coordinate system is ON with machine lock signal OFF. (Disable) Does not return to the status when the coordinate system is 0N with machine lock signal OFF.

CCINP

1:

0:

In-position width between a feed block and a feed block is set by another parameter (No. 0609 to 0612) (Must not be used) In In-position width is set by nornal parameter.
puncher.

RAI

I: Registers only
0: puncher.

one program for reading in readerf

Registers all programs for reading in reader/ Registers a program after all programs are erased for reading in reader puncher interface. The reading is the same as in normal specJ.fication in reader puncher interface.

RDL

l.

0:

GRPOS

IGNAL SBAB

RSTSW

Bit

No. 1:

GRPOS

0:
IGNAL

The actual position screen. The actual position screen.

I-S

displayed on the graphit

only

0TT

is not displayed on the graphic only

0TT

1: Even when an alarm occurs on the other tool post, no feed hold status is reached. 0: When an alarm occurs on the other tool post, the feed hold status is selected l: Head 1 is upper on the conmon screen. 0: Head 2 is upper on the conrmon screen. l: 0:
The reset key is valid only for the tool post se lec ted The reset key is valid for both tool posts.

SBAB

only

0TT

RSTSW

only Ofi

-401-

,t

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

!13LMT

2SP

SEPH

SP2C

TlST

Bir M3LU[

No. 1:

0:
1:

only 0TT The range of the waiting M code is. (Parameter No. 243 value) x (100) to 999. The rane of the waiting 1"1 code is (parameter No. 243 value) x 100 to subsequent 100 pieces.
Two

2SP

0:
SEPII

spindle (Two spindle Two tool post) Single spindle (Single spindle Two tool post)

only only

0TT
t4,

I:
0:

The lst handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent to 1st tool post, and the 2nd handle pulse to the 2nd tool post. The handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent in parallel to both tool posts.
GraphiqS;

0TT

SP2C

1:

0:
TIST
1:

are drawn on a single screen for both posts. tool Graphics are drawn on a separate screen by both tool posts.
Tool post selecting signal is invalid (HEADI only). Tool post selecting signal is valid.

only

0TT

0:
0
0 4 8

*
n

IFE

ITO

IFM

FY1

TYO

,I
'$

,t

Bir

No.

76

54

;
2

Set the parameter only to lst tool post

.!

ri'
ti'

7
! !,

t
E

-t

-402-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
1 2nd tool post

M series)

Remarks

TYI 00

TYO

-1lst tool post

TYI 0l

TYO

-d-t*'oot
I

not'

TYI l0

TYO

TYI tl

TYO

IFE

[:
n.

the conditlons for tool post checking are established, no tool post interference is checked. I.lhen the conditioons for tool post checking are established, tool post interference is checked.
Even when
When

ITO

l:
0:

Offset No. 0 is designated by T code, interference check ls contlnued according to the current Offset No. Wtren Offset No. 0 is deslgnated, using T code, tool post interference check 1s lnterrupted until offset No. other than 0 ls designated by the next T code.

-403-

Parameter No.
IFM

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

I:

Tool post interference is checked in the manual mode Tool post interference is not checked in the mnaual
mode.

FMLlO NPRV EFMLlO

0 0 9

FMLlO NPRV EFML I O

RDIK

DILK

Bit

No.

FML1O

1:

The rapid traverse rate and cutting feed upper liurit speed parameter increment system shatl be l0 nun/min or I inch/min. ..g) For 100 m/min, the increment system shall be As per normal specifications.
10000.

n.
NPRV

1:

0:
EFML

position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command sha1l be valid. (The per-revolution feed command is converted automatipally to the per-minute feed in CNC.) When no position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command shall be invalid.
Even when no

1O

1.

0:
RDIK

The feedrate command (cutting feed) of control is used by I0 times. Standard specif ication.

pMC

axis

1.

0:
DILK
l.

The high-speed interlock signal sha11 be invalid when the each directional interlock signal goes off. The high-speed interlock signal shall be always

va1id.

0:

The each directional interlock signal shatl be valid only in manual operation. The directional interlock slgnal shall be invalid.

NFED 0 0
5

RSASC] RSASC]

>Lrz
STP2

0 NFED

NFED

RSASd
RSASC]

PARTY STP2 PARTY STP2

I
NFED

Blt

No.

-404-

Parameter
Parame t
NFED

No

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lolrer : M series)

Remarks

er Nos. 0050/0051 correspond to setting l/O=2 and 3.

1:

$'{
\
L

When

0:
RSASCI

the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, no feed is output before and after that. When the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, feed is output before and after that..
When

1:

0:
STP2

the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ASCII code is used. When the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ISO/EIA code is used.
Stop

*e 5

l:

0: Stop bit shall be I bit in the reader

interface.
PARTY

interface.

blt shall be 2 birs in rhe reader

puncher

puncher

1: Parity bit shall be present. 0: Parity bit shall be absent.

NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4

IIODIC3

NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4

\toDIcz

'IODICY

NODICX 0

BirNo.
NODICX-NODIC6:

For increment systen 1/10, this sets wherfier the decimal point position of the current positLon display of each axis PMC axis control is made identi-cal to increment systen 1/I0 or not.

NODIC

1:

The current position display of PMC axLs control

0:

sh.all be the same as in standard specifications, not in accordance with the decimal point position of increment systen 1/10 The current position display of PMC axis control is in accordance with the decinal point position of
increment system 1i tO.

-405-

Parameter

No

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

LBLCD 0 0
5

LBLCD
I

RBLCD

RBiCD
I

Bit

No.

3210
t
:

LBLCD /RBLCD:

The hole pattern of [' ] in EIA code in custom macro B is set by 8-bit data in sequence.

]ROTCA 0

ETX

ASCII ASCII
I

5
?ROTCA

ETX

Bit
PRORCA

No.

10
protocol, protocol For "ororlication protocol, protocol communication
End Code shall be I'ETXrr. End Code shall be "CR".
A
B

I: ao.
0:
1:

is is

used. used.

:
I

EXT

0: ASCII
1:

0:

For all communj-cations except NC data, ASCII code is used For all cornmunications except NC data, ISO code is used.

D]C

il
7

$t'

"

u(\

t t
-406t .t &'b

-_

* ,

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

.

Remarks

Al-1 subsequent parameters are set in decirnal

Refer to
parameter No. 00040007.

CMRX

0
CMRX

CI,IRZ

I
CMRY

cl'IR3 0

2
CI',IRZ

CMR4

cuR4

When

an optional comand nulttply (No. 0035 4CMR=1) is used, there are 2 types of setting methods as follows.

1)

When

a corwmand.nultiply 7s I/2 to presetvalue=*+Ioo (Comand rnultiply)

$fben

|127z

2)

a comand rnultiply is 2 to 48: Preset value = 2 x (Comnand urultiply)

Note 1) For (2) above, be sure !o set a value such that the coumand rnultiply should be always an integer. Note 2) Set the backlash compensation and pitch error compensation values with detection unit when an arbitrary conutrand rnultiply is used.

-407-

Parameter No.
CMRX, CMRZ,

Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

CMRY Cgmmand rnultiply

C},IR4

for

X,

Z and 4th axes, in turn.

Setting
t
2 4

code

I'lultiplier
0.5
I
2
5

l0
20

10.

SPLOW

d
SPLOW

SPLOW

For spifidle speed during constant speed spindle rotation. For spindle speed at gear shift (when parameter No. 0003, GST=I), set as Gear shift spindle speed __ ,^^ x 4095

Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit:

THDCH

Maxi-mum

*oaoffi

'

rprn)

THDCH

Width of chambering for thread cutting cycle in Setting range: 0 to I27 (unit : 0.1 lead)

G92.

t s

-408E

.?

t'

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
SCTTIM

M series)

Remarks

SCTTIM

SCTTIM

Set the delay timer for checking. the spindle speed reach signal. This sets the time required from execution of the S function to the beginning of checking the spindle speed reach signal. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: msec) Spindle speed reach signal.

distribution
a

}{BUFl
0

}{BUFl

}{BUF2 0

I,IBUF2

MBUFI,2

Up to two

codes which are not subjected to for the next block can be set. buffering When 03 is set' M03 is not subjected to buffering for the next block.
14

-409-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
PSORGX

M series)

Remarks

PSORGZ

PSORGX, PSORGZ

Grid numbers at the reference point of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: o-255
OFCMP

,3

!j

H4NO+HZNO

tt
0

TLCMP
NUMHG

OFMAX

TLMAX

OFCMP

Offset value compensation value setting value 0 - 32.

Tool selection number compensation value Setting value: 0 - 99
The number of manual pulse generators to be used

TLCMD

NU}4HG

in multi-handle is set. Setting value z l/2/3 (unit)

Maximum

OFMAX

value of offset number Setting valuez O - 32 value of tool setting Settingvalue: 0-99
number

TLMAX

Maximum

-4r0-

Parameter No.
HZNO

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

In case of multi-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the Z axis in
spec

ified. Setting value:

1, 2 or

H4NO

In case of rnulti-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the 4th axis specified, Setting valuei settlng l, 2 or
H4NO 3

1S

method Second digit:

First digir :

HZNo

(Exanple) When the 2nd manual pulse generator is used for the Z-axis and the 3rd manual' pulse generator is used for the 4th axis.

Setting value.

32

MOLHPG

I I

MOLHPG

},IOLHPG

Multiplier n of the manual handle feed Setting valuez L - 127 Uultiplier n when selection sighal MP2 for the manual hand feed move distance in on, set to 100 as a standard value.
OFSNO

.l
I
I

OFSNO

Setting of tool offset number Ln tool offset value direct input function B (at the setting of work coordinate system shift amount). Setting valuet | - 32

- 4II -

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M seri_es)

GRPAX

Remarks

GRPAX

Graphic coordinate system setting in graphic func t ion.

GRPAX=1 GRPAX=2 GRPAX=3

GRPAX=0

GRPAX=6

GRPAX=4

LrJ(fA

=/

(Note) The difference between GRpAX=0, lr 2 and GRPAX=3,4,5 is the difference that the work coordinate system zero point is at chuck side or not.

PSRNQI

5 PSRNQ2

6 PSRNQ3

-4L2-

I
I

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

PSRNQ4

PSRNOI

Set the order of moving to the dry run restart position in program restart of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. Sett.ing value: I - No. of axes (Moves in the order of 1, 2, 3 and 4)

(eg)

When setting to PSRNQ1=2, PSRNQ2=3, PSRNQ3=4 and PSRNQ4=l, the tool moves to the restart

position by one axis in the order of 4th -Y-2.

(Note) When all zero, the value out of the setting range or the same value is overlapped on the above parameter for setting, the setting is made automaticallv in the order of 4th - X -\-2.
UPKY

0
UPKY
a

DWNKY

DLINKY

RGTKY

)
RGTKY

LFTKY
0

LFTKY

FWDKY

J
FWDKY

-4r3-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

BACKY

Remarks

BACKY

KEEHHE
Setting value: I to
Axis /Direc t ion
+x
6

Specify the JOG move axis and direction on the software operatorts panel corresponding to keys.

Setting Value
I
2

-X
+z

-z
+;t
-5

4 5
6

(Exarnple)

when

serri"c

f -t, Trl +3 anal . l*i1.. I ulto f-il

ro *x,

ro m ql -X, FFI to +2,

I

to -3, set as follows

UPKY=I, DWNKY=2, RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4, FI.IDKY=5, BACKY=6.

RTDKY

LTUKY

RTDKY=7, LTOKY=8

-4L4-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper:

Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

a) In
UPKY,
DWNKY,

case

of T series

RGTKY,

LFTKY

trEHH;.'
Axis, direction
+X

Sets the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to

Setting value
t
2 3

-x
+Z

-z

*"'
b) In
URKY
LTUKY

(Examo 1e )

""..r",

to *x,

ro -x,

H.'

*2,

and

to -2, set as follows.

UPKY=I,
case
DWNKY=2,

RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4.

of M series

EEtrEtr Eil EE
Axis, direction
+X _X +Y

Set the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to teY?'

Setting value
I
2 3

-Y
+z

4
5

-z
+4

6
1

-4
(Exanple)
When

setting to -X,

to

+2,
and

to -2,

to *X,

to *Y

to -Y, set as follows.

UPKY=5, DWNKY=6, RGTKY=l, LFTKY=2, FWDKY=4, BACKY=3.

-4r5-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
I

M series)

Remarks

NSWI

0
NSWI

i
0
2

\
NSW88

J
NSW88

The names of general purpose switches (SIGNAL 0 SIGNAL 7) on the software operatorts panel in the following figure are set as fo1lows.
OPERATOR'S

PANEL 02334 : : : : : : : :

N5678

SIGNAL0 SIGNALI SIGNAL 2 SIGN.trt 3 SIGNAL 4 SIGNAL 5 SIGNAL 6 SIGNAL 7

ON IOFF OFF fON OFF ION ON IOFF ON IOFF I0FF ON 0N IOFF OFF ION

AUTO

Characters are set by codes in parameters 0140 to 0203 as follows:

-416-

Parameter No.
PRM.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Code (083) corresponding to character ttStt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (073) corresponding to character ttltt

Remarks

No.

140

PRM. No. 141 PRM. No. t42 PRM. No. 143 PRM. No. 144 PRM. No. 145 PRM. No. PRI"I. No.

of

SIGNAL

0 in the

above

figure is set.

Code (071) corresponding to character ttGtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (078) corresponding to character ttNtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (065) corresponding to character ttAtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (076) corresponding to character ttlt' of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set. Code (032) corresponding to character tt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
tt

146 L47

Code (048) corresponding to character ttort of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.

PRM. No. 0148-0155 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL I in the

above figure.

PRM.

No. 0156-0163
No.0164-0171

Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 2 {n the above figure. Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 3 in the above figure. Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 4 in the
above figure.

PRM.

PRM. PRM. PRM. PRM.

No.

OL72-0179

No. 0180-0187

Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 ln the

above figure.

No. 0188-0195 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 in the above figure. No. 0196-0203 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 7 in the above fisure. For character codes, refer to the characters-to-codes table in the next page. Setting value 0 is a space.

-4I7-

Character-to-codes Correspondence Table

Character
A
B
C

Code

Conment

Character
6
7

Code

Comment
l i :

065 066
067 068 069

054
055 056 057

i
t ;

8
9

032
033
tl

Space

F
G

070
071

Exclamation mark

034 035 036 037

Quotation mark
Sharp

072
073 074 075 076
077

tl
$
o/

i
i,

I
J
K

Dollar
Percent

svmbol

.i I

t
1

&

038 039

Ampersand

L
M
N

Apostrophe

040
041

078

Left parenthesis Risht parenthesis

Aster j-sk

o
P

O79 F
080
081 082 083 084

042

043

Plus sien
Comma

0
R S

044
045

046
047

T
U

Minus sisn Period Slash

Colon Semi-co1on

085
086

0s8 0s9 060

061

!l
Y Y Z

087

088
089
,|

062
UOJ

Left ansle bracket Sisn of equality Rieht anele bracket

Question mark Commercial at mark Left square bracket
Yen srrmbol

090 048 049 050

051

uo4

I
2 J

09r
A

092 093 094

095

052
0s3

Risht square bracket

Underline

4 n

-4rB-

{ .:
I

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

CCLMP

.+

POSTNi

5 POSTN2

6 POSTN3

POSTN4

I
0:
1:

INTPLN INTPLN

G17 G18

2:
CCLMP

is selected with power on. is seleeted with power on. Gl9 is selected with power on. Setting value 00 to
cycle
99

M-code of clamp of C-axis in the drilling

POSTN1

Approach amount for single directi-on posi-tioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axi-s and 4th axis

Setting value 0 to 255 Unit 0.0I m (rnetric output) setring value 0 ro 255 unit 0.001 inch (inch output) Note) In increment systern l/10, the uni-t is the same as above. But the Max. value is 163.

-419-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

3 AO\IMDR

AOVMDR:

Mininum deceleration ratio of circular cutting speed inside the automatic override-

Setting range: I to 100% Standard preset value: I Set the mj-nimum deceleration ratio (lDR) when the inside circular cutting speed is changed.

4
AOVOR

AOVCR:

Deceleration ratio of inside corner automatic override. Setting Jange: I to 1001l Standard preset value: 50 Set the inside corner override value.

AOVTH

AOVTH:

Inside judgement angle of automatic override at inside corner part. Setting range: I to 179" Standard preset value: 91

'1

f 1 1

-420-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower':

M series)

Remarks

FIDN

FIDN:

Constant to find the feedrate variations when manual pulse generator is rot.at.ed one scale for Fl digit
command.

AF=

Fmax i 100n
Fmax

when

Set n above. In other words, set the feedrate the manual pulse generator is rotated. Preset value

I to

I27

Frnax i in the above equatlon is the upper linit value of feedrate for Fl digit conmand: set it to parameter Nos. 0583/0584.

trhax
Fmax

1: 2:

Upper Upper

linit linit

value of Fl to F4 feedrate value of F5 to F9 feedrate

MCDCNT

9 MCDCNT

MCDCNT: /

I,Ih_en

E
F:

the preset M*cgqg_ig executed, the total- number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted. Settlng value: l_tg 255 (0 is eguivalent to no setting. 98 and 99 cannot be set.)
i]MGCDO

la

0
i

0
II}IGCDO

UMGCD9

----.-

UMGCD9

.-42L-

Parameter

No

Parameter (UPPer

: T series'

Lower

: M series)

Remarks

macro' Set uP fo l0 G codes calling custom

U},IGCDO:

UMGCDI:
UMGCD2: UMGCD3: UMGCD : UMGCD5: UI"IGCD6: UMGCDT: UMGCD8: U]'IGCD9:

calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling
G code

custom macro bodY 090 10 custom macro bodY 0901r custom uacro bodY 090r2 custom macro bodY 090r3 custom macro bodY 090I4 custom macro bodY 090I5 custom macro bodY 0901 6 custom macro bodY 090i7 custom macro bodY 090r8 custom macro bodY 090r9

Setting value:

001 to 255 (with G00' no custom macro can be

called. Even when 0 is called' it is equivalent to no setting.

l I

Set up to 10 M codes calling custom macro'

UMMCD4:

UM{CD5:
UWCD6:
UMMCDT: UMMCD8: iD,IMCDg:

UMMCDlO:

UMMCDIl:
UI'IMCD 12 :

UMMCDI3:

code calling M code calling M code calling M code calling 1"1 code calling M code calling M code calling !1 code calling M code calling U cbde calling
1"1

custom macro bodY 09020 custom macro bodY 0902 I custom macro bodY 09022 custom macro bodY 09023 custom macro bodY 09024 custom macro bodY 090 2s custom macro bodY 09026 custom macro bodY 09027 custom macro bodY 09028 custom macro bodY 09029

Setting value:

006 to

(with M00' no

255

0 is set' called. to no setting. ic is equivalent

Even when

cuscom macro

can be
)

*:,

-422-

't.
Paranoe

ter

No.

Parameter (Upper:

Tserles, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

UMMCDl

0
UMMCDl

UMMCD2

I
UMI'TCD2

UMMCD3

2 UMMCD3

Set up
UMMCD1: UMMCD2: UMMCD3:

to

M codes
1.1

calling custom Dacro.

M code M code

code calling custom macro body 09001 calling custom macro body 09002 calling custom macro body 09003

Setting value: 003 to

(With M00, no custom Eacro can

255

cal1ed. Even when 0 is set, it is equivalent to no settipg.)

WAITM

be

I.IAITM:

Setting of the mlnimum value of 3-diglt code which waiting M code (only OTT): Input the 3rd figure as a setting value. Up to 100 waiting M codes are available.
becomes a

only

OTT

Exanple) When the setting value = 5, the lraiting M codes are 500 to 599.

-423-

ifJ+*F.+i-a4

i-{F

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

BRATE2 0
L
5

BRATEz

.-

BMTE2:
BRATE3:

Baud rate when the reader puncher interface is used (valid when setting parameEer Ilo is 2). Baud rate when remote buffer (va1id when setting paramete

F*used

The correspondence between Secting No. and actual baud rate i-s as fol1ows.

SettiFg No. t
2 3

Baud rate
50

r00
110
150

4
5
6
7 8.

200 300 600

POFF TPSUP

TPSUP:

Z-axis acceleration/deceleraEion type in fhe rigid tapping node

Data type: Byte type Set value: 0: Exponenti-al acceleration/ decelerati-on Standard set value: 0

-424-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

BKL9

Spindle backlash

amount

Ln the

rigid talnin8 node

Data type: Byte type Set value: O - LZ7 : Detection unit Unit
ehanged.

Note) Power should be turned off whenever the parameter is

6
MCODE

MCODE:

M-code

to specify the rigid tapping

mode

Data

type: Byte tyPe Setvalue: 0-99

Note) Power should bef,turned off whenever the pararneter ls

changed.
rNPx
0
5

Standard

INPX

setting 20 (netric

outPut) 12 (lnch outPut)

INFZ
0
5

I
INPY

INP3
0
5

INPZ
3rd axls Ln-posltion width Settlng value O to 32767 detection unit
:.i

INP3

-425-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

INP4

INPX, INPY In-position width INPZ, INP4 respectively.

for X, to

Y,

Z, and 4th axis, (detection unit)

Setting range:
Position deflection
value

32767

Next block

In-position width In position check is performed when the feed mode changes from rapid traverse to rapid traverse, rapid traverse to cutting feed , or cutting feed to rapid traverse.
SERRX

4 SERRX

SERRZ

5
SERRY

SERR3

6
SERRZ

SERR3

3rd axis position deviation linit value Setting value 0 to 32767 detection unit

ril

-426-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

series)

Remarks

r
SERRX,

SERR4

SERRY, SERRZ,
SERR4

Lirnitation value of position deviation amount during movenent for X, Y, Z and 4th axis' resPectively. serring range: 0 to 32767 (detection unit)
(Exarnple) When the rapid traverse rate and the position gain is 30, calculated by:

is

10 n/nin. the error is

s=-IConversion of 10 u/nin. into pulses/sec. with the detecEion unit of 1u/pulse gives 166,666 pulses/sec. Therefore, E = L66,665/30 - 5'555 pulses.
G

Multiply this value by a factor of 1.5' and set the obtained value 8333 as the
paraueter.

GRDSX

8 GRDSX
a

GRDSZ

GRDSY

.!

GRDS3
U

n
GRDSZ

GRDS3

3rd axis grid shift Setting value O to

amount setting +32767 detecting

unit

I
GRDS4

GRDSX, GRDSY,

GRDSZ,
GRDS4

Setting of grid shift amount of X axis, Y axis, Z axis and 4th axis respectively. serring range 0 to +32767 (detect unit). Wtren the reference !'oint is shiftefiTte slgn of

this parameter is

necessary.

-427-

<;;llP

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :

11

series)

Remarks

(i)

Reference point return procedure Select manual continuous feed mode, and turn signal ZRN on (connect it with +24V) ' When feed towards the reference poi-nt is designaEed with the manual feed button, the moving part of the machine Doves at rapid traverse. When the deceleration limit switch is operated and the contact of reference point return deceleration signal ttDCX, *DCY, i<DCZ, *DC4 opens, and the feed is decelerated. Thereafter, the moving part moves at a Predetermined low sPeed. Thereafter, when the deceleration lirnit switch is operated and the rnoving Part reaches the

electric grid position, feed stops, and reference point return completion signal ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 is outPut. The direction in which an axis is returned to reference point can be set for each axis. Once an axis is returned to reference point and the corresponding signal ZPX, ZPY' ZPZ ot Z{4 is output, jog feed for that axis is invalid until signal ZRN is turned off'
Lock condition

(2) Timing charE

ZRN (Reference Point return)

ffi---

+X
/one rotation sisnal I / after *DCX is iurned \
I

(Reference point is reached with the

V
*DCX

\r
o

tr
t

/ on) i (Set Darameter

pL

No.0534)

\
PX

'IDCX

ON

criollllllllllt
(One.rotation signal)

(Grid shift amount set bY parameter No. 0508 - 05f I

(X axis plus return direction.)

'ii

-428-

{_
.i

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower :

series )

PSANGN 0
I

6 PSANGN

PSANGN

S4/S5 digits control (Analog output)

Sets the data for adjusting the gain of constant surface speed control. (analog output) This seEs the data for gain adjustment in analog output' setting range: 700 to 1250 Standard setting value: 1000 (Adjusting nethod) (1)- Set the standard setting value 1000' (2) Designate the maximum S analog value (fOVl ' (3) Measure the outPut voltage. (4) Set this value according to the following
formula. lfeasured voltage (V)

i0

1000

= setting value

(5) After setting the Paramqter.' designate the maximum S analog value (10V) again, and make sure that the outPut voltage is 10V.
LPGIN
0
5

I
LPGIN

LPGIN

Setting of servo loop gain in position control' Setting range: t to- 9i99 (unit: 0.01 sec-1) Note) To set a loop gain to each axis, set No' 5L7 to 0 and set a loop gain of X axis, Yaxis and so on. (The increment system is the same' )
RPDFX

Standard

setting
3000

8 RPDFX

RPDFZ

r.l

RPDFY

-429-

; ,{aE}F.

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T seriep, Lower : M series)

RPDF3

Remarks

0
RPDFZ

RPDF4 PPNFY

Rapid traverse rate of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn.

RPDFY,

RPDF/32,
RPFD4

Setting 30 to 30 to Note i)

range

24000 Unit mm/nin (mno output) 9600 Unit 0.1 inch/min (inch output) Set rrl'r to the FML10 of parameter No. 49 for the other seting values. Note 2) In increment system 1/10, the unit is the
same.

'F

LINTX
LINTX

LINTZ
0
5

LINTY

LINT3
0
5
L

LINTZ LINT3

3rd axis linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (for rapid traverse) Setting value 8 to 4000 Unit msec

-430-

Parameter No.

Par'ameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

LINT4

LINTX, LINTY, LINTZ, LINT4

Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn during rapid

traverse. Setting range: 8 to 4000 (unit:

THRDT

msec.)

THRDT

The time constant value of X axis in thread cutting

cycle (G92). Setting range: I to 4000 (unit: msec.) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in combination with the parameter THDFL (pararneter No. 0528)
FEDIO(

FED}fl( FED}fl(

Upper speed of cutting feed (available for X, Y, z

axes)

Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: 6 to 6000 unit:

rnn/rnin (m outPut)

0.I inch/nin (inch output)

Note 1) Set 'r1" to the FMLI0 of parameter No. 49 for the other cutting values. Note 2) In increment system the unit is the same.
THDFL 0
5 2

THDFL

The lower linit

value (FL) of X axis acceleration/ deceleration in thread cutting cycle. (G92) Setting range 6 to i5000 unit: nm/rnin (rnm output) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch output) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in consideration of the parameter No. 0526.
Note 1) In incrernent systen the unit is the
same.

See

parameter

No. 0526

-43r-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

FFFDT

Remarks

9 FEEDT

FEEDT

Time constant of the exponential acceleration/ deceleration in cutting feed and jog feed. Setting range: 0 to 4000 unit: msec Set this to tt0tt, when the exponential accelerati-on/ deceleration is not used.

FEDFL 0
5
3

0 FEDFL

FEDFL

The lor.rer lirnit of feed rate in exponential acceleration /deceleraE ion. SeEting range 6 to t5000 unit: mu,/min (nrn output)

6 to 6000 unit: 0.I inch/nin (inch output) Note)rIn increment system 1/10, the unit is the
same.
SPALW

r'.
!

'1 l/
I

-,

;'-----0
5

/ f--'1:--T--1
J
1

CYCR SPALW

Tolerance (g) at which the actual spindle speed is regarded to reach the command value in the detection

CYCR

of soindle function. Setting range: I to 100 (7") (For constant surface sPeed control) Setting of relief amount in canned cycle G73 (high speed peck drilling cYcle) Setting range: 0 to 32767 unit: 0.001 mn ., / (rnrn input) 0 to 3/767 unit: 0.0001 inch
trf,iii.-i;p'u11

-J

=:=

Noce) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the

same.
SPLMT 0
5

.,

CYCD

SPLMT

Spindle speed fluctuation (r) at which an alarm is

indicated in the detection of spindle fluctuation. Setting range: I to 100 (%) (For constant surface speed control)

speed

-432-

Parameter No.
CYCD

Paraureter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Rernarks

Setting of the cutting start point in canned cycle

G73 (peck

Setting range: 0 to 32767 unir: 0.001 un

(rnn

drilling cycte)
O

to 32767 unit: 0.0001 inch

system

input)

(inch input)

Note) In increment
same.

L/IO, the unit is the

RPDFL 0
5 3 3 RPDFL

RPDFL

The least speed of rapid traverse override (Fo)

(Cornrnon to all axis) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: mr/min (mr output) 6 to 6000 unir: 0.1 inch/nin (inch ourpur)

Note) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the

same.

ZRNFL 0
5
J

4 ZRNFL
I

ZRNFL

Low feed speed at reference point return (FL) (Cornmon to all axes) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: rmn/min (mr output)

6 to 6000 unit:
same.

0.1 inch/min (inch output)

Note) In increment systen l/10, the unit is the

BKLX 0
5 3

BKLX

BKLZ 0
5
J

BKLY

-433-

n+rq'

'ffi*ffftf*

Et,

Parameter No.

Parameter

(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

BKL3
0
5

BKLZ

BKL4 BKLX,
I)I\LZ / I t

Backlash amount respect ively.

of X, Y, Z and 4th
0.001 nm
(rnm

axes,

BKL3IZ
BLK4

Setting amount 0 to 2550 unit: 0 to 2550 unit:

0.000I inch (lnch output) progranming, set the value of X axis In diameter i-n diameter va1ue. (For T series) Note I) Unit becomes l/tO in increment system LlL}. t
GRIO
GR2O GR3O

output)

Setting M series spindle function

2-stage gear
Low

3-stage gear
Low

Remarks

Hieh

l'liddle
Hieh

L0\{ : LOW Gear l"liddle: Middle Gear Hieh : Hieh Gear

Spindle motor rotation command (analog voltage output)

t.

i;

l0v
Voltage (NC) corresponding to the upper limit of the spindle motor rPm

GR2O

(GR2q

Spindle rotation command

, A x 76t5

vmin

*?ffi

lBf V*""

(S code input)

*?0ff

Vmux

Designation included in parentheses is concerned with the 3-stage gear.

Note 2) Set a backlash compensation value with a detection unit when an arbitrary command

multiply is used.

-434-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T seri-es,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

The following values are first. set in the parameters . Constant Vmax regarding the upper limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 542). This constant is obtained by the equation below.
The upper
Vmax

= 4095 x

spindle motor rpm The spindle motor rpm when the command voltage is 10 V

lirnit of

the

. Constant Vmin regarding the lower limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 543)
Vglin = 4095
x

The lower linit of the soindle motor rDm The spindle motor rpm when the comrnand voltage is 10 V

. Spindle rpm A with low gear whei-the comnand vifltage is l0 V (parameter No. 541) . Spindle rpm B with high (or middle) gearwhen the corrnand voltage is 10 V (parameter No. 539) . Spindle rpm C with high gear when the command volEage is I0 V (parameter No. 555) (3-stage gear) (Note) If the sPecified voltage exceeds the allowable input voltage for the spindle drive system' rpu at l0 V is assumed by proportional calculation, and the resultant assumption should be used.
From above, the spindlJ'motor rotation conrmand (0 - 10 V) and the gear selectj-on command (GR30, GR20, GRl0) are outPut for the specified S code, as shom in the Fig. above.

J TU

L\,

GRHYJ,\

SPDLC

Sets the spindle speed offset compensation value, that is, compensation value of zero offset of spindle speed command voltage. (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: 0 to +8191 (unit: VELO)
Maximum

GRH}IA.X

spindle speed (for analog output with spindle funct,ion) at high gear (intermediate gear in case of 3-stage gear).
(Spindle speed with spindle speed voltage of Setting range: I to 19999 (unit: rpm)
10V)

In case ofonly one gear, set thi-s value to low gear

i
I

--'{'+Tc

e{4ilEF:

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lo\ter : M series)

cRI'!(l

Remarks

0
GRHMIN

GRI'fl(2

I
GRLMAX

GR}D{3

SPDMAX

GR}D(4 0
5

SPDMIN
ae

GRI'D(I

The spindle speed corresponding to gears I to when the spindle speed command is lOV. (for constant surface speed control) Secting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rpn) /
when using

GRHMIN

Setting of the lower limit of the spindle speed high speed gear. (Medium speed gear in 3-step gear selection) (for S analog output type B) (for S analog output) Setting range: I to L9999 (unit: rPn) Setting of the max. spindle speed at low speed gear (for S analog outPut). Set the spindle speed when the velocity command voltage is 10V. Setting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rPm) Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) of spindle motor 4095 Setting value Upper limit llax. spindle motor speed x Setting range: I to 4095 Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) Setting value = Lower limit of spindle motor X +uY] Setting range: I ro 4095

GRLMAX

SPDMAX

SPDI'TIN

-436-

.{
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper

: T series,
DRFT3

Lower

M series)

Rem:aft5

i i
I
1

DRFT3

Set a compensation value for drift generated in the Cs-axis servo loop. Setting value 0 to +8191 Unit VELO The value of this parameter changes automatically during the automatic compensation.
JOGFL

(+

JOGFL JOGFL

The lower linit

of jog feed in exponential acceleration/ deceleration (FL) Setting range 6 co 15000 unit: nrn/min (mm oucpur) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/min (inch output)
Note) In increment systen 1/10, the unit is
srme.

Ehe

FINT FINT

The cutting feedrate in

on.

AUTO rnode

at turning

po\.rer

Setting range 6 to 15000 unic: mn/rnin (uru input) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch input) (Generally, set ttO" to this parameter and change it by program command. When the feedrate i.s constant and it is not necessary to change, set the feedrate to this paraDeter. )
SEQINC 0 0 SEQINC SEQINC

Number increment sequence No.

value in automatic insertion of 0 to

9999

Setting range:

-437-

,*rf,l|;F*

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,
LOI^lSP

Lower

M series)

Remarks

LOWSP

llj-nimum spindle .speed control mode (G96)

in constant surface
rpm)

speed

Setting range: 0 to 9999 (unit:

BRATEO BRATEO

BRATEO

This sets the baud rate when the rea_d_e-{puncher interface is used. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0. )
Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:

Settiff
I
2 3

value

Baud rate
50 100
110

4
5
6
7
B

150 200 300 600 1 200

480096 00

2400

-438-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

BMTEl
BMTEl

Remarks

BRATEl

This sets the baud rate r^/hen the reader/puncher ,-\ interface is used. (Effective when the setting paraaeter I/O is i.;,/
Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:

Setting value I
2 3

Baud rate
50 100 110

1)

'k
".t* |. ?
a

4
5
6
7

150 200 300 600 I 200

n/*

ln

-24Sq

l',.2
0
5 5 5

-<-jJgaq) f e600 \

GRTMAX GRTMAX

Setting of the max. spindle speed at high speed gear in 3-step gear selection (for S analog output) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
SCLMP

GRTMIN
SCLMP

Upper linit of spindle speed (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: I to f9999 (unlt: rpn) (Valid both in G96 and G97 rnodes.)
when using

GRTMIN

Setting of the'lower timit of.rhe spindle high speed gear in 3-step gear selection. (For S analog output type B) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)

speed

-439-

F,

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

CRCDL

Remarks

CRCDL

CRCDL

I{hen tool moves along the outside of an acute angle close to 90" during tool nose radius compensation (T-system) or cutEer compensation (M-system) limitations on ignoring a small movement
amount.

Setting range: 0 to 16383 unit: 0 to 16383 unit:

0.001 mrn (mrn input) 0:0001 inch (inch input)

Note) Unit becornes t/10 in increment system 1/f0'

(AY)

path after offset

Programmed Path
n :

If AX < CRCDL and AZ(AY) < CRCDL, the smal1 movement is ignored. This prevents the workpiece from being affected by sEopping the tool at the
corner.
ACALFL
0
5
5

ACAIFL

Feedrate during rneasuring in automatic tool

ebmpensation function (common for a1I axes) ' Setting range: 0 to 15000 unit: rnrn/min (mrn input) 0 to 6000 unit: 0. I inch/min (inch input)

Note) In increment systern l/10, the unit is the

DdulE.

-440-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lotrer : M series)

RPDJX

Remarks

RPDJX

RPDJZ 0
5 o

0 RPDJY

RPDJ3 0
5 6
1

RPDJZ

RPDJ4

RPDJX,

Rapid traverse rate in

RPDJZ/Y,
PFDJ3 /2, RPDJ4

4th axis in turn. Setting range: 30 to 24000 unit: 30 to 9600 unir: If 'r0rr is set to these of parameEer No. 0518,
used. Note 1) Set Note 2)

JOG

node for X, Y, Z and

nm/min (nn output)

0. I inch/nin (inch output) parameters, the set vd.lues 0519' 0520 and 0521 are

the FML10 of parameter No. 49 to I for the other setting values. In increment systern l/10, the unit is the
same.

JOGF JOGF

JOG

feed rate when the rotary switch position is I0 in feed rate B specification: Setting value I to 2000 Unit mrn/rnin. deg/nin

(Metric ouEput) Setting value I to 800 Unir 0.1 inch/min deg/nin (Inch output)
Note) In increment system 1/10, the unit is rhe
same.

-44r-

i6;aar*ii,'.

- .....*"crl|ff;F

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower : M series)

Remarks

(eg) When 200 is set to Parameter No. 565: Feed rate becomes geometrlcal series of 200 rnm/min (for rnetric output) or 20 inch/rnin (for inch output) in rotary SW position 10.

Rotarv
los iEion

SW

conditions
hrhen parameter
OVRI=

Manual continuous feed rate

When parameter

0VRI=0 *ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov

Metric output I *ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov1 Me tric Inch

input
0 o o o o o o o
o o

Inch output Inch Me tric input input input

0 0

o o

mrn/

inch/
r0

rnn/

inch/
min.
25 35

min.

min. 0.4 0.5 0.8

1.1 1.5

I
2 3

o o o o o o o o o

o o o o
o

t.0

t4
20 27 37 52 72

t.4
2.O

49
68

4
5
6
7

2.7 3.7

9s

o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o

2.0

t32
r83
250

5.2 7.2

3.0

8
9

o o o o o
o o o

o
o

100 140

t0.0 r4.0

5.0

3s0
490 bdu 950

E
I1
L2

@
270

8.0

rl.0
15. 0

27 .O

o
o

370
520

37.0 57.0
7

l3
L4 15

o
o

20. 0 30. 0 40. 0

r320
I 830
2

o o o

720

2.0

r000

500

100.0

(Note) O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact is open, and Ehe blank shows that it is closed.

-442-

Parameter No.

Parameter

(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

5 JOGFAD

JOGFAD

feed rate when rotary SW position is 10 for the additional axis (rotary shaft) in feed rate B specification Setting value 1 to 2000 unit: deg/nin (eg) When 200 is set to parameter No. 566: Feed rate becomes geometrical series of 200 deg/nin in rotary switch position 10.
JOG

Rotarv
Pos t_OVRI=0

SI.I

conditions
When parameter OVRI=I

Manual

I{hen parameter

contin
uous

tion
0
1

feed *ov8 *0v4 *0v2 *ovi *ov8 *ov4 *0v2 *ovl rate
o o
o

o o o o o o o

deg/nir
10

o o

2
3 4

L4

o o o o o
o o

o o

20

ro

27 37

5 6
7

o
o

52 72

o o o
o

8
9

r00
140

o o
o

o o o
o o o

o
o

tr
ll
L2

@
?7i
370 520

o
o o

o
o

l3

l4
l5

o o

o
o

o o o

720 r000

(Note l)
Note
2

O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact Ls open , and the blank shows that it is closed. In increment s stem I 10, unit is the same.

-443-

Parameter

No

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

FEDMAD

FEDMAD

Upper lirnit of feed rate of all axes in case of feed rate B specification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/rnin (rotary axis) 6 to 15000 unit: mm/rnin (mrn outPut) 6 to 15000 unit: inch/min (inch output)

Note) In increment systen i/10, unit is the

same.

RPDFLAD

RPDFLAD

Low speed (Fo)

of rapid traverse override for the axis in case of feed rate B specificaadditional F tion. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/min
Note) In increment systen t/tO, unit is the
same'

ZRNFLAD

ZRNFLAD

Low feed raEe (FL)

at reference point return of the additional axis in case of feed rate B sPecification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/nin
Note) In incremeht svstem 1/10' uniE ls the
same.

SPDLC

SPDLC

Set the spindle control Setting

compensaEion value for zeto offset of speed command voltage (for 54l55 digits

option)

range: 0 - +8191 unit:

VELO

-444-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,
SLPG},I1

Lower

M series)

Remarks

0
AOVLE

AOVLE:

End point deceleration distance of automatic

override at inside corner Part. serting range: I to 3999 Unit: 0.1rnn - Metric inPut 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Le.

SLPGM2 0
5

AOVLS

AOVLS:

End point deceleration distance of automatic

override at inside eorner. Setting range: 1 to 3999 Unit: 0.1 rnur'- Metric inch 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Ls.

SLPGI'13
I

SLPGM4 0
5

F1DMAXl

SLPGIN
0 5

F1DMAX2

FIDMAX1

Upper lirnit of Fl digit command feedrate Upper

FID}4AX2:

FIDT'IAXI: FID}(AX2:

linit of Fl to F4 feedrate Upper limit of F5 to F9 feedrate

-445-

!G

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

Setting value: 0 to 15000 unit I mrn/min (Metric output) I to 6000 unit 0.1 inch/rnin (Inch output) For deviation, refer to parameter No.
SLPGM

{ i

216.

-4

4 in sequence. Setting value = 2048 x (E/L) x a x 1000 where: E = Voltage when spi-ndle motor is rotating at 1000 rpro (V) L = Angle per spindle motor rotation (normally 360) s = Detecting unit (deg)
Spindle loop gain Setting value I to 9999 Unit 0.01 (l/sec)
SRPDFL

Servo loop gain rnultiplier of spindle for gears I to

SLPGIN

)
SPDI"DI

SRPDFL:

Minimum speed

of spindle rapid feed override Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deg/nin

(FO)

SPD}fiL:

Sets the spindle speed rpm when low- and high-speed gears are changed over. Or set the spindle speed rpm when 1or.r- and medium-gears (3-step gears are used) are changed over Set Spindle changing speed Spindle max. speed

4095

Setting value: 1 to

4095

-446-

t.''-_
ii
_i

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series '

SZRNFL

: M serles)

Remarks

5. ll tt I t I I

t 1

6
SPD}O(H

SZRNFL:

FL speed at spindle orientation Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deglmin

s,q

Sets the spindle motor speed rpn at the time of medium- and high-speed gear change when 3-s tep gears are used. Set Spindle changing sp_eed rpm x Spindle nax. sPeed
4095

F-fl

r -.
0
5

F"t

'i

Setting value: 1 to
8
7

4095

'*
MORT
t

+l

i.a
t
i

MORT

I 1
$
-I

Spindle orientation M-code Set ting value 06 to 97

MSRES

1'

MSRES

G F:.'E
G',1'

Splndle indexing reset M-code Setting value 06 to 97

MSINDX

\I

n I' MSINDX
$:

M-code inlrial

Setting value 06 to

value for M-code lndexlng

92

#
MSDEG

{9.

MSDEG

Baslc rotatlon angle for M-code lndexlng Settlng value I to 60 Unlt deg

*l
t.i

fG

-447-

itffie:'

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
PDWEL

M series)

Remarks

PDWEL

Dwell time at the tiure of C-axis unclamp the drilling cycle Setting value 0 to 32767 Unit msec

command

in

PECKC

PECKC

Setting of return amount (d) for peck drilling in the drilling cycle Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.001 uun (l'le tric input) Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input) Note) Ifiit b.cor""
1/ 10

in increment system 1/10.

STPEX

STPEX

STPEZ

STPEY

STPE4 0
5
9

STPE4 qTDFY

Z, 3,
h'

Y,
4

Position error i inrit rral-ue during X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, 3rd axis and 4th axis stop in seqr-re;:ce Setting value 0 to 32767 Detecting unit

---*

&
t

-448-

;
t-

I I
I

-t.

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
PCHK

series)

Remarks

J
0 5
9

PCI{K:

Minimum value of Progran No. used posts I and 2.

in

coruron i.n tool

oply

0TT

TLCNEC

TLCNEG:

Tool life management ignore Setcing value 0 to 9999

No.

PARTRQ

0
PARTRQ

PARTRQ:

9eqs--llrg number

Setting value

of

0_ rg_

machined 99pj

parts required.

PEXPJX
0
6

I l-

PEXPJX

PEXPJZ 0
o

PEXPJY

PEXPJ3
6

PEXPJZ

-449-

I;rF

Parameter No.

Pararneter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
PEXPJ4

M series)

Remarks

PEXPJ4 PEXPJX-

PEXPJ4:

Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant sequentially in manual feed. Setting value 0 to 4000 Unit: msec When no exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, set them to 0.
PFLJGX
0
5

PFLJGX

PFLJGZ
0
6

PFLJGY

PFLJG3
0
6

PFLJGZ

PFLJG4
0
6

PFLJG4

PFLJGXPFLJG4:

Setting value 6 ro i5000 Serting value 6 to 6000 Usuallv set them to 0.

Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration rate sequenti-ally in manual feed.

Unit: Unir:

rn/min

inch/min

INPDX
0
6 q

INPDX

INPDZ
0
o

INPDY

-4so-

ParameEer No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Rem:rks

INPD3
0
6

I
INPDZ

INPD4
0
6

INPD4 INPDZ

to
INPD4

Sets the in-position width between a feed block a feed block. (Must not be used) (Valid when parameter No. 45 CCINP=l)

and

POFF

TPFDT

ttPoFFtt means that power should be

TPFDT:

Time constants of spindle and Z-axis aeceleration/ decelerati-on in Ehe tapping in the rigid mode

whenever the parameter is

changed.

turned off

(Exponential/linear type is selected by TPSUP.) The threading accuracy is affeeted when the time constant is either too long or too short. ' Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-4000 : msec UniE Standard setting: 200 - 150
POFF

TPFFL

TPFFL:

Lower speed linit

(valid only when TPSUP = 0) at exponential acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and Z-axis in the rigid tapping. When this is increased, lact time is reduced, but the threading accuracy is affected. Data Eype: Word type Setvalue: 6-15000 : rnm/min Unit
Srandard

settlng:

30

10

-45r-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

POFF

TPLPG

ttPOFF" means that power should be

TPLPG:

Spindle and Z-axis Position control loop gain in the rigid tapping. This has a large influence uPon the threading accuracy. Make fine adjustment to obtain the optimurn value by perforrning the cutEing test and matching wiEh the loop gain multiplier. Data type: Word tYPe Set value: I - 9999 -l : 0.01 msec Unit set value: 1500 - 3000 Standard

whenever the parameter is changed.

turned off

POFF LPGM9

LPGM9:

Loop gg,in nultiplier

of the spindle in the rigid tapping for the high speed range. This has a large influence upon the thread accuracy. Make fine adjustment Eo obtain the optimum value by peiforming the cutEing test and natching with the loop gain. Data type: Word tYPe Setvalue: I-32767 Calculation = 2048 * E/L * G * 1000' E = Speed comrnand voltage at 1000 rpn L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection uniE Calculation example: trr4ren the configuration is as shown Position in the left drawing: coder E = 1.667 [V]
(motor

SPINDLE
I\'lOTOR

L =

of

6000 rpm

at 10 tvl)

(Spindle is rotated one turn bY one spindle motor rotacion. ) p = la/4096 = 720" 14096 = 0.17578'
La = 720" (Spindle must make two rotations = 360o * 2 for rot.ating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation

360"

l:l;2

-452-

Parameter No.
Gea

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :

serie s )

r ratio

between the spindle and the position

cod er

I I I I

I ... 0. 2 ... 0. 4 ...0. 8 ... 0. x

0 8 7 8 9 deg I 7 5 7 8 deg 3 5 I 5 6 deg 7 0 3 I 3 deg

Therefore, the loop gain nultiplier = 2048 x

L.667 /360

0.17578

1000

= L667

Note) Do not ml-ss to set the gear ratio parameter (No. 0028) between the spindle and the position coder. Decide the detection uniE based on thi-s
parameter.

POFF

TPS}'(
TPSMX:

ttPoFFtt means that po\ter should be

Maximum

allowable speed of the spindle in the rigid

tapping. Data type: Word type Set value: spindle: position coder gear ratio 1: t 0 - 7400
,\"

whenever the parameter is changed.

turned off

l:2 1:4
1:8

t..

Unit

1r'

: PRM Standard setting:

000-

9999 9999 9999

3600

TPIPZ

TPIPZ:

Data type: Word type

Z-axis in-position width in the rigid tapping

Unit : DetecEion unit Standard setting: 2O

Setvalue:

l-32767

-453-

G.*96

4{

,fi

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks
.: t I

*
9
.x

INP9

I
I

t
INP9:

I
:

Spindle in-position width in the rigid tapping I,'{ren this is too much increased, the threading accuracy is affected. Data type: I^lord type SeEvalue: 0-32767 Unit : DeEection unit Standard setting: 20

.n

:I

:
*

0
TPERZ

TPERZ:

Linit value of position deviation during Z axis in the rigid tapping rnode Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767
Unit

movement

a one-tenth resolution det.ector is used, the unit becomes Een times the detection unit.
When

DetecEion

unlt

-4s4-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

I
TPER9
t

TPER9:

Limit value of position deviation during novement of the spindle (5th axis) in the rigid mode tapping
Data type: Word type Set. value: o - 32767 Calculation = S x 360/60
S:

Maximum

rigid

G:
G:

Spindle:

tapping (Value of paraneter No. 0517) Axis loop gain in the rigid node tapping (Value of parameter No. 06f5) Detection type Position coder Gear ratio

spindle speed to perform the

x l/G x l/G x

100

1.5

I : I ... 0. 0 8789deg I : 2 ...0. I 7578deg 1 : 4 ... 0. 3 5156deg

I : 8... 0.
7

Calculation example:
G ...

0313deg

s . ..
@...

3600 3000

0.17578

(Gear

TPER5 =

(3600

x 360) ldo x I/3000 x 1/0.17578 x . 100x1.5=6144

coder l: 2)

ratio

between spindle and position

TPESZ

TPESZ:

Limit value of posiEion deviation during stop of Z axis in the rigid node tapping Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767 Unit : Detection unit
Standard

setting:

500

ril

.ll

if;

jl
il

.t

'l
I

-45s-

FF?9.8!{4S':.

q
Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

TPES9

TPES9:

LimiE value of position deviation during stop of the spindle in the rigid mode tapping Data type: Word type Unit : Detection unit Standard value: 500
ttPoFFtt means that power should be

Setvalue:

0-32767

POFF
LGM9M

turned off

LGM9M:

Spindle loop gain rnultiplier in the rigid rnode tapping for rniddle gear. (Set when one or more gears are used). Data type: Word type l-32767 setvalufi Calculation = 2048 x E/L x G x 1000 E = Speed command voltage at 1000 rpra L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection unit Calculation example: trrlhen the configuration is as shown

-whenever the parameter is changed.

SPINDLE MOTOR

in the left drawi-ng: E = 1.667 [V] (motor of 6000 rpm ar 10 [v]) L = 720"

G=
T^ Ld-

(Spindle makes two rotaEions when spindle motor rotates one turn. )

La/ 4096 720" 14096

7

= 0.17578"

(Spindle must make two rotations=360"x2for rotating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation Loop gain multiplier = 2048 * * 1.667 |TZO x 0. 17578 * 1000 = 833

2A"

-456-

-t
i

J
J
i

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

POFF
LGM9H

ttPoFFtt means that power should be

turned off

Spindle loop gain nultiplier for high speed gear in the rigid tapping. (Used for 3-srage gear).Data type : Word type Setring value: I to 32767 (Note) Refer to parameter formula.
No

whenever the parameter is

ctianged.

. 0624 for calculation

ERR9

ERR9:

Spindle position deviation value in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : DeEection unit

IPL9

IPL9:

Spindle distribution amount in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : Detection unit

-457-

a=,$*8*.

i'+'

il
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
LTIXl

M series)

Remarks

LTlXI
1

,.

LTTZI
0 0 I

I
;
i
1

LTiYI

.t

.,

LTIZl

LTI41

LTlX2
0 0
4

LT 1X2

LTIZ2
0
7

LTlY2

LTLZ2

LTI42

-4s8-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

Lrlnll
TI-

nth top in

axis

square zone (see figure)

.)v
2

)-t

Set stroke lirnit mentioned above. Serring amount 0 to *999ggggg (unit: 0.001 rnrn in mm output or 0.000I Tnch in inch outpuL) Set with the distance from the reference poLnt. In the case of diameter designation, set the X axis with the diameter designation value. (For OT) The outside of the boundary set with the Parameter is set as the inhibited region. Normally, set at the max. stroke of the machine.

the axis enters the inhibited region' overtravel alarm is indicated. A margin should be provided with respect. to the stroke to cope wi-th ' the fluctuation in the detecting operation. As a rule, in the case of metric designation, multiply the rapid traverse by a factor of 1/5 and set it as the margin.
When

(Example) Rapid traverse 10 m/rnin.

10x115=2nm

The actual position of the machine slightly

differs from the position stored in the CNC unit after the power is turned on, emergency stop is reset' or servo alarm is reset. Therefore, before starting operation, be sure to return Ehe axes to reference point. Otherwise, overtravel detecting position deviates by the value corresponding to the above-described deviation in the position.
LTI

Axis
(Exarnple) LTIZI =

name

the Z axis stroke

-1

and LTIZZ

becomes

infinite.

(Note 1) For the axis whose stroke is infinite, the incremental command can be specified. If the absolute co-mand is specified, the absolute register may overflow and it is not operated normallY. (Note 2) These parameters cannot be set for the rotary axis.
(Note 3) Unlt becomes 1/10 tn increment system 1/10.

-459-

d
Parameter No. Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorver : M series)

I
Remarks
'+

{
0
7

PRSX PRSX

'1

PRSZ

PRSY

PRS3

0
PRSZ

AC

PRS4

PRSX, PRSY,

PRSZ,
PRS4

These set the coordinate values of the reference point of the X, y, Z and 4th axes when automatic coordinate system setting is conducted, respec tive ly. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unir: 0.001 rnrn (mm inpur) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inpur) Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in incremenr systen 1/lO.

sfs

-460-

Pararneter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lourer : M series)

Remarks

SPTIME
2

PECINTX

PSGRDX
U

PECINTY

PSGRDZ
I

PECINTZ

PECINT4
SPTIME

Tine (P) when starting rhe spindle speed fluctuation after the comanded speed is not reached a certain time. Serting range: 0 to ggggggg (unit: r"".)' Pitch error compensation Lnterval for each axis Setting range 8000 to 99999999 unir: 0.001 m (m inpur) 4000 to 99999999 unir: 0.000f inch (inch inpur)
Note 1) It zero is set, no compensation is done. Note 2) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/iO.

PECINTX,

PEXINTY, PECINTZ,
PECINT4

PSGRDX,
PSGRDZ

Grid width of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 ro 99999999 unit: 0.001 nn unit:
(run output) 0.001 inch (inch ourpur)

No position signal is output vhen the setting value is 0.

In order to output the position signal securely without any skip when each axis moves at the maximum setting value 24 m/min of the rapid traverse speed, the grid width must be set to be more than 6400.

Note) Unit

becomes 1/10

in increment sysrem 1/10.

-461-

F.

rr

I t

t t r
[,
I

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

MRCCD
U

MRCCD

Depth of eut in multiPle Setting range:

repetitive cycle G7l'

G72.

I to 99999999 unit: L to 99999999 unit:

0.001 mn (rm input) 0.0001 inch (inch input)

Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10.

MRCDT

MRCDT

Relief amount in multiPle repetitive cycle G7l' Gl2. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0. 001 rnm (rnetric input) | 6 9v999999 unit: 0.0001 ineh (inch input) Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10.
PESCX

PESCZ 0
2

DFC'Y
PESCZ

Relief values in X and Z directions in rnultiple repetitive cycle G73, respectively. Setting range: I to *99999999 unit: 0.001 nn (mm input) 1 ro 1999 99999 uni-t : 0 . 0001 inch (inch input) Note) Unit becomes t/t0 in increment system 1/10.

'462-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

PATIM

PATIM

Number G73.

of div.isions in urultiole repetitive Setting range: I to 99999999

GROVE

cyc1e.'

GROVE

Return amount in multiple repetitive cycle G74,

Setting range: 0 to 99999999 unir: O to 99999999 unir:

C75

0.001 m (nn input) 0.000i inch (inch inpur)

Note) Unit becornes I/10 in increment system t/10.

THRPT

3
t

THRPT

of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76. Setting range: I to gggggggg
Number
THANG

TIIANG

Tool nose angle in nultiple repetitive cycle Setting value: 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, g0

G76.

-453-

F.
f.r

ti

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

THCLM

THCLM

l"linimum G76.

depth of cut in multiple repetitive cYcle 0.001 nnn (nmr input) 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)

Setting range: 0to 99999999 unit: 0to 99999999 unit:

Note)

Unit

becornes 1/ 10

in increment system 1/10.

THDFN

TT{DFN

Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle

c76.

Setting ?.ttg"

O to 99999999 unit: 0 to 99999999 unit: becornes 1/10

0.00I

nrm (uur input) 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)

Note) Unit

in increment system 1/10.

WIMAX

I{IMAX

Sets the tolerance value of tool wear offset incremental input. Setting range: I to 999999 unit: 0.001 run (nur input) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
Note)

Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.

-464-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

WOMAX

Remarks

WOMAX

Sets the uaximum of the tool wear offset value. Setting range: I to 9999999 unlt: o.ool m (m inPut) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch input) (Check together with pararneter No. 0728 in the case of incremental input)

Note) Unit becones l/10 in increment system 1/10.

I,IIRSS 0
7

0
PROTAG

MIRSS

Used for mirror image for opposite tool post. This parameter sets the distance between the tool posts in the shifting of coordinate system. Setting range: I to 9999999 unit: 0.001 m (m output)

Sets with a radius value.

unit:

0.000I inch (inch output)

Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment syster ,rr0.

PROTAG:

Parameter of angle vilue used when no angle

is present at coordinate rotation. Setting value: unlt: 0.00I deg. -360000 to 360000
CANMAX

command

I
PSCRT

GANMAZ

-465-

Parameter No.
GAN]"IAX,
GANMAZ

Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

The value of e on the X ar.d Z axes in the automatic tool compensation function' respectively. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0.001 uun (mn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.

Note) Unit becomes l/10 in increment system 1/10.

PSCRT:

Parameter of magnifLcation value used when no rnagnification command is present in scaling. Setting value: I to 999999 (Unit depends on parameter) Unit: x0.001, x0.00001

EPCX

EPCZ

EPCX,
EPCZ

The value of e on the X and Z axes, in the autornatic tool compensation functi-on, respectively. Setting range: L to 99999999 unit: 0.001 nun (urn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.

Note) Unit becomes 1/lO in increment system 1/10.

REF2X 0
3 5

REF2X

REF2Z
0

REF2Y

-465-

GF

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

REF2Z

REF24

REF2X, REF2Y,

REFZZ,
REF24

Distance from the reference polnt to the 2nd reference point for X, Y, Z, and 4th axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unit: 0.001 rnm (mm ourpur) O to Tgggggggg unir: 0.0001 inch (incir output) 0 to ;9999999 unit: 0.001 deg (rotary a*il)

Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment system l/10.

ABSXP 0
7

ABSXP

ABSZP 0
l

0
ABSYP

F,

I
ABSZP

ABS4P ABSXP, ABSYP,

ABSZP,
ABS4P

absolute pulse coder is used. These parameters are automatically set when the tool has ret.urned co the reference point. So it is not necessary to set values to these paiameters.

Counter data at the reference point when the

-467-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :
TLSXP

M series)

Remarks

LT2X1

TLSXY
0
7

LT2YI

TLSZP
0
7
{+

LT2ZI

TLSZM 0
7
q

LT24I

LT2Xl
0
7

LT2X2

LT2ZI
0
1

LT2Y2

0
7

LT2Z2

LT242

LT2X2
5

I
EXOFS

-468-

;l

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

LT222
0
5
a

EXOFS2

LT2

FF
T

'

Apex No.

of square area Represents the axis Set the stroke limit represented above. Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001
Setting value
0

to +99999999 Unir

(l"letric output)

urn

0.0001 inch (Inch output)

Set the stroke lirnit by the distance from the reference point. For the designation of dianeter, set X-axis sith the diameter.designated value. Use parameter INOUT (No. 24) to set the forbidden area to the inside or outside.
Note) Unit becoines l/t0 in increment system l/10.
TLSXP TLS)O{ TLSZP TLSZM

X axis * distance to contaet surface (Xp) X axis - distance to contact surface

(Xm) |

Z axis * d.istance to contact surface (Zp)

Z axis - distance to contact surface

(Zrn)

Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.

Set the distance from the measurement standard polnt to each contact surface (with sign). For the diameter designated axis, set in diameter

value.

X axis

surface

Z axis

,J

X axis

,_1)

contact surface

-469-

T
I
T

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

,?

LT2XI

Check stroke lirnit using these parameters, not parameter Nos. 0700 to 0707 when EXLM2 (G129.6) LT242: (M series) signal is ON.

j
t .,
;

Note) Valid only when parameter No. 0I5

0
1

LM2=1

J
EXOFS3

4 EXOFS4

EXOFSI

External work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and th-axis in sequence. Setting value 0 to +7999 Unit 0. 001 rmn (Metric output) serring lalue 0 to +7999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output)

Note) Unit becoures 1/10 in incrernent system 1/10. This parameter sets the zero-point position of work coordinate system (G54 to G59). The work zeropoint offset amount is different for every work coordinate system, but this parameter sets the offset amount colnmon to all work coordinate systems. Normal1y, machine-side input (external data input) is used for automatic settl-ng.

ZOFlSl

PECINTX
U

ZOFlS2

PECINTZ
0
7

ZOF

S3

-470-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series' Lovter :

series)

PECINT3
0
7

zoFls4

PECINT4
0
7

ZOF2S

zoE2s2

t
zoF2s3

zoF2s4

-4

zoFlsl

1st work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs4)

Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 mm (Metric output) setting value 0 ro +99999999 unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Normally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/10.

-47r-

Parameter
PECINTX, PECINTZ, PECINT3, PECINT4:

No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

3
Q

Remarks

1it

*
.

Compensation intervals at pitch error compensation of each axis.

ZOF2S

-4

Setting value: hrlren the radius is designated 8000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 4000 - 99999999 (Inch outPut) Ilowever' set in diameter value for the diameter designated axis. hhen the diameter is designated I6000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 8000 - 99999999 (Inch orrtPut) 2nd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis' Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. Setting value Setting value
(css )
0
0

...tr

*
I

to

+99999999 +99999999

unir 0.001 rmr

(Inch output) Nornally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becornes l/10 in increment system 1/10.

to

(Metric output) Unit 0.0001 inch

z0F3s

4 ZOF3S2

ZOF3S3

ZOF3S4

ZOF35

-4

3rd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cs6)

Setting value 0 to !99999999

Unit 0.001 unt (Metric input) unir 0.000I inch Set t ing value 0 to +99999999 (Inch input) Normally' data are input from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10'

-472-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

zoF4s

IDSTX
0
6
8

zoE4s2

IDSTZ
0
7

zoF4s3

ZOF4S4

z0F4s

-t+

4th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
Serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 ffi (Metric input) Setring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input) work coordinate Normally, data are input from the system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.
(cs 7)

IDSTX:

Distance from the first. tool head standard point the 2nd tool head standard point on the X axis.

t.o

only only

0TT

IDSTZ:

Distance from the first tool head standard point to the 2nd tool head standard point on the Z axis. Setring 0 ro +99999999 Unit:0.001 umr (mn output) 0.0001 inch (Inch output)

0TT

-473-

's

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

Remarks

q
t 0
7
I

-j

ZOF5S

0 ZOF5S2

zoF5s3

ZOF5S4

zoF5s

-4

5th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis , Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs8) Serring value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 rm (Metric output) serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Norma11y, data are input frorn the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system i/10.

ZOF6S

ZOE632

474

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

zoF6s3

ZOF6S4
ZOF6S
1

-4

6th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
(cse)

serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 urn (Metric output) Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unir 0.0001 inch
Normalty, data are inpur from the system setting screen.

ri:1":":::il:1"

Note) Unit becones l/I0 in increment system.

PARTAL

PARTAI

{g=-sl-eaqb+leq parts in total Setting value 0 to ggggYggg -:

REF3X 0
7

0 REF3X

-475-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

REF3Z 0
B

I
REF3Y

REF33 0
7

2
I(-L.r

JZ

REF34 0
1

REF34

REF3X REF34:

Sets distance of 3rd reference point on X axis to 4th axis from lst reference point sequentially.
Set t

ing;rralue o - +99999999 Unit: o - iggsggggg Unit:

0.00f rnrn (Metric output) 0.0001 inch (Inch ourpur)

REF4X

REF4X

REF4Z 0
7
tJ

REF4Y

REF43 n
7

REF4Z

476

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

series

Remarks

REF44 0
1

REF44

REF4X REF44:

Sets distance of 4th reference point on X axis to 4th axis froro lst reference point sequentially.

Setting value 0 - +99999999 Unit: O -1SSSSSSSS Unir:

0.001 rnm (Merric ourpur) 0.0001 inch (rnch oulput)

FIDFl

9
F

IDF2

FlDF3

IDF4

-,

2
F

1DF5

IH

|[

iii

il

ii

tl

rl

-477-

ll

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

J F

IDF6

FIDFT

9
F

IDFS

?
6, Setting value

FIDF9 coflrmands

FlDFI,2,

3, 4, 5,

Feedrate for Fl digit

FI to F9 in

sequence

7,8,

9:

0 - 15000 Unit: 0 - 6000 Unit:

0.1 nrar/min (Metric output) 0.1 inch/min (Inch output)

When

the manual pulse generator is rotated to change the feedrate for Fl digit comnand, the value of this parameter changes accordingly. This parameter can be set even in setting.

A3S9 ABS9:

Spindle distribution cumulative value for the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) data type: 2-word type Unit : Detection unit

478

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)

Remarks

PECORGX
I

0
PECORGX

PECORGX

X axis zero point of pitch error compensation. Setting range 0 to 127

I I

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Z axLs. Setting range 0 to +7

PECORGZ 2

n
PECORGY

PECORGY

Y axis zero point of pitch error compensation.. Setting range 0 to 127

PECORGZ

Z axis zero point of pitch error'compensation. | setting range 0 to 127

0
I

to
2

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Y axis (for M series), Z axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7

PECORG3
3

0
PECORGZ

'

PECORGZ

Z axis zero point of pitch error compensation. setting range 0 to I27

3rd axis zero point of pitch error compensation. serting range 0 to 127

PECORG3

-479-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper i T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

.)

to
3
I

Setting of picch error compensation amount for Z axis (for M series), 3rd axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7
8

PECORG4 4

0
PECORG4

PECORG4

4th axis zero point of pitch error compensation. Setting range 0 to L27
0
1

to
q

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for 4th axis. Setting range 0 to +7

PECORG5

0
PECORG5

PECORG5

5th axis pitch error origin Setting range 0 r^ -Ll 17

n

I
<

t+'

t
5

Set ting range

8

axis pitch error offset setting 0 to +7

PECORG6 6

0.
PECORG6

PECORG6

6th axis pitch error origin Setting range 0 to +127

-480-

Parameter No.

Pararneter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

M series)

0
)

6th axis pitch error offset setting Setting range 0to*7

z
8

DECIS
7

SCWS SCI^IS

DECIS

Blr

No. 1:

76543210
Machine decelerates when deceleration signal is I
1n

DECIS

0:

reference point return. l'lachine decelerates when deceleration signal is reference point return.
Miniuum comand.increment is the inch system (Machine inch system). Minimum cowtand increment is the metric system (Machine metric systeur) .

0 1n

scws l:
0:

PPDS
7

2 PPDS

Bir

No.

43
Relative coordinate setting. Relative coordinate setting.
IS

zr0

PPDS

1:
0:

also preset by coordinate not preset by coordinate

l-s

ZYL6
7

zt't5
ZYL1

J
ZIT6

Bit No.

543210

5th/6th axes reference Point return direction and backlash initial directlon at Power 0N in the order of ZM5 and ZM61: Minus direction 0: Plus direction
1

Ii

I
I

-48r-

t"

.ry'

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

'l

D!{R5 0 0
DMR5

GRD5 GRD6

Bit

No.

654

32t0
DMR5

Detection mult iplier for 5th/6th axes in the order of

D}G.6
GRD6 GRD6

and

0
DMR6

Bir

No.

765

43

2L0
GRD5

Reference counter capacity and 6.

APRSS

for 5th/6th axes in the order of

OFFVYS

0
APRSS
g

)FFVYS

Bir

No. 1:

76543210
Sets automatic coordinate system at reference point reEurn. Does not set automatic coordinate system at

APRSS

0:
OFFVYS

reference point return.

l.

0:

Servo alarm d.oes not occur even when VRDI is ON before outputting PRDY. Servo alarm occurs when VRDY is ON before outputting
PRDY.

SUB
7 U

I
1

APC6 APC6

APC5 APC5

I
SUB

BiI
APC5/
APC 6

NO

1: l,ihen the absolute pulse coder detector is rnounted. 0: When the absolute pulse coder detector is not
mounted.

SUB

l: 0:
.1

PMC PMC

axis control is the 5th axls. axis control is the 5th/6th axes.

APC5,
APC6

: Absolute pulse coder provided. 0: Absolute pulse coder not provided.

t'
: :
:

-482-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower

series)

ABS6
0
2

A3S5 ABS5
ii:

ABS6

Bir
ABS5,
ABS6

No. 1:

Reference point position in absolute pulse coder is

defined.

0:

Reference point position in absolute corder is

not defined. (The signal becomes r'1r' automatlcally if the reference point return is performed by Pl'tC axis control. Do not change setting by the time the detector is replaced.) When installing the CNC or replacing the position detector, always set these Parameter to 0, turn off and on the power then perforn manual reference point return.
PNGMLK

ROT6 ROT6

ROT5
ROT5

2 PNGMLK

Bit

No. MLK

PNGULK 1: 0:

signal is invalid for the 5th/5th axes. MLK signal is valid for the 5th/6th axes. ROT5,6 1 : The 5th/6th axes is a rotary axis. 0: The 5th/6th axes is a linear axis
CMR5
I

0
CMR5

CMR6 7
1

t
CMR6

Comnand
Cl,lR6.

multiplier

for 5th/6th axes in the order of

CMR5 and

DSPSUB
7

I
I

0
DSPSUB

-483-

F-

ilt?

#'

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

DSPSUB2

t
DSPSUB2

DSPSUBl,

2z

Set the axis names of the 5th/6th axes in sequence. The setting code shall be in accordance with the general switch code on the operatorrs panel.
Usable characters:

(x, Y, z, u, V, w, A, B, C, H, 0 - 9, O, N, D, -, .)
When

Note)

displaying the 5/6th axis posi-tions, the run hour, for example, is displayed on the overall position display screen.
INP5

INP5

u
7

rNp6
INP6

In-position width for 5th/6th axes in the order of INP5 and INP6.
SERR5
1

5LKK]

SERR6
5

SERR6

Lirnit val-ue of rnoving position deviation for 5th/6th axes in the order of -'SnnnS and SERR6.
GRDS5
7

8 GRDS5

-484-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series,

Lower

M series)

Remarks

GRDS6
7

GRDS6

Grid shift amount for 5th/6th axes in the order of

GRDS6.

GRDS5 and

LPGINS
5
7

LPGINS

Settlng of position control loop gain (5th/6th axes Ln co-.on).

RPDF5
7

RPDF5

RPDF6
1

RPDF6

5th/6th axis rapid traverse rate in the order of

LINT5
5
a

RpDF5 and RpDF6.

LINT5

LINT6
7

LINT6

Time constant of linear acceleration and deceLeration for 5th/6th axes in the order of LINT5 and LINT6.

!
;

I
I

-485-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper

: T series, Lower :

l'1

series)

Remarks

FEEDTS
7 2

FEEDTS

Time constant of cutting feed exponent ial accel-eration/

deceleration (5th/6Eh axes in

common).

FEDFLS
7

0 FEDFLS

Lower lirnit speed of cutting feed exponential acceleration and deceleration (FL) (5th/6th axes in common). Usuallv set this parameter to 0.
ZRNFLS
5

4 ZRNFLS

Low feedrate
common)
.

at reference point return (FL) (5th/6th axes

l-n

BKL5
1

BKL5

DT\LO 7

t-*
BKL6.

Backlash amounc for 5th/6th axes in the order of BKL5 and

STPE5
7

STPE5

-486-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorrer : M series)

Remarks

STPE6
5 9

STPE6

Linit value of positional deviatlon for 5th and 6th axes at stop in the order of STPE5 and STPE6.
PSANGNS
5

6 PSANGNS

PSAI{GNS

Subspindle 54/55 digit control (Analog output). Analog output gain adjusting data. (Set the data for gain adjustment at analog output.) The setting range, etc. is the sarne as with the main spindle parameter (No. 5f5).
SPDLCS

9 SPDLCS

SPDLCS

Set Ehe subspinble speed offset compensated valuel the zero offset compensation value of subspindle speed corumand voltage.
LTI5 I

LTI5 I

LTI6l
1

LTI6I

LT152
7
1

LT152

-487-

1q*[ *!flprr{pee

!
I

.i

_"-

Parameter No.

Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)

Remarks

LTI62
7
7

LTI62

LT151, 161, L52, r52 Stored st.roke lirnit of 5th and 6th axes.

PRS5
1 7

8 PRS5

PRS6 PRS6

PRS5,

Coordinate value of 5th and 6th axes reference point.

PRSS

Parameters related to dlgital

6
5 6 5

servo for 5th axis.

Parameters related to digital

servo for 6th axis.

i
I

-488-

Ttre parameters of each axis for the digital following:

Parameter No.

servo

are

Product
OT/OG
OM

Axis X axis X axis

The

lst axis

8100

8165

The 2nd axis

8200

8265

or/oc
OM

Z axis
Y axis

The 3rd axi-s

8300

8365

OT/OG
OM

The 3rd axi-s

8400

8465

OT/OG
OM

Cf axis, PMC axis Z axis Cf axis, PMC axis The fourth axis

In the followingr parrmeter numbers of each axis are to be indicated by *.

Parameter No.
Data
DGPRM

sBoo
BirNo.
DGPRM

While the power is turned orlr the standard values of parameters related to Digital Servo are ' 0: to be set l: noE to be set When this parameter is set to 0 after seEting the motor tyPe' the standard values which have been set corresponding to the motor type of the parameter 8 * 20 are automatically set and this parameter becomes ttltt.
Data
AMR5

Parameter No.

8Eo

l
Bit
No.

AMR4

AMR3

AMR2

AMRI

AMRO

-489-

_r'

,'d
AMRO

AMR5

Motor type

&
10,

No. of pulses/pulse coder rotation(p/r)

2000 2500 3000

AMR

q
I

0
I

2-0, 1-0: 0, 5,

0 0
0

I
I
0 0 0 0
t I

i
0 0
1

I
I
0

20,20M,30,30R

I
1

0
I

4-0,
5-0

3-0

2000 1000
I 2500

0 0 0

i
t
0

l.

0 0 0
I
1

0
I

2-O, l-0, 0, 5, 10, 20, 20M, 30, 30R

20000 25000

I
I

I
t

I
0

I
0

Parameter No.

Data

8E oz
Btr No.
7

6s

t
The

Since the set value has been fixed as in the following, never change lt. setting value of the PSSEL is 1, While that of the VFSEL is
Parameter No.
Data.

8Bo3
Bit
Parameter No.
No.

Data

sEo4
Bit
No.

Setting data related to Digital Servo.

Nore) I^Ihen phrameter No. 8 * 00 bit 1 (DGPRM) is set to 0, the standard values of these parameEers are auturatically set. Normally' never change these values.

-490-

Parameter No.

Data

8E2o

t'totor type

Parameter input Data type : Word axls type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767 The standard values of the parameters related to the Digital Servo are stored in the menory of the NC corresponding to each motor type. Set them for each

i
)

1
I :

axis.

When

this parameter is 0 or less or an unavailable value is set, an-alarn results.

Parameter No.
5-0 4-0
4

Motor type
3-0
5

2-O
6

t-0
7

sIz

Parameter No.
0
5
9

Motor type
t0
20M
11

20
L2

eflz

i0 Motor type

Parameter No.
30 30R
L4

aIz

13

Parameter No.

Data

sEzL

Load l-nertia ratio (LDINT)

Parameter input Data type : I^Iord axis type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767
When

Digital Servo is to be used, calculate the inertia ratio of the load inertia and motor rotor inertia according to the following expression and set lt for each axis. Load inertla ratio = load ir-rerti+ x 256 Rotor lnertra

-491\'I

Paraueter

No.

Data

-sE

22

Rotating direction of motor

(DIRCTL)

Parameter input

Data type : Word axis type

Set the rotating direction of a motor. The motor rotares in the positive direction (Viewed from the motor llI: shaft side, it rotates in the CCW direction.) -111: The motor rotates in the negative direction (Viewed from the motor shaft side, it rotates in the CW direction. If a value exceDt the aobve has been set, an alarm results.
Parameter No.
Data

8Ez3
Parameter input

Digital Servo related

(PULCO)

Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Dara range: I to 32167
When
B.

Digical Servo is to be used, set the number of pulses per rotation of the motor of the detector to be used for the velocity feedback. Perform calculaEion supposing-ttrat there are four pulses per pulse cycle phases A and

However, when a pulse coder of 0.lu is to be used, set l/10 data. If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results. Parameter No.
Data

BEz4

Digital Servo related

(PPLS)

Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Data range: I to 32767
When

Digital Servo is to be usedr st the number of pulses per one rotation of t.he motor of the detecEor to be used for the position feedback. Perform calculation supposing that there are hour pulses per pulse cycle of phases A and B. (Exarnple, 2,000 x 4 = 8,000 for a pulse coder of 2,000 p/r.) However,whenapulsecoderof0.liristobeused,Set1/l0data If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.

-492-

Parameter No.

Data

8E 40
a $50
s

Parameters related to Digital Servo

Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : Data range: Parameters related to Digital Servo

Note) I{hen parameter No. 8 * 0O bit I (DGPRM) is set to 0 and rhe moror type is set to parameter No. 8 * 20, the standard value is autonatically set. Norma11y, it is not necessry to change this parameter.
Parameters which can be determined by the motor to be applied. (Data type: Word axis rye) (l) Parameter No.
5-0
AC servo

uotor
3-0
669

co

be applied
2-O
322

4-0
460

t-0
469

a[+
a

241

828

pa

-527

-L467 -2373
r04 -517
0

-2I26
-237 4
96

-1 103

-1625 -2503

-2782
-2457
226

[+ z a[+: a[a + a[a s a[a o

s

-i873
80

-2488
267

2I7
- 1082
0

-300
0

-47

-1330
0

-1t27
0

-1647

-1647 |
0 0
0

-1647 I
0

-1547

-1647

-1647 r

afla afl+
a

z
a

22556

r 3582

4t73
LO24

0 0

0 0

ra24
22552
2607

ro24
13679
2607 5560
0 2T

fla afls
aEs

s
o

4t7 2

2607 5560
0
2T

2607

2607 5560
0
2L

2607

5560
0 2L

5560
0

5s60
0

a[s z a fls r s[s + a[s s

a

2I
3787
319
0

2l
3787 319
0

3787 319
0

3787 319
0

3787
319
0

3787

3r9
0

ps

-493-

Falxlrr: -'r{.i6*r.tdffir"

AC servo motor

Co

be applied
2-O

Parameter

No

5-0

4-0
2330
57
0
0

3-0
2330
(7 0

1-0
2330
57 0

s[s
e[s e[s
a

z a
e

2330

2330
57
U

2330
57
0
7

a[o

flo

282

7282 32256 32543

7282
32256
3257 6

7282

7282 32256

282

r
z

32256

32256
32507

32256
327

af,o

325t4
317 3

325r9

t2

a[e e[o s[o

:
+

28t7
225
83 75

2401 475
7

3265
853
97 L3

3Lt2
L7

706 5440 2094

85

28

9437

136

9256

Pararueters which can be determined by the motor to be applied, (Data type: Word axis type) (2)
AC servo motor fo be applied

Parameter No.
5

l0
Y44

20r4

20

30
I

30R 705

afl+ o

t7 20

808 -307
4

970

t,<)
6

s[+

-27 8r

-3532
-2622
654

-3682 -2646
535

-557

-27

16

e[+ z a[+: aIa a a[+ s a[+ o

sfln
2..

-30s

-2649
824

-2665
s05

-2669
674

3s9

-L7 89
0

-3259
0

-4103
0

-2666
0

-25L6
0

-JJ)O
0

-1647

-1647 r
835
LO24

-t647

-1647

-t647

-r647

t 941

491

49r
1024

348
1024 348
2607

348

aIa a sIa eIs o a[s r aIs z

e

l024
L94L 2607
55 60

t024 49r
zou I
55 60
U

L024 348 2607 5560

0

834
/-6U
T

49r
2607

55 60

5560
0

5560
0

-494-

I
AC servo aot.or t,o be applied

i {

Parameter

No
5

i
30R 2L 2L

10

201.1

20

30

a[s r a[s eIs s aIs aIs z aIs e aIs s aIo o a[o r aIo z aIo r eIs sIo s
+ o +

2l
3787

2L

2L

2I
3787 319
0

I 1

t t
t

3787 319 0

3787 319
0

3781

3787 319

3r9
0

3r9
0

2330
57 0

2330
57 0

2330
57
0

2330
57 0

2330
57 0

2330
57 0

7282 32256 32645

r
7

7282 32256 32645

3796 9410 11299

7282 32256

6918

6918

6554

32256
32509

32256 32452
3947

32256 324L9
4366

32r55
7

539

6s9
r

3242
95s6 9644

312

r2705
22907

29250 LL752

21926 r3005

4567

Note 1) The parameters marked by * are not used currently. Note 2) Wtren a pulse coder of 0.1u is used, the values of the paraneters marked by /l are to be changed to 1/10.
Co'nnon parameters

for each motor model (Data type: bit axls type)

DaEa

Parameter No.
It7 It6 0
tt\

#4 0

#3 0

ll2
0
0

tfL
0

ll0

aPo:
sSo
a

0 0

0
0

I
0

-495-

APPENDIX

CODES USED IN PROGRAM

Character-to-codes correspondence table

Character
A
B
D E

Code

Comment

Character
6
7

Code

Comment

u65 066 o67 068 069 070

071

8
9

054 055 056

05
r-

tt tl

032 033

Space

I
J

034 035
036 o37 038 039

Exclamation mark Ouotation mark

073 414 075

c
&

Dollar svmbol
Percent
Ampersand

Sharp

L
M N

0
P
O

076 077 078 079 080

081

Aoostrophe

030
) 041

o42

+
t

043

Left oarenthesis Rieht parenthesis As teri sk Plus sien

Conma

044
045

D
S

T
U

\/
w
X I

I
3

082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 048 o49 050
051

|linus sign
Period
SIash
Co

046

047 058

lon

059
060

Semi-colon

uol 062
? G

063 .064
091

t
t\

Left ansle bracket Sien of eaualitv Rieht angle braeket 0uestion mark Coumercial at mark Left square bracket
Yen svmbol

092
093 094 095 000

052 053

Rieht square bracket

Underline
Space

')

-496-

<-4rn

3a&a
APPENDIX 9
ERROR CODE LIST

1)

Program

errors (p/S alarm)

Contents

A parameter which requires the power

off power.
TH

off

was

input,

curn

alarn (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.

TV alarrn (The nunber of characters in block is odd). This alarm will be generared oniy when a the TV check is effective. Correct the tape.

Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. prograrnnabie
dimensions. )

A nuueral or the sign tt-tt eras input without an address at the beginning of a b1ock.
The address was noE followed by Ehe appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB cod.e.

sign rt-tt i-nput error (sign tt-tt was i-nput af Eer an address with which i.t cannot be used. Or two or more,r_r, were input. ) "1rrr"-Decinal point tt.,t input error (A decinal point was. after an address with which it ean not be used. Orinput two decimal points were input.)
Unusable character was

input in significant area.

An unusable G code

was

Feedrate was not cornmanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate.

command value or a conmand such that the lead negative value is given.

In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental outputted by idd.""" K exceed the maximum
becomes

T only

A synchronous feed is specified without t.he option for threading /synchronous feed.
The nunber of the corqmanded axes exceeded that bf simultaneously controlled axes An axis not included in the selected plane (by using GI7, Gl8, Gt9) was commanded in ci-reular interDolation.
M only

In circular interpolation bv radius designation, negative value was corr-andei for address R.
Note) ttTtt is a general term for OT-B and OOT-8. ttMtt is a general term for OM-B and OOM-B.

-497-

|;;rF.#
,e.&
;

! i,
Number

Contents The

Remarks

029

offset value specified by

H code

is

Eoo large.

M only

The offset value specified by T code is too large.

030

T only
M only

The offset number specified by H code for tool length offset only or cutter compensation is too large. The offset number in T function specified for tool

T only

offset is too large

03r

In setting an offset arnount by G10' the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified. In setting an offset amount by GIO, the offset
\itaS eXceSSive. amount

032
033

A poinf of intersection cannot be determined for cuEter comDensation C.

M only

A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose

T only
M only

radius comDensation.

034

The start up ror cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 rnode in cutter comPensation C. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation.

T only
M only

035

G39

on the plane other than offset plane

compensaEion mode.

is

commanded

in cutter comPensation B cancel mode or

Skip cutting (C:t) was specified in tool nose radius

036

T only
M only M only

Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation

mode.

037

G40 (offset cancel) is commanded at the plane other than offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected by using GI7, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensati-on C mode.

038

Over.outting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end ooint coincides with the arc center.

M only

0vercuttlng will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides wi-th the arc center.
039

T only

Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a chncel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R.

T only

-498-

Number

ConEents

Remarks

040

overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in a canned cycle G90 or G94.
Overcutting vill
occur in cutter compensation
C.

T only
M only

041

Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.

o44 046
050

T only 'M only

One

of

G27 t.o G30

is

conmanded i"n canned

cycle

mode. and

Other than P2, P3 and P4 are comnanded for 2nd, 3rd 4th reference point return command.

The chanfering or a corner R was specified in a block which includes a thread cutting command. The block after a block containing a chamfering or corner R specification e/as not a GOl cornmand. The nove direction or the move amount in a block following chaufering or a corner R command was not adequate.
a

T only
T only T only

051

052

053

2 or more of IrKandRare directed in chamfering and corner radius R corrmand or C or R does not come after a con-a (, ) in direct drawing dimension programming.
A block in which the chamfering or the corner R was

T only

054

specified includes a taper

T only

corrmand.

055

The uove distance in the block which includes the chamfering or the corner R specification is sualler than

T only

the chamfering aaount or the corner I (K) is

R.

0s6

Both end point and angle are not designated in the next block comrnand of the angle designation block (A ).
commanded
command.

T only

to X-axis (Z-axis) in

chamferin=g

-i
'--i

I
t
i

057

Block end point ls not calculated correctly in direct

dlmension drawing programming. progranning.

T only
T only

0s8

Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing

The program wlth the selected number 1n external program number search.

059

cannot be searched,

060

Cormranded sequence number was

number search.
061
command

not found

in the

sequence
G73

Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G7I, G7Z, or

T only

-499-

nGY

Number

Content s

Remarks

062

o The depth of cut in G7l or

value.

G72

is zero or negative

T only

o The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value. o The negative value is specified to Ai or Ak in G74 or G75. o A value other than zero is specified to address U or W, though Ai or Ak is zero in G74 or G75. A negative value is specified to Ad, though the o relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined. o Zero on a negative value is specified to Ehe height of thread or depth of cut of lst time in G76. o The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height of thread. o An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
063

The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G7L, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched.

T only

.l

.*

065

o G00 or GOl is not

at the block with the sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command. o Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, rejlpectively.
commanded

T only

(r
:ia 1;

066

An unallowable G code was comxnanded between two blocks specified by address P and Q in G7l, G72 or G73.

T only

067

G70, G7I, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q was

specified in MDI mode.

T only T only

069

The final move command in fhe blocks specified by P and Q of G70, G7l, G72 and G73 ended with chamfering or

corner

R.

070

The memory area is insufficient. The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in progran number search. The number of programs to be sEored exceeded 63 or I25

07r

072 073 074 076

077

(option).

The commanded program number has already been used. The'program number is oEher than I to 9999. Address P was not commanded in the block which includes an M98 command or a G65 command. The subprogram was called in three or five folds.

-500-

Number

Contents

Remarks
I

078

A prograu number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99 or G56 was not found.
The contents of the program stored in the memory did not agree r^'ith that in tape in collation.

t
I
I

079

080

In the area specified by parameter e, the ueasuring posicion reach signal does, not come on. (Autornatic tool compensation function) Autonatic tool compensation was specified wlthout a code. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T

T only

08I
082

T only T only
t

T code and automatic tool compensation were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function) In automatic tool compensation, an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. (Automatic tool compensation function) entering data in the meuory by using ASR or Reader/ Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error lras generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate is incorrect.
When When

083

T only

t
i
I

085

086

entering data in the memory by using Reader/Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader/puncher was turned off'. I

087

When

read.
090

entering data in the memory by using Reader/puncher interface, though the read terninaEe command is specified, lnput is not interrupted after 10 characters
The reference point return cannot be performed normally because the reference point return start point is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow. The commanded axis by G27 (Reference point did not return to the reference point.

092
094

return

check)
M only

P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the coordinate system setting operation was perforned.)
P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the external work offset amount changed.) P type cannot be specified when che program

095

M only

096

is re-started. (After prograrr lnterrupti-on, the work offset amount changed.)

M only

*t

-501-

ffi

Number
097

Contents

Remarks

P type cannot be'directed when the prograrn is re-started. (After power 0N, after emergency stop or P/S 94 to 97 reset, no autonatic operation is performed.)

M only

t:

098

A command of the program re-start was specified without the reference point return operation after power 0N and emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.

M only

099

After completion of search in program re-start, command is given with MDI. Setting data the system.
PWE

move

I"1

only

100

is set to 1. Turn it to 0 and reset rewriting the contents of storage & editing generated, set the on the po\rer while
memory.

101

The power r{tas turned off while the memory in the part program operation. I{hen this alarm is setting data PWE to I and turn pushing the DELET to clear the

110

The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable ranse. The calculatlsn result of macro instruction exceeds the allowable range Gzsz to 232-1).

111

Lt2
1r3

Division by Zero was specified.

commanded.

(including tan 90")

A function which cannot be used in custom macro is

An undefined H code is designated in G65 block.

1i4

For custom
l"lacro
A

There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.

115

A value not defined as a variable number is deslgnated.

The variable number designated with P is forbidden for assignment.

ti6

For custom
macro
A

The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited.

rl8

The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit

(quintuple)

iI9

The argurnent of SQRT or BCD is negative.

SQRT argument 1s negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and other values chan 0 to 9 are preserlt eAch line of BIN argument.

For custom
Macro
A

The

on

-502-

Number

Contents The macro rnodal call Macro

l_s

Rem:rks
M only

L22 L23

specified in double
used.

control

cornmand

is

t24
L25 126

DO-END

does not corresporid to 1: I

<Formula> format

is

erroneous.

In

DOn,

lcn<3is

not established. are confused.

comrnand rras

t27
128

NC and macro conrmands

The sequence number specified in the branch not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. An addres3dni"n is nor allowed in <Argument Designation> is used.

lzg
r30

In 3rd axis control-, a 3rd axis control command was n given by PMC during Cf control. On the contrary, an attenpt was made for Cf control fron PMC during axis contro l. Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm
message.

T only

i31

L32

No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message

clear.

133

message
135

Snall section data is erroneous in external alarn or external operator message. T only
T only T only
M only M only M only
M only

Without any spindle orientatloD, an attempE was made for spindle indexj-ng.
A move command of other axes was specified to the block as spindle indexing addresses C, H. A move command of other axes was specified to che block as M-code related to spindle indexing.
same

136

t37
141

same

G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.

t42
143

Scaling uagnif i.cat ion

L-999999.

1S

commanded

in other than

The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum conmand value.
The coordinate rotatlon plane and arc or tool offset plane differ from each other.
C

144

148

AutomatLc override deceleration is out of the settable range of judgernent angle. Check parameter No. O2l3'

M only

02L4,02I5.

-503-

*{H*.

s
*
Number

Contents

Remarks

r50
151

Tool Group No. exceeds the set.

maxi-mum

a11owable va1ue.

M only

The tool group commanded in the rnachining program i-s not

The number of tools within one group exceeds the
maxi-mum

M only
M only M only M only

t52
153

value registerable.

The program setting the tool group is not entered in block to store T code.
When the group commanded.

<,/,

is not

commanded, H99

or D99 was
same

i55
156

In the machining program, M06 and T code in the block do not correspond to the group in use.

M only

P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set.
The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxinum a1lowab1e va1ue.

M only

r57
158

M only
M only M only 0TT only

The tool life

to be set is too excessive.

159 | During setting program executionr power was OFF.

160

Different M code is
M code.

commanded

in Heads I and 2 as waiting

r65
199

An attempt was made to execute a program of an even number in Head I or an odd program number in Head 2.

0TT only

Special word which cannot be used is

commanded.

200

In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. (programming error)
error

20r
202

In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.

)

(progranming

In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (system error) In the rigid tap, position for incorrect .
M29 and G84 (G74)
1429

203

or an S command is
between

204
205

In the rigid tap' an axis rnovement is specified blocks. (programrning error) In the rigid tap, no rigid desoite M29 is specified.
mode

DI signal is turned

on

-504-

2) Alarms on the absolute pulse coder

Number 310

(APC)

Contents

Renaiks

Manual reference point return

X-axis.

is required for the

Failure in data
transmissi-on

311

X-axis X-axis X-axis X-axis X-axis

APC communication

error

312
313

APC

overtime error framing error

Failu-re in data transmisslon

APC

Failure in data
transmission
transmi-ssion

314

APC

parity error
pulse miss alarm
a

Failure in data
APC

3r5
316

APC

alarm

X-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to level so that the date cannot be held.

low

APC

alarn
alarm alarm

317

X-axis APC battery voltage ac a level where the battery must be renewed. X-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level where the batterv musE be renewed (including when por./er is OFF) .
Manual reference point return is required for the Z-axis (T) or Y-axis (M).

APC

318

APC

-l
I

320
321
I

Z-axis Y-axis

APC communication APC communication APC APC APC APC

APC APC

error (T) error

(T)
(M)

Failure in data
transmission

I
{
I

(M)

322

Z-axis Y-axis

overtirne

error

Failure in data
transmi-s
s

overtine error

ion

323

Z-axis Y-axis

framing error (T) framing error (l{)

Failure in data
transmission

324

Z-axis Y-axis

paritv error parity error

(T)
(U)

Failure in data
transmiss ion
APC

325

Z-axis Y-axis

APC APC

pulse miss alann (T) pulse miss alarn

(M)

alarm

326

Y-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a lott level so that the date cannot be held.

APC alarm

-505-

Number 327

Contents

Remarks APC alarm

Y-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the batterv must be renewed. Y-axis APC battery volcage has reached a level where the batterv must be renewed (including when
porder

328

APC

alarm

is

OFF) .

330

Manual reference point return is required for the

Z-axis. Z-axis Z-axis Z-axis Z-axis Z-axis

(M)

33L

APC communication

error
(M)

(I'1)

Failure in data
transmission
t

332
333

APC

overtime error framing error

Fai-lure in data
ransmission

APC

(M)

Failure in data
transmission

Jc+

APC

parity error

(M)

Failure in data
transmi-ssion
(M) a Iow

335
JJO

APC

pulse miss alarrn

APC alarm APC

Z-axis APC bfttery voltage has decreased to level so that the date eannot be held.
APC I

alarm alarm

337 | Z-axis
338

baccerv must be renewed.

wherej

battery voltage at a level where the

APC

Z-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level the battery must be renev/ed (including when power is OFF).
Manual reference ooint return is required for the

APC alarm

340

4th-axis. 4th-axis 4th-axis

4th-axis

(M)

341

APC communication

error
(M)

(M)

Failure in data
transmiss ion

342

APC

overtime error
frarning

Failure in data
transmission

343

APC

error

(I'1)

Failure in data
t ransmis s ion

344 345
346

4th-axis th-axis

APC

parity error

(l'1)

Failure in data
transmission
APC alarm APC
(M)

APC

pulse miss alarm

4th-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held.

alarm

-506I

Number 347

Contents

Renarks
APC a1-arm

4th-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the battery must be renewed. 4th-axis APC batLery voltage has reached a leve1 where the battery must be renewed. (including when
por^rer

348

APC

alarm

is

OFF.)

3) Servo alarms
Number

Contents

Remarks

400
401

The lst, The lst, The The

2nd-axis overload signal turns on.

2nd-axis velocity control
READY

turns off.

signal

(VRDY)

402 403

3rd, 4th-axis overload signal turns

on.

3rd, 4th-axis velocity control turns off.

READY

signal

(VRDY)

404

Position control READY signal (READY) turns off, while velocity control READY signal (VRDY) does not turn off, or velocity control READY signal (VRDY) turns on' although READY signal (PRDY) is not turned on yet when turning on the power supply.
A position control system error. A reference point return failure due to a trouble in CNC or servo systtem.

405

Start operation with the

manual

reference point return

again.
410

(Note)

In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.

In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue.
411

The position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in X-axis. The content.s of the X-axis error register exceed "32767,

413

or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures.
An

4r4

error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of the X-axis. Details of the error are output to the DGN0S
No. 720.

-507-

F*.

""i-w

Number

Contents An attempt \.ras made to specify a velocity of exceediirg 5f1875 detection unit/sec in X-axis. This error is usually caused by a CIIR setting failure. An error in the position detection system of X-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
When

Remarks

415

4t6
417

the X-axis enters any of the conditions shovm in the following, this alarm results. 1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8120 for motor type. 2) A proper value (l1I or -I1I) has not been set to the parameter 8122 for the rotating direction of the
motor.

.;

,};
fg

it

,::

'i

3) An inproper data such as 0 or less has b..n set to parameter 8123 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of. the motor 4) An improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8124 for Ehe number of positi-on feedback pulses pef rotation of motor.
/,') i

.!

i
a

4,
g,

(Note )

In Z-axis; the position deviation amount during scop is greater than the setting value In Y-axis" the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.

421 | The position deviation amount is larger than the set I value during move in Y-axis (M) or Z-axis (T).
423

The position deviation amount exceeds "32767 in Y-axis

(M) or Z-axis (T), or the velocity couunand value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures.
An error has occurred in Ehe DigiLaI Servo system of rhe X(0II) or Z(OT) axis. o The details of the error are output to the DGNOS 721.

424

14

25

An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in Y-axis (M) or Z-axi-s (T). This error is caused by a CMR setting failure.

4LO

error of the position deEection system of Y-axis pulse coder (M) or Z-axls pulse coder (T) (break alarrn)
An

-508-

Number
Lal

Contents When-the

Remarks

Y-axis (01,I) or Z axis (0T) encers any of the conditions shorsn in the following, this alarm results. 1) A value which is out of the specified range has been ' set to the parameter 8220 for motor type. 2) A proper value (lI1 or -fll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8222 for the rotating direction of the
moE.or.

3) An improper data such as 0 or less has been sec to paraueter 8223 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8224 for the nuuber of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor.
430
(No te )

In 3rd axis, the position deviation is greater than the setting va1ue.

amount

during stop

In Z-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue.
431

Position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in Z-axis.
The position dqvi.ation amount exceeds "32767 in Z-axis

M only
M only

433

or the velocity command value af DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usuallv caused by various setting failures.
434

An error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of Ehe Z(oM) or 3rd (OT) axis. The details of the error are

output to the

DGNOS 722.

435

An attenpt was made to specify a velocity.of exceeding 51 18 75 detection unit/sec i.n Z-axis. This error l-s caused by a CMR setting failure. An error of the position detection system of Z-axis pulse coder (break alarrn).

only

436

M only

-509-

roFF

Nurnber 437

Contents
When

Remarks

conditi-ons

the Z (0M) or the third (OT) axis becomes any of the shown in the following, this alarm results.

1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8320 for motor type. 2) A proper value (111 or -I11) has not been set to the parameter'8322 for the rotating direction of the
motor.
3) An

inproper data such as 0 or less has been Set to parameter 8323 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of Ehe motor.
data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8324 for the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of the motor.
T

4) An improper

440

(Note)

In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value. In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop ts greater than the setting va1ue.

44L

Position devfition amount is larger than the set value during move in the 4th-axis.
The position deviation aurount exceeds !32767 in the

M only M only

443

4th-axis or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting faj.lures..
An error has occurred in the Digital

444

Servo system of the fourth axis. Details of the error are output to the DGNOS No. 723.
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in the Ath-axis. An error of the position detection system of the 4th-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
I'1

445

only

446

M only

-510-

Number

Content s
When

Remarks
shown

447

the fourth axis enters any of the conditions in the following, this alarm results

1) A value whieh is out of the specified range has set to the parameter 8420 for motor type.

been

2) A proper value (1ll or -tll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8422 for the rotating direction of the
motor

3) An improper data such as 0 or 1es6 has been set to the parameEer 8423 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor. 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8424 f.or the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor. 4) Overtravel alarms
Number

Contents

Remarks

510
511

Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke l_init of X-axis. Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke limit of X-axis.
2nd stroke

5r2
513

linit at * side of X-axis was exceeded.

a

T T (M)

2nd stroke liurit at - side of X-axis was exceeded.

520

Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke lfuoit of y-axis or Z-axis (T). Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit or Z-axis (T).
2nd stroke linit

521

of y-axis

(M)

522 523 530

531

at * side of Z-axis was exceeded.

2nd stroke lirnit aE - side of X-axis was exceeded.

T.
M only
M only

Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke linit

of Z-axis.

Overtravel Eo exceed the (-) stroke liurit of Z-axis.

Overtravel to exceed the (+) srroke limit of the

540

4th-axis.

M only
M only

541

Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit

4th-axis.

of the

- 5lr -

:,#
r!

5) Alarm in
Number 600

FANUC PMC MODEL I,/M

Contents

Remarks

Interruption by illegal
PMC RAM PMC
PMC

command

is occurred

60r
602 603 604 605

Parity error is occurred

occurred

serial transmission error is

watch dog error is occurred

PMC ROM LADDER

Parity error is occurred.

PMC

Contents which can be stored in

is exceeded.

5) Overheat alarm
Number
700

Contents

Remarks

704

Master PCB is overheated. Spindle overheat is detected by spindle flactuation

detection.

7> System
Number

alarm

F
Contents
Remarks
PCB

9r0
911

RAII
RAM

parity error (1ow byte). parity error (high byte).

RAM

Replace master

Replace master

PCB.

9t2
913

Parity error of shared Parity error of shared Parity error of 1ocal

Watch dog alarrn.
CPU

with digital servo with digital servo

(LOW). (HIGH)

RAM

9t4
920
930

RAM

of digital servo.
PCB.

Reolace master

error (abnormal interrupt).

Replace master

PCB.

940

This alarm results when any of the following conditions is encountered: 1) A PCB used for Digital Servo system is
malfunctioning.

2) Evel when there are more than two control axes, the third axis (the third/fourth-axes) control printedcircuit board is not mounted. Example) The Z-axis of the 0M becomes the Chird. :) fhe master printed-clrcuit servo is in use.
board for the analog

-5L2-

Number 950
998

Content

Remarks

Fuse disconnection alarm. Replace the +24E: Fx14 Fuse.

ROM

paritv error.
(BP/S)

8) Background edit alarm

Number 't?2

Contents BP/S alarm ls produced with the same nunber as P/S alarur taking place in normal program editing. (070, 071, 072,

Remarks

073, 074, etc.)

t
l

140

An attempt lras made to select or delete a program being selected in foreground.

Note) An alarm on background editing is displayed on the key input line of background editing screen, not on a normal alarm screen. It is possible to reset it by some following MDI key operation.

The details of Digital Serv.o system alarm No. 4t 4 are indicated at the diagnosis numbers 72O,721,722, and 723 in order for the X, Y(Z), Z(C and PMC) , and the fourth (Y and PMC) axis.

w;4

DGNOS No.

OVL

LV

0vc

HCAL

HVAL

DCAI,
I

FBAL

OFAL

OFAL: An overflow alarm has occurred. FBAL: A wire disconnection alarm has occurred. DCAL: An alarm of regenerative discharge circuit HVAL: An overvoltage alarm has occurred. I{CAL: An improper current alann has occurred. OVC : An excessive current alarm has occurred.

has occurred

LV : A voltage shortage alarm has occurred. OVL : An overload alarn has occurred.

-513-

i:{r;:=lifi {q*e**itidbeil *a*f rL*sra

APPENDIX

10

LIST OF OPERATION

Class i f icat ion

Key
Func t i on

SETTING

Mode

switch

PI,JE=l
o

swi rch

button
Power
0N

Func ! i on but ton

Operation
and

Clear

Mernory

all

clear
Cleari.ng
Parameter
o

Power

ON

I DFeFT

Clearing
s

Power

ON

to red

Program

Data InPut from TaPe

Parameter

ED

IT

PARA}I

I Tf,lDIIT

(Tape

MemorY)

Offset value
Program inPut
o

EDIT EDIT/AUTO
MDI

OFSET
PRGRM

firlpUrl
flNPUfl
+ Parameter No. PWE=0+
+

Data InPut from

MDI

Parameter

PARAM

1:t ?

Offset value

OFSET

+ of fser

11e.
+

* FfrFffl

+ Offset data Setting data

MDI
PARAU

+0-

+ Data

Tape Punch

Parameter

EDIT
ED

PARAM

I ETADT

Offset value

1T

OFSET
PRGRM

fsTFR-f]

A1l program
One Prograrn

EDIT
LUII
ED

Io

l.

-9999 + | srARr

PRGR}I PRGRM

El .
[-1-l

P.ogram No. + | START Program

Search

Program No. eearch

Add res s

IT i AUTO

xo. *

fII
TE=unson)

AUTO

PRGR}4

sequence

Program No. search * l-I--l + Sequence ,.'o. * fll

number search

(cuRSoR)

Address r,rord
search Address search

ED

IT

PRCRM

Searching address and data input + l-Il (cunson) Searching address [-b-l

EDIT

PRGRM

l-T-l
(CURSOR)

Deletion of all Programs

ED

IT

PRCRM

-eeee *

rcE

ET]

-5r4-

Classif icat ion

Prograo Edir ing

Func t

lon
a

Key

SETTING
PI.JE

Mode

switch
o

= I

switch but ton

ED1T
.

Func t

ion

but ton
PRGRM

0pera t ion

Deletion of
progran

I U I r rrogram No. +l ur,Lt r

Deletion of seve ral

b

EDIT

PRGRM

[-N-l

+ sequence No. * l-SEiEfl

locks
o

Deletion of a block Deletion of a word Alternation of a word lnserti.on of a word CoIIation Collacion in
menory with
taPe

EDIT

PRGRM

f-mfr-l

'

l-5ErET-l

EDIT

PRGRM

Search the word to be

deleted
o

'

I-bEIEfl

EDIT

PRGRM

Search the word to be

deleted+Addtess+Data

*
o

|-TITEE-I

EDIT

PRGRM

Search the word before the pLace in the program + Address + Dara * fTfrSItl

EDIT/AUTO

PRGRM

f ilreur

Input / Output

Progran input Output all

prograB

EDIT/AUTO

PRGRM

File tqo.

with

. FIFFI

FANUC

Cassette
EDIT
PRGRM

I-o]. -nrrg *l-srARr-l

outPut
Program

one

EDI,T

PRGRM

ffl i

etog.am No.

* I-sreETl
-9999 or

Searching

a head of

ior
a

EDIT/AUTO

PRGRM

f-ilI + File No. or

_eee8 + rTfrPtri-l

file

Deletion of f ile CoIIation in file with

taPe

EDIT

PRGRI.l

El* rtr. r.ro. * l-3Te.fl*l

ED

IT /AUTO

PRGRM

File No. * [-r]iFuE

I t

I I

---l

-515-

/..r*#*.;".

"

;.d!e*l,

-r1*q

.l
APPENDIX

.g

11

LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

f;

Optional

*; Function included in other optional items o; t

PMC

is required

Name

Specification

Reference itern

Concrolled axis

3 axes (X, Y' Z) * 4 axes (4th axis/PMC axis) * 5 axes (PMC axis) * 6 axes (PMC axis)
2 axes 3
fi

rr-2
rr-2. i

Simultaneously

controlled axes

axes axes
o

Axis control bY PllC

Least input
increment

* Controlled (3 axes Max.)

rr-2.1
Appendix
3

0.00t

mm/O.0001 inch

*0.0001 run/0.00001 inch

Least command
increment

0.001 mm/O.0001 inch

x0.0001 rnm/0.00001 inch
Provided
+8

Appendix

Increment system

Tr-2.2
Appendix
I
3

r/r0

Max. Programmable
dimension

digi ts

Rapid traverse rate

100 m/min, 4000 inch/min

I-5

x24 mlmin, 960 inch/rnin

Rapid traverse override

Feedrate range

Fo, 25, 50,

1002

TT-5.3.2
Tr-5 .2.3

Perminutefeed

0.01 - 4000 inch/min

I 0 .0

100000 mrn/min 12000 mm/min

Per-

revolution
feed

i - 480 inch/rnin * o.ol - 5oo.oo mm/rev

0.000L

*1 -

rr-5 .2.4

9.9999 inch/rev

Automatic ac ce 1 erat ion /

Provided

rr-5.4

deceleration

-516-

#
PMC
Name

is required

Specification

Ref,erence

itern

Feedrate override Jog override

0-

1502
o

rr-5 .3. 1
,

* Provided
Provided

Override cancel
Manual continuous feed

Simultaneous 1-axis *Provided

Provided

TTI-4.2

Manual synchronous feed

Positioning

rr-4. i
Tr-4.2

Single direction positioning Interpolation

Thread cutting/ synchronous feed

:t Provided Linear/circular * Provided *' Provided * Provided

Provided
Provided

rr-4.3 rr-4.4

Helical cutting Fl-digit return

feed

rr-4.5
rr-5
. 2. 5

Reference point Reference point

II-6. I
rr-6.2
o

return check point return

2nd reference

Provided

rr-6.3

3rd/4th reference point return

CRT/MDI (sma11)
CRT/MDr (small)

* Provided
9tt
monochrome

III-2

9tt color 9tt monochrome 9tt color

IIT-2

CRT/MDI CRT/MDI

(ful1 key) (full key)

key

III-2
III-2

MDI

soft

*'5 + 2 pcs.
2 units 3 units

rIr-2.

1.1

I"lanual handle feed

I unit

III-4 .4

-517-

ffi
*iil

o; ,
Name

PMC

is required

Specification

Reference

item

Manual handle feed

magnifying factor
Handle interrupt

xl,xI0,xM *
Provided

III-5

.6

Job and handle in

the

Provided

same mode

Incremental feed

x 1, x 10, x 100, x
* Provided
*'Provided

1000

Rigid tap
Program restart Reader puncher

III_5 .5

inEerface

* Reader puncher interface (1st channel)/ASR33 interface *' Reader puncher interfaee
(2nd channel)

Dwe1l time

(every seeond)

Provided Provided A11 axes Provided

o

rr-5 .6

Each axis interlock

Machine lock

III-6.

Stored stroke check 1 Stroke limit external

qpf|-ino

* Provided
Provided Provided

Z-axis
ignored

command cancel

Additional axls

Mechanical handle feed * Provided

III-I5

Skip function
Exact stop
mode

Provided Provided Provided Provided

ON/OFF o o
o

rr-i5.1
rr-5
.5 .2
5.

Exact stop
S

rr-5.

ervo-of f

Manual absolute

Provided

Stored pitch error compensat ldn

* Provided

rrr-10.

-518-

*3*
?o; ,
Name

PMC

is required

Soecification

Reference

i teirn

Clock function
MDI ooeration MDI operation
B

* *

Provided

III-II.9 III-5.1.I
rrr-5
.

Provided Provided

I .3

0rder-made macro
Reset

* Provided (64K8/128K8)
Provided

rrr-5. 4.5

Optional

CMR

Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided

o

Rapid traversing

signal output.
Dry run

III-6

.6

Single block
Program protect signal

III-6.7

Self-diagnosis function
Emergency stop

III-7 . I

St.atus output.

ready signal, servo ready signal, alarm signal' distribution end signal, automatic operating signal, automatic operation starting signal,feed hold larnp signalr power supply ready signal and resetting signal
CNC

Battery alaru signal Position coder External dimensions

F
F

*'4000 rpn
6000
rpur

560(W) nn

x 400(n)

rolo

200(D) nn

It
F:'

Power supply

I
or

phase 200 V AC +102,

5O Hzl6O

t:
I
I.
1,

tConnection servo motor

:
i

Fz +t

-L57"

ttz
-157"

phase 220 V AC +102, 60 Hz *l Hz

AC servo motor AC spindle

FANUC FANUC

Connectable spindle notor

motor, etc.

rl

,l

-519-

. I"lachine Operatorrs ?anel

Name

o: t

PMC

is required

Specification
s

Reference
i i6m

Software oPeratorr panel

* Provided * Provided * Provided

ITT_2

Software oPeratorr s panel general Purpose

Machine oPeratorr panel
s

LLL-L.L

. Position Detector
Name

PMC

is required

Specification
Provided

Reference itern

Incremental Pulse coder interface

Provided Absolute Pulse coder i-nterf ace ,

PMC

required

Speci

fi cation

* * * * *
No. of DI/DO

3000 stePs 3000 5ooo 8000 12000

steps steps steps steps

* *

-520-

Program Inpu
Name

o: t
Speci f icat ion

PMC

is

required

Reference

item

Coordinate system setEing Automatic coordinate system setting

Provided

rr-7. I
rr-7 . I .2

Provided

[,Iork coordinate svstem ;t Provided Decimal point

programming

rr-7.1.I
rr-8.3 rr-8.3

Provided Provided

Pocket calculator type decimal point programming

Program input of offset data

Custom macro Custom B format )

* Provided
:k Provided

II-I6 III7

(F10/fl

* Provided

Inch/uretric conversion | * Provided Cutter compensat.ion Cutter comDensation

Canned cvcle
B
C

rr-8.2 II-T4.2
rr-14.3
rr-13. I

* Provided * Provided
rY Provided

Playback
I
I
i
1

* Provided
Provided

Circular interpolation by R programming

EIA/ISO automatic discriuinat ion

* Provided
Provided
o

Mirror

image

Automatic corner override Scaling Coordinate rotation

I'lenu programming
I

*' Provided rt Provided * Provided

:Y Provided

rr-14.5 rr-14.5

rrr-9.
II-18

14

Ff0/ffl

tape format

* Provided

'l

;|
I

.521

o: t
Name

PMC

is required

Soecification * Provided
*'Provided

Reference

item

Pattern data input

Conversational graphic
programming with graph for machining programming with

Conversational center

*'Provided

Ilacro execucer

64KB/*i28KB

r rt. Auxiliary

lunction

o; , Specification
M2
M3

PMC

is required

Name

Reference item

Auxiliary function

digits

rr-11.1
o
o

digits

2nd auxiliarv funcEion

86 digits
Provided

Auxiliary function lock . Soindle Function

Name

III-6

.3

PMC

s requlre

Specification

Reference

item

Spindle function Spindle analog output Spindle overr.ide

S2 digits

s4ls5 dlgirs

rr-9.1. i

* Provided t, 50 l2O%

o o

by

Analog voltage control

PMC

Provided

-522-

. Tool Function
Name

s
item

requ

Specification
T2

Reference

Tool function

II-10
o

T4

Tool offset

memory

*6 di-gits x 32 * 64 nemories f 99 memories

* 200 nemories
Provided

Tool length
comoensation

rr-14. I

Tool length measureuent

* Provided * Provided
*'Provided
o o

Tool life

management

rr-10.2

External tool offset

Edit/Operation , Edi lo
Name

o; ,
Specification 10n *.20 n

PMC

is required

Reference

item

Part program storage

length

rrr-9. l8

No. of programs registered

Program name display
Sequence No. search

*40u *80rn rt 120 n *320n * 63 programs * 125 programs g 200 programs

Provided Provided Provided

rrr-9.

l7

rrr-1 I . 2

III-9.9 III-9.4
rr-13 .4.4
o

Program No. search

Optional block skip

I block
9 blocks

rr-I3.4.4

Sequence No.

* Provided

comparison and stop

-523-

o:
Name

PMC

is required

Speci
No.

fication

Reference item

External work
search

Provided (15)
Provided

Program protect Background edit

* Provided

rrr-9. I 3
, PMC 1S

. Dlspl.a Di
Name

req u ired

Speci

fication

Reference ltem

Languages

* * * *
Run tine/No. of parts

English Japanese (Chinese characters)

German/French Chinese

Italian

display

'. t

Provided
-: .j

III_I

I .6

Graphic display

* Provided
Provided

III-14

Actual speed display

Floppy cassette directory display

rrr-1 1 .4 rrr-13.7

* Provided

. External Data rnput/uutpu Dat /o,t

Name

o:,

PMC

is required

Specification
*'Provided
o o o

Reference item

External key i,nput External tool offset External

message

* Provided *' Provided * Provided

15 works

External dafa inDut External work No.

search
Remote

o,

buffer
A

':t Provided

High-speed remote

buffer

* Provided

-524-

is required
Name
Sp

ecifi cation

Reference

item

buffer

High-speed remote
B

* Provided * Provided
o

I/0 device external control

-525-

&:

a'

n1
,.t

-l

II

i) i
I

o O

uJl

sl
(Y)

I g
Jl

It
-t

<l

o (l,
I

fl zl <l
E.

cc

EI
chl
I

o
u,

(D

o
cc
uJ

o
co

= o o o
I
F.

irA

2o>
o

po
o! !o o6 CD 6ko
:!

(J

l+' lrt

i,
I

t'

i_

=qlltrF-:#.;.'

""*r{fff

'ir S.t

'i:,

lf,'-c-:.,{41 :
^.\ \*'

\rI\

i.

\\.

ut

\
't

. l/o fart af this mnnunl may be refiroduced in any form.

. All specifications and desigrs
are subject to cltnnge without
notice.

ii
'a

.*
;:i

ll#+-;r-ieK;ll.*,

-\l-./t#

\ '. :,.
'.

.,

'tt